CHPH2 - DVDs - Transcripts - Part - 2

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2

By Igor Ledochowski

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2

Table of Contents DVD 12 – Resourcing Tools & Mind Bending Hypnotic Language ................................... 4 Resourcing Tools .......................................................................................................... 4 Brief Interview .............................................................................................................. 8 MBL Warm Up .............................................................................................................. 9 MBL Power Words ...................................................................................................... 16 MBL Exercise .............................................................................................................. 20 Benediction ................................................................................................................ 29 DVD 13 – How To Run Mind Bending Language Loops For Change .............................. 32 The MBL Interview ..................................................................................................... 35 PCAT Drill ................................................................................................................... 46 MBL Cycles ................................................................................................................. 54 DVD 14 – Using Mind Bending Language With Real Problems & Demonstration ......... 69 Mind Bending Language Demo ................................................................................... 69 MBL Debrief ............................................................................................................... 92 Q & A Session ............................................................................................................. 94 MBL Exercise 1 ......................................................................................................... 103 MBL Exercise 2 ......................................................................................................... 106 How To Master MBL ................................................................................................. 111 DVD 15 – Hypnotic Regression Training & The “Days Of Wonder” Demonstration.... 116 Hypnotic Memory .................................................................................................... 116 Regression Training 1 ............................................................................................... 119 Intention v Behavior ................................................................................................. 124 Regression Training 2 ............................................................................................... 128 Emotions .................................................................................................................. 138 Regression Training 3 ............................................................................................... 145 Days Of Wonder Demo ............................................................................................. 149 DOW Regression ...................................................................................................... 163 DOW Role Play ......................................................................................................... 173 DVD 16 – The Ultimate 12 Step Regression Therapy Demonstration ......................... 185 Demo Selection ........................................................................................................ 185 Regression Therapy Demo ........................................................................................ 191 DVD 17 – Regression Therapy Secrets Revealed ......................................................... 227 Regression Demo Debrief ......................................................................................... 227 General Comments .................................................................................................. 250 Step By Step Regression ........................................................................................... 255 DVD 18 – How The Total Reintegration Method Works – Important Principles & Full Demonstration ............................................................................................................ 277

2 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q & A Session ........................................................................................................... 277 Ledochowski Protocol .............................................................................................. 293 Secondary Gain ........................................................................................................ 300 Reintegration Demo ................................................................................................. 305 Demo Debrief ........................................................................................................... 312 Reintegration Principles ........................................................................................... 316 DVD 19 – How To Do The Total Reintegration Method Yourself With Step By Step Guidance ..................................................................................................................... 332 Step By Step Reintegration ....................................................................................... 334 Q & A Session ........................................................................................................... 363 Closing Remarks ....................................................................................................... 369 DVD 20 – All Your Questions About Hypnosis Answered ........................................... 372 Final Q & A Session ................................................................................................... 372 DVD 21 – How to Successfully Run A Hypnosis Office The Right Way & End Of Training .................................................................................................................................... 408 Practice Management .............................................................................................. 408 Contraindications ..................................................................................................... 421 Client Intake Form .................................................................................................... 434 First Session/Phone Call ........................................................................................... 437 Special Advice .......................................................................................................... 445 Certification Process ................................................................................................. 453 Exam Induction ........................................................................................................ 463 Closing Ceremony..................................................................................................... 464 End Of Training......................................................................................................... 466 Bonus Information ................................................................................................... 468 Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 is the sole property of Street Hypnosis Publishing (including, but not limited to text, content, graphics, video and audio) and is protected by copyright as a collective work or compilation under U.S. copyright and other laws. You must abide by all additional copyright notices or restrictions contained in this law. YOU MAY NOT POST ON A WEB SITE OR CREATE A WEB FRAME AROUND ANY PART OF THIS SERVICE (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, TEXT, CONTENT, PHOTOGRAPHS, VIDEO AND AUDIO). YOU MAY NOT COPY, REPRODUCE, DISTRIBUTE, PUBLISH, DISPLAY, PERFORM, MODIFY, CREATE DERIVATIVE WORKS, TRANSMIT, OR IN ANY WAY EXPLOIT ANY PART OF THIS SERVICE, EXCEPT THAT YOU MAY DOWNLOAD MATERIAL FROM THIS SERVICE FOR YOUR OWN PERSONAL, NONCOMMERCIAL USE AS FOLLOWS: YOU MAY MAKE ONE MACHINE READABLE COPY AND/OR ONE PRINT COPY THAT IS LIMITED TO OCCASIONAL ARTICLES OF PERSONAL INTEREST ONLY. WITHOUT LIMITING THE GENERALITY OF THE FOREGOING, YOU MAY NOT DISTRIBUTE ANY PART OF THIS SERVICE OVER ANY NETWORK, INCLUDING A LOCAL AREA NETWORK, NOR SELL NOR OFFER IT FOR SALE. IN ADDITION, THESE FILES MAY NOT BE USED TO CONSTRUCT ANY KIND OF DATABASE.

3 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2

DVD 12 – Resourcing Tools & Mind Bending Hypnotic Language

Resourcing Tools

Igor: Okay, so settle yourselves down. Do you get the basic idea of the PCAT formula, yes? Now you can do very good hypnotherapy, in fact all hypnotherapy will somehow go through this process at some point or another, right? Every form of therapy will find out what’s the problem we’re trying to resolve, right? They will have some sort of a goal of what you are trying to achieve, whether it’s coaching, therapy, pain therapy, Reiki, there’ll be some type of a goal in mind whether it’s expressed or not, right? There’ll be some kind of way to get you out of that problem whether it’s the massaging or the talking or the painting or whatever and there’ll be some kind of way of getting the resources. In terms of parameters, we’ve got some simple questions, we can play with those more as we go. What kind of tools do we have to bypass the critical factor? Non Awareness Set, what do we have? Confusion, which is part of the non-awareness, what else do we have? Instant Induction absolutely, did I hear someone say blitz? Right, remember the end of the first day you stared at them and you just did this big rant and wasn’t that kind of like, I have no idea what you’re talking about but it all makes sense, right? Once you’ve bypassed that, what tools do you have already available to you for resourcing? You have revivification, right? Remember that? If you can revivify a trance can you revivify a happy memory? Can you revivify a time when they felt confident or strong? Can you revivify a time that they learned something quickly and easily, right? What other tools do you have at your disposal for that, Dynamic Mental Imagery (DMI), right?

4 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Isn’t that the whole point of that, that when you get them down to a symbol, well first of all, you bypass the critical factor because they have no idea what it means and did you notice that when the symbol pops, doesn’t it have a strong emotion that comes with it or insight, which can be applied to whatever that was, right? What other tools do you have, general feeling good? Right, kind of like the Non Awareness Set, so what are you sensing now and let that grow, H+, absolutely. Have you noticed that when someone believes in you, it’s a great context for you to find belief in yourself again, right? What about the blitz again? The blitz doesn’t just bypass the critical factor, all of you felt a little better on the first day when people talked to you about comfort and trust and learning and so on; isn’t that a resource? So you have lots of resources, ways of accessing resources at your disposal, right? And transforming, well transformation is real easy, you just mix it up as you’re feeling the resource, do this; you’re feeling great, think about that. Recall when, I think it was Jacob when he sat up here, laughing his little happy face off, there you go again, would it be fair to say that’s a resource? Yes? What did we do whilst we had the resource? Think about the biggest concern you have about hypnotherapy, right? What did he do? He kept right on laughing; actually you saw classic integration, ha-ha-ha-ha, right? What’s going on here? Right, now just imagine we’re in an old school saloon, here’s your swinging doors, oh, let’s have nice black doors, your swinging doors and here’s the whole saloon area here and inside here we all have our frowning bad people, because they’re heavy drinkers, they drink whiskey and they gamble and they spit in spittoons and they fight. You walk in here, a little five year old will get eaten alive, you know the kind of saloon I’m talking about? Now, if you send a feeble, teeny bopper resource in all happy-clappy going “yay, let’s love the world”, he’s not going to be doing too well is he? What you want is to call in the cavalry, build them up all outside, oh there’s a lot of us, that one’s a bit wonky eyed and when there’s enough of these buggers, they come in here and the fighting starts.

5 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Now, do they come in and everyone goes oh I give up governor, it’s okay, you win? No, they have a good old fashioned punch-up, don’t they? So what happens inside you, you get a resource, you feel great. Now think about the problem, you go “I feel great, but I feel bad, but I feel great”. You can see these contortions beginning to develop, you saw them with Jacob, do you remember? He started going, oh hahaha, yes it’s not a problem, I can’t think of it anymore and all these other things, right? Who do you think won that particular fist fight, the cavalry, the green cavalry, like was it the green guy, Lantern, there you go, or the bad boys? Well the lantern won, right, because the hero always wins. So, the transformational stage is real easy isn’t it? Whilst they are full of paint, run into the problem room and just basically bump into as many things as you can to get the paint to transfer to, right? So now we come onto the idea of Mind Bending Language. Here’s another analogy again just to help you out. Imagine you have a glass of water here and in this glass of water we have all the negative states that make people so unhappy in life, oh very bad. And of course out here we have all those happy, positive states that make life worth living. There’s only one problem, we have a little layer of oil that separates the resources from the problem. What happens is we pour all these little things in here, they’ll float, they are separated, right? What if you had a little bottle of liquid soap that you can do a little droplet in here, what would happen then? The barrier dissolves and everything mixes up again, now we have choice again, right? So the question is what is this barrier made of so that we can change it? It’s made of your thoughts primarily, you’re thinking about it in a certain way brings it about. I’ll give you a crude example, I’ll come to you in a minute if I may, I will give you a crude example, think of someone who you find deeply unpleasant, positive experience or not? Now think of someone who you find very appealing or you love or are happy around, a shift in your attitude? Now think about the person you didn’t like so much in the same way as you did the other person, you don’t like that do you? What you just came up against is the oily filter that prevents the two things from combining at this point.

6 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Now I’m not going to remove that filter at this point because it might be useful for you to not like certain people, especially if they have it in for you, right? But you get to experience very quickly what I’m talking about, right? Yes? So, in order for you to know that something is happening, one of the ways you make things real to yourself is you just describe them, you talk to yourself about it, you put words in, so words are the building blocks of our reality. Have you ever had a moment, an experience that you can’t even describe to someone else because if you try to describe it, it feels like you’re cheapening the moment, it just doesn’t come across right? Have you ever tried that? Have you ever noticed that if you persist in trying to explain it to people, after a while it doesn’t become so exciting anymore and those moments that you refuse to explain it to others, you can revisit time and time again and you don’t really know why they are so good but they are, right? So, language is part of what keeps something in place, it’s the handle on reality, so we’re going to use language to turn the reality part upside down. So we had a question back there, quickly. If it’s still there can you just stand up so we can get the microphone back there as well? It’s right behind you; that way I can hear you properly. Q:

Just an idea, the oil is without any intelligence or feeling.

Igor: I agree. You’re 100% correct. So, would you be interested in discovering some ways of mixing this all up? Yes? So here’s what we’re going to do; as we did before, I would like for you to find a partner, someone you’re comfortable working with. We’ll be working with things which are linguistically based for a while, so if you wish to do this in another language by all means do so, just make sure that the person you’re talking to speaks it as well, okay? I’d like you to find a partner as quickly as possible as soon as you have that, feel free to spread yourselves around, as soon as you have that please quietly face this way so we can begin. Alright, everyone got a partner, settling down, slowly but surely?

7 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2

Brief Interview

Igor: Okay so the first thing I want you to do is I want you to role play a little bit, you can have a pretend problem. I prefer if you have a pretend problem because then you’re not really invested in it, you’re just experimenting with it. If you want to have a real problem by all means use it but make sure it’s a little small one, we’re starting with Tyson’s sister, not the full man, right? So either choose something small but personal or something made up, I don’t care which way it is, just getting used to something here, okay. Everyone have something like that in mind? So the starting point is very simple, we want to just get a handle on the problem, you’re going to ask them what’s the problem, the other person is going to try to explain it to you, you’re going to be overloaded with information and we’ll come back, is that easy to do. Alright both ways, off you go. So, would it be fair to say that when you asked them what is the problem and the flood gates open up, does anyone here feel overwhelmed like what the hell do I do with all this stuff, right? Are you starting to feel like that as therapists, it will get worse with real clients by the way, these guys…you guys here are more well behaved than the actual clients normally are, right? So we need to have a way, a mechanism, for filtering information so that you can do something useful with it, right? That’s where the parameter comes in. Ask them for an example, so where does it happen, when did it happen? Specifically one time and most important of all, how you feel? Because that tells you whether the problem has been activated or not, does that make sense? Look for them, if there’s role playing there won’t necessarily be the same emotions, but look for them to have a physiology or body language that matches the feeling they’re describing, right? So ask them again, what’s that problem? When the verbal diarrhea begins, you say let me just pause here for a second, it’s clear that, that’s a big deal. Let me just ask you, when did it happen and they give you all the stuff like…let’s pause, it’s just in this place, the revivification, okay? When did it happen, where did it happen? Okay, so you were at home on Tuesday and what happened? “Well I

8 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 started feeling really bad, just started feeling really bad”. Do you have all three items of information, yes? You don’t need anything else at this point. Quick question? What happens if what? What happens if he’s not open to give you information, then slap him, he’s role playing for you. We’re not dealing with that yet, this is a real simple starting point, okay? Easy guys, this should be quicker and easier than last one, both ways get the information and turn around silently, off you go. Alright, how was that, was it easier to deal with? Yes? Hands up if it was easier to deal with, okay, why was it easier to deal with? Very simply, because what you’re not doing is the same mistake that they were making, which is not dealing with the whole big, red mess at once, you’re heading for Roman Therapy you’re biting one chunk out of the elephant and that’s much easier to deal with, so get really used to honing it right down to a very specific, simple set of details, that you can actually manage, okay? So you get the idea of it, it’s definitely not rocket-science, it’s not that difficult, you may need a little more practice to make it more eloquent or conversational and so on but the idea is simple isn’t it? So what do we do with all of this stuff, that’s really what we’re going to ask ourselves, right? Because you’re sitting there, oh I know when it happened, where it happened and he feels pretty bad about it, I can tell, now what?

MBL Warm Up

Igor: If I told you the dog chases the cat under the table. You all understand what I mean by that do you not? You have a very clear representation of it? If I told you the cat chases the dog under the table, you realize that I’m saying something very different, is that correct? So the reality in your mind is totally different from that first version, is that correct? Why? Think about it, I’m using the exact same building blocks. Is there still a dog present? Yes? Is there still a cat present? Yes? Is there still a table

9 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 present? Yes? Why is it different? When the syntax changes, the meaning changes. If I said to you, table, dog cat, do you have any idea what I’m talking about yet? Why? No verb, okay, dog, cat, table, chases? It’s not missing a verb now, what we’re missing is things that connect. We’re missing words that tell us the relationship between things, right? Adjectives and adverbs, the specific kinds of adjectives we’re looking for, but do you see how by breaking language down just a little bit, I’ve already created a massive amount of confusion, in the sense…not the positive kind just the one where you have lack of understanding, right? So consider, if these words - the dog chases the cat under the table - need a specific sequence, a specific order and you need specific filler words in between so you can actually understand what I’m talking about. What if I took the same building blocks that you use to create a problem and I rearrange them like a Lego set? Could the problem still exist? It could but it will not be the same problem, will it? If you have your dog chasing your cat under the table, you might say that’s a problem for you. If you have your cat chasing your dog under the table, you have a different problem. When the table starts chasing the cat under the dog, now you have a real big problem, right? So do you understand just how, just by playing with language a little bit we can have quite a profound impact on people’s understanding of it. Now here’s the secret of it. You want to use words that people are using to maintain their reality because that’s what fits in. This green line here is made up of ideas, anything that reinforces the idea easily fits in, anything that does not will bounce off, so what if you hijacked the idea, the dog is now the one that’s being chased into the table, let’s get an experience of that, it would make more sense. What I’d like you to do is in your pairs in a moment, I’d like you to play with some ideas. In fact, do you know what, turn to the pair next to you, so you are going to do this in groups of four, right, just sort yourselves out quickly.

10 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 When I say the word play, do you understand what I mean by that? What I do not mean is get a result. What I do not mean is…do you play like this…am I doing it again, oh am I doing it, oh, is that very playful, am I the embodiment of a playful spirit right now? So when I say play you understand what I mean, right? I would like you to play with the language just to see what happens. I’d like you to take a simple idea, like I fear cats, or he hates me so I feel bad, just some simple ideas like that. And the first thing I’d like for you to do without necessarily trying to make this fit into a social context, in other words you’re not trying to be lucid about this or anything like that, all I want you to do is change the order of things that are being said. Change the order and have the one person be the person that makes the utterance, “I fear cats” try to preset their mindset, everyone else will then reply “well, what cats fear you?” what are you on cats, you afraid of that? I’m playing with the same words but changing the sequence without really caring much about how it is. Then you will just experience what that makes you think or feel like and then the next person will have a go so you will get a chance to do this. Do you understand what I’m talking about? Off you go. Alright, let me ask you this, just pause there for a moment, hands up if you enjoyed the exercise and it was easy? Hands up, perfect, hands up of you found the exercise difficult, didn’t really enjoy it and it wasn’t that easy for you. Guess what? Why are different circles putting their hands up? It’s because the ones who are having fun are finding it easy, the ones that are sitting there trying to figure it out; what am I supposed to be doing, are not. I don’t know, right? And I understand we’re setting it up the difficult way first, so we can make it easier for you. Now, I’m going to ask you to do something a bit tricky just so we come back to this, it can be a lot easier. Would you be willing to play with this, yes? The first thing I need you to do is to remove all the chairs way back out to the sides of the room please. Okay, I want you to remember roughly where your group was…you know what, I should make it easier, we’re going to do an exercise in a moment and I’ll tell you

11 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 what it is, in the middle of the exercise, once I start seeing something occurring, I will invite all of you to stop as soon as that happens, without thought, without thought, I would like you to turn to the three nearest people, just physically grab them so that you know we have you three touch someone quick, there you go, we have our four people together, that way you don’t have to think about it, you just know. If more people append themselves fine, you can have a group of five or six but if it’s bigger than six just split it in half, right? So as soon as I say the word stop, grab whoever happens to be nearest until you have groups of four, five or six people. Does that make sense to you guys? We haven’t covered that yet. So let’s just practice that part, stop, everyone quickly grab someone, good. There you go, good, and release them again…pause, face this way, face this way again folks, okay, so you notice how the temptation is to start chatting about this, you’ll be doing something different when we to get it, so I’m just getting you to practice the physical element, so this bit doesn’t turn to fear with what we’re about to do. Is that okay with you guys? So once again, stop. So then just then release, you’re getting the hang of it. Okay very good, face this way again, then stop! Okay, good, face this way, face this way. Okay you’re in good shape. So now here is the exercise: 1) You’re going to walk around the room and point at things and name them those things that they are not. This is an elephant, here we have a sky. This is a tall piece of lamp shade thing. Now, I want…the three keys to doing this is, point with conviction, move with conviction, speed and volume. I want conviction, speed and volume. If you’re going (whispers) you haven’t quite understood the sense of what we are talking about. Do you understand where we’re going with this? Once I see everyone moving with speed, conviction and loudness, I will call stop, pay attention because you’re going to be very loud in the room, listen out for it. When that happens, you’ll find whatever group is close by, at that point, you will launch straight into the I fear cats exercise, only this

12 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 time in whatever spirit you find yourself in as a result of doing this. Does this make sense to everyone? Do you understand the exercise? It’ll make more sense as you do it. Off you go. Alright, first question, how much easier was it that time than the first time you did it, alright, why? Because your mind is in a different place, to do this stuff you must stand on that edge. Did you feel yourself on the edge, walking around, pointing at things? Yes? That’s why it is easier, so we’re going to do it again. This time we’re going to switch it up a bit, you’ll move around and you’ll point at things, call them what they are as though they were not. This is not a floor. This is not a whatever that is, same thing, volume, speed and certainty. When I yell stop, you will stop that particular exercise, you’ll grab the three nearest people to you, up to four people in a group, you’ll do the same I fear cats exercise again, moving things around. Only this time, you will liberally sprinkle it with “nots”. This is not a cat I fear and so on as though we are baking a cake and cakes folks, require lots of sugar, “not” is the sugar. You got it? Off you go. How was that folks? Is it kind of exciting, is it kind of fun? Yes? Do you notice that the less you think the easier it becomes to do this, yes? The more you try to figure out what’s expected of me, what am I supposed to be doing here the more you’ll miss the point. Is that fair to say? Please bear that in mind because that mindset is the one that will help you through Mind Bending Language. I often like to joke that Mind Bending Language is not about speaking like you’re on drugs, although it may sound like it sometimes, it’s about thinking like you’re on drugs. Because then speaking like it is easy, right? Without the arrest, yes, we’re in America now, I have to remember. In Holland that was much easier, they didn’t get that one, it was like, but of course we’re on drugs, it was a joke. Now let me ask you another thing, when you were the token client fearing cats and people were throwing these “what fear you not cats, cats not are” and that sort of stuff, how did that impact you? It was weird, what other kinds of things did you notice? Say again? No meaning, what else did you notice? It seemed silly, right?

13 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 So, you’re trying to make sense of it but it doesn’t quite make sense, it feels a little silly. Especially because the way they’re saying it doesn’t really make you make much meaning out of it, right? But would it be fair to say it’s difficult to think of that same context, the same problem, the same way? I’d like you to experiment with it. I’d like all of you to think of a small, very small problem in your own life, something you’re willing to talk to others about. Can you all do that? When you have that in mind, what we are going to do in a moment is this, we’re going to move around in circles the same way, pointing at things, this time calling them what they were not as if they were things. This is not a caterpillar, this is not a shining beacon of light, this is not a small monkey with a banana. You’re going to point at things, say what they are not, because they are not those things. With full conviction, speed and volume, when I say stop you’ll grab the three nearest people. If you end up being in a group of three that’s fine, a group of four that’s fine, five is fine, six is fine, if you’re over six then just split in half and go back into threes and fours, make sense? So you’ll get into your groups, three, four, five, six people, whatever it is and then one person will just present the problem you just thought about to the others. This time the others will just reload that problem back, will reflect it back, only this time rather than the classic echoing, where you’re reflecting exactly what you’re doing to make more of it, you’ll reverse syntax, you throw some “nots” in just to see what happens. And the only thing you need to do as the person presenting the problem is noting what it feels like when people are saying this. Does that make sense to you guys? As soon as you’ve had two, three, four people shout some things at you and you’ve really, really thought about those things and the next person does it and the next person, so momentum is of importance. Does the exercise make sense to you guys, yes? Alright guys, so, off you go. Alright guys, how was that, interesting? You know, give yourselves a round of applause, it was a fun thing to do, wasn’t it? So, was it easier to do that than the first time you tried the whole exercise, yes or no? Why? Because you stopped thinking, that’s the only thing that’s getting in your way, you can do all these

14 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 things, it’s inside you, but you need to change your state and stop thinking as much so you can start doing, right? Now, what we did here in terms of the pointing exercise and so on that’s kind of a poor man’s substitute for H+, it kind of gets you into hyper drive. It does similar things to H+ without actually doing the whole H+ thing. So when we later get towards H+, more of this sort of stuff will come out as well. Now what I’m more interested in at this point though, and may we have some assistance with mics coming close you, can you just jump up so they can see you, what was your experience as the client presenting a problem to hear these things come back? There’s a hand back there, this gentleman over there. So could you just step forward so I can see you as well? Q:

Yeah. It was disorienting.

Igor: Disorienting, right? What was your relationship with the problem as a result of that? Q:

That was my orientation and when I heard what they said when they mixed the words around, it threw me off.

Igor: Did you hear those words, what he’s telling you and please I’m going to paraphrase it in a different way and tell me if it is incorrect in terms of your experience? Q:

Okay.

Igor: What he’s telling you is that he felt alright with the problem being one way, that’s what he knew. Q:

Yes.

Igor: And when these other ideas came forward, they seemed close enough that they should make sense but somehow, someone had just pulled the carpet from under his feet, he couldn’t hold onto the problem in the same way anymore. Would that be fair to say? Q:

Yes. Very fair to say.

15 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: Did anyone else experience that sort of thing, yes? Now, of course I understand that at times you experience that more intensively and at times it was more mild, so mildly you may not have noticed it, would that also be fair to say, right? Because right now of course, we’re just playing with the language, we’re just doing a training exercise, we haven’t used it in any functional way yet. But already, just by some silliness, you’re all beginning to experience how impermanent problems really are. Would that be fair? And the only reason they seem so permanent to us is because we’re so good at thinking about them. You are champions, you are champion thought problem thinkers, if there was an Olympic event in thinking up problems, the human race would probably all come first. So now what we need to do is see if we can develop a vocabulary so we can do the same thing without being as manic, would that be of interest to you guys? I mean that’s one of the main things that we are here for. Now when I say - by the way as an aside, when we talk about Mind Bending Language can you begin to understand a bit more why it’s called Mind Bending Language? Yes? Is that matching your experience to a certain degree?

MBL Power Words

Igor: So we’ve got this idea of negation, we’ve got this idea of syntax we’ll leave that to the side right now. There’s another thing that we talked about earlier on which is the idea of predicates. These are the connecting words that give a relationship between one item and another, when the dog chases the cat under the table, under tells us in which position the cat is relative to the table, right? If the dog chases the cat over the table, that’s a different thing entirely, right? So when I have a fear of cats, I don’t have a fear under cats, right? And when I think of a fear under cats it’s like what did you say again? To process that I have

16 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 to break down the walls that keeps that fear in place, that’s exactly what we want. Do you see the idea of this? Now here’s one problem though, at this point you’re not really fluent with a vocabulary that allows you to do that. These predicates, you’ve got to get fluent in. So here’s what we’re going to do, we’re going to start with some very simple ones. Let’s go here…actually, no let’s do this one. • Beyond • Aside When something is beyond something else there’s a spatial relationship, is that correct? When something is aside from something else, it is again a spatial relationship, even though it may be more of an abstract thing, is that correct? So just like with the power words, these are mind bending power words. I’m going to ask you to walk around and just like with the power words make nonsense statements with those two ideas in mind beyond the things you don’t know, aside from what’s here, it’s there. Did that make sense to anyone? If it did I’m going to offer you a refund because (motions crazy). So, with full conviction I would like to you meet another person and then I would like for you to use those two mind bending power words in any way that is random, in any way that is random. Please avoid making sense as much as possible, okay? So it would be something like “beyond the shirt, aside from that is the blue of the sky”. Then he will return the favor to me and then we’ll move on the next person and so on. So just get really used to it and remember where do you want to be standing? Right on the edge, you want to be feeling like you’re about to trip over your own words. Do you all understand the exercise? Yes? Off you go. How was that, was it fun? Easy to do when you’re not thinking, yes? So it’s pretty straight forward in using those two words and making nonsense, you’ve done this sort of stuff before this should be child’s play by now, right? So let’s have some more mind bending power words would that be of interest to you?

17 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 So this plays with space a little bit, you know spatial relationships. We can also play with time, can we not? • Before • Yet So we have the idea of something comes before something else, oh let’s do this a little more neatly. And we also have something like let’s use the word yet. Is yet a time word? Of course it is because it implies something about to occur, is that correct? So you may as well use all four at the same time because beyond what the floor is, aside from the thoughts you have, before this is that and that’s not here yet is it? Do you understand at least the principles of the exercise? Yes? Off you go. How was that folks, enjoyable? Whose mind is spinning right now? That’s why it’s Mind Bending Language and it’s going to get worse. So we’ve dealt with space and time, how else do we organize ourselves in reality? With things, isn’t it, with matter, with things that we know exist, right? • Only • This/That So we have again just two examples of mind bending power words, only and to the extent. Although, yes only, only identifies a specific one and to the extent is probably the next one so let’s scrap that one for now. Sorry that will be for the next one. Let’s play with, to be honest with you the distinction doesn’t matter. But we may as well stay purist for this right, just because we can. This and that, this points at one thing…what’s the difference between this and that by the way? Picture the scene, this is my car, that is my car, what’s the difference in your mental pictures? Right, one gets closer than the other, so this and that will…this and that refer to items so it’s about matter, about specific things but they have slightly different meanings. One brings it closer, one brings it further so it has an element of spatial relationship in there as well, correct?

18 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 So that’s aside from the point, that’s just a nice little linguistic trick for you guys. So beyond the things you don’t know, aside from everything that’s here, before you think that, not yet, only this is that, that was not, right? Off you go. So, can I have your attention up front. Who’s having fun? Isn’t it interesting, the less you try, the easier it gets, right? Who’s feeling their brain getting all fried up and frizzled up and it’s like I can’t grasp anything anymore, please don’t talk to me but I kind of like it anyways? Yes? Welcome to my world. So we have, space, time, matter, the last one on the list is energy. Energy is a quality of matter, it’s how fast something moves, how slow it moves, how much it has, how little it has. Do you see where I’m going with this? And again these are just convenient categories for us to be able to think about other ways of using predicates. • Enough • To the extent The two words I have for you here, there’s no magic in them, they’re just nice ones that I selected for you, the idea of enough and to extent, notice how both of them require a quantity, quality type of thing. Does that make sense? So the energy is the quality and quantity of something in existence which is matter which is located in time and space, you have it all related together to give a form of reality, right? So once again, beyond all the things that are here, aside from what’s not, before this, have you thought of yet, only of those things that are here, this thing is enough to the extent that you don’t think about it now, right? I think you’re starting to get it now, off you go. Alright let’s just pause now, can I have your attention up front folks. This is coming up to the final segment of the day so let’s just plough through this last bit and then we can get out of this hot room. I think they’ve turned the air conditioning off on us to give us a hint. Alright guys so how was that, interesting? What do you notice happening inside your mind when people are saying these things to you? Did some of this stuff start making sense to you in a crazy sort of way?

19 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Isn’t that interesting? Because this is how you form reality it’s through relationships between things. You cannot understand something without contrast to something else. Let me give you an example, what is this thing here? Refrigerator…whoo, how do you know it’s a chair? The only way you can know it’s a chair is by contrasting it against everything else which is not this chair. It’s a relationship to everything else, right? It could be many things, so its relationships that define meaning for us. That’s why the dog chasing the cat under the table is different to the dog chasing the cat over the table or the cat chasing the dog under the table because as the relationship changes, the whole meaning changes and what we’re doing here is using the language to change the relationship. And you notice how it all makes sense but at the same time your mind starts spinning in circles and you’re not quite capable of grasping things, would that be fair to say? As hypnotists, do you notice how you cannot plan anything you say? The more you try and plan what you’re about to say would be the more you trip up over yourself. Would that be fair to say also? Especially with Mind Bending Language, you cannot do that, you can even sit down and write it out if you wanted to but that’s the difficult way. The easy way is to change your state of mind, so you’re thinking in these ways and get out of your way long enough to let the unconscious mind do it for you. Of course, practicing exercises like this will help you a great deal. So now that you’ve had that I want you to spend a moment thinking about what state of mind you were in to do this crazy, hand shaking exercise, yes?

MBL Exercise

Igor: Think about that and combine it with some essence of H+, what H+ means to you. Because in moment, not just yet, but in a moment, we’re going to do the final exercise of the day, in this exercise, you will be in your group of three, four,

20 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 five people, one person will present a problem, a small, genuine problem in their life and as before you played around with language just playfully. Now, instead of just being playful for the sake of messing around with it, I’d like for you to be so on the edge, so in the zone, so in your H+ that you feel like you’re right on that edge again, and then I want you to reflect their problem back to them. Only this time by putting in one or two of these words or ideas, maybe a negation like a not or something like that or maybe even switching the words around. You have a lot of choice, it doesn’t mean you have to use them all. Do you understand what I’m saying by this? Yes? Do you want a quick example or do you just want to dive in? All:

Example.

Igor: Someone give me a problem? That’s not a problem, fear of heights is not an actual problem; tell me the actual problem, I fear heights for example because it requires a person to fear heights, right? There’s not an amorphous height fearing spirit floating around, right? So, beyond the height you fear what are you? Doesn’t that sound a little bit profound? Give me another problem someone? You have a problem leaving your house when it is not tidy, right? So aside from the tidiness, how else are you leaving your house when you’re not? Do you see what’s happening now? It does make you think doesn’t it? It really does make you think. And what exactly are you thinking about. It is fun isn’t it and are you having fun? So as you’re having fun think about your house and notice what happens when it’s untidy I mean. You’re not having as much fun are you? So what’s underneath all that fun that takes you just enough to the untidiness that you can leave it? The house I mean? Just consider it fully, that’s right? No, I’m serious, just consider it fully. What’s happening now? You’re having fun again, my God you work quick, so think of the untidy house and can you leave that? Are you sure? That’s right, so you’re having fun and the house doesn’t bother you even when it’s untidy is that what you’re telling me? How do you do that? Q:

With your help.

Igor: Fair enough.

21 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 We’re nowhere near from done, you realize that right? But you see how quickly we spin this around. I could sit here for hours trying to explain, it’s okay you know, it’s okay you can be messy a little bit and allow yourself to be human. You can be very logical and persuasive and you’ll still reject all of it because you want your house tidy, right? But now you’re having too much fun to be untidy, right? Okay, so you’re telling me that the more fun you have leaving your house, the less you’ll care how it’s in? Is that what you’re saying? I believe you, I believe you, so think about leaving the house in any state that you want, just make sure you have fun once you’re doing it. So what happens now? Q:

I’m just having more and more fun with it. And it’s mattering actually, just to be serious, it matters less and less.

Igor: Are you serious to have fun? Q:

Am I serious to have fun, yes.

Igor: That’s good and it’s starting to matter less is it? Q:

Yes.

Igor: So how much more fun do you need for it not to matter at all? Can you hear the Mind Bending Language? Q:

Yes.

Igor: Could you feel the Mind Bending Language? How are you doing right now? Q:

I’m great right now, thank you.

Igor: Do you see where we’re going with this, was that enough of an example? All:

Yes.

Igor: So, it does not matter what the result is with this folks, I really don’t care. All I care about is using some of this language, a little bit of syntax play around with it, some “nots” thrown in but this time with a real problem because you’ll notice how the smallest thing can suddenly just totally go…what? Off you go.

22 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Boys and girls, you’re making far too little noise, remember this work is way too important to take seriously, so stop it. Don’t make me make you run around the room again, I will if I have to. So I want some more noise, less thought. Quick question? Q:

Can we still be silly or are we trying to be more serious using the word?

Igor: I think so, so off you go. So that’s much more the sound of happy changes isn’t it, laughter everywhere? Now think about it you’re basically doing stand-up therapy, essentially, right? Who’s having fun here right now, right? In my opinion what better resource is it to have fun than to be able to laugh at your problems. Now it’s not that you’re able to laugh at them and then you go, “okay, I’m fine that someone is going to be stabbing me in the back every time I walk into the room, I’ll be happy with that”, right? That’s not what we’re talking about. We’ll work tomorrow in terms of how we use this productively. But let me ask you this and assistants can we have microphones for this, when you presented a problem and these kind of ideas started coming back to you and you really thought about them, you really gave them a chance to process them, obviously some didn’t have much of an impact, but those that did have an impact, what was impact it had on your problem? Can we have a microphone over here please, just kind of fight your way through the crowd, crack heads if you need to? Q:

I had this strange sensation that some of the things that they were saying even though they were crazy were just as valid as the problem I presented.

Igor: Right, so your problem started going into a different category from kind of valid to maybe my problem is a bit crazy. Would that be fair to say? What other kinds of things did you guys experience? Q:

When I thought about my original statement of the problem after they had gone around and mind bended it and I came back to my statement and it didn’t have the same emotional charge.

23 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: Right, did anyone else notice this that the emotional charge reduces, almost with each cycle? It doesn’t necessarily disappear entirely, sometimes it does, but there is definitely a shift you can make, you don’t have the same relationship with that problem as you did before and how long did that take? Q:

It was about 45 seconds, around.

Igor: Right, it doesn’t take long with it. Go ahead. Q:

If I’m to describe a problem for example, I often am not able to experience the emotions when I’m told to because it’s difficult for me to connect maybe to the problem or just to the state.

Igor: That’s fine, there are ways around it, don’t worry about it. Q:

Okay.

Igor: There are ways to cheat. Go ahead. Q:

I had kind of like a strange feeling of relief to hear these weird sentences that didn’t make that much sense and I also had a sense that there was more space or more options for me than was there for me before.

Igor: Did anyone else have something similar to this? What are you experiencing folks if not the bursting of, where are we, the bursting of the boundaries that have kept you so tightly wound up. And I know it’s only a small problem right now but the relief you feel, imagine magnifying that ten-fold, a hundred-fold as the problem becomes more intense, right? All that energy that’s being used right now to contain the problem releases, you can use it for something else. That’s the relief you feel and in a strange sort of way, can’t you breathe easier as well, right? Is this fun stuff, useful stuff? All:

Yes.

Igor: What other kinds of things can we have a microphone on this side of the room? Q:

I found…

Igor: A little closer to your mouth, there you go.

24 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

I found that the statements that were being made, actually challenged me and actually made…brought the problem more into sharp relief. Didn’t really release anything but definitely challenged it a bit and almost kind of made me want to in a funny sort of way hold on to it.

Igor: Right? Fair enough, we’ve only done a couple of cycles in it, you could feel the problem being shaken up a little bit but nothing quite penetrated through the boundary, is that correct, which is fine? But you notice how again there was no intention or no real purpose how “I’m going to take this sucker and break it apart”. Things are starting to happen just with the language when you start putting the H+ in and all these other things that we’ll start playing with more tomorrow, can you start to sense the power of the tool that you have at your disposal, can you? So thank you for that. There’s a couple of people over here with a question as well, go ahead. And we’ll move this mic over there. Q:

I too felt even though some of the things didn’t make sense logically, I felt the H2 coming through.

Igor: Right, and that’s important, why? Because if you do not feel that whilst in the process of feeling that sort of challenge then it becomes a threat, right? What happens when we say, oh I really did this I have a problem with this and so on “oh, don’t be stupid with that, just grow up”. It’s nice isn’t it, you feel good, yeah I’ll grow up, that’s your natural instinct isn’t it? No. because it is an assault on your person, shall we say, so the H+ reminds them and notice by the way having this little gentle humor surrounding it, it reminds them that this is not a bad thing, this is not a painful thing, it’s not going to be an attack on them. It’s not even a comment on them that they have the problem because let’s face it, we all do, right? I can’t say oh I’m better than you are because I haven’t got that problem nahnahnah. It’s ridiculous because there are plenty of problems that you don’t have that I do. What we do have is a tool set or a tool kit to let us penetrate through those things. Does that make sense, yeah? Over here somewhere, go ahead. Q:

So to the extent that there’s lots of people here asking questions beyond the fact that we’re all pretty much done with asking questions when everyone else is can we do another round like this, please?

25 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: Yes you can. And you see how naturally you start using it. I want you to get used to using this stuff because it is sort of fun and purposeful, it’s very useful. So, oh, we have one more over here? Q:

Igor I’d just like to say what I noticed from that exercise, when the people asked me a question with those words it had a way more profound effect and I know we are just learning about the new words and stuff but I noticed the impact when I was processing a question was way more of an impact.

Igor: And I meant to ask you this, why do you think that is the case? Q:

I was engaged in a way that I was hooked.

Igor: Because questions require a response overall, in order to respond to a question you must process the information fully. If I make a statement, you have the option to skim it or really think about it. Does that make sense? If you choose to just skim over it, well the impact is so-so, the same way if someone chooses to not even think about it, what you’re saying then is Mind Bending Language is useless because they are disengaged from what you are saying. If you met someone who is clearly on something a little crazy making and they start making crazy making statements. Do you really sit there and start to think about “yeah, you’re right man, yeah” (smoking sound) or do you start thinking, I don’t want to be near this person and I don’t care what they say my answer is no, right? So this is where the H+ again comes in, you must keep them engaged and there are different ways of keeping them engaged. Questions are great because they’re a cultural way of getting more engagement than with statements. Although you can do it with statements too, you just want the engagement, really. Do you want to know a good way of getting someone to engage even though it’s not really a question, right? Just really consider this, right, and you can do that with a question as well and it doesn’t matter, the people will pay more attention to what you’re saying and then more steam will come out of their ears, which is what you want. Another quick one over here, just have the microphones over here. Stand up if you want a mic, whoever stands first, gets it first…oh, you’re just too slow, you’ll be next don’t worry.

26 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

So it was an interesting event in delivering the word salad that even though it was verbal gibberish, it felt like delivering it, it felt like this is going to be useful, perk up-listen.

Igor: And that’s where the H+ comes in, that’s why they will listen because you don’t have that. If they think you’re speaking gibberish then they’re going to think, “yeah, I’m being wound up here I’m going to ignore this”. Isn’t that the old classic, you’re at school and you go, let me shake you by the hand, oh denied, I apologize, I really do apologize, I apologize for this, right? But people are afraid of this, it’s happened to us, it’s part of our social program and we do not want that to happen to us. So when we start speaking in these crazy making ways and do not have the H+ people are going to think “oh, I’m not a fool, I’m not falling for this one”, right? So you understand why all the stuff we’ve being doing up to this point really is important even though we’re just having fun with this, right, and that’s exactly right, if you feel like it will be deep and meaningful, it will be deep and meaningful, you can start up your own YouTube channel and be the guru, right? Do you want to pass the microphone over to this gentleman? He’s got one already, that’s fine. Q:

What I found kind of odd is as things were going on is…

Igor: Can you hold it up a bit so I can hear a bit better. Q:

As the group was going around with their rephrasing of things, several of the things actually sort of hit a “ooh, that’s kind of threatening” but the energy of the group kept it from being threatening.

Igor: Thank you. Q:

And then all of a sudden, someone said something and something clicked and I went, wait a minute, this isn’t even my problem, it’s a projection of somebody else’s problem on my space.

Igor: So let’s have a look at what’s going on there.

27 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 1. Remember we said that we’ll make lots of mistakes but the H+ will protect us, it will be automatically reframed, if you say something wrong but it’s done in a good spirit what people end up thinking about is, I don’t think they meant it that way, right? As opposed to when you say something right but you dig it in with a little mean face, then people go, I don’t trust him, I know what he really meant ,because it’s part of the suggestion. 2. The second part of what you said there was what you’re experiencing once again is the problem naturally dissolving. You’re distancing yourself from it realizing this is not even my problem, what am I doing with this thing? It’s got nothing to do with me. Can you already feel stuff starting to resolve and we haven’t yet put it in a format to resolve, right? Who’s getting excited by this, anyone? Who likes this whole idea? So let’s hand the microphones back to the assistants for a moment and let’s just turn our chairs around a little bit. So here’s what’s going to happen, we’re going to coming close to the end of the day. Oh, can we have a quick mic over here before we finish, sorry, just stand up so they can find you, right behind you. Q:

So this is just a really quick question.

Igor: Sure. Q:

So we labeled beyond and aside as spatial, before and yet as temporal or time based. As far as only this and that, enough and to the extent, what category would you place those in?

Igor: Only and this and that is matter, it identifies objects in space, physical things. Enough and to the extent is energy because it’s the quality that an object exhibits. So, in order for something to be real, it must exist, that’s matter, it must exist somewhere, a space, at some time that’s time, there we go and it must have a quality, a size, a shape that defines it’s energy shall we say. And I’m just using these loosely as categories so that we have range, you don’t even have to remember the categories if you don’t want, it’s just that I find it easy to be able to play with different, shall we say, faces of reality in that sense. Does that help? Q:

Yeah, excellent. Thank you.

28 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: So here’s what’s going to happen, in a moment we’re going to be coming to a close, we’ll do on last ending thing. Before we do that, two things: When we finish the session formally I’d like you to once again find your assistants, this time I’d like you to find a different location on this ship to do your evening exercise to the extent that you want to do your evening exercises, right? If you don’t want to do any exercises and you want to just head home, find your assistant, let them know what the one biggest thing you learned from today was and your time is your own. If you want to stick around the assistants have all kinds of groovy drills to do with you guys and assistants, if you stick around a bit longer, let them play with their Mind Bending Language as well, right? Just for the fun of it, but I’m going to ask you to do it in a location that you have not been to yet, whilst doing anything hypnotic. Make sense? And just to reiterate, I’ve told most people this already, the main purpose for that is don’t want you to have associations to hypnosis that are only in this room because you cannot take this room with you once you leave, it stays here. So either you stay here with it or you have the ability to take hypnosis out of it. So I encourage you to do the latter, it’s much easier. So find a different space, stick around as long as you want the assistants really want to help and aren’t they doing a great job by the way guys?

Benediction

Igor: Alright folks, so who had fun today? Who’s going to have some more fun today once we leave here? Now I want you to realize that you’ve had a lot of experiences here tonight. In fact, the whole day you’ve had experiences, have you not? And aside from the experiences that you remember, there’s a whole portion of experience that you have yet to consider, you’ve had those experiences but you haven’t put enough attention on them yet to realize that you’ve being doing so much more than you thought you were. Now, I realize that you can sit here comfortably and I also know that that comfort can grow to the extent that you already begin to think about what’s important

29 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 and there are many ways to think about things. The one I’m going to invite you to engage in now is the one that you haven’t done yet, because it goes beyond the way you normally perceive things. Right now, you can understand everything I say without having to tell yourself anything about it, because underneath everything you hear there’s something else, something more and it’s this quality that you get to communicate to another person. Hypnosis is easy, Mind Bending Language is easy. All this is easy, when you are allow your mind to rest, in the right place, and I know, that every single person in this room has found that place at some point or another, and of course you also lost that place at one point or another. So, whether you are finding it more now or losing it is nowhere near as important as what you do in between, because you’ll always be finding and losing and it’s the points in between that determine which direction you head in. Now we’ve all had fun today, haven’t we? You’ve enjoyed yourself, have you not? And you’ve realized that when you’re having fun in a special way, things begin to happen that you cannot plan but you wish you could, plan for, and perhaps you’ll realize sooner than you think that there is a way to plan to make them occur. Planning is as simple as trusting your unconscious, and you have, have you not? Every word that you have spoken that surprised you, maybe even delighted you, was something spoken from your unconscious and all you had to do was to get out of the way long enough to allow it to occur. And then the magic happened, didn’t it? So I invite you to do more, or less, depending on which thing you need to need to do more or less of, because this is where you get to take all the experiences you’ve had in here to this point and transform them to something far greater than you have yet to consider. Right now you’re feeling comfortable, aren’t you? Your mind is calm and you’re breathing and you’re realizing that there is so much you can do with your words and aside from the words you want to be using, please remember, the words have no importance other than to the extent that they express something from inside. It is that meaning or idea that carries far more weight than the word itself ever could, because words are only sounds until a mind fills it with more life.

30 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 And the simple way of doing that is to say things when you mean them, and I realize there’s a room for training, where you get to say all manner of things that you don’t mean, yet. But the purpose of your training is to discover, to learn that the things you mean right now, are nowhere near as good as the things you will get to mean, soon. Because as you grow so will inside, your ability to help others grow, increases tremendously, how could it not? So I invite you to expand your mind beyond whatever you thought you were capable of, and be willing to find out how much more there is, so of course tonight at some point you will find yourself sleeping and dreaming comfortably and safely, in the safety of your own homes or hotel rooms and things will occur that will help you to process all of this so you get to understand it in a brand new way. Only after you’ve slowed your thoughts enough to fall asleep and let the real work begin. I have a suspicion that you know what I mean by that don’t you? So with that very happy thought, I want to thank each and every one of you or both of you, both you and the other you, for coming at the same time. I realize for some of you it’s been a bit more difficult to get both of you in the room than for others. Rest assured that by tomorrow, only one of you will be left, and that’s not a threat, it’s merely a promise that you will get to enjoy. So, on that happy thought I want to thank all of you again for your time, effort and commitment, I know it’s been a energy-consuming day. So go ahead and consume some external energy to replenish whatever you used up and be back here bright and breezy in the morning. Recall that your assistants are awaiting you on the peripheries, grab them or perhaps someone else if you prefer and have some fun with the exercises tonight, do something small if you want to, spend more time if you want to, it’s entirely up to you. Off you go, thank you guys.

31 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2

DVD 13 – How To Run Mind Bending Language Loops For Change

Igor: Did you enjoy yesterday? All:

Yes

Igor: Did your brains start to melt? All:

Yes.

Igor: It’s going to get worse today. Before we launch back into some of the more content stuff like that, we are starting to get into more hypnotherapy stuff. Can you feel it? More actual change work sort of things. Not that the Dynamic Induction or Non Awareness Set can’t do change, it can, it’s just more pieces are falling into place on how to use it more strategically, right? And that’s what we are focusing on today. So one topic we have to cover at this point which for some reason a lot of schools don’t really touch on and I think is very important or let me put it this way, how many of you actually would like to be a hypnotherapist at the end of this whole process? Excellent, yeah I know give me a round of applause because you are getting very close right now. Those who did not put your hands up feel free to ignore the following comments. If you want be a hypnotherapist you have to be very aware of everything your environment does. We’ll talk more about that on the final day. One thing that a lot of people tend to forget is personal hygiene. You have to be extra careful with your personal hygiene because what is okay for you may not be okay for the clients coming in. Does that make sense? All:

Yes

Igor: So we are talking about if you – let’s put it this way if you went to a hypnotherapist and you have a big issue and he is coming in and he’s got dirty finger nails and maybe his breath smells a little bit, how comfortable are you

32 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 going to be to relax and release in such an environment? Have you ever been to one of those houses that have millions of cats and it smells a little bit? All:

Yes

Igor: Right, if you walk into an environment like that, how comfortable are you going to be that you are in the right pair of hands? Does that make sense to you guys? So I’m going to ask you to use it as training wheels in the mornings whatever you do to groom your selves and so on, do extra. So do not wear strong perfume some people have very sensitive smell, strong perfume can take away that at the same token don’t not wear deodorant. It may be there are a lot of natural deodorants out there if you are not into the whole chemical deodorant that is fine, but the point is there will be a lot of clients who would take one whiff at a more natural hypnotherapist and regret signing up. This is making sense, right? Other things are that if you have eaten then make sure you brush your teeth or you have some mints around especially important if you are a smoker. There is a particular scent associated to that. Make sure you have some breath mints around because you are going to be getting close to people, right? And if all they are thinking about is like, is he a – yeah he is a smoker – my God he must smoke a lot! If these are the thoughts going through their minds, they are not really listening to what you are saying. Now, can you get past some of these things? Of course you can, but it’s easier if you take extra care upfront so that it doesn’t become an issue in the first place. So I would like you to think about yourselves actually being hypnotherapists right now, having your own practice. How do you do you want to present yourself? Are you going to be turning up in jeans and T-shirts which is fine, but it’s going to have a certain impact. Are you going to turn up in a suit and tie? Are you going to work in a suit like a more casual like a lounge suit or something like that? You need to understand what are you projecting, what kind of clients do you want? We will talk more about this in the final day, but let us put it this way if you are in an area which attracts a lot of corporate clients, people work professionally, do you think that wearing a big star suit and putting whale music on in the background and having incense burning everywhere and going, welcome, big

33 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 hug, that that would be the most conducive way to make them feel at ease in your practice? Likewise, if you are in a more beatnik community with lots of grown up hippies in it and so on, it may be absolutely appropriate if that is the kind of clientele that you wish to work with, right? So just think about where you are, what you are going to do and if in doubt the rule of thumb is you know, find that balanced neutral point. Dress smart but not over dressed, not under dressed, not going to you know the ball tonight and you have to have frilly gowns and sparkly shoes. But at the same time you do not want to wearing jeans and T-shirt. I have tried the jeans and T-shirt approach and it works, but I had to work harder upfront to be taken seriously and it makes sense, doesn’t it? All:

Yes.

Igor: So as an offer, you don’t have to do this, consider tomorrow as a test run for this and if you want to come in dressed as you would be in your own practice to the extent that you brought the right clothes and so on, it’s a way for you just to get into that role a little bit. You do not have to do it, I will not be offended if you don’t, but it’s an offer for you guys, you may as well rehearse in here how you mean to be out there, does it make sense? Okay. Q:

Then we can take group photographs.

Igor: Yeah and then we take group photographs! Look how good they look. We were originally thinking this place has got this great 1920s feel I should turn up here with a top hat and tails and everyone has like the feather boas, and stuff like that so we have a real 1920s hypnosis school, right? Then the video could be done like sepia color and we say, look what we found? Igor is immortal, he still looks the same today! Yeah that will be the launch of the hypnotic rejuvenation system, right? Proof.

34 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2

The MBL Interview

Igor: Alright guys so how did you enjoy the Mind Bending Language yesterday? All:

Interesting stuff

Igor: Interesting stuff? Some people felt a little challenged by it’s that correct, yes? We’ll show you later on how to make it more easy, but now I want to start turning it into something more functional, right? So if you recall yesterday we started the PCAT formula, right? What was the P of the PCAT formula? All:

Parameters

Igor: And what do you do in the parameters, what is the objective in the parameters? All:

Finding out the problem.

Igor: Finding out the problem and? All:

Context the direction.

Igor: Get the context and direction that they want to move in, right? So there are a couple of questions that you can ask your clients, these are actually questions that come from John Overdurf. You should know by the way this whole Mind Bending Language stuff originated from a man called John Overdurf, one of my mentors. I have kind of taken it in this direction in the way we train it and so on but the core idea I got from him and so hats off to him, he did a fantastic job so some of the elements that we will be discussing today will be coming directly from him and I will just point out when it does, just because you got to give credit where it’s due, right? So when you think about the parameters… This is one of John’s favorite questions I think it’s great you do not have to ask it, but I’m presenting to you because I think it’s a great question. What is the difference between this and saying what is the problem? P – Parameters

35 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 1. What do you want to work through today? There is it presupposition that you will be finished, right? A lot of therapists would you like to do is ask things like what would you like to work on today? You can tell the mind set is that it will take a long time to finish. There is no way we’ll get done today, right? So that is one of the reasons I like it – you can just ask what’s the problem? That is a simple way of doing it. Just in the back of your mind have this as an idea so that you can start exploring into it if you want to go down this road. Can we have a microphone up here please? Just stand up so we can get it to you. Q:

It seems like this would also be a little self limiting where you say what do you want to work on? They would be more likely to give you a list that this I think.

Igor: Right, because they think you have to work through it today, my god, well better make it something I can work through today, right? It’s true so there are elements in there. Please do not get too caught up on the questions, I just want to give you some food for thought and if you simplify down to what’s the problem I really don’t have an issue with it. I’m just giving you options at this point, right? So then what are you asking we are trying to contain the problem, right? How do you contain the problem? Exactly. 2. When, where and how. This is also important, the how, how do you feel? If I’m in poverty and barely eat, do I have a problem? All:

Yes.

Igor: Really? If have abject poverty I can barely eat, but I’m really happy and I do not care, do I have a problem? All:

No.

Igor: So it’s not the situation that is the problem it’s our reaction to the situation where the problem occurs. Now it may not be an ideal situation, but there are many people who are very poor and quite happy about it, right? I realize there is some extreme situations, you know where you know well the real problem is

36 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 someone has got a gun to their head and so on. We are not talking about those things, right? We are talking about how we are going to deal with the therapy. So fundamentally a person will come to you because at some level they are dissatisfied, they are unhappy, they feel bad about something. The irony is, is that something is a behavior like over eating, nail biting or something like that, the thing that maintains the behavior is the dissatisfaction. You see it’s kind of like you remember the image from yesterday? Let us go back to this. You remember this funky little image here looks kind of a modern artist you know. In traditional psychology what you can call this sort of circle where everything has been isolated in can be called a part. It’s kind of like being so self contained that its apart from the rest of them and it feels like something else is taking over and in extreme circumstance I guess this could become more like a split personality or something like that. Do feel a bit like you are a split personality when you have got a problem and you keep acting the wrong way and you cannot help yourself? Do you feel a little bit like that? So the whole idea of parts is kind of an extreme splitting off of part of your nervous system, right? So a lot of people will look at some aspect of themselves and not like it, they want to cut it out and move it away just get rid of it and burn it off. If only I could chop it off like a nail, then I would be real happy. Would that be fair to say? And if your are honest with yourself would it be fair to say that at some point in your life, something has happened to you, some aspect of your own personality you wish you could just curve out with a knife and just get rid of. Wouldn’t that be fair? And that’s why it stuck around for a while. Because you see it’s still you, it’s all you. Your nervous system is your nervous system and to the extent you try and disavow some part of it you are giving it independence you can no longer influence. You can’t cut out a part of you. What you can do is dissolve a boundary and transform it, which is why the old saying comes along, what you resist will persist, what you accept you get the power to transform. You see where we are going with this? So even if there is a behavior they want to change like nail biting for example, there is an emotion which drives the behavior and if nothing else, there’s that

37 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 dissociation, that wish of trying to just say it’s not me I wish this was gone, which is stabilizing it as separate and therefore outside of influence, do you see how that works? So this question how is important, how do you feel, how do you feel about it, how do you feel when you do it? Two slightly different questions there. How do you feel about it? The fact that it’s happening, how do you feel when it’s happening because it tells you what’s driving that behavior, driving the situation, right? 3. How do you want to be different? Again this next question comes from John. How do you want to be different, doesn’t that give you a direction to head in? Yes, simple? What I would like you to do is get into pairs. As soon as you are in your pairs please turn this way so we know we actually start the exercise, off you go. You have a choice at this point first of all one of you guys decide to be the hypnotist the other one the client. Just very quickly decide then come back. Okay great. Let us not make a song and dance about this folks. Let us have your attention up here again please let us not make too much of a song and dance about it because it’s a very simple choice to make. It’s going to be a long day otherwise, right? So what I want you to do is this, the client you have a choice to make here, you can either present a real problem you have, but small we are doing training here right now. Right, small or you may ‘channel’ someone you know who has a problem small or medium sized and kind of role play them so that the hypnotist can kind of work with that a little bit. Does that make sense? So either you select a small problem of your own or you think of your friends or potential clients and get a small problem from them and just role play how you think they might answer these questions. Makes sense? All I want you to do hypnotists is get this information, what you are going to work on through today, when and where does it happen, specifically, one example only. How do you feel when it’s happening, how do you feel about it and how do you want to be different? Those are the three key questions you want to ask. Now, you probably want to spend five or ten minutes exploring this, which is why you only get one.

38 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: What do you think the consequences of only getting one minute are? All:

You are going to have to go right to the point.

Igor: You are going to have to go right to the point, exactly. Clients are great at distracting you from what needs to happen. They are the world’s best hypnotists and they do not even know it. How many hypnotherapists in the room, how many? Once again hands up? Would it not be fair to say, clients are great at giving this hour long sob story, at which point you think, my God you are right, you really are messed up! The hypnotists is believing that their issue is actually real, whilst you can empathize with the emotions that are experienced of the pain that they are in, please never actually believe that any problem a client has is actually real. It’s something they created inside. In the same way, what are the problems you have or I have? They are things I have created inside or you created inside yourself too, right? So you are going to have a minute specifically so that you start with listening to the story getting sucked into the hypnotic story about woe and you are looking for specific information, things you can actually do something about, right? So one minute, we’ll come back, then the other person will have a go. Off you go. How many got done in that time? Actually surprisingly good, I’m impressed well done. How many people needed more time? Right that’s fine. Notice how some clients really want to push that issue of like keep talking and adding more info and so on, right? So there is a balanced skill set that you need to develop between letting them talk enough to feel like stuff coming off their chest, that’s kind of part of the process as well, but not so much that they eat up the entire session time and you have two minutes left to do something. So you’ve got to find that balance point. Any questions, concerns, issues about that? We are pretty straight forward. Pretty straight forward? Alright, other way round the second person to be the hypnotist now. Was that easy to do yes? All:

Yes.

Igor: Yes. So going the P part of the PCAT formula is pretty straight forward. Right and there are things we can do around them a little more, but essentially it’s pretty straight forward. So the next this is – what is the next thing in the whole PCAT

39 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 formula? Right the C stage, right? The C stage is the critical factor bypass, bypass the critical factor I guess you could call it the P bat formula, but that’s a little harder to say. What tools do you have to bypass the critical factor? C – Bypass the Critical Factor 1. Mind Bending Language 2. Non Awareness Set All:

Mind Bending Language.

Igor: Mind Bending Language absolutely, Non Awareness Set, right? Do you see they are very closely related in some ways? So I want you to do now with your partner, same partner, first hypnotist again is to start from scratch same three questions; • What do you want to work through, • When and where does it happen, and how do you feel? • Finally - how do you want to be different? Once you have all that information and you can kind of gather it a bit more quickly now because you know it’s coming any ways. I’d like for you to throw out one or two mind bending phrases and they don’t have to be great. To assist you with it I’ll just leave this up, they do not have to be great, they do not have to even be useful, they don’t have to have any impact, I would just like you to say it. Whatever comes to mind, ask the questions, speak to them, no more than two questions or two statements please then you’re done. Is this easy to do? All:

Yes.

Igor: Yes who feels under pressure right now, anyone? Stop it! Have I asked you to do anything difficult really think about it? All I’m asking you to do is take whatever they just said, whatever their problem is like, I fear cats or I can’t leave the house without dying! Small problems of course and you are going to just play with the language a little bit, put some extra words in between them maybe switch the order around, throw a not in or two, that is it. Right now we are finger painting.

40 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 So how many of you still feel under pressure right now? Getting a little easier? Okay, it’s the mindset that’s important. Now if you are still feeling a little bit of pressure, a little bit of nerves, try this for a change, close your eyes and get in touch with that sense of H+. That sense of really wanting to do something for someone else. Now you’ve had good trances in here. You felt great have you not? Get in touch with that feeling and wish it for this other person, want it for them and want them to really succeed. Now it’s irrelevant whether or not the one or two things you say right now will do that for them, they may or may not, but eventually want something to come out that will do that for them whether you know what that is right now or not. When you have a good sense of being that, open your eyes, look at your client and ask the three magic questions. Off you go. So how was that, interesting? All:

Fun.

Igor: Fun, more fun than you thought about before you went in? Because here is the thing even though we did the whole H+ and so on, who was still a little bit concerned a little bit anxious like, what am I going to do? I do not know. What you are experiencing is the fear of the unknown. How could you know what's going to happen because you haven’t talked to them yet, right? If you knew what they were going to say and what you would reply in return you wouldn’t need to do it because you already had had the conversation. So the only thing you need to be confident about is how to start. And you start by simply questioning the parameter and that’s how its taking you in. Makes sense? Hold the mic over here, just stand up. Q:

Yes one great focus is that H+ just having that intent and focus it takes away a lot of the fear, the doubt because you just go right in because you are like, I will help you and it makes a big difference

Igor: Huge difference, right? And you feel that shield developing. Perfect, over here folks, please stand up so we can get it you to you. Q:

In the last couple of days it seems like I get very forgetful about the steps and I can’t remember them and then sometimes I just kind of go off the reservation

41 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 with some other good stuff, but I know it’s not – I don’t know I‘m just having trouble kind of remembering every step, so I’d leave some things out here and there. And I’m just going to let that happen unless you tell me different. Alright! Nicely said. Igor: There is another question over here somewhere. Q:

That’s okay. When you were showing the diagram and talking about when people try and cut something away, is that something different than like a person constantly goes to the doctor and feels in control because that’s what they feel in control of.

Igor: Oh you are talking about things like secondary gains and stuff like that? Don’t worry about that we’ll come to that later. Q:

Okay. That is something different that what you were saying?

Igor: It may be related, but let’s deal with it when we get to that section. You can ask the exact same question again at that point okay? Q:

Okay, thank you.

Igor: And just stand up so we can get the mic over. Q:

Small question and if it’s not relevant now then it’s okay if it’s not answered. The how part seems specific to a behavior and then the third question of how would you like to be different distinguishes you from the behavior. So what is the difference between how would you like to be different or how would you like it to be different? Or is there one?

Igor: Well, where is the behavior when someone has a fear of exams? Q:

Internal.

Igor: In that question for you the idea of state is a behavior, when they feel anxious is a behavior for you? Q:

Right.

42 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: Okay, in fact if that’s how you define behavior then that is fine you can phrase the question however you want, the idea is what is important here, right? Q:

Okay.

Igor: If the idea is not communicated, then no matter how well you phrase it, it will be useless, if the idea is put across it goes through one of these and it will still have its impact. Makes sense? Q:

Just so I understand, once you’ve collected the information of what the problem is and then you have your where and how a person feels and then you have how they want to be. When you do this Mind Bending Language words is that with the problem or is it with a combination of all of the things that you’ve collected?

Igor: You’re right. Q:

So it can be with any of them then? It can be with any combination of everything you collected?

Igor: If you can get a sense here that there is a theme evolving in terms of my answers. There is no wrong way to do anything and there is no right way to do anything. Doing certain things in certain ways would get you certain results relatively predicatively, that is it. You can get the same exact results doing other things as well, so who cares whether or not you miss some steps on the way. The only thing that could happen if you did, is that something else will arise other than what you had expected or hoped for, which means that you have to do something else at that point, right? When I started in therapy I went to the old classic schools where you know here is a technique for this problem, here is a technique for this problem, here is a technique for this problem and I was furiously studying to memorize every single pattern and technique, every process and so on. A couple of things happened. Number one, clients refused to play my game, that was really upsetting. They didn’t fit into my technique. I had to do something horrendous. I had to chop half a technique off from this one and go into the other one and I was just hoping that my instructors would never find out, but I got the change.

43 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 There is nothing you can do that’s wrong. You can make mistakes absolutely. You can maybe create an unpleasant experience for someone by an unfortunate sort of suggestion, but provided you are paying attention you can fix every mistake as it occurs and then you can look back on it and realize that’s possibly the best thing that could have happened because it brought to light something you might otherwise not have seen. So who am I to tell you that this is the way it has to be. There are drills for sure and we will do more drills to internalize certain structures and ideas and so on, experiences and we will do those, but only under the agreement that you’ll forget about them afterwards and you’ll use them as they are necessary, it will be there for you. You drill to get the experience and then you let go of it. Make sense, because the most important thing you will take from this training is not the language, it’s not the inductions. Someone just said over there it’s the experience, more importantly it’s the instincts that you are developing here. The instinct; when you do something wrong can you recognize it or - let’s take the word wrong out, when you make a mistake, when you say something that has an unintended consequence can you fix that? That‘s really the only thing you need to be able to address. You can start in the middle of change work, right? Sit down, don’t tell me your problem, sleep, now your problem is going away, but it’s not. Why, what’s happening now? Have I missed a step? Of course I have. Does it matter? No, because the client will keep you on track one way or the other. So you have a lot more leeway than you realize and yes, I will be pushing you through certain sequences so have the experiences to know what things tend to result in what things, that’s all. Any questions? Can you just stand up so the mic can come to you? Just stand up so we will see you there. Q:

On behalf of the problem I’m wondering, I feel that how you want to be different is basically a product of how deeply associated you’re into the problem. So basically like in terms of the time that you gave us, if a person is not associated into the actual feeling of the problem or the experience of the problem it makes all the difference in the world in terms of how you want to be different.

44 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: I agree, hold that thought. Alright number two, same thing as number one just did ask your three questions about the problem and throw in two mind bending question, statements and so on. Off you go. How is that? Fun? All:

Yeah.

Igor: Are you beginning to get the feeling of how to get yourself ready to start asking the right kind of questions and so on. Question can you just stand up for the mic. Q:

I have been noticing that if I put too many of those in my statements it just comes out as word salad and not relating to my client and just one or two is all I need.

Igor: Did anyone else notice this? All:

Yes.

Igor: And this is a very useful thing to realize at this point. People here might mean language and they think the more convoluted I can get the better, because you can spin them into an amazing deep trance, right and there’s a couple of things you should know about that, number one, depth of trance has zero correspondence with therapeutic results. Those are one of the few things we do know about hypnosis. The depth of the trance has absolutely no correspondence with the therapeutic results. Of course, when we start off with the thing, we’ll over accentuate it, we’ll over emphasis it because we want to do it so right, we’d rather do it over-right, shall we say. What you will learn over time and I don’t care by the way if you put all these convoluted things in, that’s fine. In time you will learn to use Mind Bending Language with such a small spin that nobody else will know it’s happened. The only person who will know it’s happened is the client and the reason for that is their the one with a problem. They’re the one walking up into a glass wall. If I ask three of you to step across a line, but only one of those people had a glass wall in front of them, two people would happily walk past that line wouldn’t they? All:

Yes.

Igor: And one person would bump against something and go, what happened? The other two would look back and go, what happened, because they think they’re

45 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 having the same experience, but they are not. So when you’re doing Mind Bending Language by all means go crazy on it for a while, but sometimes what you say may seem very sensible to you. In fact Mind Bending Language will sound very logical. You can have some very true questions you can ask, it’s just that they can’t process it yet because they are coming up against their issue. Do you see how that works? All:

Yes.

Igor: So it’s an excellent thing to spot. So just play with it a lot, a little, stretch it out, stretch it down, just see where it goes there’s no hard and fast rules. Q:

I sort of noticed an interesting thing that when it’s your own problem it makes the questions very interesting.

Igor: Doesn’t it? Q:

Yeah it really does yeah.

Igor: Which is exactly what we just talked about again, isn’t it. The two people that crossed the line they go what’s the big deal? The person that bumps into the wall goes there is a wall here? Just try that again, just give me that direction again I’ve got to test this one out. Would it be fair to say that you’re beginning to get that experience here a little bit? So and to be honest with you, the more you do this the easier it becomes.

PCAT Drill

Igor: What we are going to do now is a couple of little drills to keep things real simple, right? I would like for you to find a different partner. A different partner, settle down with them and then face the front. Alright everyone with a new partner? We are going to something which is fun. Are you okay with these words? Can I take these off now? All:

Yes.

46 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: Do you have them relatively in your memory or in your notes, something like that? All:

Yeah.

Igor: You don’t even have to remember all of them just a couple of them kind of as they just come out. Alright so here is what we are going to do here. We are going to go through the same phases as you did now only this time I don’t care about content, right? So you’re going to turn to your partner and ask them what’s the problem or what you’re going to work through, whatever, you are going to ask them. It’s going to be two seconds and you know what their answer is going to be? Blah, because you don’t care. So you will be done literally in 15 seconds or actually it should be in five seconds, but I’ll give you 10 seconds. Is that easy to do? All:

Yes.

Igor: Just the first question, what’s the problem or what do you want to work through today? Go each way and come back. I will stop you in 30 seconds one way or the other so please don’t go too blah, blah, blah, blah, blah because you don’t need it. You ready for this? All:

Yes.

Igor: Speed is of the essence. Go. So a whole bunch of you were done like in 10 seconds then looked to me nicely as we requested and then they starting going like what the heck is everyone else talking about? Did anyone start getting into a conversation by any chance? Talking about what they were doing. I understand the temptation for the moment I’m going to ask you to resist that temptation because there is more than enough stuff that happens in the therapy room with a real client that you can get so lost in the conversation that nothing ever happens. Trust me I’ve been there. Hypnotherapist in the room am I telling a lie at this point? All:

No.

Igor: Not really, right? So what I want you to do is the same thing, we are going to add one more step, only this time please try and contain yourself to the steps as best

47 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 as possible, purely for the reason that you want to have a kind of a program running at the back of your mind that decides when something is being relevant and when it’s not. If you start mixing in normal conversation then that’s how you’ll start doing therapy, in other words you will end up having long chats. It will take a lot longer and there is nothing wrong with that. You can do that if choose to do that that way that’s fine. For the purpose of what we are doing here though we want speed so you can get a clear distinction between what you need and what’s extra for you, because it makes you comfortable or interested and so on. Makes sense? Can we have the microphone here quickly please? Q:

Just a little quick clarification. We are actually talking about whatever the issue is we are not saying blah.

Igor: You’re actually saying blah. You’re actually saying blah. Now rest assured in time you will talk about the issue in the same way, but you want to be looking for the issue being of the same importance as blah. So is that easy to do? Q:

Yes.

Igor: So you can ask about the problem and get a simple blah in response yes? Not rocket science is it? Did you have a question? Can we just have the microphone over there so I can hear properly. Q:

Okay so after the client blah, blah and then your response then…

Igor: That was it that’s the only thing I asked of you. Q:

Okay cool.

Igor: Anything extra that’s on you folks not me. So do you understand how simple we are doing things right now? All:

Yes.

Igor: We are spending a lot of time with simple things aren’t we? All:

Yes.

48 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: Why do you think that is? Igor: Because you are over complicating it. And you will try to over complicate it with real clients and it will make your life a lot harder. Once again, your welcome to do it that way until you wake up one day and realize what am I doing? I could do it the easy way. Now my hope is you will be doing this in here, because then out there it is real easy, but if you wish to take it out there and experiment for a while and do it out there be my guest, it’s entirely your choice. So we understand the first question what’s the problem? We are going to work through? Blah, right? What’s the next question? Give an example, where and when does it happen, right? So I want you to start from beginning again, asking what’s the problem or what do you want to work through today they will go? All:

Blah.

Igor: Let’s try that again they’ll go? All:

Blah.

Igor: Then you will ask them, where does it happen? What will say? All:

Blah.

Igor: And you ask them when does it happen? They will say? All:

Blah.

Igor: Is it difficult folks? All:

No.

Igor: Alright guys do that. How many of you fell into the whole conversational trap again? See how easy it is to do? Some of you were very good I noticed it you did your thing and that’s it, that’s all the information I need. You’re creating a contrast inside your mind so if you engage in conversation, you’re realizing you’re doing it for other purposes than what you need to do for change. You’re doing it for rapport building. You’re doing it make yourself feel more comfortable. You’re doing it to let them vent or something like that, but you’re not getting engaged in

49 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 that in a way that’s going to mess up what you’re doing therapeutically. Does that make sense? Is the first question easy? All:

Yes.

Igor: Is the second set of questions easy. All:

Yes.

Igor: What do you ask then? It’s not rocket science on the board. All:

How do you feel?

Igor: How do you feel about this or how do you feel when that happens? Do you know what the answer is going to be? All:

Blah.

Igor: Not quite. It’s going to be bad. I feel bad or sad or mad or anything that rhymes with ad. In other words we’re looking for something unpleasant, right? All:

Yeah.

Igor: But once again this is just a place holder for something else, make sense? So get your blahs and a bad, simple as that. Easy? 20 seconds off you go. Easy, right? Alright, so the next set in terms of the set up, the parameters is what? How do you want to be, right? And what’s the answer going to be? All:

Good.

Igor: Yes you got it, good. For those of you who are greedy, great. Off you go. Excellent that’s what I like to hear. Easy? All:

Yeah.

Igor: So we have covered the P stage of the PCAT Formula, right? What’s the next stage? C right, we are going to use Mind Bending Language here, your nots, your reversal and so on. How are going to do it with words like blah and bad, what’s not blah that’s so bad you feel good now? Now of course there is no problem, there is no context really, so you really get to have some fun with it don’t you?

50 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 All:

Yeah.

Igor: Easy to do? Off you go. So far was it easy? All:

Yeah.

Igor: Blah. Alright guys so we got the P the C what is the next step? All:

A.

Igor: Our questions for the A part of the formula are really simple. The first question is and this is really otherwise you have nothing to do. 1. How do you feel? You can ask this question in many ways. How do you feel? What is happening now? What just happened? What is going on inside? Check inside what’s going on? You see you’re getting asked the same question the same general idea in different ways, yes? All:

Yes.

Igor: For now let’s stick with how do you feel, just because it is easy. Now essentially they can give you three answers can’t they? What are those answers? Either good, bad or I don’t know, right? That’s really the only three options you have for the moment, I would only like you to go with the answer good. So we have something to play with and then we will start exploring the other possibilities. Is that okay with you guys? All:

Yes.

Igor: So do you want to start the exercise? All:

Yes.

Igor: So off you go. A few of you seem to be having far too good a time on this one. So how is that going, good? All:

Yeah

Igor: Simple to do?

51 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 All:

Yes.

Igor: So the final stage of the PCAT formula is the T the transformation and the question for this is real simple. As you’re feeling X in this case as you are feeling good just think about the problem, think about blah and notice what happens. Is that difficult? 1. As you feel X think about the problem…what happened? All:

No.

Igor: That’s it, that’s all you do. Any questions? Go all the way through that please. Off you go. How was that? Easy? All:

Yes.

Igor: Kind of fun? All:

Yes.

Igor: Simple? All:

Yes.

Igor: Yes. All:

Yes.

Igor: Any comments or questions on what you have experienced so far? No, good stand up so that we can get a mic to you. Q:

Even though we were working on blah, I feel a hell of a lot better about blah!

Igor: You have been blahed out have you? We should start a new cartoon you know like the Smurfs, the Blahs. Alright so I want to have one more question which we are going to put into this which for now, and we’ll come up with some other ideas. What did he ask, how are you feeling now, how do you feel, what’s happening now and so on and they’ll go I don’t know. What are they telling you when they say I don’t know, I’m not sure? What are they saying to you really? Exactly that they are neutral. There are not in a bad place. They are telling you that the box is open, but they haven’t decided what’s going to go in it yet, right?

52 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 So what do you think might be a useful thing to do at that point? Give something useful to go in there. All:

Yes

Igor: Do you recall a revivification from day two. Do you recall how quickly you began to re-experience something from your memory when someone invited you to think about it, right? What if we did that here? What if you asked them, of course we are not asking this unless they are in a neutral state. • How do you want to feel? If they are in a positive state we just go straight to the next step. How do you want to feel? If they tell you how they want to feel which would be what? Good right. Why don’t you just ask them what’s it like when you’re feeling good? Or you can just echo it. You want to feel good don’t you? You really want to feel good and then start smiling and go, you really want to feel good, are you already? Of course they are, they’re smiling. Do you see where we are going with this? Is that easy? All:

Yes.

Igor: Simple step. Okay so do the second variation they’ve gone all the way through, but they will come out at I don’t know, then you’ll ask them how they want to feel they’ll say good you play with it you revivify, you do whatever you want to do. Once they are smiling that will be your queue to finish off as your feeling good, think about the problem and notice what happens. It’s exactly the same ending you’re just adding an extra step in to make sure that they are getting to the resource, right? Easy? Yes, questions go. How did that go folks, easy? All:

Yes.

Igor: You realize you are still role playing at this point, so you are not really doing anything hypnotic we are just getting the sense of how the whole thing works. Q:

Liar.

53 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: Liar (laughs). Is anyone here beginning to feel good for some strange reason? All:

Yes.

Igor: How did that work? Is your own unconscious mind taking advantage of the situation? Don’t stop it. Would stand and have that mic over here. Q:

I’m going to ask the question with regard to what I did because I’m not sure what I did was what I was supposed to do. So the second last line as if you…

Igor: You did just enter the territory, its true. Q:

Second last line as you feel X thing about problem the X should be no as you feel good now think about blah.

Igor: I think that’s perfectly fine. Q:

Or as you feel blah think about the problem no?

Igor: Which do you think is the better version? Q:

I used the first version.

Igor: I agree with you. Q:

As you feel good now think about blah because the problem is blah.

Igor: Exactly. Are you confused by all these blah’s? Yeah who is getting a little blasé about the whole thing? It will start getting easier. Here is the irony, you get the idea of the structure, the form of it when you have a real problem, but even not with this it gets a lot easier because now you have something real to work with which we’ll get to in a moment. Before we get there though, I would like to put this whole thing in context here.

MBL Cycles

Igor: Let us imagine we have our unhappy chappy here, is all sad and blue. Isn’t that how therapy always begins? Somewhere up here, there is a line here where

54 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 consciousness starts to dissolve and what I like to call this area up here is the Trance of Infinite Possibilities (TIP), because you know when you get your head spun out like that do you notice it’s like everything becomes open ended, doesn’t it? Almost anything becomes possible. Good things and bad of course are possible. Your attitude will filter down towards the good things, that’s why we have H+, but both things are equally possible at this stage. So they come here and you ask them, how are they feeling? I feel a bit bad. So then you say something what’s not bad above all this and they’ll go huh. So they’ve just hit some place where normal thinking stops occurring, would that be fair to say? At this point they can come down in one of three places, either you ask them what’s happening now? And they go I’m feeling great, right? So if this happens of course what are you going to do? Well they are feeling great, so we are you going to do? So what’s the question? Q:

As feel great what do you feel about blah?

Igor: Yeah as you feel great think about that problem and notice what happens, right? Some people will come out and they will feel… They don’t quite know how they feel. So what do you do at that point? What do you say? Q:

How do you want to feel?

Igor: That’s one person who’s got it how about the rest of you? All:

How do you want to feel?

Igor: How do you want to feel? This is not rocket science is it? All:

No.

Igor: So they come down here you ask, how do you want to feel. And they say I want to feel good. What do say then? You really want to feel good. What’s it like when you’re feeling good. You are just going to bring it back to life. You are going to revivify it because eventually they’ll end up back here right at that point what do you say? As you’re feeling good, just think about the problem notice what happens. What do you say?

55 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 All:

As you feel good think about the problem and notice what happens.

Igor: Again it is not difficult is it? You’re just doing the same thing again, right? But what if they come down and they are all sad, I’m still feeling bad or I’m feeling a different kind of bad than before but it’s still bad, any ideas what happens then? You do it all over again, exactly and you spin them back out until they land either here or here, which allows you to fast the whole thing off again. So you basically just keep running cycles until your done it’s not difficult is it? This diagram by the way is from John Overdurf, it’s been adapted a little bit so once again credit goes to him for this. Say that again. Q:

How comes that still comes back to the bottom again?

Igor: Because that is where the problem is right here. Here is where the problem is, this is where they started from and you have to transform, the only way you can transform something is to take what was the problem and repaint it with a resource. This situation the problem is a room where the problem is at and this up here this stuff up here. This is the resource, this is the paint. The paint must go in the room otherwise you’re not painting anything. It’s not enough to just make them feel good, that good feeling must attach to what the problem was and then you can start generating solutions and so on. Do you want to stand up so we can get a microphone to you? Q:

The exit in the diagram.

Igor: The exit will be right here at this point here, at the bottom. If this point here ends up here, your practically done, there is a few more tests, stuff we will talk about later. If at this point here at the bottom you get anything else you do exactly the same thing you’re basically popping right back up here or here again. See it doesn’t matter where you land, its only one of three possible choices you have. Some are good, some are neutral or some are unpleasant, that’s pretty much it. Is it easy to get. So down here we have, let’s use this. Here we have the P of the PCAT formula here with a C here is the A and right here we have the T do you see all three stages of the PCAT formula cycling through there. Is that easy to do? Just over here.

56 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

I’m not sure if I understand what I do when they say I still feel bad when you said go through the cycle again so what do I say?

Igor: What do you do when they feel bad down here? What do you do if they are saying I feel bad here? Q:

Is that at the beginning or?

Igor: It doesn’t matter the whole point is… Q:

So I say how do you want to feel? Or when we went through the process.

Igor: As soon as you have any negative emotion you’ve already have a problem don’t you? Q:

Yeah.

Igor: So then what the second step after the P? Q:

It how do you want to feel when we are through with the process, right?

Igor: That’s the thing here so what happens right after the PCAT formula. What does the P stand for? Q:

Well the C is after that.

Igor: Exactly what’s the C? What do you do in the C process? Q:

You bypass the critical factor so you use the Mind Bending Language.

Igor: Mind Bending Language? So as soon as you get a problem what do you do? Q:

Okay so I use the mind bending…

Igor: You spin them back out again, right? Because you’ve basically landed them in an unpleasant room so you are going to keep stirring the room and stirring the room until they land somewhere positive or neutral, right. Q:

Okay.

Igor: Neutral is almost positive which is why you can finish it in that way, that’s fine. It will make more sense as we go along does that help?

57 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

Yes thank you.

Igor: Could you stand up so that we can get a mic to you. Over here. Q:

I’m working with a Shrunghi, he is my partner and he has a bit of a language barrier so when you give the time, I noticed how stressed he got because he felt like he was confused.

Igor: Sure. Q:

So I said just go slowly and I’ll try and help you as much as I possibly can.

Igor: So if you would like to just go with an assistant during the exercise they’ll help – coach you through. It will make it a little bit easier for you or he can do it in Korean if you prefer. Q:

Okay.

Igor: I really don’t mind because he’ll be doing this in Korean anyway at some point he may as well do it straight away does that help you? And you can just find a different partner because we are going to be swapping partners a lot at the moment. Q:

The other thing that I think would help is if you put like just an example of a phrase near each of those letters.

Igor: Here you go. Q:

I understand what you saying, but it would – I will do it myself.

Igor: It will get easier as we go along trust me alright. You just get the idea of it for now. Q:

Yeah but I think if you are a visual learner it would be easier.

Igor: We will get it as we go along, just one step at a time folks. Do you get the general overall sense of it, yes? Do you get the overall sense of the cycle, yes? So here is what we are going to do now. I will be your client as a group. So if I come into your office, what is the first thing you ask me? 1. What do you want to work through?

58 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 All:

What’s your problem?

Igor: Somebody going what’s your problem? Alright exactly so my problem is blah, so what do you say next? 2. Where & when do you have it? All:

So where and when do you have it?

Igor: So when and where do you have it right so what do you ask me? All:

When and where did you have it?

Igor: I want a little bit of more conviction folks, what do you ask? All:

When and where did you have it?

Igor: I had it last Tuesday in my house. 3. How do you feel about that? All:

How do you feel now?

Igor: How do I feel? I feel really bad. 4. How do you want to feel instead? All:

How do you want to feel?

Igor: I want to feel good. So at this point you just say some Mind Bending Language. You just do some mind bending right. So throw some mind bending at me. Alright that’s enough don’t make me go crazy, I can deal with that one. So you have some mind bending, and what do you do now? 5. Mind Bending Language All:

How do you feel? 6. How do you feel now?

Igor: I feel great, 7. As you’re feeling great, think about the problem & notice what happens?

59 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: So as you feel great think about the problem, how do you feel? What happens, is that easy? All:

Yeah.

Igor: Well I feel great, I’m done. Check $100 thank you very much well done. Now I’m a new client am coming in question here. What do you say? All:

What is the problem?

Igor: Perfect I’m saying blah what do you say? All:

When and where did you have it?

Igor: Last Tuesday in my house. What do you say? All:

How do you feel?

Igor: I feel bad. What do you say? All:

How want to feel?

Igor: I would like to feel great. What do you say? Mind bending yes. Honestly at this point it matters very little, right? Then what do you say – you said it I’m going, interesting. All:

What's happening now?

Igor: I’m not too sure. All:

How do you want to feel?

Igor: How do you want to feel? Absolutely, I would like to feel great. All:

So what's it like when you do?

Igor: So what's it like when you do, right? What's it like when you do feel great, what's it like, right? Well it feels great, I’m great now? All:

Yeah.

Igor: So what do you say?

60 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 All:

As you feel great think about the problem notice what happens.

Igor: As you feel great think about the problem notice what happens. I feel great thank you very much. All:

$100.

Igor: That’s client number two you just earned $200 well done. Client number three walks in the door. Okay. When and where well, it was actually this time was a Monday and it was in my car. All:

How do you feel about it?

Igor: How do I feel? I felt pretty bad in the car. All:

How do you want to feel?

Igor: I want to feel confident. You almost blew my ear of on that one. All:

How do you feel? How do you want to feel?

Igor: Well I feel a bit bad actually. I feel a bit bad actually. Alright this is good, let me pause you there, whenever something negative arises you know what the normal response is? The simplest response? Bend their mind. You don’t need anything else because you’ve got a block to the resource. So bend their mind until they are actually somewhere positive, so somewhere neutral, right? If you recall lets go back to the picture here if I land over here – here we go. Where do I go? The only way out is up. Spin me out right. So what are you asking again how do you feel? I feel a bit bad. So you bend my mind I’m going like oh so and what do you ask then? I don’t quite know. All:

How do you want to feel?

Igor: How do you want to feel, right? I want to feel great. Well it feels great, as you feel great, is it starting to make a little sense folks? Now I know there is a couple of questions here, so go ahead let’s start there.

61 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

I’m just curious if you could explain why we – if they go back to feeling bad or if they are still feeling bad why we don’t try and access the resource state again. So how do you want to feel?

Igor: So let me ask you this, when they start of over here, they come into your room and they are feeling bad why don’t you go straight to the resource? Q:

Because we don’t have any reason yet. But no I’m saying afterwards.

Igor: I understand, but why wouldn’t you not do it here either? Q:

Because you don’t have the explanation at all of what they are up to and what they are feeling.

Igor: Explanations are irrelevant, because we are in the unconscious mind at this point. What you don’t have is access. You need to get them out of the problem room to get access to the resource. When they are in the problem they don’t have access to resources that’s why they have problems and that’s irrelevant at what point in the story you are at. You are absolutely correct. Your aim is to get them to the resource but has anyone here felt bad about something? And some one has tried to give them some advice like cheer up, look at the bright side, how helpful is that for you? Q:

Not very helpful, but what I meant is when you are asking them so the first time they say okay how does this make you feel bad. How do you want to feel? Is good. So why don’t we say how do you want to feel the second time that they say they are still feeling bad.

Igor: I see what you mean you mean like in the parameters because the only reason for the parameters is this. The parameters are literally setting a start point and an end point to put the unconscious mind on notice that it somehow has to make a journey, that’s it. Once you’ve established that, then that’s the context, that’s going to happen at some point or another. So you could do this for example, and I have seen this done very successfully. Everyone right now I would like you to think of a small problem you would like to resolve, is that okay with you guys and you are thinking of it right now?

62 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 I’d like to think of a specific context when and where and how it makes you feel, right? How do you feel whilst the problem occurring? Not pleasant is that correct? So just clear your mind at that for a moment and think about how you’d rather be different. How you would like to be in that situation can you do that? Just forget all that and just think about you’d rather be different. Now close your eyes and wait for something important to happen. Put your hand up if you begin to feel the resolution starting to occur. It doesn’t have to completely go all the way through, lift it right up in the air and keep it up there for would you? That’s it, slowly but surely hands are coming up. Keep them up for now. Slowly but surely there we go, there you go. Now on pause, leave your hands where they are – leave your hands up if they were up leave your hands up if they were up and when paused open your eyes look around the room. So we got maybe what, a third of the room, half the room something like that is that, right? Did I do anything in terms of clever trance work or anything like that? No, well the only thing that I did is I put you on notice. I asked you to think about a problem so we’ve got a start point. I asked you did you think how you would like it to be different, we’ve got an end point. Then I shut up I said you do it and your unconscious mind naturally connects the dots. Now this was how long, two minutes a minute less than that, 30 seconds and you are already starting to resolve something without my even needing to do anything. Did I say any clever words? Did I use Mind Bending Language on you? Did I have to get a symbol and pop it for you? Did I do a blitz and fill you full of resources? I did none of things because I didn’t have to, because I know that the unconscious mind likes to connect dots. So the only reason for the parameters is to start is to have dots to connect. Here is where you are going to start. Here is roughly where you will finish and everything we do from this point on will be to help you make that transition. Does that kind of make sense? I know a person who does this with massage therapy. They will talk about a problem with a client before they – as they are getting them ready and they’ll say, how you like to be different and so on its great. Get on the table massage,

63 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 massage, massage, feels good. How are you doing? Fantastic. How is that problem doing now? You know what it’s really not that important anymore. It could be done like that too. Now it’s not necessarily as consistent with all problems, so we’ve got some extra things we can do in the middle of that, but the core of what you are doing is set up with those parameters. That is why you ask in first place. Does that make sense to you? Does that answer your question now? Is it useful guys? Do you want to stand up so we can get a mic to you? Q:

I practiced Mind Bending Language yesterday and today as far as you understand the second stage critical factor bypass critical factor and then how do you feel? The people said good or bad, right? That’s as far as I understand Mind Bending Language here just a bypass critical factor which mean just trance. So it’s like its induction the same status. So after induction…

Igor: Let me just pause you there a moment. You made an assumption that just because the Mind Bending Language is causing this sort of trance response here is spinning them out into the Trance of Infinite Possibilities we are sending them to a kind of trance where anything can happen. Now if I’m sitting there going what is not you that’s there? What is my overall suggestion? Something unpleasant, right? Q:

Yeah.

Igor: If I’m saying have you really thought about what's everything else you haven’t done yet that isn’t that? What's my overall suggestion, right? Q:

Yeah.

Igor: So I’m actually doing C&A at the same time, I’m creating the Trance of Infinite Possibilities, your mind is sort of blanking out. Its spinning out it can’t hold onto reality, meanwhile the only thing you are seeing is this which is expecting you, do you see what just happened there? You just smiled, felt a little shift. It’s expecting something good to happen. It’s a suggestion folks. So if you are sitting there going I am a clinical hypnotherapist, so what's happening now? Why are my clients always upset? I don’t understand this. You should be really more excited about this because I’m presenting the wrong

64 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 suggestion. So you are correct and we are doing much more than that. Does that help? Q:

Yeah why I’m asking is when you are talking about accessing resource I thought resource is when I think of the good memory or a good thing, but you didn’t mention its just – it’s were then…

Igor: The resource is anything positive. Q:

Yes to simple so I..

Igor: It’s much simpler than you think. It is much simpler. So let me give you an example. Do remember when Jacob over here was sitting on this chair the other day and you remember when his mouth started laughing? Q:

Yeah I saw it.

Igor: Would you call that a resource? Q:

Sure.

Igor: Right. Q:

Yes.

Igor: Because he is laughing. Now he is laughing at his problems, that’s a recourse. Whether he is laughing, whether he is happy, whether he is excited, it doesn’t matter, it’s a strong positive mental energy, which when attached to the problem will blow it out and that’s all we care about. There is no specific resource that you need. All you need for a resource is a strong positive mental energy. Q:

H+ you mean, right?

Igor: H+ from you and inside them they need to feel something strong and positive. If it’s strong and if it’s positive, it’s a resource. If it’s weak and it’s positive it’s a part of a resource. If it’s weak or strong but negative it’s not a resource. That’s all you have to think about. It’s a really easy function you don’t have to complicate things. You are not looking for anything else you are looking for how are they doing? Are they in a strong positive state or not and that’s it. Does that make sense?

65 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

Yes, thank you.

Igor: Your welcome and its literally the only thing you are looking for, is what is the state of mind that they are in right now? Strong and positive you are half way done. Over here and then we’ll come to the back again. Q:

In that two minute exercise you did I just wanted to get the few steps you walked through. You kept the starting and the ending and then I think you asked, now close your eyes and wait for something important to happen and then are you starting the resolution, what came after that I didn’t – just want to follow it.

Igor: Ignore it, that’s not an exercise we are doing. That was just as demonstration to something right. I just asked people to put their hands up when it starts happening. All I’m doing here is to demonstrate to you that when you presuppose change so in other words we are going to start over here with a problem. We are going at some point to end up over here with a solution. You – pretty much anything you do at that point will move them from one to the other because the unconscious mind has that tendency to fill in those gaps for you. I know one hypnotist who does guardian angel therapy it was something like this, you come with a problem. What's the problem? Great sit there. Yes so what is it you wanted again? Very good. Yes, they’re here. What was that? Yes they are working well. Almost there? Carry on. All done? Are you sure? Try it out. Well done. That’s pretty much his therapy. Now I’m honestly advocating this as the constant approach, it will be very successful with some clients, they’ve got to be in that belief system shall we say, but you see how it can be really, really simple when you do it – when you set the context in the right way. You can see all the hypnotic elements there can you not. The attention, the bypassing of the critical factor it’s just presupposed by them just waiting expectantly. The accessing of the resource, or the stimulating of the unconscious mind through this idea of guardian angels, right? Maybe guardian angels do exist and exactly what happens. What if they did exist and what if all we are doing here is complete nonsense, shaking our little magic feathers and we think our words are so clever, whereas really they are doing all the work and we are getting out of the way long enough to do it. Who knows? I don’t know. All I

66 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 know is that if we do these things in a consistent pattern they work. Does that kind of make sense to you guys? Please do not over complicate any of this stuff. It is really simple. Do you have a problem? Do you have a parameter for the context? Can you spin them out a little bit with the Non Awareness Set or anything else, so that they are not in the problem anymore? Can they land somewhere positive and can you use that positive energy on the problem so that it transforms, that’s it. It’s real simple. Does it make sense? This is the basic idea. So go ahead stand up and we will get a mic to you and we will come to you in a sec. Q:

I’m not sure if I understand this, but I’m not sure if they I understand anything today. But it seems to me that the reason to throw them into a tip or any kind of throwing them out of their state once you access the problem state is that trying to get resources from that state and especially if the problem is deep or deep rooted the walls seem to high to even see where the possibilities could be. So am I correct in understand that one of the purposes in throwing then out first before trying to illicit a positive resource is that it make it easier to find positive resources.

Igor: Yep. Q:

Thank you.

Igor: Over here and then we will come back. Q:

I’m just curious about attaching the disoriented state of the recycling to – and a positive resource like and that’s the part I don’t see the connection.

Igor: Okay has anyone here got a problem. Give me an example of a problem. Q:

I smoke time and again and I would like to get rid of it.

Igor: You would like to get rid of smoking? What other things do you guys have come one just regular problems everyday things. Q:

Nail biting.

Igor: You have nail biting. So how do you feel when you bite your nails?

67 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

Bad.

Igor: Bad okay what else do we have? Q:

I have trouble finishing your courses.

Igor: You have trouble finishing my courses. That’s too funny. Anything else? At the back over here. Q:

Consistently stay up too late.

Igor: Consistently stay up too late how, how is that a problem? Q:

I feel tired the next day.

Igor: So how is that a problem? Just go to bed sooner. Now why I’m doing this, because he has not given me a problem has he? He has given me an event. Q:

Yeah.

Igor: So what I have no idea about is what's causing him to stay up late at night, right? So probably for the purpose of a demo either yourself or yourself will probably be the cleanest demonstrations here. So which of these do you prefer folks? Okay stand up if you want smoking. Sit down again. Stand up if you want nail biting. Smoking has it. Give her a round of applause. Come on up.

68 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2

DVD 14 – Using Mind Bending Language With Real Problems & Demonstration

Mind Bending Language Demo

Igor: Have a seat, there you go. Joe, do you want to arrange the microphone so she doesn’t have to hold it? Actually, you know what, do you mind holding it? It’s probably not going to be that kind trance anyway. Just test it out say you are okay. Q:

Yes, I’m okay.

Igor:

Okay, you all can hear okay?

All:

Yes.

Igor:

Everyone fine?

All:

Okay.

Igor: So, just a little time out before we start off. Normally, when we just do the stop smoking program, along with a whole bunch of other things that we’ll do, so I’m going to try and restrain it just to the Mind Bending Language to show you that you can do anything with anything else, does that make sense? It will mean that we will have to do a few extra loops on the way but why not, right? Q:

Why not?

Igor: Exactly. So you are a smoker? Q:

Yes.

Igor: How long have you been a smoker? Q:

20, 25 years.

69 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: That’s fine. And give me an example when and where do you smoke? Q:

I hide and I smoke at home.

Igor: You hide. Q:

Yes.

Igor: And you smoke at home? Q:

Yes.

Igor: Wow. Just out of curiosity, how come you hide? Q:

I don’t like that I smoke.

Igor: You don’t like that you smoke, right, so how come you do? Q:

I don’t know.

Igor: So what happens? You know, walking around your normal day, give me an example of the last time you smoked? Q:

This morning.

Igor: This morning, right? So you woke up and decided I have to smoke? Q:

No.

Igor: Oh great, so what did happen? Q:

I don’t know. I had breakfast and I decided well, I should smoke now because I might want to later so I’ll smoke now.

Igor: Okay. So just before you were thinking I should smoke now, how were you feeling? There you go. Q:

I don’t know.

Igor: You don’t know, do you? You really don’t know. This by the way is very common for a compulsion because the unconscious mind kind of takes over a little bit, that’s fine. So how would you like to be different?

70 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

I would like not to smoke.

Igor: You would like not to smoke, right? So how would you be as a person if you were not smoking? Q:

The same.

Igor: The same? Q:

Just not smoking.

Igor: Okay. And how do you feel about smoking now? Q:

Like it’s bad.

Igor: Like it’s bad. Like it’s bad. So what’s not bad about you, that goes beyond the idea of smoking? Q:

I don’t know.

Igor: Really consider it. What do you think about it? What’s not bad about you that goes beyond the idea of smoking? There you go. What’s happening now? Q:

I’m thinking about what you said.

Igor:

You are thinking about what I said, aren’t you? And how are you feeling whilst you are doing that?

Q:

Good.

Igor: Yeah. How do you know when you want a cigarette? I mean, let’s put it this way, how do you know, right now, that you’re not cured, done, finished. You just could go home right now and never smoke again? You think that’s likely? Q:

Yes.

Igor: You think it is likely? Q:

Yes.

Igor: Great. How would you know? How would you know for sure? Q:

I wouldn’t want to smoke.

71 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: When? Right now? Q:

Ever.

Igor: Ever? Do you want to smoke right now? Q:

No. Maybe.

Igor: Maybe? Now we have something. You see it takes a little bit of work sometimes to get at the actual thing? So what’s that maybe about, tell me? What just happened then? Q:

Probably if I could smoke I would. If I didn’t think that anybody would see me or something.

Igor: Okay. So if you could smoke you would, how did you know? How do you know you would smoke if you had the opportunity right now? Q:

I don’t know, just from past experience I guess.

Igor: So right now if you were alone in the room and there was a cigarette packet there, what would prevent you from just ignoring it? Right now just think about. Q:

Nothing would prevent me.

Igor: So it means that you could just choose not just smoke? Is that what you are telling me? Q:

For a while.

Igor: So what happens after that while? Q:

My anxiety level goes up.

Igor: Oh. Do you see how long it took us to get to the point? There is a feeling, a state that drives every behavior and it will take a little bit of effort to get to that, but now we can see more of the correlation, right? So when anxiety goes up you want to smoke is that what you are saying to me? Q:

Yes.

72 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: When anxiety goes up, you want to smoke. So if either your anxiety levels weren’t going up, you wouldn’t smoke or if you found other ways of dealing with that anxiety, you wouldn’t smoke either, am I understanding this correctly? Q:

It’s probably true.

Igor: Right, so aside from the anxiety you feel at that point, because you can think of that can’t you? Aside from that anxiety what else is there that’s not smoking? There you go, what’s that? What was that? Q:

It’s infinite, I don’t know.

Igor: It is infinite, isn’t it? Q:

Yes.

Igor: It is infinite, isn’t it? It is infinite. How does that feel? Q:

Good.

Igor: So as you are feeling this good, just think about that situation where the anxiety would normally arise? And notice what happens? Q:

I still feel good.

Igor: You still feel good. Are you convinced? Its half and half, right? We are making progress, but we are not entirely there yet and you know I’m right, right? Q:

Right.

Igor: Exactly. You’re being a very nice client by saying, oh, I will be nice. I won’t say anything bad, but you may as well tell me what’s going on. So what was that other thing about? Q:

What other thing?

Igor: Whatever was left over, what’s that? Q:

I’d probably smoke.

73 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: You’d probably smoke, right? That’s fair enough. Incidentally, a little time out there, so you guys should know that smokers have several reasons to smoke. Anxiety is one of them, social insecurity is another one, sometimes they have time alone and contemplate, there are many different reasons for it and we have to track all these down. So for the purpose of the demonstration we will just do one or two of them rather than the whole bunch and I suspect your unconscious mind might be smart enough to start applying the same idea to other things too? But anyway, that’s neither here nor there for now. So why do you think you would still smoke? What’s makes you say that? Q:

Maybe when I’m bored.

Igor: Maybe when you are bored. Do you see another just come out? Before we get to this idea of boredom, I would like you to just think about something that would normally stress you out and you get a little anxious, you know what I mean. There you go, that. Not the most pleasant thing is it? Q:

No.

Igor: And there is a packet of cigarettes lying next to you, what happens? Q:

I sneak away and have a smoke.

Igor: That’s right. Exactly. Now why did I just do that? I’m doing a test. Do you see how the whole idea of the association and anxiety and smoking it has been eroded, but it actually hasn’t been cleared yet. So before I start dealing with any other reason like boredom and so on, I need to clear one specific trigger idea, whatever first. Does it kind of make sense? I’m doing this all a little backwards. If I was doing a stop smoking session first, I would actually do it much faster, doing other things as well, but because I’m restricting myself to Mind Bending Language, we are going to be going through these maneuvers a little bit more mechanically just so you can see what’s going on. Is that cool with you guys? Yeah? Is this useful to you? Q:

Yes.

74 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor:

You’re having a good time up here? Good. So you are in the situation, can you give me some ideas of when or where the situations - what made you feel anxious?

Q:

You know the family is loud at home and…

Igor: Right, so you are at home? Q:

Yeah.

Igor: Like what day might this be? Q:

Any day of the week really.

Igor: Just choose one. Q:

Okay. Last…

Igor: Last… Q:

Last Thursday or last Friday.

Igor: So it’s last Thursday. What time of the day, morning, evening? Q:

In the evening.

Igor: So it’s last Thursday evening, right? And you are at home? Q:

Yes.

Igor: Any particular room? Q:

Usually in my room.

Igor: Where were you last Thursday evening? Q:

In my room.

Igor: So you are in your room Thursday evening, what happens? Q:

I sneak a cigarette.

Igor: Well how come? What happened before that?

75 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

Nothing really, just everyday pressures.

Igor: Just everyday pressures, right? Those are things I’m interested in, those everyday pressures, there you go. So before you have that cigarette and you have that everyday pressure, at what point does it sort of begin. Because at some point of the day you were just probably happy go lucky and you weren’t feeling like a cigarette, no pressure or anything like that, right? And it started to change, at what point did it start to change? Can you recall that now? Q:

I think once I get home and everything kind of settles down I feel like I have dealt with everything. It’s maybe my reward for dealing with…

Igor: Okay, let me just pause to have a little time out here. Once again you notice how she is introducing a different theme here again? Again, a very common smokers theme which we’ll deal with in a separate time, but I have to keep dividing these things up because otherwise it becomes too big a thing to deal with at once and once again in the stop smoking session I can take all this things and pre-frame them out so I can deal with one thing at a time, but again because I’m doing this backwards. You can use basically any tool to achieve anything, sometimes you have to work harder if you haven’t got the other tools in place as well. So I’m doing it this way for you guys. Is this helpful by the way? Q:

Yes.

Igor: And I’m pulling these things out just so you realize that there is not a classic smoking session precisely because these issues are arising, right? We are going back to this idea of the pressure, it’s Thursday evening, you are at home, when does the pressure begin? Q:

It builds throughout the day.

Igor: It builds throughout the day. At what point on Thursday did it reach the level at which you needed a cigarette? Just talk me through it. Q:

Well after I deal with everything, the pressure is there throughout the day.

76 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: Right, so the pressure is there throughout the day and if I understand you correctly, at some point, you decide you have dealt with it and then to release the pressure you have a cigarette, is that kind of how it works? Q:

Right.

Igor: Okay. So aside from the release, what aren’t you smoking when you go beyond the pressure? Q:

I don’t know.

Igor: You don’t know, do you? Q:

No.

Igor: You really don’t know. How are you feeling right now? Q:

Relaxed.

Igor: Relaxed. Really relaxed? Q:

Pretty relaxed.

Igor: Do you think if you waited a few moments you’d get even more relaxed? Q:

Yes.

Igor: Well, let’s just wait a moment then. There you go, that’s it. That’s it, there you go. Now, as you are feeling this relaxed, go back to Thursday evening, we’ve dealt with all the pressures, can I ask you, wouldn’t you rather feel this? Q:

Yes.

Igor: Just feel it now and notice, did you need a cigarette for that? Q:

No.

Igor: You didn’t, did you? Q:

No.

Igor: You really didn’t. Yet how are you feeling right now?

77 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

Good.

Igor: You are feeling good, aren’t you? Q:

Yes.

Igor: And you are going to be right there Thursday evening, your family stuff, you have kids I presume? Q:

Yes.

Igor: Your kids are doing stuff and you’ve settled it all down and it’s time to formally divide all the pressures to time to relax, right? Q:

Right.

Igor: Just observe what happens this time instead of the cigarette. There you go, do you feel it happening? How do you do you that? Q:

I don’t know.

Igor: You don’t, do you? You really don’t know? Q:

No.

Igor: But you’re glad it’s happening? Q:

Yes.

Igor: Something must be happening here, eh? Q:

Something.

Igor: Something. Is it important? Q:

Yes.

Igor: I agree. I agree. Are you enjoying it? Q:

Yes.

Igor: Let it grow because you deserve it. There you go. You may as well close your eyes and really… there you go now you are getting it, because we are not just talking

78 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 about this Thursday. We are talking about all Thursday’s aren’t we? Go onto Friday because you had the same sort of day on Friday didn’t you? Q:

Busier.

Igor: Busier it’s even better then. And eventually you dealt with everything, the pressure is still there what do you find yourself doing spontaneously now? What do you need to do? Q:

Just relax.

Igor: Just relax. How do you relax? Where do you go, what do you do? Talk me through it. There you go. That’s it there you go. Would you prefer this or cigarette? Q:

This.

Igor: Are you sure? Q:

Yes.

Igor: Your not messing with me are you? You’re not messing about? Q:

No this feels better.

Igor: Sure it does? How do you feel about yourself having this instead of the cigarette? Q:

Much better.

Igor: Much better? There you go, like someone worth appreciating? Q:

Yeah.

Igor: Yeah you are doing a great job by the way. There you go just a little more. Take your time. Really take your time. After all that’s what the whole purpose of this isn’t it? There you go. And there have been other days where pressure builds haven’t there? Go ahead and try those out and see what happens now. Isn’t that something? Is it getting stronger? Q:

A little bit.

Igor: It is isn’t it? Do you know why?

79 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

No.

Igor: Because you are getting better at it. That’s it. Can you by the way, see the integration happening? If you right at the back feel free to come forward you won’t damage anything so you can actually see the expressions they are useful to see and you can stay there if you prefer as well. But you can see how the integration is going on here, right? The transformations happening, the resource is what, relaxation, right? It’s a real simple resource, but it’s also very profound can you see it? And you can see how she is slowly associating that she is painting the room or at least one of the rooms that used to crave smoking she is painting them with relaxation can you see it happening? All:

Yes.

Igor: Is this putting them more into context. Now notice how we have this sort of simple PCAT formula where we each have one little loop and so on, but I have been spinning in different directions a few times haven’t I? That’s how change is. Changes get a little messy at times, but if you have the idea in the back of your mind then this becomes easier because I’m only looking for three things, is she in a good place, a bad place or a neutral place? You’ve seen all three haven’t you? For the good place I just invited her right back to the idea of the cigarette – actually the pressure wanted her to smoke to release the pressure, right? When she was in a neutral place I asked her how she wanted to feel and when she was in a negative place what did I do? I asked a few more questions around it had some little words from her for handles and just throw a simple Mind Bending Language pattern in, they were of medium intensity. They weren’t crazy convoluted. They weren’t totally invisible though of medium intensity, right? Not rocket science is it? How are you doing by the way? Q:

Fantastic.

Igor: You are doing fantastic aren’t you: Q:

Yes.

Igor: You are doing really good. So what I would like you to do now is I would like you to think of a really bad day where the pressure is you know, really intense. You

80 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 know one of those days where you just want to shut the world out and lock yourself in a room, crawl in the bed and hide under the covers, you know that kind of day? Q:

Yes.

Igor: Everyone has them. Q:

Yes.

Igor: Think about that day. There you go, tell me what happens? Any desire to smoke? Q:

Yes.

Igor: That’s right. Talk me through it. Q:

It’s a bad day at least I can have a smoke.

Igor: That’s what you tell your self isn’t it? Q:

Yes.

Igor: What is it that smoking does for you at this point, or what do you think it will do for you? Q:

I don’t know.

Igor: That’s right you don’t know do you? Q:

No.

Igor: It’s because some part of you just hasn’t caught with the rest of you has it? Did you hear the Mind Bending Language there? What’s happening now? Is it catching up? Q:

I think so.

Igor: It’s a really bad day and you think you want a cigarette, but beyond that what else can happen? Q:

Get relaxed instead.

Igor: There you go, now you have got it. Can you feel the flood gates opening?

81 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

Yes.

Igor: So do you prefer this or the cigarette? Q:

I much prefer this.

Igor: You do don’t you? Q:

Yes

Igor: Are you sure? Q:

Yes.

Igor: How do you know? Q:

It feels better.

Igor: It does feel better doesn’t it? Q:

Yes.

Igor: Is it getting stronger yet? Q:

Yes.

Igor: Here is the thing because you had such an intense day this gets to feel so much more intensely positive. Because all that energy has got go somewhere doesn’t it? Q:

Yes

Igor: There you go isn’t this something to look forward to? Q:

Yes.

Igor: Are you sure? Q:

Yes.

Igor: Not kidding me? Q:

Yes.

82 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: Not lying to me? Not being nice to me? Q:

It’s good.

Igor: Your sure? Q:

Yes.

Igor: Alright. Positive? Q:

Yes.

Igor: Just checking, not changing your mind? Q:

No I don’t like smoking.

Igor: But you know what if I come in with a pack of cigarettes at that point you have this really intense crazy day and I’m offering a cigarette have it? Just take it? Q:

No.

Igor: You have done this before why? Q:

I don’t want it.

Igor: You know you want one just have one. Q:

No.

Igor: How come? Q:

I’ll just relax instead.

Igor: How are you going to do that without a cigarette? Q:

Just take a deep breath.

Igor: Wow, putting me in my place, there you go. You’re doing great. You really are doing great, there you go. Was this really one of the hardest days you could imagine or think of? Q:

Yes.

Igor: Nothing big, badder that you could test yourself out on?

83 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

It was a pretty bad day.

Igor: You sound quite relaxed about it. Q:

It is better now.

Igor: It is better now isn’t it? Q:

Yes.

Igor: Because you and I both know that no matter how bad that day was you made it through, right? Q:

I did.

Igor:

And you are here now feeling pretty good, right?

Q:

Very good.

Igor: Because relaxation and comfort, it can come again. Q:

Yes.

Igor: How does it feel to know that no matter how bad it gets, eventually it will pass? Q:

It feels good.

Igor: You’re sure? Q:

Yes.

Igor: I believe you. How are you doing right now? Q:

Great.

Igor: Yeah, so what I would like you to do is and this is not necessarily a plan, but just so that you are aware of the possibilities. I would like for you to think of what one of the worst things that could happen, that might cause you to go back to smoking you know what I mean, like a really intense pressure, now I’m not saying it will ever will happen, make sure your unconscious mind realizes this is not a plan, this is a test only you understand what I mean? Q:

Yes.

84 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: And it’s not pleasant whatever you thinking about now is it? It really is not pleasant is it? Okay and relax. Q:

Well I’m thinking about drinking, sometimes when I drink I want to smoke more so it’s not necessarily unpleasant.

Igor: Well then just put the idea of drinking to one side would you? Q:

Okay.

Igor: To one side. Now why did I do that again? It’s a different category again, right? What we are working on right now the problem is pressure leading to smoking not drinking leading to smoking you see where I’m coming from with this? All those other things we can deal with in time, but remember we talked – a couple of days ago, she is trying to deal with the whole pie at a once I want to neutralize one entire segment of that pie first then the others will be easier to handle, right? And again if I was in a smoking session this would be more in the reverse order anyways, but that’s not – we can get that in the last class if you want. But you can do this but it just requires a bit more cycles around it. So the idea of pressure that’s really what’s interesting me right now like a really bad day, really intense pressure more than you’ve had before, something might have caused you to smoke in the past. Q:

Okay.

Igor: I just want you to see how can deal with that now. Q:

Okay.

Igor: What’s happening now? Q:

We are having trouble with the kids.

Igor: Yeah, and how are you feeling right now? Q:

Frustrated.

85 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: That’s right. What do you need to allow to happen in order for this to – do you want a cigarette by now by the way? Q:

Only a little bit.

Igor: Only a little bit, right? And you know why that is by the way don’t you? Q:

No.

Igor: Because some part of you has not entirely caught up with it has it? Really consider it, aside from that little bit of cigarette that you want, what do you really want not? Q:

Not to be frustrated.

Igor: And beyond the frustration what else do you have? There you go now it’s coming back isn’t it? Q:

Yes.

Igor: More intensely again? Q:

Yes.

Igor: That was a close one wasn’t it? There you go. Q:

Feels better.

Igor: It does feel better doesn’t it? Q:

Yes.

Igor: And you realize of course that frustration is part of life, it will happen, right? Q:

Yes.

Igor: It’s not whether or not it happens, or for how long it hangs around, it’s what happens afterwards that counts. I would like you to imagine like a mental movie of an alternate you in the same scenario, with same pressure having a cigarette, which of you do you prefer? Q:

The one that’s not smoking.

86 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: And how come? Q:

Its healthier it’s better.

Igor: And how do you feel right now as a nonsmoker? Q:

Fantastic.

Igor: Right and that woman over there with a cigarette is she feeling anywhere as good as you? Q:

No.

Igor: That’s right. I wonder what the lesson is here. Q:

Not to smoke, just to relax.

Igor: I wonder how you are going to do that. There you go, that’s it, because you’re so much more capable than you realize, that’s it and up to this point you thought you needed a cigarette to relax didn’t you? Q:

Yes.

Igor: And all that happened was you were blocking yourself from the very thing you could have done to feel like this. Q:

Yes.

Igor: So it’s really a distraction wasn’t it? Q:

Yes.

Igor: Prefer what you have now? Q:

Yes.

Igor: Do you know how you found it? Q:

I’m not sure.

Igor: Because your unconscious mind was waiting to give this to you. You just had to wait and be open long enough to allow it to occur. There you go. How are you doing right now?

87 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

Great.

Igor: Can you see how the responses are getting stronger and stronger each time and you see how I’m testing more extreme scenarios so that I’m not leaving anything to chance now we still haven’t dealt with drinking, with boredom and with any other reasons for smoking, but in this sense here we’re probably close to being done. Does it make sense? How do you feel right now? Q:

Great.

Igor: Do you think there is anything left over. Any idea with pressures and smoking, not the others for now, just idea of pressure and smoking, anything left over at that point? Q:

I don’t think so.

Igor: Yeah you sure? Q:

I’m feeling pretty relaxed.

Igor: And what happens when you don’t? Q:

It’s okay.

Igor: Are you sure? Q:

Yes.

Igor: So why don’t you bring yourself back in your own time. Just let it settle in, in whatever speed is appropriate for you. You don’t need to know what that is, you just know your eyes will open when you’re ready to be back in the room. How are you doing? Q:

Good.

Igor: Rocking and rolling? Q:

Yes.

Igor: Yeah. You see a different person sitting here than before? All:

Yes.

88 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: I’d like you to pick a volunteer and do an Instant Induction in front of everyone would you? Q:

Really?

Igor: Yeah. Q:

Okay.

Igor: Would you like a cigarette to help you out? Q:

No.

Igor: Are you sure? Q:

Yes.

Igor: You’re good. Give her a round of applause. Just stay here a second. We have to try don’t we? So you realize you have done a pretty big thing for yourself here, right? In terms of the smoking and the thing – just keep your microphone on so we can hear you. Q:

I think so.

Igor: And also realize that we have not directly addressed things like drinking and smoking and being bored and smoking and probably some other associations you have like that and because you were kind enough to come up here and demonstrate something I would like for you to know something. You have an unconscious mind that did all of this for you and in the same way is you discovered a different way of being a better you when under pressure, better than smoking. There you go. It’s happening already isn’t it? I wonder if those eyes will close all the way to allow you to complete rooting out everything, there you go. Rooting out every element that’s it, every association every connection, every need and every desire so that you can learn fully and completely that as a nonsmoker, you are so much more. There you go, and everything you used to think smoking gave you, is a tiny little insect of a thing compared to the amazing things you get to experience now instead. You what I mean by that don’t you?

89 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

Yes.

Igor: And I really don’t how long this process will take to complete nor will you because 20 years of smoking may require some time to go through and process fully, but then again you managed with the pressure, which was pretty intense. Q:

Yes.

Igor: You managed that pretty quickly so I guess there is some part of you that knows something about change, right? Q:

Yes.

Igor: Just rest there for a while and notice it happening. You don’t need to do anything other than wait for your eyes to open, that will be your signal that it’s done, but there is really no hurry. I will talk elsewhere, but it’s of no importance what I’m saying. It is of more importance that you continue and complete the process you are in right now. Does this make sense? Time is of no meaning at this point. That’s right. So is the PCAT formula a little bit more in context, right? Did you notice all the mistakes I made? They were plenty of them. That was quick. Wow you are good. So if you were to take someone out for dinner tonight, or like have social drinks in the bar downstairs and stuff like that. Q:

Yes.

Igor: And you sit there what kind of drink would you have? Beer, wine, cocktail. Q:

Maybe a coke.

Igor: A coke? Q:

Yeah.

Igor: Heavy drinker? Q:

Yeah.

Igor: Would that have been something that would have caused you to smoke in the past? Q:

Yeah just being in a bar.

90 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: Just being in a bar? Q:

Yeah.

Igor: So there is a bar in this ship, right? Q:

Yes.

Igor: There is and they sell coke I hear? Q:

Yes I had one.

Igor: And there are people in this room that are sure, actually it’s going to be funny suddenly a 160 people descend on the bar. It’s happened before, right? So what do you think will happen if you are there with some of this folks and you in the bar having a coke. Q:

Nothing.

Igor: Really? Wow you sure? Q:

I’ll just enjoy my time.

Igor: Yeah I guess there is one way we’ll really know is there? Q:

Yes.

Igor: What would that be? Q:

When I get there.

Igor: That’s right, are we good? Q:

Yes.

Igor: Thank you very much. Give her a nice round of applause folk’s thank you so much.

91 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2

MBL Debrief

Igor: Just to illustrate a point how many have got, I’ll come to you in a second, how many of you got the stop smoking Master Class anyone? Would it be fair to say that what I have just done here is completely backwards from what I’ve asked you guys to do in that one, right? And nowhere near as smooth, nowhere near as direct - nowhere near as directed, nowhere near as simple to follow as the Master Class that correct? But did it still work? Yes? We’ll have a test in the evening in terms of all the other things. I’m a 100% sure about the whole pressure thing which is the biggest one. Exactly, see we mention pressure what happens? Exactly, that’s the best answer I can get on that one. The other ones will tend to flip down like dominos as well if you create the same associations next to it. Of course the test night will be the one that will be of particular interest. If time permitted I would actually happily go down there and do the test together and do you know why? Because if anything is going to fall apart, I will want to be there? Do you notice how I tested are pretty hard here at some points? Some pretty hardcore things, why, because if it’s going to fall apart, its better if it falls apart in front of me. When I was a lot younger and a lot worse at hypnosis, I used to have this huge insecurity about the whole thing. I’d do some work and – something just kind of happened and I’d say, okay nobody breath, nobody move, just shuffle out as carefully as you can from my office right now because I don’t want to break whatever just happened, because it seemed like it was okay. But then what good is that if as soon as they step back into the real world it starts falling apart. So if it’s going to fall apart somewhere, let it fall apart right here in front you where you can do something about it. It’s not rocket science. It fell apart a few times didn’t it? There was the different pressures the first which has normal pressures then we had that really intense day from the past. Then we had the really intense day that might occur sometime in the future. Whether or not it does is irrelevant, right? At each one of those it failed but a small amount.

92 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 It could have lead to restarting the whole smoking cycle does that makes sense? But by flushing those out here instead of thinking, oh I’m so embarrassed I failed in front of a 160 people because she still feels a little bit bad about the cigarette. It’s been a bad day. I’m sorry. That would have been how it would have felt in the past because it didn’t work, oh no, now it’s irrelevant. It’s a good thing for that to happen because the chances of it now working out in the real world and sticking are much higher. Does that make sense? Instead of, during the break, can I have just a two minute chat with you there is a couple of things you need to know about smoking as a pattern intellectually shall we say to avoid you falling down the relapse route in terms of not that you want to smoke, but there are things some people, some people do to test themselves which are less than useful alright. I just want to give you a little heads up on that because you may as well have the full shebang, right? So you noticed the cycles going through? Did you all notice problems arising? Did you all notice getting specific about the problem, when and where and how and so on, just in the chatty sort of way and then something mind bending happening as a result. On some occasions, some were good, some were neutral, in other occasions some were bad. What happens when some are good, what did I do? What did I say? Let’s try this again. What did I say? As you are feeling this relaxation just think about cigarette and what happens. Wasn’t that pretty much what I said? All:

Yeah.

Igor: Was that rocket science? Was that difficult to do? And what's happening now? I’m feeling okay. She is thinking about the cigarette and she is noticing what happens and she is okay, where is she? Neutral. So what do we do? How do you want to feel different, right? In this version of the resourcing I said, that’s right because you haven’t caught up entirely yet. Can you hear the supposition there, the implication, right? Its same thing it’s just a more – a slightly different way of saying, how do you want to be different, right? Just because you are not saying the same words doesn’t mean that I’m not saying transfer the same meaning, right? Then what happened? She lights up like

93 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 a Christmas tree and then we did test cycles and stuff like that. Is it starting to make a little more sense to you guys now yeah, now that we’ve got a context around it? What I would like you to do is just spend a minute or so maybe with your eyes closed or your eyes opened whichever you prefer. I would like for you to review the last exercise you did with the blahs and the bads and the nots and the goods. I’d like for you to review it in the light of what you have just witnessed. I would like for you to review the exercise where you ask what's the problem, how you are going to be different and all those things in the light of what you just watched here and notice how and where you have correlations, where they are the same thing. Really get in touch with that. Really have that feeling. And maybe talk to yourself a little bit. What if you had a client with an actual problem? Can you see yourself taking him through similar steps? Simple, because all you have to do is make one choice at a time, just one and how do you make that choice. How do you make that choice? Well its simple, you watch the client. If they are in a negative state bend their mind some. If they are in a negative state bend their mind some. If they are in a positive state make it strong and attach it to the original situation. And if they are neutral help them find something positive and bring that to bear. It’s really simple isn’t it? When you have a sense that you could really do this, at least with something small and simple and allow your eyes to open and come back into the room. How are you guys doing? So we are going to have a break now and we’ll come back and we’ll do some questions and exercises and stuff like that. Does that sound good to you? 15 minutes lets be back in the room.

Q & A Session

Igor: So how is everyone doing? All:

Great.

94 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: Is this making a little more sense now, yes? All:

Yes.

Igor: Is this making a little bit more sense now yes? All:

Yes.

Igor: Don’t worry, we’ll draw you a nice cleaner version on the board later on, so you can actually see the cycles and actions and so on. In fact Sarah, whilst we are doing our next segment could you choose a nice piece of wall and do a long version of this with all different variations so – yeah like that long, so you have going down to unpleasant then cycling again, unpleasant and cycling again, unpleasant and cycling back to neutral then to happy, back up so they see the whole thing visually represented. I will point you that way over the lunch break okay? So we have a couple of questions and this gentleman here was waiting for some time. Do you want to stand up so we can get your mic to you? Q:

When I put this all together I find out there is a – it’s all about replacement. So you replace a bad habit, put in whatever it is, relaxation and the person is going back to find out if it’s all replaced if not then it’s the approach by you to get out the other bad habit or the same bad habit, but through the rest what is left and then you put in the relaxation or something else, what it is or whatever it is. The only…

Igor: Yeah you are 100% correct. Q:

And the approaching is what we do here now.

Igor: So do you remember this, do you remember this diagram here? Q:

Yes.

Igor: That’s the replacement. Remember all this – all this guys up here are ready to come in and destroy these guys down here, so that what used to make them feel bad now empowers them, now let me say this, I’m not saying what used to make them feel bad makes them feel good. What I don’t want to do is help Renee feel good about smoking. That’s not what she asked for, right? Do you understand the subtle difference here? It’s what used to make her feel bad, in this case it’s the

95 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 pressure which is being released by smoking, that’s been released, being replaced by relaxation so the need for the habit disappears. Q:

Yeah because if you don’t replace it, there is a gap and you can fall in it again.

Igor: Exactly. Q:

If it is drinking or smoking its, whatever it is.

Igor: This brings us to exactly the next point and thank you for bringing this up. I know there is another question, we’ll come to you in a moment again. But consider a mountain… when it rains what begins to happen on mountains they get wet, right? Does the rain like run down the mountain in equal proportions everywhere? Q:

No.

Igor: What does it do? It collects into rivers, right? So little streams come together and suddenly you have a big mighty river, right? What is the essential quality of the river? It’s the channel that is bigger than any other part of the mountain which is why the water collects there because it goes to lowest point is that fair to say? So if I come along and I start pouring water on the mountain up here with a giant watering can where is the water going to go? Most of it is going to go down the channel that already exists. That’s kind of how problems work isn’t it? When you’ve got that neurological connection wired up it’s like a channel, as soon as a new energy comes in it will most easily fall into that channel, which is why we keep getting sucked into it. Make sense? What Mind Bending Language does is this, you should be very familiar with this here in California, it’s called an earthquake. What happens to structures in an earthquake? They collapse. So we are now temporarily collapsing this channel. However the essence of the channel is still there at some level isn’t it? The trace of the old pattern is still there. There is physical connections and neurons in the brain and so on. So what do we have to do if we want to move the river, we have to be able to hijack it and create a new channel that leads somewhere different so that every time it rains it may start here but it ends somewhere completely different. Is this making sense to everyone?

96 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 All:

Yes.

Igor: That is the final part of the T of the PCAT, it’s not to transform, its transform and test. Each time you test, what you are actually doing is not only getting information about how well this thing worked, but you are also conditioning them. You are conditioning them to the new response. The harder you test the deeper the channel will go. So I test lightly at first and we have just a light channel here because it takes a lot of effort to dig deep, right? I don’t want to miss and create the wrong channel by accident. So we test a little bit harder and a little bit harder eventually we get a nice big whoa. One of these, oh yeah. At some point it will be easier to find this new channel than it is to find the old channel, at that point your change has taken place. That’s when it becomes shall we say as permanent as the problem used to be, because you realize nothing in life is actually permanent, right, and whatever this is, there may be even better ways that they can evolve to in time, but the point is the energy or the rain when it collects will no longer collect down the problem path. If you do not test, the risk that you have after the earthquake is, some water goes down the new channel, but the old channel gets washed open again because there is still enough of it left to start collecting rain water. Do you see what the metaphor is like? So you are 100% correct. We need to replace whatever was driving the behavior and the behavior will spontaneously be replaced as well. We need to replace it with something else. You know the – you’ve heard the phrase nature abhors a vacuum, right? So you need to place something in there. Do not leave it just open ended. You can leave it opened ended in the sense that they can fill it in themselves. Did I choose relaxation as a resource? Q:

No.

Igor: No, but did you notice how it spontaneously arose. She went into a special kind of trance in which many things were possible and of all those possibilities the one that her unconscious mind selected for us was relaxation, wasn’t it? Now do you begin to see the importance of this? The reason she selected relaxation is because we set the parameters upfront. I’m a smoker I don’t want to smoke and the unconscious mind found the best path to connect this two up.

97 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 In this case it’s that relaxation and all of the other things that came with that start of relaxation because that wasn’t normal relaxation was it? It wasn’t it just like yeah I’m relaxed, it was a special kind of relaxation. A therapeutic relaxation shall we call it. But she called it relaxation therefore I called it relaxation even though I could clearly see it was more than just regular relaxation, do you see where I’m going with this? I don’t need to know what that resource is, because if I have set my parameters up the unconscious mind will fill it in for me. Does this idea make sense to you? In terms of Mind Bending Language what you are doing, does this make sense to you? If the first earth quake does not move the river what do you do? You shake it again exactly and you felt pretty shaken a few times, right? Does this make sense to you guys? So there is a few more questions over here and then I think somewhere else go ahead. Stand up and get the mic. Q:

I noticed that several times you ask are you sure? Are you sure, are you sure? And the more you ask it, it seemed like she was almost saying yeah that’s mine you can’t take away.

Igor: Yeah. Q:

So could you say something about that?

Igor: Sure – and then just pass it forward I think this guy in front of you wants next. So here is what is happening in the test cycles, remember what are we doing. We are testing to make sure it’s working. If anything bad is going to happen, it should happen in front of me. If it’s going to fail, fail right in front of me please because then I can fix it. The second thing we are doing is we are testing, we are conditioning rather. Now let us say you plant a new tree in your garden and you want to know whether its roots are taking and it’s firmly set in the ground, what do you do within five minutes of planting and the earth is still nicely freshly packed over it, do you start yanking and pulling and pushing and yanking? No. You just shake it a little bit and say is it going to hold for a little bit and if it does what do you do then? You shake a little bit harder, right? Then you might tamp down the earth a little bit more and you shake a bit harder.

98 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Each time you shake the tree the roots will grow. Why? You have simulated the tree to want to send those roots out just to solidify. Well then I’m not a gardener so I don’t know if it’s true in nature in this way, but you get the metaphor, right? You are simulating the tree to send deeper roots out to be able to take more pressure. So as my testing progresses, I test increasingly harshly. Now what happens when I say to you, you know, has this changed and they say yes. What do they have to do to be able to say yes? They have to go through the entire process again to check it don’t they? In this case Renee had to put herself in a position where she is under pressure, she feels what she is feeling instead and instead of wanting a cigarette she feels a flood of relaxation coming through, right? You saw that cycle happening didn’t you? When I say are you sure there are two things happening, number one she must do the exact same check again, which means she is sending water down the new channel again. She is conditioning the channel herself. Secondly she is taking responsibility for it. I’m no longer suggesting it. She has…at first I made half the suggestion, are you sure? Which is kind of like I’m sure with you and other times going I don’t believe you. I don’t believe you. It can’t be this quick and I’m going to start voicing her potential doubts so that when she fights me, she is already inoculating herself against her own potential doubts. Do you see how that works? So that’s the whole point of saying are you sure? I’m not going to start with are sure, I’m going to start with how are you now? How is it going? Is it getting stronger yet? I’m solidifying things, right? And just double checking but before we move on are you sure – this is good? Yeah. Are you sure? Really? Really? You are not messing with me are you? Again they have to check. I don’t believe you. It can’t be this quick. Well when you were just sitting up here, you were just doing stuff in your mind here. It’s not really real is it? What happens when the client, when you are pushing the client so far they want to shake you and say shut up already I’m done? Is that a good thing or a bad thing, versus the opposite which I have by the way been in, where you are so busy trying to persuade the client that it worked? Has any hypnotherapist tried that before? How well does it work for you? Not the best place to be in is it. I know I have done it plenty of times and it’s not a happy place to be. I’d rather

99 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 have the client tell me to shut up already, because I am done I want to get out of here, just stop because now they’ve taken complete responsibility for this. Can they now go back and have doubts? It’s extremely unlikely isn’t it? They’ve committed to a position, the position is one of change. Do you see how that works? Now there is no 100% in anything. There are no guarantees in anything that you do? What you can do is you can stack the deck in your favor and make it more likely, most likely to work and be stable and so on. Does that help? Do you want to stand up and… Q:

This might be really, really simple I might have just missed it but at the top of the diagram with the happy faces and the squiggles going up.

Igor: Squiggles are just a work of art. This is clearly Mind Bending Language spinning people out. Q:

Exactly.

Igor: Clearly. Q:

And beyond that setting that aside it says TIP at the top.

Igor: Trance of Infinite Possibilities. Q:

Got it thank you.

Igor: Let me ask you this guys, just click off a second and we’ll come to you in a second. Have all of you or at least most of you at some point in this course experienced that sense of like, (blankness) when you are asked the question whether it was during the Mind Bending Language or the none awareness set or anything else, have you all experienced at least one moment of that yes? All:

Yes.

Igor: And was – and have you at least experienced at least one moment of that which was positive in other words you had no idea what's going on. It’s kind of a weird blank voidy sort of thing, but you felt really good about it. Yes? All:

Yes.

100 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: When you think about that moment will it be fair to say that at this point pretty much anything is up for grabs yes? That’s the trance of infinite possibilities. You are moving them into a mental state where virtually anything is possible for them and it’s just a question of where do you help them to land. And one of the easiest ways to do that is your tonality and your expression. How are you doing now? Not good. That’s right you are not doing good yet. Huh? What just happened? I don’t know. You really don’t know. Do you see how virtually any part of your conversation, of your interaction brings it forward, progresses it. You are only looking for three things, good bad or ugly, ugly being neutral. It’s cowboy therapy. It’s really simple you are only looking for three things aren’t you and you only have three maneuvers to make. You bend their mind if it’s bad. You encourage it and transform them, you bring it back to the problem if it’s good and if it’s somewhere in between, if it’s not good not bad it’s neutral you help them find something good. It’s really simple steps, anything extra well that’s on you. You are over complicating at that point. Do you understand this, the general principal of what we are doing here, yes? Does this help? Does this answer your question? Q:

Yes.

Igor: Go ahead stand up and click it on. Q:

We just observed a successful session of the quit smoking in here, the question is, what is relapse rate of, compared to medical treatment and then another question for addiction gambling and alcoholism and all these?

Igor: Let’s take this one at a time. 1. Number one, what's the relapse rate of this, I have no idea. How could I know it’s the first time I have ever used Mind Bending Language exclusively for a stop smoking session, I did tell you this, did I not? It was a demonstration of Mind Bending Language over anything else. In terms of the stop smoking session that we’ve created there, which may include Mind Bending Language as part of it but has other things around it, it really depends on the therapists.

101 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 I have not tracked my progression cleanly so I can’t give you a clean static. I know it’s very high so be in the 80 I’d like to say 90 percentile rate but I really don’t know. They are other clients which for example Joe over here has been doing that so maybe you can say a word or two about your particular success rate. Just make sure everyone can see you Joe. Joe:

So I do a lot of stop smoking sessions. I do you know maybe five to 10 a week and I do track my success rate with people. I have all sorts of tools to do that. I give them surveys and all sorts of stuff if anyone is interested in how I do that you can talk to me later, but I see about a 95 percent sort of stick rate and I you use most of the techniques that Igor has on his Master Class and a few sort of tricks that I have kind of developed on my own. I see people like I said that 95 percent success rate has continued for years. I have been doing this now for like two almost three years and I do it in one session, I do it in an hour and no one comes back. The very few people that do come back it takes me about 15 minutes to fix whatever went wrong and its usually something that didn’t figure out or didn’t know to tell me or it was just a new situation that came up in their life and I can deal with it right there in like I said 15-20 minutes and then they never come back either. I have clients constantly calling me or emailing me and telling me six months later oh my god my lung capacity has doubled. I’m feeling so great. It’s very easy to do and like I said about 95 percent success rate that’s in comparison to, like your other question to medical cures like gums and patches and other things. Again I can’t really speak to that, but most people that come and see me have already tried all those things and they failed. If you want statistics on those they are much lower than hypnosis.

Igor: There is actually an article in New Scientist if you can find it, thank you by the way Joe, appreciate that, which some of it used in my original advertising where they did a whole range of different methods for stop smoking and tested the follow up studies and overall hypnosis was the number one most reliable tool for stopping people smoking. In their particular study it was in the 60 percentile rate,

102 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 but you got to bear in mind not all hypnosis is equal. So they are mixing a whole different bag of hypnotist’s, right? The reason I can’t give you my exact success rate is because like Joe I have very few people coming back but I have never actually tracked it so I’d be lying to you. I can only give me my instinct. As opposed to other addictions and so on, so ask me that question again on day five, so tomorrow after the lunch break or at lunch break it will be a more useful question to ask. Okay does that help? You’re welcome. Any other comments, questions, praise, standing ovations at this point? No. So we get the idea of Mind Bending Language we get the purpose, we get the principles and right now if you think about actually doing an exercise where you have to use Mind Bending Language therapeutically I suspect at least one person is going to feel a little bit nervous about it especially given what you’ve seen. Would that be fair to say? All:

Sure.

Igor: So the first thought I would encourage you to consider is, stop it. Stop thinking. You are making more out of this than you need to.

MBL Exercise 1

Igor: What we are going to do in a moment is this I’m going to ask you to find a partner, a different partner, I’m going to ask that partner to have a small simple problem and the nature of the problem, feel free to check with me or one of the assistants if it’s the right kind of problem for this. For purpose the nature of the problem should be something that has a clearly identifiable feeling behind it, for example using Renee’s example I feel pressure and that makes me want to smoke. That was the original equation, do you remember that. It took me a while to get to it so if you don’t – aren’t aware of what that equation is yet then don’t use that as a problem.

103 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Can you all think of a simple problem which is along the lines of I feel X as a result of which something else happens or maybe just the feeling itself is no good, right? I feel bad when my boss yells at me and then I cry or I can’t answer back or I stop being as smart or whatever. I feel anxious before an exam so I don’t perform as well, right, or maybe even like I know this is really far out there, when I think about doing an exam, like a certification that I don’t know much about, I feel nervous and I don’t know what to do, right? I know its way out there, no one here feels like that, but you are getting the kind of idea of the equation I’m talking about, right? I feel this way as a result of which there is an unpleasant consequence. Put your hand up if you don’t have an idea like that yet. Okay if you guys don’t think of something like that in a moment feel free to come up and I will help you find something like that and you can work with each other. I feel bad that I have no problems. So you get the idea in terms of the kind of problem we want, right? We don’t anything complex nothing like I want to lose weight that’s a goal, right? Unless you can put it in the terms of I feel bad and then I eat the wrong things that’s fine, but saying I want to lose weight that’s a very different thing. You can get to the same point, but it requires a little more effort than we want to be doing at this point in the training is this very clear to everyone? All:

Yes.

Igor: If there is any doubt, please feel free to come up and ask me and I will help you find the right kind of problem of the purpose of this. Now let’s go back to here now if turn to page 51 in your manuals. My God the manuals, you don’t have to use the page. I’ll give you a slide that will give you the same kind of information you will essentially have this information there just produced with more space so you can you can see more clearly. Q:

What if you don’t get the manual?

Igor: Then partner with some who does, simple, right? You can always borrow mine if you want to borrow it for now or you just look at the board because really the same information will be here. It’s just this way you can have something with you. Now don’t worry about the manual for now you will see that basically those

104 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 questions are exactly the questions that are up here which is exactly what we did a moment ago would that be fair to say? Yes. Q:

Yes.

Igor: So whether you use this or the manual I don’t mind. So you are going to go through the same process, only this time with a real problem. The only thing is you are not going to have to resolve anything, the only thing you have to be curious about is this, you’re going to ask them about the problem and they’ll do a data dump on you. So you’ll have to stop them and ask where and when specifically has it happened. How do you feel? When you get that magic formula I feel X when and that gets me this result that I don’t want, right, then pause what am I doing? That’s right and when you have it, ask them the mind bending question about that problem, or rather, aside from the problem, help them go beyond it into what they weren’t, right, then pause and watch because the show is not in your notes, the show is not in your manuals, the show is not even in yourself, the show is right in front of you and your client so what’s the show? Exactly, watch it right in front of you and as you clients show starts doing stuff initially you may not know what you’re watching. What’s this movie you’re watching here? Ask them what’s happening now? That’s it. At that point they will say one of three things and I’m pretty sure that an instinct will kick in at that point. Can you all ask about a problem yes or no? Q:

Yes.

Igor: Can you all get a specific time and place yes or no? Q:

Yes.

Igor: Can you all ask the question with some mind bending ideas thrown into it, yes or no? All:

Yes.

Igor: Can you all watch a show?

105 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

Yes.

Igor: In that case you can all do this exercise can’t you? Q:

Yes.

Igor: Find a partner off you go. And keep going once you’ve done that. How many of you find this easy? Perfect, beautiful. How many found it hard still a little bit? Yes well that’s fine, I understand, it’s good.

MBL Exercise 2

Igor: I’m going to ask you do one more exercise before we go to lunch break and it’s going to make everything really simple for you. Is that okay with you guys? Q:

Yes.

Igor: Especially you guys who’ve had a little harder time with this. In a moment I’m going to ask you to find a different partner, right? A new partner. If you are planning to do this in a different language like Korean or Spanish and so on please make sure they speak that language also. You are going to start a conversation with them about whatever problem they have and at some point in that conversation I would like for you to turn on this idea of H+. So you are talking about the problem, what’s the problem? Oh it’s this. Oh it’s that okay and what's this and when does it happen, where does it happen? And at some point you going to switch on your H+ and you are going to carry on a regular conversation, but you will only say those things that continue to enhance your H+. You will only say them in a way that continues to increase your H+. Aside from that, you have nothing to think about, no goal to achieve other than can you have a conversation with that person? Somehow loosely related to that problem, whilst you are in H+ and just notice what happens, can we do this? ALL:

Yes.

106 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: Please find a different partner you’re going to go both ways so begin now. Okay guys how did that go? ALL:

Good.

Igor: Was it smooth or easier to do than before? ALL:

Yes.

Igor: Did you stop trying so hard yes? ALL:

Yes.

Igor: What happened when you stopped trying so hard, did it get more interesting? ALL:

Yes.

Igor: Who got a more potent reaction shall we say from their client when they stopped trying so hard and just had a really engaged conversation, anyone? Who found that things like Mind Bending Language with a little bit of the Non Awareness Set would slip out without you realizing it and it just came out because it was appropriate, anyone? It’s exactly what happens to everyone because the only thing at this point that you have to focus on is having a genuine conversation with someone with a real desire to somehow, somewhere help them change and you do not need to have any idea of how to do that. The patterns already exist for you, you’ve experienced it haven’t you? The only thing you need is a genuine desire to help the person, that H+ and enough faith in what you have learned that you can trust your unconscious and just start talking, just start talking. Have a chat. Have a heartfelt chat, a heartfelt conversation. If you do those things you cannot help yourself. You will do Mind Bending Language. You will do the Non Awareness Set. How could you not? Because it is inside you already, the experience is there and this is where you start getting to real Conversational Hypnosis where you just sit down and you have a chat, a conversation and maybe somewhere in the far distance at the back of your mind, you have this idea of some kind of pattern, a loop that you want to take them through, but that’s just enough to keep you steered in some place.

107 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 You are just focused entirely on the person and you’re watching their reaction and you’re wondering what’s going to happen next and your probably asking it a few times as well, especially when you see something significant changing, you want to know what that is don’t you? It doesn’t matter what it is, good, bad or ugly. It makes no difference does it? Doesn’t this take a tremendous amount of pressure off of you? No? Now admittedly there are many things you can do to refine this process. You can expand your mind bending power word vocabulary. You can drill and these things and get more fluent with it, you can do these things just like you can do with normal power words. You can get used to these kind of questions and do a little exercise just for that, but those are exercises, those are training wheels. When a person goes to see a physiotherapist and does the leg exercises, is it so that they can sit all day in the office or in the home lifting their leg like this? No. It’s so that they can get on with their regular life, having fixed whatever their body needs to have fixed so they can get on with their regular life. You’ve done the drills, you’ve done the exercises. You can do more of them. We’ll talk after the break about how to get really good at them, I promise you this, but for now give yourself a nice a pat on the back for having a regular conversation and allowing it to transform just because you wanted it to. You wanted to have something happen and you don’t know when it’s going to happen. You don’t know where it’s going to happen but you do know that provided you keep speaking to this person long enough in that state of H+ things will start slipping out of you. It’s the Freudian slip you want to have happen, right? It will slip out of you and when it does, well, you’ll just have to – you can’t fail to spot it because it’s there, because you are watching the person and it’s because it’s right in line with what you are trying to achieve for them, does that kind of make sense for you guys? All:

Yes.

Igor: Forget all the rules, do you start with the problem or not? It doesn’t matter to much, yes cleanly speaking that’s how it starts and it’s good to have that as a process in your mind, but what if you’re thrown in the middle of it, you deal with

108 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 the middle of it, right, what if they give me all this stuff? No big deal you keep talking until you have something that you can lock onto and then you deal with it, everything is possible provided you are willing to have a heartfelt conversation with intensity and you’re willing to keep talking with them, interacting long enough for that something to slip out, does that make sense to you guys? Q:

Yes.

Igor: Any comments or questions on what you’ve done. Can we have assistants with mics please. Please stand up so we can see you guys. Q:

I thought I was using H+ but I was looking up at the words and Jeremy was nice enough to tell me that he didn’t feel that I was being sincere in his analytic mind and was kind of drifting off and he was doubting what I was saying, like my sincerity.

Igor: Right. Q:

So then the second time I didn’t worry about that and Jeremy just had that heartfelt conversation and it went way better, right?

Q:

I didn’t notice it.

Igor: You didn’t even notice what she was doing it just felt good, right? Q:

Yeah.

Igor: This is how it works. We get so sucked into the language and the patterns and all the rest of it. Did I not warn you about this in the first day? The words are useless folks, useless, unless you get something that they are channeling for you. The mind set shall we say that you are communicating with them. So why bother with the words, if you want the words to be there then do exercises on them, drill them just like you know like you do warm up scales on a musical instrument, any musicians in the room? Would you ever do a live performance in front of a big crowd of people of scales? Not really right, that is not the purpose of scales, scales is to get yourself fluent with stuff. So can play the music you want to play. These words are scales, these questions are the scales, when it’s time to do the work, these go out of the window, you have practiced them before you have a

109 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 come to it and the only thing that’s left is you speak, you have a conversation, a heartfelt conversation, right? And then that’s when it all comes out, all the hard work, all the training you’ve put yourself through will come out, at that point and let’s face it, it’s already happening now isn’t it? You just have to put yourself in the context and you have to be willing, this is not a very traditional form of training is it? You must do it my way, you must follow my rules you must follow my steps and I appreciate that some of you feel more comfortable having precise steps and having a precise order that you must follow. If it helps you by all means do so. Just realize that you will only come into your own, you will become a powerful hypnotist, a great hypnotist at the point at which you’ll allow all that to recede into the background and you just have a genuine heartfelt conversation and trust that everything else will flow through as a result of that. Does that make sense to everyone? So thanks so much Renee, that’s a perfect example of exactly what we are talking about, you have really experienced it haven’t you? Q:

Yes.

Igor: Any other questions or comments? Fantastic. So before we go for lunch break there is a couple items and stuff like that. First of all Renee these are yours, would you like them back? Someone left their cigarettes in the bathroom, but if you want them you can have them. Are you sure? Q:

Yes.

Igor: Free just one little cigarette taste so good. Q:

I will take a deep breath.

Igor: Are you sure? Q:

Yes.

Igor: There so good. You’re having lunch now you want to smoke with lunch, it makes it taste so much better no? Join me outside for a cigarette maybe. Q:

I don’t smoke.

110 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

I’ll take them.

Igor: So if anyone is in a position that Renee is not and they left their cigarettes in the back of the room please come up and collect them and you can have those. Aside from that guys you did a fantastic job so far, it is now, give yourselves a round of applause. It’s now 12:45pm lets be back here again at 1:45pm and we start at 2:00pm on the dot. I think everyone should put their pens and papers down for a moment and if you really want to get the best out of the rest of this session I’m going to ask you stand up and do an Instant Induction on the person next to you. Literary 20 seconds let them do it to you in return and then come back and sit down. Spend no more than 10 seconds on it did that clear a few cob webs again yes? Good.

How To Master MBL

Igor: What I’d like to talk about now a little bit is how do you get good at all this stuff, would it be fair to say that you know the Mind Bending Language when it works, it works great, but sometimes you kind of fall out of synch with it and its like oh my God what do I do now? You get that sort of oscillation process going on everyone has had it at some point, right? All:

Yes.

Igor: So would you like to know a simple process to get really good at Mind Bending Language? All:

Yes.

Igor: Guaranteed. All:

Yes.

Igor: Believe it or not, Mind Bending Language is something you’ve been doing since day two, it just had not been obvious. In terms of the key maneuvers, think about the Dynamic Mental Imagery Induction. Didn’t you have similar loops running

111 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 through in those? They are much simpler admittedly, but there are similar loops weren’t there? When you had the symbol, you just say find a symbol and you just wait. When they have a symbol you have to echo it. You have to reflect it, you have to wallow back on to it, there is a loop constantly riding and all the things you are doing have parallel’s with the Mind Bending Language. When they have a problem you are still circling around that problem it’s just using Mind Bending Language to do more with it at the same time. So the basic structure is the same, it’s just that Mind Bending Language works primarily and I say primarily because remember you can achieve any result with any tool provided you have the right principles in place. So whereas Mind Bending Language primarily focuses on the level of thoughts, ideas, beliefs, the Dynamic Induction works primarily on the level of symbolism doesn’t it? It’s a lot easier to control, to maneuver through that because well the symbols are more obvious, we can see it happening more obviously and there is a little less for you to do within it. Do you see what I mean? Does that kind of follow your experience a little bit? Where did things evolve from that? The Non Awareness Set. So DMI is a Dynamic Mental Imagery Induction, DNAS is the Non Awareness Set and wasn’t the Non Awareness Set really kind of like the Dynamic Mental Imagery Induction, it’s just we are letting go of the symbolism and now we are letting physical experience be more of that symbolism. It also added another little nuance to the step didn’t it? We added more implications to it now, a little bit more suggestion has been packed into it than we had at the level of the Dynamic Induction, we still had implications there didn’t we? We still had suggestions there it’s just that they were not quite as elaborate as in the Non Awareness Set, would that be fair to say? Q:

Yes. 1. DMI – Dynamic Mental Imagery 2. NAS – Non Awareness Set

112 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 3. MBL – Mind Bending Language Igor: Yes. And of course finally we ended with Mind Bending Language. Believe it or not this are three virtually identical processes. They just function at slightly different levels. So there is absolutely no requirement for you to master Mind Bending Language right now. If all you do is a Dynamic Induction it works, it doesn’t matter, it does the same thing. You’re actually training the same mechanisms it’s just looks different. It’s more stable because all the steps you’ve put into it allows you to just isolate things a little bit more along the way, right? Now here is what is going to happen to you and I can pretty much guarantee this, provided you do the Dynamic Induction often and you ask that magic question which is? All:

How do you feel?

Igor: How do you feel? What is happening now, right? Eventually you’ll get to the point where you think you know I like this Dynamic Induction, cool stuff happens and it’s a little different each time, but you know I need a little more challenge. I want to do something a little bit more, you know. Do you know what you do at that point? You drop the symbolism and you go to the Non Awareness Set because the Non Awareness Set is the same exact thing with just a little few extra bits and pieces thrown in. Think of it this way, what is a sensation if not a symbol immediately recognized as one, right? So then you start playing with the Non Awareness Set and you will be in love with it for a while. It’s like, I could do anything with this, right? If all you have is a hammer everything starts looking like a nail, right? And you’ll have fun with it and I encourage you to do it because it’s a fantastic process, I love it. I by the way I did not discover it, I did not invent a Non Awareness Set. I had the lucky accident of seeing two great Ericksonian hypnotists both of whom studied with Erickson do this and unfortunately they didn’t realize they were doing it. So they didn’t teach it. So they were teaching a completely different thing and when they do the demo they’re doing this thing, round and round and I was thinking this is genius, but they wouldn’t teach it. So I thought fine, if you won’t teach it, I will.

113 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 So you start doing the Non Awareness Set and you start playing with it and you start filtering it into other things as well, because you see how easy it is to filter it in, right? What’s happening now? I don’t know. It’s just begging for it isn’t it? That’s right you really don’t know, what’s happening here? How do you feel? I feel good, but I don’t know why, that’s right, you really don’t know why. Do you see where we are going with this? You can filter it in to little portions of a regular induction process or you make it your whole induction process, it doesn’t matter because now you’re getting more used to the language. Now that we have elevated ourselves away from this symbolism, you get to focus more on the language, the clean thing. Now eventually as you start getting so good at the Non Awareness Set you’ll actually find yourself doing Mind Bending Language without realizing it because really they are the same thing. Mind Bending Language just has less structure around it so it is less contained, therefore giving you more possibilities but you can also be distracted by it more. You can go into more random directions with it. That’s fine because the other processes are more constrained for you hence allowing for more training wheels. So whether you start up here (DMI) or you move here (NAS), what’s going on here, or you end up here (MBL) it really doesn’t matter because you’re doing the same thing it’s just a slightly different scale at which your doing it. Does that make sense to you guys? So this is really the transition you’re going to be going through. Some of you have made the transition already, you understood each step of the way, so it’s kind of natural and you’re going like, why is he making this point because it’s obvious, I can do all of them and it’s no big deal. That’s fine. Some of you will be okay up to the Non Awareness Set, but then the Mind Bending Language is like yeah my mind is still stretching around to try and grasp all this. And that’s fine, and some of you are thinking like, Non Awareness Set give me a break. I can handle the Dynamic Induction, but the others are still a little more challenging for me, and again that is just fine, why, because they are training mechanisms to prepare you for the next level at each step? Now that you’ve seen all three levels, now you’ve done them at some point, you have shall we say the road map, you have your point A and you have your point

114 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 B. Every single time you do a Dynamic Induction now from this point forward, you can’t help but become increasingly mind bending during it because those parameters are set up now, I’m sorry folks that’s just how it works, you’ll get good at Mind Bending Language without ever trying to. I know. So does this make your journey a little bit easier? Because it takes the pressure off you, you don’t have to be great at it yet, this is an environment in which I have to move you along as quickly as possible, because let’s face it, there are very few people who have the time and the money to be able to come for three weeks, four weeks and sit down and do this step by step and drill each step until its totally automatic, right? It’s a great way to do it, but unfortunately that’s not how the world works right now. So what my job is, is to prepare you and I’ll give you the tools to go home and then it’s your show. You can run with it and you will know where it leads or you cannot and that’s again the choice that you make. I can’t make that for you. Does this make sense as a protocol? Any questions about it? Okay.

115 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2

DVD 15 – Hypnotic Regression Training & The “Days Of Wonder” Demonstration

Hypnotic Memory

Igor: So now onto something completely different, that’s what Monty Python liked to say. Let’s have a little talk about memory shall we? All:

Yes.

Igor: We all know what a memory is, we all have recollections don’t we? And you of course all realize that hypnosis can allow you to augment your memory in different ways. As far as hypnosis is concerned there are three different levels of intensity I would like to invite you to think about when it comes to memory and this is specifically oh you know what, let’s get some other things here…this is specifically in relation to hypnosis as a method for using memory, right? So whatever your regular memory is that’s fine. Three Types of Hypnotic Memory 1. Hypermnesia Then we have something called hypermnesia. Hypermnesia is basically the ability to recall something particularly clearly, better than you’d normally recall it when you have your normal memory process active. This is classically the level at which something like forensic hypnosis would work, right, and depending on what country you’re in, or some countries will allow forensic hypnosis in terms of legal cases some won’t. It doesn’t matter, the point is this is primarily the level that they will engage in for that. It’s just getting more information.

116 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 2. Revivification The next step is revivification. You’ve all done a revivification haven’t you? Brought an experience back to life, so the difference between hypermnesia and revivification is that in revivification, you are not so concerned about the content, the information in the memory, but the experience of it. They get to relive it to some degree. 3. Regression Finally we have a regression. And what is a regression? A regression is when you are so in that experience of the past that you literally forget there is any future after – that came afterwards for that moment in time. They are in that moment in time completely and this form of reality has disappeared for a while. Does it make sense? Q:

Can you explain that with an example.

Igor: Sure let me put it this way to you, it makes a little easier. In the classical text on hypnosis, if you go reading around the subject, which I encourage you to do by the way, they will present these three topics, these three ideas as being separate phenomenon in hypnosis. They are different things because of the experience of them. However, I’m going to encourage you to think of it as a continuum. You start off with regular memory up here somewhere. When you intensify regular memory it becomes very clear, but you don’t necessarily feel anything about it, right? You just know it happened, but there is not necessarily an emotion attached. So at that point you get to hypermnesia. When you start becoming more and more involved in that very clear memory it begins to come to life more and more for you. You start feeling things. You start dropping yourself in it. You know like when you have one of these really intense day dreams where you go back to some time and you are really reliving it. That’s a classic revivification. Now if the person is so consumed by that re-experiencing of the memory that they begin to forget where they are currently physically, how old they are currently physically and all the history that they have experienced after that particular memory, so they feel as old, act as old, think as old as that memory

117 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 was. Now you have a classic regression. See how that works. So the classic regression you’ll see people talking like a child. You will have them moving and behaving like a child, if it’s of course a childhood, because that’s where – that’s the intensity with which they have revivified that particular experience, that particular memory. Make sense now? Has that helped a little bit more? Q:

Oh yeah very much so.

Igor: Okay, now bear in mind that in the classic literature they will not say this. They will say this is a different phenomenon. Now you have all probably heard about the idea of doing regression work as the hypnotherapist, yes? Once again a lot of schools when they do the regression hypnotherapy will tell you that you need to have a regression, it’s got to be a proper regression and so on, but when they actually demonstrate their regression work, do you know what they are primarily are demonstrating? A revivification. As far as therapeutic work goes, all you need is something from revivification onwards. A mild revivification is enough and that make sense doesn’t it. Think about the PCAT Formula, what's the first step? The parameters, the problem, you have to activate the neural network don’t you? In hypermnesia it’s not really active. You have access to the information but you are not really feeling anything there. Do you see how that works? That’s why it’s like looking through the window at the room with a problem in it, but if you throw paint at the window, does it stick to any part of the room? No, on a revivification on the other hand, you get to pop your head through the door and look around. Now you can start splashing paint around. In a regression you not only enter the room, but you close and lock the door and bar the windows, now you are in the room and of course the same applies there, you throw the paint around in here, it still sticks to the right places. Do you see how that works? Makes your life tremendously easier because getting a revivification is quite easy isn’t it? You have pretty much all done it haven’t you? And I will show in time how to set up your therapy practice so that if ever you have to do a regression it will be so easy to do, I mean so easy to do, it will actually be harder to keep the client out of the regression than to put them into it. Would you like to know how to do that?

118 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 All:

Yes.

Igor: Better stick around. So do you understand this idea in terms of how memory works in general as processes yes?

Regression Training 1

Igor: So what I want you to do now is I’d like you to find a partner and do a simple sort of exercise, so just find a partner and then quietly face this way so we can actually do the exercise. Off you go. Alright guys so the next few steps we are going to go through are going to be real easy. We’ll do a few of them, we’ll have a break and we’ll come back and we’ll do some more is that okay with you guys? All:

Sure.

Igor: This is going to be ridiculously easy at this point, so please enjoy it and do whatever you want with it. The only thing I’m looking for in the next point is the H+ and your attention as a hypnotist is that clear? The rest is you do as much language or as little language as you want no big deal. So the first experiment I want you to run is to ask your client to find some sensation in the body and notice how ambiguous I am about that – whole permissive there is no real right or wrong right? If they say there’s nothing well then they’ve got bigger problems right, some sensation any sensation? When they tell you that sensation let’s say oh my stomach feels comfortable, then your only job is to put attention on that. So your stomach is comfortable isn’t it? That’s right it’s comfortable. Put your attention on that comfortable stomach and notice what happens. So you are going to constantly loop their attention back on to that sensation hypnotically speaking and see what happens. I think we can predict what's that going to be, but we may as well just do it and get the experience as well. Is that easy to do? Really easy to do?

119 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 All:

Yes.

Igor: So just spend literally one minute a piece and then we’ll come back off you go. Was that easy? All:

Yes.

Igor: Right at this point this is really a no brainer type stuff isn’t it? So what do you find when they got a sensation, you put their attention on it, what tended to happen? All:

It magnified.

Igor: It magnified. Where attention goes energy flows. At this point this is not particularly difficult or surprising is it? Can we have a microphone over here please just stand up so we can help find you with a mic. Q:

Yeah I felt uncomfortable doing it with her because when I asked her to find a spot that was different on her body she said it was a tension and then I felt bad because felt like I was increasing the tension.

Igor: Was it a massive increase in tension? So for the moment you did the exercise and rest assured we’ll fix exactly that for the moment. For the moment though we’ve got the general idea, right? Just stand up so we can get the mic to you. Just stand right up there and that’s fine I understand the mindset you have. That’s a good mindset and we’ll look at exactly how to deal with that in a moment, right now we are just looking for very simple things, right? Q:

So I had a similar issue with my partner he actually had a pain in his back and I was worried about bringing attention to that and making it grow.

Igor: Perfect so what do you do instead? Q:

We talked about it but I didn’t emphasis it as much as I would.

Igor: Fine excellent, lets pass it on again. Stand up again, just click it up there you go. Q:

I did the same thing I suggested the sensation and she said her tail bone hurt and then I went ahead and echoed it and it went away.

120 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: Now thank you for bringing that up. Why did it go away? If attention goes – if energy flows where attention goes, why would comfortable sensations increase and uncomfortable sensations decrease? Any ideas? H+, there is two things. One will cover more when we get around to the whole pain control thing, which is the idea that what you resist will persist, people resist pain. When they pay attention to it without resisting it, it no longer needs persisting, the message comes across. We’ll cover more of that if and when we have time for it. The other reason is your H+ is a suggestion folks. Attention is not just going to the sensation. It’s going to the sensation mingled with your attitude. And your attitude is for pleasant things to occur isn’t it, even if you are not saying it hence the H+, plus the question. Does that help you guys a little bit more? So thank you guys for having the experience so well because that’s kind of where we are coming on anyways, but that is what tends to happen. Was there another question over here? Can you just stand up so we can get the mic to you? Can we get a mic from this side please? Q:

Okay what was interesting with us was it was a reverse.

Igor: Right? Q:

We focused on a comfortable part of the body.

Igor: Fine. Q:

And it increased and then all of a sudden I had pain in a different part of my body.

Igor: Interesting, but the comfortable sensation still increased, right? Q:

Yeah.

Igor: Perfect you are in the right place. So this is a very simple level now, right? The next step I want you to do right now is number one, I’d like you just to practice the whole trance thing, I’d like you to induce a trance in under 10 seconds. It could be like an instant induction. It could be close your eyes and go into a trance. It could be blah sleep whatever you want. I don’t care. The point is I want you to start behaving more hypnotically shall we say. Makes sense? Your H+ is of

121 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 course the main part of the trance induction but it may as well create a formal step in the process too. The second thing I want you to do is this time instead of just asking for a random sensation whatever arises, I would like you to ask them to find a positive emotion. Not necessarily a feeling, but a positive emotion. Is comfort an emotion? Maybe, maybe not, it’s depends on the individual. Is happiness an emotion? All:

Yes.

Igor: Absolutely. Do you understand the difference between a feeling or a sensation and an emotion? Do you know what the difference is primarily? An emotion is a sensation with a thought attached to it. This is good, this is bad, right? For example you may have known this in terms of neuro chemistry, fear and excitement, are virtually indistinguishable, the difference is what the mind does with the sensation. With fear it resists, so it becomes more frightening. With excitement it accepts so it becomes more positive. So I want you to ask them to just close their eyes go into a trance and allow a positive emotion to arise, a positive emotion. Once you find a clear, unambiguously positive emotion reflect it back, echo it, build it up and notice, did it grow? Now let me make something abundantly clear here because at some point or another one or two of you may miss this. So please this is extra attention, right, on this one here. It is an unambiguously, absolutely, without a shadow of a doubt, only positive emotion. If it’s like I’m kind of happy, but a little sad. That is not an unambiguously positive, totally only positive emotion is it? It’s kind of like melancholic kind of like a happy sadness. That is not a totally and ambiguously, right? So what would you do if they come up with something with this positive, but has maybe some other stuff attached to it too, that you are not too sure of. Right, you say, oh great thing that you found that, but it’s not that. Keep searching until an unambiguously, completely positive emotion arises. It could be happiness, it could be excitement, it could be well being, it could be at peace. Doesn’t matter

122 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 what it is, but there will be no shadow of a doubt that it is only positive and that’s the only part of the experience that is there. Am I making myself abundantly clear on this one? All:

Yes.

Igor: Do you think that this might be of an importance in the steps that we are building up here yes? All:

Yes.

Igor: You’d be right? So take a couple of minutes longer this time with the same partner finding a positive emotion and letting it grow, off you go. Each of you gets to have a go. Okay guys, so how are you doing with that? Was it fun? Who enjoyed that? Excellent. Who noticed a clear and unambiguously positive, totally, only positive emotion arising? Who enjoyed feeling it grow? Did anyone have something other than that, something that might have been more ambiguous, something mixed or tainted with something else? No. One or two. What did you guys do at this case? Q:

I kept working on trying to find it.

Igor: Perfect so they kept working trying to find something else to let that one disappear, or at the very worst, based on the stuff we are doing right now you say, great lets end the experience at this point because that portion of the exercise is contained. I’m very happy for you to do that, seriously, I really am because where we are going today you will adore and it must be through the doorway of an unambiguously positive emotion, right? You will be doing absolutely the right thing as we continue after the break. If the person doesn’t find an unambiguously positive thing then the rest does not follow at that point and I will show you how to work with that anyways at some other time, but it’s not for this point right now. Does that make sense? If that should occur to you bring them out of trance and then talk through the rest of it like a role play, as though you were doing it but don’t do it for real with that person does that make sense? So we’ll still have the practice of doing the

123 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 steps which is really the important part, without shall we say making do with something that really won’t, right? Exactly huh what? Alright folks any other quick comments or questions before we go through a break. I think you’ve all deserved a nice break. Let’s take a slightly longer break because I think we all need a bit of fresh air. I recommend you go and get some air into your lungs and so on let’s say 20 minutes, but please try and be back early again because I have got some very exciting things to do with you in the evening and I would like to make sure we get them done.

Intention v Behavior

Igor: Before the break we started playing a little bit with some revivification and did you all experience the emotions starting to arise and it’s kind of pleasant and its fun, its wow, this is great stuff, right? Before we carry on down that path I’d like to have a little chat about something which is of great importance to our work as hypnotherapists. It’s a fundamental understanding. It’s a point of view that no one can prove or disprove, however, in my experience if you adopt this point of view and I certainly have, it makes your life as a hypnotherapist infinitely easier than not. It is your choice, whether or not you accept it. It’s entirely your choice, but I want to present you the frame of reference I use and why I use it so that you can adopt it or not as you wish. Does it make sense? All:

Yes. • Behavior v Intention

Igor: Alright? There is a difference between what people do and what they try to achieve by doing that thing. So there is a difference between how people behave and the intention, the purpose for that behavior, what they are trying to achieve through that behavior. For example little Jonny is five years old goes to a new school, he walks up to some kid, says hi and they are mean to him. Happens again the next day, he somehow falls into this unpleasant rut where he is the kid that everyone picks on. So after a few weeks, maybe a few months of this what does

124 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 he do when he goes to school? He walks in and is mean back first, before they are mean to him. You can see that happening, right? Little Johnny grows up he leaves school, he grows up, he grows older and then when he gets into his older years he is this unfortunately bitter old man who is sitting or walking around play grounds shouting at kids. Is he a bad person? You can clearly see what he is doing is trying to protect himself. He is running an old pattern that he has never managed to master. He doesn’t need to be mean to kids any more does he? He doesn’t need to protect himself from that anymore. His behavior has become useless or pointless at this stage. However the intention he is trying to do to protect himself emotionally from harm that’s a good thing isn’t it? Whilst at the same time his behavior, being mean to kids, that’s not a good thing is it? You see how that works? So the belief or the point of view that I happen to have and you are welcome to share or not, is aside from some shall we say issues where their biology in a case where there is brain damage or something like that, in the average person shall we say every behavior is motivated by a positive intention. No matter how bad the behavior is the intention is always a positive good thing, something you would approve of, something that is respectable. The behavior however may be atrocious, do you see where I’m going with this? Now let me give you some hard examples of this. Would we all overall think that I don’t know, that Hitler and his holocaust the behavior was it a good thing or a bad thing? All:

Bad.

Igor: Are you sure there is not that many people speaking right now. Good thing or bad thing? All:

Bad.

Igor: Right, it’s pretty awful, right? So the behavior is to be condemned. What kind of positive intensions could he have had, we’ll never know of course because he is not around, but what might he have been trying to achieve that is positive, although his means of trying to do it are really not the best ways of getting there. Q:

To improve the economic state of the nation.

125 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: To improve the economic state of the nation. Germany was in ruins. Is it a good or bad thing to give the whole nation hope? All:

Good.

Igor: It’s a good thing, right? The means was bad, but the intention is a good one isn’t it? What else might he have intended? Q:

Unification of the people.

Igor: To unify people is that a bad thing or a good thing? Give people their self respect back. Is that a good thing or a bad thing? All:

It’s good.

Igor: It’s a good thing. Once again the means was bad. The behavior was reprehensible but not necessarily the intention, as far as we can hallucinate that. Is this kind of making sense? Every behavior someone engages in will have some kind of positive intention, something that person needs, that is good for that person and the irony is this, most negative behaviors like that don’t actually serve that intention. They are actually inadequate for reaching that outcome. That’s why they are stuck in a compulsion with it. But here is the problem, what happens when you say to someone, you need to stop doing that. What if you go to the old man, you know old Jonny now in the playground telling off young kids and someone comes up to him and he says, you have to stop talking to kids like that it’s not, right? What is he hearing? Q:

He is not going to stop.

Igor: You have to stop protecting yourself, that’s not right, because to him it’s the same thing. At least the way the unconscious mind is reasoning at that point. Do you see where I’m going with this? That’s why he’ll resist it, because to the extent you try and change the behavior only and you are not taking care of whatever the behavior is trying to achieve, well there is a void there. However, what if you were to walk up to Johnny’s unconscious, the one that is running this whole thing and you managed to get into a dialogue and show Johnny unconscious mind that if he behaved in a different way, he was nice to

126 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 kids, not only would he protect himself from them being mean back, but actually his reward would go far beyond that. What do you think the chances are that if the unconscious mind accepted the idea that his behavior would change? Q:

100%.

Igor: Pretty certain, right, because we’ll all do the things that will get us the best result to the extent that we know, right? So we need to be able to separate this idea of how people behave from what they are trying to achieve by it. Once you can get passed the behavior and look at their intentions, you gain the power to transform the behaviors very easily, because the intention is satisfied. Would you like me to give you a very personal example that you’ve experienced in here all ready yes? When Renee came up here for the stop smoking, would you say that she saw the behavior smoking was good or bad? All:

Bad.

Igor: Yet she was stuck in the loop why, because it was doing something for her. The intention was to help her to de-stress at the end of a stressful period, right? Was it doing a good job of it? All:

No.

Igor: Adequate, but not necessarily good, but whilst the unconscious mind was hanging on to the idea that this is only way that I can have some peace after all this stuff has happened, is there any wonder there is a compulsion for a cigarette, right? So what happened during the whole mind-bending procedure? Wouldn’t be fair to say we found the intention to relax. She found a better way of getting it and now there is a better behavior in place. Something that serves the intention more directly, more fully than the old behavior did. Now how could the old behavior exist anymore when something better has come in its place? People are fundamentally not irrational. There is always a logic to what they are doing, even if we can’t necessarily see it upfront in terms of their behavior or even how they are verbalizing and talking about things.

127 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 So this idea of behavior versus intention does that make sense to you guys? Can you see it kind of in action in your own lives, the people you have met and so on, things like that, yeah? So once again this gives you hopefully another facet of the general idea, the general saying that what you resist will persist and what you accept you gain the power to transform, because what people resist is this, they are resisting so I will not smoke now, that is will power stopping us smoking, right? I will not smoke. They are resisting the behavior. How well does that work? It doesn’t work at all does it? It will persist because the intention has not been satisfied, but when you – but what you accept you gain the power to transform because when you accept all this you are also accepting this and this is what transforms that. Do you see how that works? (Intention transforms Behavior) It’s true in our own personal lives how we deal with ourselves and its true of other people. Of course I can sit up here and pontificate, oh look how cleaver I am. I get stuck in exactly the same loops as everyone else does. I’m no special guru in the mountain, but I can tell you that as therapist this makes your life a heck of a lot easier, because when people come in complaining of a behavior as soon as you find the intention behind that, your ability to change the behavior, it’s easy. Does that make sense? Does this make sense to you guys? All:

Yes.

Igor: Yeah okay.

Regression Training 2

Igor: So let’s do an exercise again. Before the break you all had a partner you talked to you partner and you had them bring to life a happy or a very pleasant positive emotion is that correct? You then put attention on that, H+ the special kind of hypnotic attention shall we call it and in doing so it tended to grow did it not yes? Overall was it positive experience or a negative one? All:

Positive.

128 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: Very good I’m glad there is no doubt in this one. What I would like you to do in a moment is find a different partner and I’d like you to do the same thing again only this time what we will be doing is this, you got them – just talking to them you get into a little bit of a trance. You are getting a small emotion to arise – we are getting a small emotion to arise and as you focus on it, it becomes a nice large emotion, right? That’s kind of what you’ve had so far, but you have to first drop them into it in order for that to happen. Now what if you said to them I’m going to count from three down to one or whatever signal you want to give, a simple count is easy. At the count of one you will go to an earlier time where you felt exactly this and only this, exactly this and only this same emotion. Then you count to three two one and you ask your classic revivification questions, your orientation questions which were things like what do you see? What do you sense? Do you remember in the Dynamic Induction how you made that place come to life a little bit, without putting your fish in their dreams, right? What do you see? What do you sense? Are you inside or are you outside? Why are we giving a binary choice like this? Because if I said are you inside well I wasn’t, but you know what, I will be now. Q:

It’s a suggestion.

Igor: Exactly it becomes a suggestion. If I give a binary choice with equal emphasis on both words, they get to choose now, they get to tell you what's happening, you are minimizing the risk that you are accidentally inducing it. When we are working with memories, there is something called False Memory Syndrome. Anyone heard of that term before? This is a terrible thing that happened, was rampant in the 90s and it’s still very controversial, where a whole bunch of families here in America and the UK and I think in Europe in general as well, it’s a weird the way they swept the globe, where social workers were a little over keen and started finding sexual abuse and abuse in children in places where they really didn’t exist. What they were doing is this, little Johnny comes in to the social workers office and the social worker says, so little Johnny what happened. Well uncle Johnny came home and then played with me. What did he do? Well you know we were doing stuff and were… Did he touch you down there? What's the kid going to do

129 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 with that? Especially children who have no critical factor? They are going to start creating memories that didn’t exist. Do you see how cautious you have to be of this stuff? Now this is a crude example, but when you have interviewed – there are versions of brain-washing out there from cults and so on where they would literally interview people for hours on end doing this until new memories have arisen. It’s crazy. So be very, very careful you don’t accidentally implant something. Does that make sense to you guys? So binary choices allow them to tell you what's occurring. They have to be either inside or outside somewhere, don’t they? Another classic one is alone or with others. Someone will always be – you are always either on your own or with others, right? It maybe one other or it may be many others, but you are always either alone or with others. There is no other choice is their? Unless I know of some super state that’s kind of in between. • See/Sense • Inside/Outside • Alone/Others So do these ideas kind of make sense to you? So the idea is very simple. Get a positive emotion yea! Make it stronger yea! Count of three you are going to move back in time to a time when you felt exactly this way and only this way, notice the emphasis because I don’t want to go to anywhere else only this way. Are you ready to do that? Yes. Okay three two one go be there now. Where are you? Inside or outside? I’m kind of outside. Are you alone or with others? I’m alone. What do you see, what do you sense? Well I’m in park there are people playing football and so on and I’m just here on my own doing my own thing. How old are you or don’t you even know what that means yet? Because does a four year old know what age means, three year old, right, maybe, maybe not. So you give them the option. Make sense? I doubt they will be going far as back, they probably go like five years ago, 10 years ago, 20 years ago that sort of thing, it tends to be what happens but you never know. You don’t want to putting your fish in their dreams. Did I make sense?

130 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 All:

Yes.

Igor: Once you’ve had that just tell them to go ahead and enjoy the experience. Make sure that it is enjoyable. It is a purely, only, singularly positive emotional experience. Once they’ve enjoyed it, bring them back, literally, once you have hit this scene here and they have oriented to it once, they are here, you done. Bring them back, it’s their go they will do it for you, everyone has a great time. Everyone is happy-clappy yea we are having fun. Easy, any questions about that as a process? It’s really just adding one more step to what you have done before plus your regular orienting questions that you are familiar with from a few days ago. Please find a different partner and have fun with this. So what kind of experience did you have? Actually before we start talking about this, a good rule of thumb is check in with your partner if you can talk about whatever experiences you just had with each other is that okay? Just double check. Say, yes, yes and you will be fine or yes no and that’s fine. Okay so we have a hand up here and then one back there. Q:

So one thing I really appreciated is and I have noticed this a couple of other times today when I am completely H+ I like – I felt like I was there like with him in like part of that…

Igor: You are going to get sucked into their memory and you can kind of play with it too. Q:

Yeah totally and it was so lovely I was just really very easy just – again this would be my words, but like stepping over completely onto his map and being there with him it was very vivid and real for me as I listened to him. It was really lovely.

Igor: Beautiful. Did anyone else feel that as well? All:

Yes.

Igor: Fantastic. Q:

I’ve a lot of good trances this week already and what I noticed this time though something different happened when I was moving from you know the current

131 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 feeling to the second feeling, there was a deepening shift that everything stopped and I felt like I was moving. Igor: Right, and you felt like more sucked into the experience that was great. Q:

It was feeling like I was pulled into something.

Igor: Let me just pause you there. Anyone else experience this sort of thing yes? Hands up. So this is not uncommon. Would you like to know what that is? Q:

Yes.

Igor: Recall we start with a strong positive emotion, right? Now one of the key ways that we store memories is through emotions, it’s through all our senses, but the emotions are the strongest of all our senses. So they have the strongest memory trace shall we say. So the stronger the emotion is here the bigger this bridge it’s called an Affect Bridge. Affect is just a complex way of saying emotion. You can call it the bridge of hearts if you want, because that’s where your emotions lie. The stronger the emotion is here the bigger this bridge here becomes. That’s the feeling you had of being sucked into something because as you go backwards in time it’s actually not just taking you back in time its beginning to revivify and probably go into a partial regression at that point. That’s the amping up of the experience. Now those of you who felt that sort of rushing sensation that we were just talking about asked – may I ask you this? Did you feel as though you are losing more and more sense of what's going on around here and it was more and more like you were in that memory, like you forgot for while you were on ship, you forgot there was people around you. Even though they were all quite loudly talking around you wouldn’t that be fair to say? All:

Yes.

Igor: You are hitting the regression stage because you are now phasing out external reality and your internal reality is taking over, but you notice it’s not a black and white thing. It’s not like you are here one moment and there the next. It’s a sliding scale. This fades out. That fades in. Depending on how much this has faded out and how much that has faded in is how ‘deep’ a regression you’ve experienced. So we’d say about a third of the room spontaneously went through

132 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 a regression. The rest of you probably hit a revivification of one level or another. Does that make sense? Now if you started off with a, what I could call a technical emotion it’s like feel a great emotion, got it. What is it? Absolute joy. Great make it stronger. Yep it’s stronger. Go back and in absolute joy. Got it. Do you see how there is not really – I’m not really feeling the emotion? What we would get at best at that point is hypermnesia and I understand that some people have a greater facility at accessing emotions and others not, I get that, that’s fine. So if you happen to be a person that doesn’t access them as easily please do not feel any pressure to perform in any way. You can quite easily role play this drill and it will be just as useful for you as a hypnotist and realize that – I will make a promise by tomorrow I will show you a way that you can guarantee the emotion, in fact if anything, you have to work hard to kind of calm it down a little bit promise and this works with absolutely everybody guarantee it 100%. Okay in the mean time and I will come to you guys in a second. In the mean time it’s enough that well, for most of you who will experience it to some degree, which is great, that’s my preference and please don’t put yourself under pressure that you have to have the experience, because you don’t. It’s enough to just role play a little bit just to get a facility with this whole – the mechanics of it. Do you understand? So we have a question in the back then we’ll come over and then we’ll come to the front. Q:

In that it’s inside and outside are we talking about a geographical association or are we talking about associated disassociated inside outside.

Igor: Well let’s put it this way, just close your eyes for a moment and recall some pleasant memory from the past can you do that for me? Just recall a pleasant memory from the past. Let me know when you’ve got that just say yes and you have it. Q:

Yes.

Igor: There you go, just remember it is enough for now. Now does this scene take place inside or outside? Are you inside a house or outside in the world?

133 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

Inside.

Igor: Inside very good, come on back bring yourself back fully alert that’s what we need. Q:

Okay.

Igor: So there is nothing technical involved here all I’m trying to do is locate them – let’s put it this way. I know the question you are asking are they dissociated or associated and that sort of stuff we do not care about that. Do five year old children know what I mean by association versus disassociation? No. I suspect that at least a third of you in the room still don’t quite know what I mean by association and disassociation and it doesn’t matter. It’s irrelevant for our purposes. So it’s just a real simple question are you inside somewhere or outside somewhere. Does that help? This gentleman over here can you just pass it on. Q:

I noticed with my partner Ilea that we were doing the work with him and his emotion was playful maybe a little bit on the competitive side as in soccer or something like that or football if you will. But the thing is the emotion which is outwardly one of excitement and jumpy and fast paced of course in trance appeared to be a lot more slow and I wasn’t – but the thing is I wasn’t really getting any signals of and sorry to put you on the spot here, but I wasn’t getting any signals of you know trance or – not trance – of that sort of playful.

Igor: Of whether he had it? Q:

Right?

Igor: So let me just talk to the person who actually had the experience because that’s the way the action started if you may. Let me just see you so I can actually talk to – there you go. So you remember the experience you had over there yes? Q:

Yeah.

Igor: Now when he was suggesting for a positive emotion to come up did you feel something? Q:

Yeah I felt something.

134 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: Was it strong or was it just okay? Q:

It was just okay. It came up…

Igor: Perfect and did it get stronger? Did it get stronger or did it stay around that level? Q:

It stayed around the level but it slowly got stronger.

Igor: It slowly got stronger it just didn’t get particularly crazy strong. There is your answer. It was just a question of degree and that’s fine because he is basically saying that the experience he had was decent which is fine, but it is not far removed from what I just talked about some people who are finding it more difficult and I’m not saying that some people are emotionally repressed, or I guess that exists too, but there are times and there are places. There are times when I will be very emotional and there are times when I will not be. This may just not be that time for you. Does that make sense? So all you experienced was exactly what we talked about, which is someone who is having a less than intense response. If you wanted to make more of it you could probably spend more time building up the response and the regression would be easier. Otherwise if you just did this as an exercise I just wanted to get your familiar with the process that’s all. Does that help? Q:

Okay thank you.

Igor: You’re welcome, can we stand up over here. Who was this again? There you go. Q:

I had trouble going back to the other memory when she counted me backwards and when you just said that some people are not as kinesthetic I thought well I think I’m more visual and auditory so I was wondering if you would make use of that?

Igor: Sure you can make use of that, but that’s not the purpose of what we are doing here. You will see much more about what this is all about. Right now we are just having some fun with it. Let me ask you this did you have a very strong positive emotion? Q:

Yes.

135 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: And did it grow stronger? Q:

Yes.

Igor: And when you went back and just oriented, you know where are you, inside or outside and so on, just found it difficult to orient in a specific place and time is that what you are saying? Q:

It didn’t really, stuck to a specific memory.

Igor: Excellent. In that case the only thing you need to do at this point as a hypnotist is remember the loops we talked about before, you get a little insistent with it, just quickly now inside or outside. Just have a look around you, or just sense around you, are you inside or outside? Is it daytime or night time? Just quickly have a think, day time or night time and the scene starts popping in place, just like when Andrew had his Dynamic Induction with the path and the river and all that sort of stuff. The scene will start popping in place once one item comes, the rest start creating themselves around it. It’s just a question of how much time you have to push a little bit, but friendly in a friendly way. Does that help? Q:

Yeah.

Igor: And it’s true some people will require a little bit more of an effort because let’s face it, you have a lot of memories to choose from, right? So which specific one do you go to? So sometimes a little bit of pressure can help. Sometimes backing off can help and I realize this is an exercise so time is not exactly on your side at this point, right, so good stuff. One more, this gentleman will you stand up so we can get a mic to you. Q:

One of the things that I experienced is I was initially stuck on a particular emotion and the hypnotist did a really good job of going wait a minute he’s stuck, okay that’s not the right one, go look for another one.

Igor: Excellent, excellent. Q:

And the second one I found was totally different. It built but it didn’t really build far and then when she said okay now go back, what happened, this one image came in and as she said well where are you – and as soon as I was starting to

136 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 describe that image a different one popped in and said, no you are going to be here and it was just kind of weird. Igor: Yeah that will happen. The unconscious mind navigates in all kinds of interesting ways, but your hypnotist did a great job because they did not accept an ambiguous emotion which is not appropriate for what we are doing here. Why am I that strict, by the way, any ideas? Why might people want to avoid an emotion that is ambiguous? It’s kind of happy but kind of bad. Why would you want to do that, any ideas? Q:

Because you want them to go the happy place.

Igor: Because you want them to go to the happy place. Think of it this way – think of the Affect Bridge, right? If I’m starting in a place that is a little bit of both happy and sad – a little bit of sad together, right? There are two emotions present. Which one are they going back to? You might go down to an even worse memory and they are all I’m unhappy now and you just triggered an abreaction, you caused it, or they might go somewhere happy and go yeah thank you so much. This was a fantastic experience, thank you thank you. You just don’t know. So what is the rule of thumb - get only a positive emotion because only that can lead to this? Or at least you are hedging your bets as much as possible. Is this making sense to you guys? Hence we have only positive. As soon as something other than positive happens spend all your time either getting to something absolutely positive or end the session. If your client is not responding in the direction that you need them to, then why take them down the path that is getting darker and darker and darker, that’s not necessarily a good thing for them, right? Does that make sense? Just use a little bit of common sense in that sense. So is that all making sense to you guys? Is that all clear? Yeah?

137 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2

Emotions

Igor: So here is the next concept, every emotion that we experience serves a function, it has a purpose, it is of great importance. Every emotion has a very crystalline logic to it, it has a – which is involved with that purpose. You may not always be able to tell from the outside what it is, but it’s very clear. Now as therapists we need to know this, because emotions are the main reasons people come to us for. The two biggest emotions that you will encounter as a therapist by far, what do you think they are? Fear and anger exactly. Fear and anger are by far the most commonest of emotions, then you have shame and guilt and frustration all these are kind of a second tier want to be emotions, but fear and anger those are the big cheeses. What is the purpose of fear? Warn you protect you, you are guys are very close. What else? Q:

To keep us safe.

Igor: To keep us safe. These are very close. Q:

To survive.

Igor: To survive again you are all 100% correct. Allow me… again you guys are getting very close. Allow me to just put it this way to you and see if its fits in terms own experience. The purpose of fear and the only purpose of fear is to anticipate a danger to you and then to motivate you to avoid that danger. That’s a key part of the emotion to anticipate a danger to you and then to help you – to motivate you to avoid that danger and it means this – if you accept 100% that danger is unavoidable you will not feel fear. The two things that kill fear is number one is extreme hope, because you are expecting something good to happen and number two, surprisingly enough is the complete absence of hope, provided they don’t go down depression because depression is when they can’t accept the fact that whatever bad thing they think is going to happen will happen. They are trying to not accept it and they are caught in no man’s land between not wanting it but not wanting to feel afraid and then that bounces backwards and forwards and leads them kind of nowhere.

138 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 I’d like to give a story to illustrate this very clearly. Some time ago I saw a documentary about you know heroes you have this I think in America here it’s usually like Hero’s instead of just heroes. So it is one of these programs and they had real Hero’s in this show and one of them really stuck in my mind he was a fireman in Australia. They’ve been called out to a freeway accident/incident and it as probably one of the worst things that a fireman can deal with. There was a petrol delivery tanker thing had collided with some other things, cars were involved, trucks were involved petrol was everywhere or you could call it gas was leaking everywhere. Fire was present. You can see that this is probably not the most happy of circumstances for anyone to find themselves in correct? So the fireman is naturally adrenaline is running. He’s afraid, but he is well trained, so training over comes fear and he does his job. He’s working to get a little girl out of the car. Whilst he’s doing this the petrol, the gas ignites. They are surrounded by a wall of flame. Now he is a fireman. He knows what this means. They are surrounded by a wall of flame. They cannot get through it. He knows exactly what this means. It’s only a matter of time before the oxygen inside the circle will be consumed and the fire comes in and it’s really not a pleasant end. So he’s sitting here underneath the truck with this little girl and he knows what's coming. And this is the crazy part. This is the bit that he described. As soon as his mind caught up the facts to the reality of the situation he became calm. Crystal calm. He wrapped the little girl in his coat. He walked through the fire. He was so badly burnt it took months to overcome the injuries but not only did he survive so did she. Now that’s a heroic story its true, but the important part here is fear was absent when he accepted the fact that he was going to die at this point. So fear has a purpose and you were all correct, it is to protect you from danger and all this different things. The mechanism is to predict an unpleasant event, a dangerous event in the future and then to motivate you through the fear to avoid that situation. And that tells you how to deal with fear doesn’t it. You either change the expectation or you accept the result. Either way it works. The fear can no longer be present at that point. Does that make sense to you guys? What about anger? What is the purpose of anger? Is it just a destructive emotion that’s no good that should be destroyed? Say that again.

139 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

Someone steps over the line?

Igor: Someone steps over the line; that is exactly it. We all have our, shall we say mental, emotional, and physical boundaries. When someone violates those boundaries the purpose of anger is to push them back and re-establish that boundary again, right? So that we are – we can stay within homeostasis and so on. We are not being invaded. Think about when you have been angry. Think about then you snapped. It could have been a small thing, but it was a small thing at the end of many other things. Someone is getting closer and closer to your boundary so even the tiniest thing started attacking the wall that protects you as a person and what anger does is it gives you enough psychological energy to push people back over that boundary so you can re-establish the safe relationship. Does that kind of make sense? So how do you end anger? There are two elements that are required for anger to end. 1. The person, the violator must be on the other side on the correct side of the boundary again, right? 2. Your protection, your boundary itself has to be re-built. When that occurs we go back to calm. Here is where we get in trouble and you will see this a lot in clients. Some countries are much worse than others. If you wrong your friend, how do you reestablish the nature of the relationship again afterwards, you’ve wronged them in some way what do you do to reestablish the balance that existed before? You apologize don’t you? Or more accurately you’ll apologize and try to make it up in some way, do you not? Do the words in anyway rebuild that boundary? Does the making it up in anyway rebuild the boundary? No it just shows symbolically I’m willing to symbolically show that I’m going to respect this boundary, right? What do you do with someone who violates your boundary once and apologies, you forgive them. You do it again and again and each time he keeps apologizing what happens eventually? The apology becomes meaningless doesn’t it? Because it’s important it’s not the apology it’s the symbolic rebuilding of the boundary and this is where it gets dangerous.

140 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 In the apology, who rebuilds the boundary, me the injured party or you or shall we say them, the injurer? In the apology they are the ones that are symbolically rebuilding your boundary. When I apologize to you I’m saying I understand there is a wall here let me rebuild it for you and step back from it to show the respect as a boundary. That’s what an apology does. That’s why we expecting that apology, but here is the problem, where does the power lie when I the violator am the one that was to rebuild your wall which I have violated, who has the power there? Me, not the individual that’s angry. Now very often anger can motivate if you have the right relationship it will motivate the person to realize they have over stepped a line and to fix it, right? What if I don’t care? What if I die before I can apologize to you and make things up, where are you left then? You are left with a broken wall and that means you will stay angry for the rest if your life, unless you find a way of fixing it yourself does this make sense as an analogy? And this is where there are so many people stuck. You know these people, you’ve met them haven’t you, who are just angry at life. It’s because life hasn’t been kind to them and it has not. But because shall we say I don’t know maybe it’s a social upbringing and so on, they are expecting life to make up for whatever damage it did in the form of the people that did it and so on. But if they are not doing it, all that’s left anger and anger is a terrible emotion it will destroy a person. It will eat them up from the inside out cause all kinds of health issues as well emotional upset and social problems and all the rest of it. So if I’m angry for life and I’m angry at you and you refuse to apologize to me, either because you don’t care or because you are incapable of it anymore, because you are not around, whom is my anger hurting me or you? It’s me. It’s the angry person that suffers. It’s the angry that gets damaged not the person they are angry at. Do you see how that works? So what is the solution to anger? Its forgiveness, but not in the way that most people think of it, where did this idea of forgiveness come from in our culture? Religion. Religion has done some wonderful things, some terrible things have been done in the name of religion as well, but it has done some wonderful things. Ethics has been shall we say socialized into us because of religion at least our

141 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 current version of it. We’ve learned you must forgive, you must love your neighbor and so on, but what do these things mean? What we think it means is this, who do we normally forgive? It’s someone we love. Someone will say I will ignore or accept the violation you’ve just done here because I love you more than that and I want to keep a relationship going with you. Isn’t that kind of what motivates us normally to forgive, right? But now what happens when the person who has violated you is someone you don’t know, someone you don’t even like, a rapist, a mugger, someone who has beaten you up, someone who was nasty to you at school and couldn’t care less about you. Given that idea of forgiveness how could you possibly forgive that person because there is no love connection there is there? And you don’t want it to be there, in fact it’s inappropriate. If it’s case of say sexual abuse. Is it appropriate to say, hey love the person, right? Not in that sense. The kind of love that may be present is a totally different one, more an abstract human being type of thing. You can love a tiger but you are not going to put your head in its mouth are you? Do you see where I’m going with this? So love is not necessarily the right – it maybe the fuel in some situations but doesn’t have to be. So let us re-examine this idea of forgiveness. What if forgiveness really means letting go, cutting the bonds. I’m no longer concerned with this. I’m done this, I will rebuild the wall myself, I’m not going to hold on to you anymore. Can we have a microphone over here please? Or let’s just get this over here quickly just stand up can you pass this back. Q:

Isn’t the root of the word forgiveness somehow associated with cutting the tie?

Igor: It may well be I haven’t looked it up, but I wouldn’t be surprised if it is. There is a great practice in a Hawaiian religion called Huna it’s kind of a shamanic tradition and its known ho’oponopono, some of you may have heard of it, it’s been kind of panned around the internet a little bit. Can we have a mic over there and I will come to you in a second and what it literally is the ceremony is the cutting of the ties. In that particular metaphysical philosophy they think that every time people interact with each other they leave like a little thread of energy attached to the other person.

142 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Now that’s kind of the chain of association we talked about isn’t it? Then they go through a ritual to cut the bonds, those chains that you have with people that are unhealthy in your life. It’s basically the same ritual of forgiveness we are talking about, without necessarily the acceptance that our current perception or current idea of love might include, right? Does that make sense to you guys? It’s a wonderful ritual, at least the idea of it is a wonderful thing, because what you are doing is you are cutting the bonds. Let me put it this way, you know for a fact that there are – in America and other countries there are people in those prisons that have murdered other people. Now as a caring human being that’s not a good thing is it? But when you sit here and think about those people, do you really care? I mean it in a blasé sort of way, do you sit there and get angry about the fact there is a murderer sitting in prison right now? You know it exists, you know it’s true, but you can’t get angry because they haven’t done anything to you. Of course if they murdered your father, your mother, your loved one your child it’s a totally different story isn’t it? So what forgiveness does is it reverts that person back to their original condition. In other words, it’s someone who has killed someone else, fine, but you don’t have to keep thinking about it. Now if a murderer broke out of prison, came to your house and said do you mind if I stayed a few nights? Would you say sure come on in, even if you don’t know them, you are not foolish enough to start letting in the crazies. So just because you’ve cut the bonds and you no longer have to think about those people or be emotional about that doesn’t mean you lose your sensibilities and start doing dangerous things. Do you see how that works? So we must get a client to the position where they can understand, that when you are asking them to forgive whoever perpetrated the unkind or unpleasant act on them, that they are not having to love the person or accept the person. Or even have then in their life in any way, shape or form. The idea of forgiveness is basically saying, I am done with this. I am done with you. I don’t need to waste any more energy on this. Is this kind of making sense? It’s kind of an important point here.

143 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Some cultures find it very difficult to do this they are more revenge oriented. They are, in the Mediterranean in Europe is a very revenge oriented culture overall. Go to Greece, Cyprus a place like that. Some lovely people, but they have some pretty interesting ideas about getting even. But getting even as we know right now is just a question of rebuilding that boundary. So the purpose of forgiveness is to let go. Because when you are angry at someone believe it or not, the anger is not projected to the person. Its projected at some part of yourself you have pulled out to symbolize that person, otherwise you wouldn’t know how to do it. I mean there’s people who are angry at people who have been long dead, aren’t there? So how can they be angry at them they don’t exist anymore? What they are angry at is the representation of that person inside themselves, they are angry at themselves and that’s where the damage occurs. That’s the core they have to bite, that’s the person that have to dissolved inside their own neurology, so that whatever energy they use to sustain that relationship can be used for healing, for growing for doing other things. Has anyone here had the experience where you’ve been angry at someone for some time and somehow no matter how you did it, you managed to release it, let go of it. What did you feel when you genuinely managed to forgive or at least to release that bond of connection? Would it be fair to say it was an intense, emotional rush, you had more energy suddenly? Because all the energy that was being diverted to something else is back and available to you as a resource and that’s where the healing begins. Is it making sense as a concept? Yeah? It’s important when working with a client, some clients will not get their heads around this idea as easily. It’s important that they realize that just because you are no longer afraid or no longer angry, it does not mean you start doing foolish things. How many people here are afraid of crossing the road provided you can look and do so safely, anyone, really? How many people here are afraid of standing in front of a truck as it comes hurling towards you at say 150 miles an hour? It’s appropriate isn’t it? Just because you are afraid of one eventuality it does not mean you have to fear crossing the road. You can still cross it safely. If some day

144 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 you should be crossing that road and that truck happens to come at a quick speed do you know what’s going to happen? You are going to run! It’s just naturally isn’t it? Exactly the same way an abuse can forgive the abuser, they can cut the bond of the abuser. If the abuser ever would try to reengage in their abusing behavior, they can still prevent that from happening without having to spend the two years in between worrying about it, carrying that with them. Do you understand where we are going with this? That’s what true empowerment is, it’s I’m fine, I’m doing well and so on and what the heck is he doing here? You know what, do we go out? We don’t want this anymore. Isn’t that what it is all about? That’s true empowerment isn’t it? As soon as the persons left it’s like, that’s alright I’m getting on with my day again now. Because there is no need to hold on to it, you can be safe and still let go of that. Is this all making sense to you guys? The skill of course is in getting clients to see that. Hopefully by now you have sufficient analogies that you can borrow. You are welcome to use any of these or come up with others to demonstrate the principal to the other person.

Regression Training 3

Igor: So let’s get back to an exercise. Before this little talk we did a little exercise where you, you got a nice strong positive emotion, you built it up and you regressed back on it using the Affect Bridge, that emotional bridge. You drop them in and for most people in this room you got a relatively vivid or relatively clear experience of what that memory is about. Now that memory was oriented somewhere in time, was it not? It was probably somewhere in the last ten, 15, 20, 30 years or so. It’s rare although it’s possible that you went straight back so far when you were eight, ten, five, two or something like that. Would that be fair to say? So what I want you to do now, is to get used to this process and be able to do exactly that. So you are going to have a little emotion positive, clearly positive emotion. You are going to drop

145 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 them into it so that it grows, then you are going to explain to them what’s going to happen at the count of from three down one. You are going to go to a previous time you felt as good as this or even better, more intensely this emotion. So you experience it again. So you ready for that? Yes. Three, two, one go be there now. So what do you see, what do you sense? I’m kind of, I’m not quite sure I’m kind of in some place. Is it inside or outside? I think its outside. Day time or night time? Its night time and kind of like a forest in night time. Are you alone or with others? I’m with my friends, oh yeah I’m with my friends we are having this midnight picnic there is a fire going on, we are all singing and dancing having a great time. That’s kind of how the memory sort of starts coalescing isn’t it? Once you have some core ideas friends, forest, night time. You just have some core ideas and you have a handle on that situation, you may or you may not ask the age, what I would like you to do, is to bounce back again to an even earlier event before this one. How do you do that, any ideas? You ask them for it, I’m going to count from three to one again. On a count of one you’ll be at an even earlier event before this, where you felt just as good as this. You see the pattern we are playing with here, yes. The final one this is the interesting one. We are going to do this one more time. So you are basically going to go from one, two, three, four experience of that positive emotion. In this final one the instructions will change slightly. The instructions will be to go to an even earlier event. Preferably and notice the word preferably, before the age of ten, I will explain why later. Now here is where it gets important. Before you begin any of this, ask your partner if they are happy to go to a memory before the age of ten. If they say no do not do the final step, leave it at this point. If they say no, do not go to an earlier memory, in fact make sure in your suggestions that there is no way they will get to that point. If there is an age range that you personally never want to revisit again that’s your choice, tell your partner you know what, whatever we are doing in here, let’s avoid this age. I want to avoid a certain age range. You can either tell them the age range or you can just give it a code word, it doesn’t really matter.

146 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Better still tell your unconscious mind right now that’s not the place to go. Because let’s face it, you protected it from whatever happened there, no need to start playing with that ballpark again. Do you understand this? So this will be a – you’ll enjoy this, it will be a very pleasant experience. So you go in, you have a nice positive experience or positive emotion, you get stronger, you bounce back, one event just like you did. You’ll do it again, just to get used to that orienting response. Now you will do it the final time, this time offering the possibility to go before the age of ten. Making sure that they realize that if it’s more appropriate not to then that’s fine too. Let the unconscious mind decide, it’s been protecting you quite well your entire life and its going to carry on doing so. Does all that make sense? Once you orient them to the final set of memories inside, outside, day time, night time, alone with others that sort of stuff then you are done. Bring them back, you have a go, you’ll both be very happy for it. Can you just stand up so we can get a mic to you over here? Stand up over here. Q:

What if we’ve gone to the age of eight already?

Igor: Then you are there. Q:

Then we are there.

Igor: It’s rare that people go straight to those early ages, it can happen sometimes then you are just there, then I guess you will just go well done, come on back. It’s relatively rare, but it can happen and it will be more likely to happen with what we do tomorrow. But if you are there already that’s fine, for the moment it is good, if you want to get – it’s just a suggestion for everyone. Don’t go straight to an age before ten in this exercise, let yourself build up to it. It’s just so that the hypnotist has an opportunity to navigate through time a little bit. It’s just to give you a little bit of facility doing that. Make sense? Q:

Yeah.

Igor: So suggestions out there folks, no need to go straight back just take your time revisiting memory lane before you get to that age. Are you all clear on this, yes? All:

Yes.

147 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: Question new partners. No stay with your partners I think it’s a good thing to build up on. Wait a second folks there is still another couple of questions. One over here just stand up and then there will be one over here in a second. Just stay where you are folks please. Q:

Right now I don’t feel anything, I feel very drained.

Igor: That’s fine as we said earlier on, if you are having difficulty accessing emotions right now, I realize you’ve had a long day and so on, then all you need to do is just role play the experience with your partner. To give them a chance to still do the things without necessarily having the pressure of having to, oh I have got to perform. Rest assured when we need to use this as an actual therapeutic tool I will show you tomorrow how to make it happen so there is no possibility for you ever to even consider not having an emotion at that point. This gentleman over here can we just have a mic over there. Q:

I was just wondering on the way out, do we look back through the ages or do we just come back?

Igor: Good question anyone else? Alright folks you can hand the microphone back. I look forward to hearing your answer afterwards alright? Finally get with your partners let’s do about five minutes apiece, ten minutes in total. Alright folks how was that? Who enjoyed that anyone? Who was like wow, I’m so happy, yeah. Give yourself a round of applause folks. So who had a particularly good experience? Let me know, with some ideas, go ahead. Can we just have a – actually I have got a microphone right here. Let’s get the mics ready folks, go ahead just stand up so we can all see you. Q:

When the person I was working with Cora went back the last time past the age of ten I just felt so much – I actually was touched and teary.

Igor: Is this as the hypnotist? Q:

As the hypnotist I was touched by her experience and I was just pulled right into it. So it was so heart-warming, it was more than heart-warming.

Igor: Yeah pretty intense stuff. Do you want to pass it back to the lady behind you, just stand up so we can capture you as well? Just click it up there you go.

148 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

It was quite a journey. I was in Nepal and then I was – it just kept getting better and every time I went back one step it got better and better. The Nepal was the first one and then it went back to when I was eight and felt that – but I had that same chain of excitement through all – through everything and it was fantastic.

Igor: Exactly rock and roll, good job. Who else had a great experience? Can I ask the gentleman over here just to stand up so we can get the mic to you and then we’ll come over to the left? Q:

Actually I didn’t do this one because the first time I went way back. I started with the emotion of love and it took me back to playing hockey at eight years old.

Igor: Okay fantastic. Q:

I realized that my father had created the whole hockey league so that I could play that year.

Igor: Wow. Stand up so we can get the mic over. Just click that mic off. Q:

So generally I don’t associate good memories in most of my childhood and it was really stunning to go back and experience something that was absolutely, wonderful, delightful, fun, joyful and just wanted to stay and revel.

Igor: It’s nice isn’t it? Who likes this as a process, is this a pretty good thing? Yes. Who would like to make it one step better than that? Do you want to come up? You don’t have to if you don’t want to, I need a volunteer so if you want.

Days Of Wonder Demo

Igor: Give her a round of applause folks, have a sit up here, can we get the mic ready. Just so we can hear you without you having to hold the mic and stuff. All these people looking up here, don’t worry you won’t see any of them very soon. A:

Made a commitment to be brave this week.

Igor: So you enjoyed the experience you just had, was that pretty cool?

149 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 A:

It was awesome.

Igor: Excellent, well you are about to have something even better than that if that’s okay with you, right? A:

Hard to imagine but I’m ready.

Igor: Good the first thing I want to ask, is it okay if I touch your shoulder from time to time just to help you throughout the process, is that fine. A:

Yes.

Igor: Good. The next thing you should know is we are about to do hypnosis as you know and that’s it, get yourself all tidied up, exciting as the journey starts. What I would like you to know is that you will hear sounds around you from time to time it’s going to happen, but I would like you to realize that those sounds will help make this journey even better for you. I wouldn’t be too surprised if they would start blending in with whatever environment your memory is bringing back for you, you know what I mean. Of course my voice will continue with you and will guide and help you shape the experience. So at every point you know you are absolutely safe you realize that, right? A:

Right?

Igor: Now you know where you are sitting don’t you? A:

Yes.

Igor: You know what that means don’t you? A:

Yes.

Igor: You are safe aren’t you? There you go, feel the chair and know you are safe. Very good. Now in a moment I’m going to touch your shoulder just like this. When I do I would like for you to have that really positive, happy, exciting emotion. Whatever that was come back up and there you go. Is it there yet? Of course it is. Getting stronger yet? A:

Yes.

150 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: Now this is the most amazing part. In a moment I will count from three down to one at the count of one, even though they are way back in time, way back to when you felt just as good as this or even better, you ready for this? Three, two, one go be there now. There you go where are you, inside or outside? A:

I’m outside.

Igor: You are outside aren’t you? Are you alone or with others? A:

I’m alone.

Igor: You are alone. How are you feeling right now? A:

Wonderful.

Igor: You are. Do you know how old you are yet? Or does that not have much meaning. A:

Maybe 25 or 30.

Igor: That’s right? Are you enjoying this place? Now as good as this place is the next one is even better do you know why? It’s going to go way back to before the age of ten are you okay with that? Before the age of ten, something just as exciting, just as good as this or even better, are you ready for this? Three, two, one go be there now, that’s it there, how are you doing little Angell? A:

I’m doing great.

Igor: You are doing great aren’t you, are you inside or outside? A:

I’m inside.

Igor: Are you alone or with others? A:

I’m sitting on the top of the stairs.

Igor: You are sitting at the top of the stairs. Now how are you feeling right now? A:

I’m so excited.

Igor: You are so excited aren’t you? So good. Do you know why?

151 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 A:

Yeah.

Igor: Why is that? A:

Because it’s Christmas morning and I’m not allowed to go downstairs.

Igor: Its Christmas morning isn’t it great. I‘m going to count to three and big Angell is going to watch that Christmas scene with me. One, two, three big Angell watch that scene way down there. Wasn’t that exciting for little Angell? A:

Yeah.

Igor: Did I say your name right Angell? A:

Angell.

Igor: Angell. Thank you. What did they call little Angell over there? A:

Jelly Bean.

Igor: Jelly Bean, that’s so cool. So you Angell, here watching little Jelly Bean over there. Didn’t she have the best time ever? Now there is something that you and I know that she doesn’t know at this point. You know that before this whole event. This whole Christmas morning and so on, just sitting on the stairs you are excited, before that happened, there was a period, a time when she was just bored. It was just nothing was going on, she was, it could have been an hour before, a day before, a week before, it doesn’t matter. You know what I mean? How long before this would you say that was? A:

Maybe a day or two.

Igor: Like a day or two, can you see that now, just before that, little Jelly Bean over there kind of bored? A:

Yeah.

Igor: What is she doing? A:

She is coloring in her coloring book.

152 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: There you go she is coloring in her coloring book, nowhere near as good as the Christmas morning is it? So here is what we are going to do, in a moment I’m going to ask, I’m going to count from three down to one and you’ll step inside the scene, you’ll be little Jelly Bean coloring the book, a little bored. But the beautiful thing is. The thing she doesn’t know yet is that Christmas morning is coming and then, then the show starts. You ready to experience that yes? Okay three, two, one. Go step in the scene, hey little Jelly Bean how are you doing? A:

I’m fine.

Igor: Are you having fun? A:

Yes.

Igor: What are you doing? A:

I’m just sitting down at home.

Igor: That’s right, so let time pass a little bit and look Christmas is coming, its Christmas morning, how are you feeling now? That’s right, it’s quite something. A:

I can’t wait.

Igor: I know it’s the best. One, two, three. Angell looking at the little Jelly Bean over there wasn’t that something? A:

Yes.

Igor: Did she have any idea how it’s going to be then? A:

No.

Igor: No she didn’t, did she? A:

Because maybe there is nothing.

Igor: She had no idea because it could be nothing exactly. She is young, how would she know. A:

Right?

153 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: Now what do you think would happen if you told little Jelly Bean that even though nothing is happening now, she is just coloring her books, doing whatever, that just a couple of days from now Christmas will be here. Then she will sit and notice that and then she’ll be so excited, what do you think is going to happen to her then? A:

She would get excited.

Igor: Wouldn’t she. She would have like two whole days of getting excited and even more excited wouldn’t she? So go ahead and tell her in the ways that only you can, so she understands what is going to come and let me know how she reacts. A:

She’s so excited, she can’t wait now to get there.

Igor: So would you like to experience that as little Jelly Bean again? So the count of one once again, three, two, one, hey little Jelly Bean what’s going on? A:

It’s almost Christmas.

Igor: It is almost Christmas how do you feel about that? A:

I can’t wait to see.

Igor: You can’t wait to see can you? A:

I know, I’m so exciting.

Igor: No, times passing, the day has landed and there you are on the stairs its Christmas morning, how is it? A:

I want to go downstairs.

Igor: Was it worth the wait, was it? A:

Yes.

Igor: Oh what a fantastic time, one, two, three. Angell in the room watching little Jelly Bean wasn’t that something? How do you feel about little Jelly Bean over there having done all this? A:

She is so excited.

154 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: Isn’t she. A:

Yeah.

Igor: Is she a special little girl? You have just given her a tremendous gift to realize that. She was bored but now she realizes that boredom is just waiting to be transformed to excitement because she got excited didn’t she? A:

She did.

Igor: Now let me ask you this, was Christmas morning more exciting knowing it was coming? A:

Yes.

Igor: So would it get even more exciting if you did the whole thing again knowing that’s its coming and it will be more exciting still? I think so. You ready to experience that? A:

Yeah, I’m.

Igor: Three, two, one. Hey little Jelly Bean? A:

Hey.

Igor: Christmas is coming soon, you know that don’t you? A:

I do its almost here, I can’t wait.

Igor: I know let time pass, you are sitting on the chair and there it is, it’s Christmas morning, wow and one, two, three back in the room watching little Jelly Bean over there, wasn’t that something? How do you feel about little Jelly Bean to be able to generate that kind of enthusiasm, isn’t that something? A:

It feels so good.

Igor: Go ahead and tell her how proud you are, how she’s a wonderful little girl, to be able to experience such a wonderful thing, isn’t that? A:

She did a great job.

Igor: She did a great job, didn’t she?

155 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 A:

So good.

Igor: Go ahead and tell her. Tell me did she get even more excited now that you’ve told her that? A:

Yeah.

Igor: I think it’s worth experiencing one more time, don’t you? A:

Yeah.

Igor: I think so to. Three, two, one. Hey little Jelly Bean, how’s it going? A:

I’m so excited I want to go down stairs now.

Igor: I know you do. A:

Because I know what’s down there now.

Igor: I know you do, I know, time passes, you are just sitting in the stairs and its right there it’s Christmas and you are itches away from those presents, isn’t that the best? A:

This is the best.

Igor: One, two, three, back in the room watching little Jelly Bean down there wow, quite a rush, hey. Well actually the best thing of this whole experience is, little Jelly Bean over there was bored. She was just coloring her books, normal boring day. She had no idea what was coming. But you did, didn’t you. By being able to share that with her you taught her to be excited. For two whole days she could have wasted being bored instead, right? You totally transformed that little girl’s life at that point didn’t you? Now that’s something that you and I both know that little Jelly Bean is yet to find out. You know what that is? That there are many, many more moments of excitement waiting for her in her life. No matter how many boring parts she goes through, they are just the waiting period for something amazing to happen, aren’t they. Now if she knew the way that you know, that these amazing moments were coming, do you think she could possibly still be bored at any point in that timeline?

156 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 A:

No.

Igor: So go ahead and tell her. Tell her what’s coming. Tell her the highlights, tell her all the best things. Make sure she understands that just when she thinks she should be getting bored the best is yet to come. Notice how her whole attitude changes, it does doesn’t it? A:

She gets so excited I told her one thing, she does get it.

Igor: That’s right? Then the next thing gets better and better still doesn’t it? Now go ahead and tell her, how amazing her life is going to be, so she gets to grow up knowing that. So she gets to grow up knowing that anytime she is even tempted to be bored there is no place for this anymore is it? Then go ahead. Go ahead and give her a big hug, bring her inside you. Let her go up inside of you, going through all those moments that used to be boredom but now just excitement in this place, because one good moment leads to another. No matter what happens in between those moments its always more excitement and better things. So that she learns as she goes to ten, 12, 13, 14 years old, 15 and all those changes that come at that sort of age, 18, 20. Growing up, going on to the world, 21, 22. All those moments that used to be boring now are just filled with anticipation, filled with exciting, filled with good things, all the way through until we are sitting in this room on a ship somewhere in L.A. You know that as good things were then, even better things are yet to come don’t you. How do you feel about that? A:

I feel excited about that.

Igor: You do, don’t you? A:

Yeah.

Igor: So as soon as you are ready just breath that all in, take that excitement and lock it inside you because you’ve earned it. You know for a fact just as it happened back then, it will happen again. Whenever you are ready you will know because your eyes will come open and you’ll bring that excitement back with you. Knowing without a shadow of a doubt that you really have something worth getting excited for, don’t you? So take your time and do that now. There you go.

157 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 A:

Hard to come back.

Igor: It is hard to come back isn’t it? But you have to come back in order to go forward don’t you? A:

Absolutely.

Igor: That’s where the next good stuff comes from isn’t it? A:

Absolutely.

Igor: How are you doing right now? A:

Oh my gosh. It’s hard to describe.

Igor: I understand. A:

It’s just ridiculously happy, just it’s, I just can’t –

Igor: Do you believe her? A:

It’s overwhelming, it’s beautiful.

Igor: Did I follow up on my promise to you? A:

Absolutely.

Igor: You glad you came up? A:

I’m so glad I came up, what a privilege its – it’s so beyond words like every cell in my body it feels like it’s just on fire, just with happiness, like every single hair on my head, every single, just…

Igor: Long may it continue. A:

Yes.

Igor: Now is it okay for you to answer some questions about your experience, please don’t ask her about the technicalities like when did this happen and did you do this and that. Just ask about her about her experience. I will explain the steps momentarily, is that okay with you guys? So just ask her, if you get curious about, how she experienced, what she experienced and so on. By all means ask and of

158 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 course as with everyone before, if there is something you obviously want to share or talk about, just say no, I would rather keep that private they will totally understand. Is that cool? A:

That’s fine.

Igor: So stand up and put your hand up so we can find you with the mic if you would like to ask her a question at this point of her experience. I think everyone is a little stunned. Stand up, so we can actually get a mic to you. Q:

Could you describe what happened when he told you, I didn’t hear the suggestion it sounded like something like wash or something when he told you to see the little girl in the room the Jelly Bean. What happened in your mind when there was kind of that separation when he told you to see that girl or be outside of yourself?

A:

I saw her but I don’t know that I three dimensionally saw her.

Igor: You were kind of aware that she was there, right? A:

She was there and we were having a conversation and I was just – I was telling her how good it’s going to be on Christmas day. You didn’t even ask about the Christmas day part it was just the anticipation.

Igor: Yep. A:

But I did go forward a little bit and I was just whispering to her like, oh you are going to get this. That particular year was a big – it brought me back to the one particular specific year that my dad did commercials. He was a director for commercials. He got all the Toys Are Us toys that year. He brought them because nobody else was married or had kids and so he brought them all home and so that Christmas, my parents didn’t have very much money but that Christmas, was like, there was hardly room for people. It was just so…

Igor: Wow good choice. A:

Kind of a magical – but I mean I haven’t thought of that experience for decades. So it wasn’t like in my awareness.

159 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: You weren’t planning to go back there, let’s put it that way, right? A:

Right?

Igor: Exactly. A:

It was a complete surprise for me.

Igor: Perfect, right? By the way did you all see that this was on – we were more in the regression realm than the revivification, how would you tell? Her voice and mannerisms all became more child like, did you notice that? Do you mind saying a little bit about how you experienced that? Like being the little Jelly Bean at that time, to the extent you remember, you don’t… A:

What did I experience about that?

Igor: Was it vivid? A:

It was vivid, it was Technicolor. Like I wasn’t seeing her, I was her.

Igor: You clearly so that happen didn’t you? All:

Yes.

A:

So I felt like I was that little girl.

Igor: So do you see and this is actually wonderful, thank you for coming up for this. Because this is a wonderful example of what a classic regression looks like. It’s not the most intense regression, I have seen much more intense ones where there is literally no awareness of future at that point. But it’s probably in the midrange of regression. You can see the voice changing, the mannerisms changing. You probably lost awareness of the fact that you were in the ship around you at that time you were just in that experience would that be fair to say? A:

Yes.

Igor: Excellent. So you now have a nice way of checking, well you know what a revivification is like, they are feeling it, but they can talk about it in a relatively adult sort of way. This is going much more into the classical regression territory, it’s more intense than revivification. It basically, did you notice how as you were

160 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 going backwards in time, it became increasingly more intense and by the time it landed, it was totally I’m here and there is really nothing else that I need to pay attention to, right? A:

Yeah. I was fully in it.

Igor: Exactly, that kind of gives you the whole range of experiences there. Any other questions at this point? Do you want to stand up so we can get a mic over to you? Q:

So this is the end of September and I’m just wondering what’s Christmas this year like?

A:

I don’t know.

Q:

I just wanted to see that.

Igor: There’s another hand over here somewhere, someone else over here with a question. Okay just stand up. Q:

It’s a long, long story, so as far as I understand you are talking about good memory and then you…

Igor: I will talk you through the process later on, right now if you have any questions for what she experienced. I will take you step by step through everything so don’t worry about that part, okay. Just stand up a sec so we can get you as well so we can find you then we’ll come back to you in a second. Q:

I think we know the answer but is there any doubt that hypnosis is a force for good?

A:

There is no doubt in my mind that’s it’s a real experience. You know what I mean it’s not just – it doesn’t feel like fantasy. It’s a real profound experience. So I can see how this is going to relate to a healing tool for people. Because it’s – this profound happiness that I have its not fake, I haven’t made it up and it was unexpected.

Igor: So once again, the Non Awareness Set in action isn’t it? So right back over there, just forwards so I can see you, you are a little bit in the shadows there. Go ahead.

161 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

Igor you kind of stole my question but I had a follow up on that. When you were in that child state and I could hear you giggling in that child’s voice, were you at that time aware that you were also an adult, or how did that all work?

A:

I wasn’t paying attention to my adult self. I’m sure at some level I was aware, but I was fully in that little girl space.

Igor: To kind of give some kind of structure around that, that’s why I said she was more in a mid-level regression right in the mid-stream of it, because there was a level of awareness but there was so little attention and so little observance of it that it didn’t really matter. In a full blown intense regression, even that little piece would just completely be absent. Make sense, so it was to be honest with you, there was more than plenty to get what we needed to do here. But in fact even a revivification is more than enough go get exactly the same kind of result, but you happened to be fortunate enough to see a full blown regression which is great for everyone. Great for you for actually experiencing from the inside out what is actually possible? A:

Absolutely.

Igor: Exactly. Now any other questions or can we release Angell back into the wild? Can you stand up so we can get a mic to you? Can we get someone with a mic just to come around over here please? Q:

Angell I’ve got a question out of curiosity, do you remember at any time at that age, remember seeing somebody an adult with blonde hair, tall?

A:

I don’t think I understand the question.

Igor: He is asking if you basically have now a recollection of you being a girl remembering some tall stranger to yourself, talking to her and so on. You can answer the question but I can probably predict what the answer is going to be. We haven’t messed with her memory. What we have done is we’ve altered her relationship to the memory. Because you know for a fact, would that be fair to say that you had a point in time back when you were a little girl, you were bored. That hasn’t changed as an idea. But it would also be fair to say that there is an equal memory of her having the most amazing time. It’s almost like they are in

162 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 parallel, you know one actually happened and one didn’t necessarily happen. But they both feel about as real. Would that be fair to say? A:

They do both feel real.

Igor: So what we have done is we’ve created a parallel track of memory. I haven’t messed with the original ones. But she now has a new set of memories in her nervous system to use as a focal point, as a basis for future things to occur, for future expectations. I’m not messing with her memories though because they are memories why should I do that? Does that help your question a bit more? A:

I don’t remember all of it but I remember part of it about expecting good things and I just feel that. I don’t know what you said. I’m not aware of what you said.

Igor: We’ll come to that I promise you. Q:

Thank you.

Igor: Okay guys let’s give her a nice round of applause, thank you so much for this and let’s release her back into the wild. There you go. Everyone is thinking like, I want to work with Angell now.

DOW Regression

Igor: So I’m going to walk you through the process very quickly. Do you guys want to have a go at this? Yes. No, yeah. Change my life forever why don’t you? Do you guys want to have an experience like Angell just did, yes or no? All:

Yes.

Igor: Okay so here is what we are going to do, it’s very quick it’s very easy. We’ll give you plenty of time so there is no stress on this one. Then we’ll call it a day just so you know what’s coming. Did you all see the boiler-plates in action at the start, yes? All:

Yes.

163 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: Important because we are now doing some more important work, hence we are going to put those in for the same reasons we discussed before. Did you all see a clear positive emotion being evoked? Yes. There was no ambiguity there was no doubt was there? Did you see the emotion getting stronger? Yes? Did you hear the instructions for moving backwards in time to an alternate experience, an earlier experience with the same emotion yes? All:

Yes.

Igor: So far you’ve done exactly that have you not, yes. Then instructions shifted slightly, which is to say to an earlier time before the age of ten, is that correct? All:

Yeah.

Igor: We dropped her right into the middle of it and you saw the effect of going straight to that would that be fair? All:

Yeah.

Igor: So far I have done thing other than what you’ve already done too, right? So here is the next part, we have little Jelly Bean down here. She is in the actual memory. So now I have to ask her to bring the adult back, to bring her awareness back into…that’s a skirt, there we go, am I regress, I don’t know. We have to bring her adult self back to have observations about the experience and why is not important right now. How do we do that? I’m going to count to three at the count of three you’ll be the adult Angell watching the scene like a memory which is really what it is. It’s really simple instructions wasn’t it? Did that step make sense? Moving up from here to the adult from the Jelly Bean to the Angell, yes? Easy? The next step is me the hypnotist, that’s me is having a dialogue with the adult. I will only talk to the adult directly. The only reason for me to talk to the child is if something is going seriously wrong, in this process you can do anything of course, right, but for the purpose of this process I want the adult and again tomorrow I will explain why. It’s not important for this purpose. I’m going to talk to the adult and what did I do? I asked for a specific kind of memory don’t I, what was it? Anyone remember? All:

Boredom.

164 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: Boredom. So this red place here is excitement isn’t it. She is obviously excited you can see that. So need to have a great place of boredom that occurred before the memory of excitement, because what we are doing now is we are going to start education her neurology, her unconscious mind, her nervous system her body. Whatever you want to call it, to not have boredom as part of the regular repertoire, it’s easier to be excited than to be bored. See where we are going with this? So we start with boredom because that’s what we want to start changing at this point. So once we’ve had that dialogue and we have established this, there is a clear indication of a journey, isn’t there? In fact I may even, I can’t recall entirely if I did or not, I may even have mentioned to Angell that this journey is going to take place, in other words go from one to the other. Once we’ve established the scene, so I’m still talking to the adult up here, once we’ve established the scene what do we do? That’s right we have the boredom, we have the excitement, the memories right next to each other. I’m going to have her drift into boredom, I’m going to orient her, hey little Jelly Bean, what are you doing. Oh nothing just coloring in, having a little bit of fun. Then once we’ve established that as an event, as an experience a general suggestion like time passes is enough to move through time into the memory we’ve already established, the exciting memory. There you are. How do we orient them to the exciting memory because we’ve already established it, any ideas? We use the orientation points that she gave us, what were they? Sitting on the stairs, Christmas morning, excited. Do I know any more than that? No, I don’t need to, because just by saying that time passes until you find yourself sitting on the stairs, on Christmas morning, and how excited she was feeling. I’m so excited, right? Because we have just revivified, gone right back to things she knows exactly where to go at this point. Does it make sense? Now what you’ve done at this point is you’ve created a link in neurology between the boredom and the excitement, why, what is the primary law of suggestion? I just said it. Association. Now you have boredom and excitement associated, they can’t help but work out on each other. So what do we do at this point? Any ideas? We do it again, we bring them back out. Back up, back to the adult Angell,

165 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 back to the therapist here or the hypnotist in this case, having a chat with the adult. So we are basically doing the same cycle again. What is that called? Conditioning isn’t it? But we are going to add some extra stuff in it to make it even better each time. Now that her neurology has kind of adapted and started putting these together into one experience overall, I want every level of her to have the same experience. So what we end up doing here is getting the adult over here to coach the child down here, to let the child expect that this is going to occur. So the whole thing looks like this. We have boredom, we have excitement, we have a loose connection from the original experience and now we have the adult coaching the child Jelly Bean. Letting Jelly Bean know that while she may be bored here excitement is coming. What does that do in this example? It put – exactly, it collapsed the whole memory. So now the excitement from the one overruns the boredom of the other. Because excitement is stronger than boredom, does that make sense? You could feel it just bleeding right over couldn’t you? Does this make sense as an idea? Once the child has accepted the idea – remember the adult is doing the coaching because the adult knows what that little child version of her needs to hear or needs to be told, because it’s her anyways. Once we’ve established the idea of it, we want to cement it in, how do we cement it in? Through the experience, with the instructions go back in here and run the whole scene again until we are back out. We’ve done another loop this time, we cement the memories together even more fully, do you see how that works? Of course the positive emotion is the one that starts washing into the boredom of the other. It eradicates it, in the words of our friend over here whoever he was, it replaces the boredom. We replaced, we took out the boredom and we replaced it with excitement. What happens to a little child who is excited for two days solid? It’s going to intensity isn’t it? Especially if you’ve got your H+ and wondering out loud, I wonder what’s going to happen. It’s going to get better and

166 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 did it? Oh yes. Do you understand this is a cycle so far, yes? Can we have a microphone over here just stand up so we can get it to you. Q:

Just for clarity is the adult coaching the excited little one or the one in the bored state?

Igor: You are quite right, this is the more accurate version of this, let me do this in a more accurate pictogram here. So we are here so far, we have bored Jelly Bean, so we have grey Jelly Bean and we have red Jelly Bean. Then we have blue Angell, oh hello. You didn’t put on any weight that’s just me. Angell coaches the bored child because you want the bored child to have the cognitive commitment to excitement don’t we? That’s where the change is going to occur isn’t it. So we are going to coach the child, so that we can connect this memory and then bring it back up again. Then have another discussion between the hypnotist and the subject. Does that whole loop make sense to you? It’s really the same loop that we made back here again, only more intense. What do we do at that point? We do it again, why, because it’s nice. They may as well have our optimal experience at this point. Now if you want to add some extra things in there you can add again more layers on top. What makes a problem, a problem? Remember it’s your thinking about the problem that makes it more problematic, doesn’t it? If something traumatic – remember my friend with the car crash, she had no time to think about it, how could she be afraid of it? There was no phobia being created. The minor car crash the one that did not injure her in any way, is what freaks her out. Why, because she spent weeks re-living it and scaring herself, right? So if this is true why not use it to our advantage? Get a cognitive commitment. Get them to put more thoughts on the situation. So what do you do? You just take the adult and you are the hypnotist and you talk to them. How do you adult, how do you Angell feel about little Jelly Bean over there being so bored but doing such a great job of being excited? The moment she starts approving, oh what a special little girl, what a great little girl, she did a good job. Did you hear these some of those things? That’s going to now add into the whole mix.

167 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 What was once good if not great is now becoming amazing. Because even more stuff, positive stuff is being added to the mix. You see how that works? Each cycle of course will cement it in by dropping into the experience, running right through it and coming back up again. Each cycle intensifies it. There is more thoughts, more positive thoughts, more positive emotions, running through the whole experience. It intensifies, more talking, more thinking about it, more beliefs about it, inducing it, running right through it again. It intensifies and becomes a self-fulfilling prophecy because you expect it to get better and it did. Do you see how that works? We did may three or four of those cycles, each one just something a little different. Then how did we end it up any ideas? Right, so we just have the final piece which is the kind of a fun piece, here is the adult, here is now little Jelly Bean she is no longer grey. She can’t be grey anymore. So we now have the last little coaching chat between Angell and Jelly Bean and as a result of this we are going to ask Angell to give little Jelly Bean a hug and bring her inside.It’s a metaphoric or a symbolic reintegration isn’t it? Does it have to be done this way? Of course not, it’s just a simple way of doing it. Then we have little Jelly Bean growing up through the ages. So she becomes, she is eight years old, ten, 12. I’m counting up to mimic her lifespan and I know something is going to happen. I know she’s hit puberty she was not hitting puberty at eight years old that’s very rare. I know that when she hits around 20 years old she starts having to meet the real world, either by going to university and having that big shift, or by going to work and that’s a big shift as well. I know it’s going to happen around that age group. If I knew more about Angell, if we had a chat beforehand, I could put more of those pieces of the puzzle in. You got married, you fell in love, you did this, you did that and we could intensify the whole thing even further. Constantly as this whole process is going on, I’m reminding her of the excitement she experienced. So that as she reintegrates, as the child grows up within her and becomes one whole woman again, it’s with a new set of memories, it’s the memories of excitement. Which is why she is still buzzing which you are, because that’s what’s now expected – that’s what’s inside her neurology make sense?

168 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Then of course we just finished it up, came back and had a little chat, the whole congratulations, well done, well good work and so on, we’re pretty much done. As a process you understand all the steps, not necessarily the sequence yet, you understand each step and why we did it. Now would you like to have a sequence laid out for you step by step so you can just do one step then forget about it and do the next step and forget about it and so on, would that be useful to you? All:

Yeah.

Igor: It’s what your manuals are for, on page 56 of your manual. Just stand up and get a microphone over here, can we have some mics over here folks, just stand up if you need a mic. Q:

Clarifying question you did say that the therapist is not at any time talking to the younger child?

Igor: Yeah there’s no point, there is no reason for it. Q:

Okay just checking.

Igor: Can you pass it over to the gentleman next to you as well. Q:

One thing I’m curious just is the pleasant moment of the experience. Then you said to make up all the adult, you can create just normal adult and can coach them. Why do you create the bored adult, just curious?

Igor: Bored adult or bored child? Q:

Bored adult.

Igor: At what point, you mean during the integration here? Q:

Yeah just.

Igor: You mean at this point here when? Q:

No just to go back to the adult that is bored.

Igor: The adult wasn’t bored the child was bored. Q:

Oh, right?

169 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: Boredom is grey, that’s the child that’s little Jelly Bean being bored two days before Christmas. Q:

Oh that’s my misunderstanding.

Igor: Fine okay, you are right, you don’t want to bore the adult. This is a new induction. It’s the life sucks induction, are you ready for this one? Thank you for clarifying that. Okay so if you look at page 56, if you haven’t got a manual please just share with someone next to you and just work with someone there. Step 1, induce trance get a genuine positive emotion. We have covered this one now yes and regress is that easy. You orient them fully who, what, when, where, how old. Inside out those sort of questions. Easy. Step 2 yes? Part B of step 2 bounce back two or three times then you bounce back once as a test bounce. The second time I just went straight back to the oldest memory before the age of ten just because it saves time, right? Sometimes you may need a little bit extra but really it’s fine to go straight to it, make sense? No question at this point, yes. Dissociated back to adult, what that basically means is that, at the count of three you will be big Angell, I use big and little until I know what the labels are for the different child and adult people. Big Angell watching the scene remembering that scene all the way back there, with your eyes close so don’t think that it’s an instruction to come out of trance. One, two, three big Angell watching that little girl over there, does she understand step 3? Yes? If you look at 3A that is the first coaching conversation, isn’t it, it’s the chat I’m having right here with big Angell about the whole boredom thing. I’m establishing that first grey border for boredom. I’m establishing this by having a chat right here. Do you understand 3A, yes everyone clear on that step? I’m not installing because it’s already there in the memory, I’m searching for it. I’m saying basically – because everyone has been bored at some point. If they haven’t been bored at some point there is no point doing this induction. Stay with boredom right now, specifically with boredom and I’ll explain tomorrow why

170 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 we are sticking with boredom. I’ll tell you right now in fact, it’s because it’s safe. We are not looking to do therapy, we are giving someone a gift right now. We are not looking to fix anything. Boredom is a neutral state. If they start selecting something that was negative, do not do that, because you open the possibility of having to do therapy and we are not doing this yet. We are learning to navigate through people’s memories that’s all. Does that help? So it’s a gift you are giving to someone whilst developing a skill set that you will use tomorrow. Very quickly, just take this so everyone can hear you. Q:

Is part 3 where you would then ask them to think of a time before when they were bored?

Igor: Yep that’s right up here, this is part three right there, you are the hypnotist talking to the big – the adult watching that scene and saying hey, you realize you were bored before this – Whatever this Christmas morning. Q:

Some times.

Igor: Yeah. Q:

Okay.

Igor: When was it, was it ten minutes ago. Was it an hour before, a day before, a week before, how long before? I don’t care how long it was, right? I’ve had up to a month, which is fine. I say great of course she didn’t realize what was coming that’s why she was bored, it’s a natural assumption. So if you were to experience this boredom and go all the way to the excitement wouldn’t that be a wonderful experience to have? So I‘m preparing them to want to do that journey again. Okay does that make sense to everyone, is everyone clear on the idea of 3A? So 3A and 4 really is pretty much the same without positive emotion, I mean it’s boring. Right? So 3A and 4 is really the same issue, they’ve been kind of combined together. I think they have been mixed around, but you get the general idea. Yes? Not confusing anyway? So now let’s move on to step 5, everyone clear to move to step 5? Explain to the adult the boring to exciting loop. So what I’m explaining to them there is what we

171 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 just talked about. That if you were to step in here and get bored and have the whole experience wouldn’t that be a great experience to have, knowing that it’s coming. So we are explaining it to the adult because they are going to experience it for the first time. Do you get step 5? She’s already smiling because she remembers it now. So 5A is all about reminding them that the good feeling will intensify precisely because the adult already knows it’s going to happen. What have I done? I put my parameters together, so the unconscious mind connects them, makes sense? Can we move on to Step 6 everyone clear on that? Get the child, the first part of the loop, run the whole loop, boring to exciting. So basically we are doing this chain, they are stepping in being bored, time passes, wow look at that, look at how excited you are. Come on back let’s talk about that. It’s a really easy loop to run. Easy. It’s just lots of little steps and once you do this it’ll be easier. So are you good with Step 6? Step 7, reframe the adult. That’s basically the coaching chat that we talked about right here. I’m talking to the adult and I’m getting the adult to prepare for coaching the child here which is 7B. Then in 7C, or step 8 this happens. So this is step 7 here and Step 8 it actually does it. So you are coaching the adult to tell the child. Then the adult actually tells the child, hey look, amazing stuff is going to happen. Do you get step 7 and 8? Yes. Then you may want to write this in, we haven’t necessarily written it in, Step 9 which says run cycle three to five times. Basically once you’ve coached them you are going to step into it again. Now that you coach them you’ll step in, run the scene come back, talk. In, out, back, done, in through back. You are doing that two, three, four times to really intensify it. Does Step 9 make sense to you guys? Any question so far. Step by step you understand it is that correct? So please stand up we’ll get a mic to you guys, just stand up and we’ll get a mic to you guys. Q:

So sorry just to clarify when, from the observing adult is she stepping back into being at the top of the stairs fully associated?

Igor: Yes, she goes – exactly so she’ll become. You talk to her as an observing adult then you go three, two, one, be little Jelly Bean. Hey little Bean, how is it going, great, time is passing, look how exciting, its Christmas, one, two, three adult back in the room. How was that? Wasn’t that amazing? Great. Tell her that it’s even

172 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 going to be even better this time. You want to do it one more time? Sure great three, two, one. Hey little Beanie what’s happening now? I’m so excited. Of course you are because you know what’s coming don’t you? Then time passes you are at the stairs its Christmas morning, hey you may as well open your presents. One, two, three adult you see I’m just running that loop several times, is that a clear loop to run yes? Please go ahead stand up so we can get a mic to you. Q:

Okay this is just a small distinction. When the adult is – when you are having a conversation with the adult about coaching the child, it sounds like then what you actually have the adult do is just step into the little bored child and because the coaching has already happened on some level and its integrating into the bored child. Then she moved to the happy child and then pops out.

Igor: Exactly, that’s exactly 100% on the money. Easy, this is a lot easier to do than to talk about by way, you realize this, right? Stand up so we can get a mic over here. Q:

I have a question at number five, explain to adult boring to exciting loop. In my brain it says that I don’t see you telling the adult, hey this is a loop you don’t need to do this. So can you like slowly go to number five for me?

Igor: Yes. Q:

Thank you.

DOW Role Play

Igor: Would you like to come up for this? This is easiest if you come up, give him a round of applause, is that okay with you? What I’m going to do for you guys now is we are going to do the same process again only instead of this as an induction, so I’m not paying attention to any hypnotic elements, you’ll role play and you’ll pretend basically and I will walk you through it again, so you see all the steps and actions will that be useful to you guys. It will probably answer your question best of all because you will experience it this way, right? All I require from you is a

173 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 little memory. If you can’t remember that far back invent something it’s irrelevant it’s a role play. Okay let’s test mic, can you say hello? Q:

Hello.

Igor: Fantastic so we are walking slowly through my set up induction I say close your eyes trance there we go easy, right? Emotion comes strong he looks happy, happy includes – there you go he’s got smiling. Right, good role playing. Are we good so far? All:

Yes.

Igor: Now we’ve got an emotion lets regress what do I say? Count of three, at the count of three you will be at an earlier time where you felt this good. One two three earlier time. Where are you? Are you inside or outside? Q:

Inside.

Igor: Are you alone with others? Q:

With others.

Igor: Great is it day time or night time? Q:

Day time.

Igor: Fantastic so we’ve got the first step of the regression, right? Easy? Great let’s do this one more time only this time you are going to go way, way back in the past till sometime before the age of 10 do you understand what I mean by that? Q:

Yes.

Igor: Great one two three, go to an earlier memory before the age of 10 and be there now. Q:

Yes.

Igor: Are you inside or outside. Q:

Inside.

Igor: Excellent alone or with others?

174 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

With others.

Igor: With – day time or night time? Q:

Day time.

Igor: Great, how old are you? Q:

I’m five.

Igor: Fantastic, have we hit the second point here? We’ve done the major regression back to the child great. Now we need to pull him out of that, okay. This time I’m going to count from one to three, you will be the adult, let’s have a look at your name Ben Winner looking at little Ben Winner in that memory. One two three, adult Ben Winner sitting in the chair with me here and remembering a little boy, a five year old boy over there in a memory can you do that? Q:

Yes.

Igor: Great so now we have the association, right, which will be step three disassociate back to adult. Easy? Feel good so far? Yeah you are role playing his answer is yes very good. Are you following the process so far yes? Q:

So right now I’m the adult or the child?

Igor: You are now the adult. Q:

Looking at the child.

Igor: Just like this and you are remembering the child, like you are watching on a TV screen. Q:

Okay.

Igor: Right, so you are the adult right now with me and you are watching a TV screen of a little five year old boy having some pleasant memory back there. Easy? Q:

Okay.

Igor: Great and it’s a pleasant memory, right? Q:

Right.

175 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: So now I’m going to talk to you as the adult and I want to ask you Ben Winner that little boy over there in that little TV screen or that memory he is having a pretty good time isn’t he? Q:

Right?

Igor: But you and I both know that before he is having this good time at some point maybe 10 minutes ago, maybe an hour ago, maybe 10 days ago who knows he was bored. It was nothing – it’s just like bored nothing really going on you know this, right? Q:

Yes, half an hour ago.

Igor: Half an hour ago exactly. Right, we have the time now don’t we? So what was happening half an hour ago for him? Q:

He was bored.

Igor: He was bored. Where was he? Q:

Staring into space sitting on the swing.

Igor: There you go so swimming pool staring into space, right? Q:

I’m sitting on the swing.

Igor: Oh the swing I’m sorry. So he is sitting on the swing over there staring into space kind of bored, right? And in half an hour you and I both know that something amazing is going to happen, right? Where will he be in half an hour? Q:

He will be with friends.

Igor: He will be friends great. So we have established the two time periods haven’t we? Boredom, excitement for want of a better word alright? He is still the adult, we are still talking to the adult right now. This all happened in a TV screen somewhere alright, it’s a metaphor. So what we are going to do now? What do you think will happen if you stepped into little bored Ben Winner sitting on that swing knowing that good things are going to happen? Wouldn’t that something worthwhile getting past the boredom into the excitement?

176 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

Yeah I will tell him.

Igor: Don’t tell him yet. Q:

Okay.

Igor: I want you to surprise him. Q:

Okay.

Igor: Shall we surprise him? Q:

Yes.

Igor: So we are going to surprise him this way. I’m going to count from three down to one. At the count of one you will step into that little boy on the swing being bored, I’ll talk to him for a little while and then time will pass and he will get excited with his friends. Sound cool? Q:

Okay great.

Igor: Three two one step inside, be little boy, hey little boy, how he is it going on that swing? Q:

Okay.

Igor: Okay not so good. Time passes and now you are with your friends and hey hurrah things are fantastic aren’t they? Q:

Yeah.

Igor: Wow one two three big Ben Winner in the room watching that TV again. Q:

Okay.

Igor: Right, how was that? Was that pretty cool? Q:

Yeah cool.

Igor: Of course it was. See the coaching going on again? Now as cool as that was, how much better would it be if little Ben Winner sitting on that swing orienting into the boredom, what if he knew that in 30 minutes time his friends are going to

177 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 come round and he is going to have a whale of a time. How do you think he would feel then? Q:

He would be excited.

Igor: He would wouldn’t he? Q:

Yes.

Igor: Well why don’t you tell him, get him excited in the way that only you can. So now you Ben Winner talk to a TV Ben Winner little boy over there. Tell him what's going on. He tells him what happens, of course the little kid gets excited doesn’t he? Q:

Yeah.

Igor: Great you are doing a great job. Now that he knows don’t you think it’s worth experiencing it? Q:

Yes.

Igor: So at the count of one he will step inside… little Ben Winner on the swings only this time he knows it’s coming, right? Q:

He already knows.

Igor: Exactly. Q:

Okay.

Igor: So three two one step inside on the swing hey little boy on the swing how is it going? Q:

Great.

Igor: You are excited aren’t you because that’s going to happen you know that, right? Q:

Yeah my friends are coming.

Igor: Yeah, half an hour passes they are there, while you are having a whale of a time, right?

178 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

Right?

Igor: One two three big Ben Winner in the room watching the TV screen again. How was that pretty cool, right? Q:

Yes.

Igor: Did it get better, of course it did, right? It will get better trust me. We are role playing, right, I’m just moving you through the steps. Is this all making sense? Is it all easy to do? Is this making like step by step sense progression now? Q:

Yes.

Igor: Now I can do it again if I wanted to each time adding more. Should I do one more loop just adding an extra layer of things? Q:

Yes.

Igor: Not that you need to its just you may as well because it’s good practice, right? So how do you feel about that little boy having done that? Having transformed boredom to excitement so quickly? Q:

Yeah it’s magic for him.

Igor: Its magic for him isn’t it? Q:

Yes.

Igor: And you feel proud, I’m leading a little bit here, don’t you feel proud isn’t he a special little kid to be able to do that? Q:

Yeah.

Igor: Yeah well go ahead and tell him. Q:

I go and tell him again.

Igor: Tell him again he that he is magic. Tell him you are proud of him that he is doing amazing stuff and that all that stuff, so by talking to the kid now he is linking those emotions back into the child, right? Q:

So now I go and tell him?

179 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: You go and tell him go ahead. So now he is doing the conversation. I’m going to wait until that conversation has taken place. So now he talked to – have you talked to the little boy? Q:

Yes.

Igor: And isn’t he more exciting now? Q:

Yeah he said, how come you talked to me twice?

Igor: It’s the crazy magic of hypnosis. It can happen, right? There is a logical thing going on here, but it can happen. With hypnosis anything is possible, lucky you. So at the count of one step inside little boy in the swing again and experience it all over. Ready for this three two one, little boy hey how are you doing on the swing? Yeah exciting. Exactly all the way 30 minutes. All the friends are coming now one two three back in the room watching the TV again, wasn’t that amazing? Q:

Yes.

Igor: So we’ve done the cycles have you seen two, three four of those cycles going on? Is it pretty obvious now? Is it obvious to you as well? Q:

Yeah.

Igor: Excellent now we are coming to the finale. In the finale we need to reintegrate, bring it all back inside, right? So what I want you to do is bring that little boy out of the TV screen and stand him in front of you alright? Now I want you to tell him how proud you are, how amazed you are that he’s done all this stuff because you know he transformed boredom to excitement that’s a good thing isn’t it? Q:

He did it.

Igor: He did it because he experienced it. You told him you helped him but he did all the work didn’t he? Q:

Okay I told him and he did it.

Igor: Exactly so you can be pretty proud of that I presume though? Q:

Yes I am.

180 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: So tell him tell him how you feel about him. Tell him… Q:

Yeah he is smart guy.

Igor: Smart guy exactly. Q:

Yeah.

Igor: You see self esteem building up and so on, right? Q:

Yeah.

Igor: Plus all the emotion he feels by doing that while he is projecting self esteem onto himself which is all good, right? Now I want you to do one more thing, tell that little boy about all the good things that are going to happen in his life going forward in the future, because he doesn’t know it yet does he? Q:

Yeah.

Igor: But you do. Q:

That’s right?

Igor: Because you have experienced it. Q:

Yes.

Igor: Now at any point in his life when he is tempted to be bored, well how can he be bored now because he knows that just a few days, hour, minutes away some amazing thing is going to happen because you know it’s happened already, right? Q:

You’re right?

Igor: So tell him so he understands it and watch him get even more excited, right? Do you see how we have completed the loop so that we’ve now got the parameters between boredom and excitement for his whole lifespan yes? Q:

Okay so the third loop is for the whole life span?

Igor: So the final loop – this is now – now we are at point number 10, right? Q:

Okay.

181 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: So is there integration? It’s the whole life span, you are telling him you are proud and good things are going to happen. No need to be bored again because there will be excitement. Is this making sense yes? Q:

Right?

Igor: Now I want you to give that little boy a big hug, bring him inside, you feel him getting inside you and growing up with that sense of excitement. From age five to six and ten, 12, 13 years old. All those changes that start happening in the teenage years, 14, 15, 16, 17. But this time instead of being bored in all those phases, he is always excited because he knows something good is just around the corner does he? 18, 20, 25 all those big changes that happened during manhood going out into the world, making a living, making things happen. 30, 40 all the way up until you are back here in the room with me, in 2011 some time. Sitting on a chair, on a boat having had an amazing experience, isn’t that something, you just done the whole thing congratulations, start to finish. Q:

Thank you.

Igor: Does that help? Q:

Yeah.

Igor: Was this useful? Yes. Give him a round of applause you are free to go. Did it answer all your questions I presume yes? Hopefully everyone is cool with that as well. We have a choice folks because it’s getting on a little bit. It’s now half past six and I would like to give you a good time to do it. So a good ... you only need about ten minutes to do it, but I would like to give you 20 so you don’t feel rushed. So you have a couple of choices. We could either stay late and do them, I will be here for you for that. Or we could do one way right now and you can come in early tomorrow and do the second half before we begin. I promise to have the doors open for you half an hour early so you can do the second half here in the morning. Or we can do them all the morning. Are you guys a little bit fatigued and that sort of stuff?

182 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 I figured as much, so I’m going to try and give you guys the option to do this. What I would like you to do though, what I would like you to do folks tonight what I want you to do is specially page 56. I want you to look through those instructions again and rehearse during this whole process, is that okay with you guys? All:

Yes.

Igor: The next thing I want you guys to do is to look through the whole manual, the whole manual. You should recognize pretty much everything in this, except the section covering the 12 steps of Regression Therapy forwards. We haven’t covered those things yet, you can look at them if you want but it will be of no value because we haven’t covered it yet. Everything up to page, I will come to you in second if I may ... Everything up to page 64 you should be very familiar with. If you have any questions about that please ask about that in the morning after you’ve done this exercise. What we will do is, we will open the doors half an hour early. I will expect you to just come in with your partner do one half of the exercise, do the other half of the exercise. I won’t do any starting or warming up, you will just do the exercise. Then at 9:15 so we’ll start a little bit later but you will have done the exercise by then. At 9:15 I will begin the main session again and we’ll just roll on with the date, is that okay with you guys, does that work for you guys? Everyone cool with that? So we have a question here first do you want to stand up Jacob? J:

Igor isn’t hard when 3 and 4 swap because there is.

Igor: Yes we already talked about that point 3A and 4 should really be the same, it’s just been a missed typo in the way it’s been formatted. Sorry. J:

Okay.

Igor: There’s a question here as well can we just have a mic here. Q:

Do we keep the same partner tomorrow morning or do we just see if we find a partner when we come in?

Igor: Keep the same partner. So arrange to meet each other and do it together. You may as well work with what you’ve already started building up, so you are more

183 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 familiar with it. Let’s have your attention folks please, we do all your ending in a moment folks, so we can just finish up then we can release you guys to the wild and so on. Do you have any questions about the process right now? Yes or no? It’s pretty clear isn’t it? There is a lot of steps, there are little steps but they are all easy, is that correct? Now I realize you’ve worked hard today and I appreciate that. You are going to push that extra mile and get the benefit of that, your instructors, your assistants here are still donating the time for you guys tonight. So grab your assistant and at the very least, just talk to them for like a minute and say here is the biggest thing I have got out of it today and you can leave if you want. However I would encourage you to stick around a little bit. Because we have some very cool exercises, drills and stuff you’ve already done to help cement some more of the stuff you have. It’s an opportunity we’ve presented for you guys to help you out, you don’t have to take it but it will definitely take you forwards further, make sense? So what remains for me is to thank you all for working so hard today and I’ll see you guys in the morning.

184 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2

DVD 16 – The Ultimate 12 Step Regression Therapy Demonstration

Demo Selection

Igor: So what I’d like to do now is I’d like to do one of two possible demos, and it all depends on what we have in the group here. I’d like to show you how to use the skills that you’ve just acquired, how to use them more therapeutically, okay. To do this I need a specific kind of subject, either as a role-play demo or my preference is a live subject, but I need the right kind of subject so I don’t complicate things for you and kind of lose it on the way, does that kind of make sense to you guys? Here is what I am looking for, I am looking for a volunteer who has a problem, (gasp) shock horror. The kind of problem I want for this and it will make more sense later on today when we go through some other things, is someone who has a medium size problem, when you think about it, you feel the emotion and relatively strongly, but it’s something that if you didn’t deal with it right now it really wouldn’t be the end of the world. In other words, you’re not married either way if you don’t change it. Here is the kind of thing I’m talking about. If you have a fear of heights and just thinking about heights right now makes you get a little antsy and nervous, it’s a great example, right? So fears in general are good for things like that. There can be other examples as well, but really the fears are the easiest ones to demonstrate this cleanly, so you guys can see what’s going on. Who has something like that in mind? Excellent, can we just have my assistants with the mic come around. I will just have a quick chat with you guys to see which one fits best for what we’re doing here.

185 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Just stand up if you have a fear or a strong negative emotion, which whether or not you change it is okay with you – so go ahead. Q:

I have a fear of large crowds.

Igor: A fear of large crowds. Well we can test that one, right? Q:

Easy.

Igor: How are you doing right now when you think about being a large crowd in the way you do, what happens to you? Q:

I have to force myself to overcome it to be in here and then I’m alright after I force myself through it.

Igor: So right now as you think about it, forgetting the forcing or doing it, if you think about being in a large crowd, what actually happens? Q:

I get real nervous, I start perspiring.

Igor: So you’re starting to get a little nervous, now? Okay, that’s good potential. Let’s move onto the next person. Q:

I am afraid of spiders and cockroaches, and insects like that.

Igor: Okay, that’s a classic phobia. So what happens when you think about now, like a spider maybe crawling on your hand or something, what happens to you? Thank you, next person? We will come over here in a second, you know what, go ahead. Q:

I have a fear of swimming pool drains, to the extent that when I went on the Ghost Hunt there is that pool down there that’s all creepy and it doesn’t even have water. I was more afraid of the drain than of ghosts popping out.

Igor: Oh wow, so just swimming pool drains themselves? Q:

Yes.

Igor: So when you think about swimming pool drains or the one you saw the other night, what happens to you? Q:

I just get really nervous and anxious.

186 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: Is it happening right now, can you feel that happening now? Q:

Now that I am really thinking about it, yeah.

Igor: Excellent very good, thank you. Let’s bring the mic forward again. Q:

I get a little bit nervous around people in the sense that I am worried I will say the wrong thing or do the wrong thing and then my cover is blown.

Igor: Okay got it, and when you think about it now, what happens, like putting yourself in that kind of situation? Q:

My cover is blown.

Igor: Thank you, just pass it back a little bit, this one here. Q:

I am scared of regression.

Igor: You are scared of regression? Q:

I am like shaking right now.

Igor: Okay, well we will have to pause on that one for a moment because we are doing regression right now, I could test it really well. But how do you deal with that by the way, just out of curiosity, how do you deal with that, any ideas? Exactly, you work with a different thing, because why make them confront the very thing they are fearing, I do the regression afterwards to help them demonstrate that it’s actually fine, but it doesn’t fit the actual regression work because you would have to go through a little bit of hell to get there in the first place, right? Q:

Right.

Igor: Perfect, thank you though. Over here we had a microphone. Q:

I am afraid of snakes.

Igor: Okay, so when you think about a snake right now. Thank you, next person. Q:

Mine is actually snakes, too.

Igor: Say again?

187 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

Mine is actually snakes, too.

Igor: Okay, so what happens when you think about snakes? Q:

I don’t. I don’t think about them because I will literally pass out.

Igor: If you think of a little one way in the distance and it’s that strong, okay, that’s good. Let me ask you one more thing to follow up on that. Not thinking about snakes, just the idea that you may have to think about snakes, what is that doing to you right now? Okay, let it go, a little bit of release. Let it flow, look at me, a little more – look at me, just let it flow. Let it flow way back in the distance. There you go, now you’re coming back – welcome back. Keep coming, all the way back. Do you mind if I ask you how old you are? You probably do in public, right? Q:

42.

Igor: You’re 42, excellent. Breathe, there you go. Every time you breathe you know you’re safe, how are you doing? Back, so just settle down, you know what that chair does, don’t you. There you go – welcome back, thank you. Okay this would be great except that, it may require me to do some things that will complicate things for you guys, so I am very tempted but we’ll see where it goes with that. Go ahead. Q:

Flying.

Igor: Okay, so when you think about flying now what happens? Q:

I go get a double at the bar.

Igor: You get what? Q:

I always go to the bar and get a double so I can get on the plane.

Igor: Okay, so when you think about it now about going on a plane, what happens to you inside you? Q:

I get kind of scared in here, and in here.

Igor: Beautiful thank you, anyone else?

188 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

I have a fear of the sensation of free-falling so rollercoaster’s and things like that.

Igor: Okay, so when you think about that sensation, like maybe you’re on a rollercoaster, what happens to you now? Q:

I feel out of control.

Igor: You feel out of control, okay, thank you, and then bring yourself back in control before you sit down of course. Q:

Okay, it’s not a flying, but it’s being stuck or trapped on an airplane sitting on the runway.

Igor: So what happens when you think about that now? Q:

The air goes away and I can’t breathe.

Igor: Thank you, and right in the back again. Wow, you guys have some interesting things going on. I really appreciate it, because I want to make sure that the demo you get here is one that’s really useful to you guys, does that make sense? Q:

Being a driver or a passenger in a car that’s on a cliff of any kind.

Igor: Like when you’re driving in Colorado or something like that, right? Q:

Yeah or Big Sur or anywhere on the coast.

Igor: So what happens? Q:

My legs start shaking.

Igor: Is it happening now, when you think about it now what happens? Q:

I want to do something.

Igor: You want to stop the car, right? Q:

Yes, get out and run to the hill.

Igor: I understand, thank you – and just way in the way and we’ll make a decision. Q:

I am really small it’s easy to miss me.

189 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: Say again? Q:

I said I’m really small it’s easy to miss me. It’s actually a fear of rejection when I’m not in a position of authority.

Igor: So when you’re not or when you are? Q:

When I’m not. If I’m in a position of authority I have absolutely no problem approaching a stranger.

Igor: So just like in a normal situation, when you think of a scenario you have mind, what happens now? Q:

Everything inside just goes – blah.

Igor: Beautiful, thank you. And then we’ll go the lady here and then we’ll go right to the back. Q:

I’m afraid of speaking in front of people.

Igor: Okay, well done, you’ve just solved it. I’m kidding-I’m kidding, so what happens right now as you’re standing here. What’s happening? Q:

Um.

Igor: Thank you, next person last person over here. Q:

Flying, I haven’t flown in over 20 years.

Igor: You haven’t flown in 20 years. Q:

Thanks to hypnosis I got out here, but even now, I think it’s rational but I think at some point in time I’m waiting for the plane to crash into another plane.

Igor: So what happens now when you think about getting on a plane and flying? Q:

Probably I’m thinking more about talking to you.

Igor: What’s actually happening inside of your body when you think about getting on a plane and flying? Q:

Anxious.

190 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: Okay. So here’s what I’m thinking. We can get adventurous and work with this charming young lady here. I warn you, there will be a lot more emotion involved, so you may lose some of the maneuvers in the content because the emotion will come out, right? The other version was, I think this gentleman over here had a nice strong reaction that we can work with, in terms of what we’re doing here, and it will be a nice clear demonstration as well. And over here, so there’s Tim over here, will be another great one again because again we’ve got the very clear physical reaction, so we can track what’s going through. So these three people, which would you guys rather see? So, let’s do this like the America’s Got Talent competition, would you stand up a second. If you’d like to see this demonstration, please stand up. Okay, sit yourselves down, you have friends. If you’d like to see this demonstration, please stand up, okay sit yourself down. Tim, stand up, if you’d like to see this one, okay. Are you willing to do this, is that okay with you – you don’t have to. This is about you, not about anyone else, right? Are you 100% sure? Okay come on up, give her a round of applause, sit up here. Can we have an assistant up here, please helping with the mic’s so we can organize all this. I have a mic here, it’s just we need to get us set up and stuff.

Regression Therapy Demo

Igor: Have a seat here. Don’t look so serious, you’ll be fine, have a seat. The first thing you should know whilst we are setting up is we won’t even begin until you are more than ready, okay. We won’t even get close to it until you’re more than ready, alright? The other thing you should know is once we have sat and started doing things well there are several things you should know:

191 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 1. If at any point you need a timeout, just say, we’ll have a timeout. It will be real easy and this is all about you. 2. Once we start, I will stay here no matter if it takes the whole day to make sure we get to the point where you feel safe, where you feel comfortable where everything is good. So if you decide you want to have a timeout we’ll pull you out, if you decide you want to end it, we’ll end it even if it’s early, right? Because this is about you, and if you decide to go all the way through I’ll think you’ll surprise yourself on how great this works. S:

This is something I have always. I can’t even really talk right now.

Igor: I realize. S:

This is something that I have always wanted to do, but I have just.

Igor: Right, I can see it. S:

I can’t…I have to be careful. I live in Redlands, which is in the Inland Empire.

Igor: Oh for sure. So here’s the thing, before we even begin. You realize the difference between like a tiger-trainer for example, or a lion tamer, they realize what they’re working with, don’t they? So there is a difference between being okay around a particular stimulus and doing things that are stupid, there’s a huge difference, right? S:

Yes.

Igor: And there are lots of people who live in your area and they are cautious without having to be afraid. So as long as we understand the distinction which of course you do, then we are good to go because whatever the fear is that you have, is no longer helping you or serving you at that point, does that make sense? S:

Yes it does.

Igor: Exactly. So before we even begin, what I would like you to do is jut close your eyes for a minute and calm down. Close your eyes and find something inside of you that’s positive that has nothing to do with any of this. There you go, that’s

192 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 right, no, the other way. Something really nice, something that makes you smile, there you go. What’s happening over there, what’s that? S:

I was thinking that my husband is over there watching out for me.

Igor: Yes he is. S:

And I have you who is willing to do this for me.

Igor: So you have two people who have your back, right? S:

Yes.

Igor: That’s a good thing isn’t it, it’s a comforting thought, isn’t it? So whilst you’re sitting on that chair thinking that thought, you know you’re safe don’t you? S:

Yes.

Igor: You really know you’re safe, don’t you? I want you to feel the chair and feel how safe you are. Feel how safe you are, because no matter what people undertake, provided they do it in a safe way, they have achieved amazing things, haven’t they? Can you imagine what the first man in space must have felt like, right. But he knew he was safe, because everything had been tested before. You know what I mean by that, don’t you? So just sit there for a little while and feel how safe you really are. You are doing a great job Stephanie. Is it okay if I touch you here on the shoulder from time to time, you’re doing good. So we will just set the scene a little bit, we will have to set an extra scene of course because you can see this is an extra amount of emotion, right? Now of course, whilst she’s sitting there and enjoying the safety that you have here, there you go. Knowing that two people are there for you no matter what happens, and there are many good things in your life. I’d like you to know that you will hear sounds from time to time, but you and I both know that they have no importance because they will just help you to finally do this thing for yourself that has been of great importance to you, hasn’t it?

193 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 That’s right. My voice however will go with you, no matter where you go, it will guide you safely throughout this experience, no matter what happens it will stay with you and it will make sure that you always end up somewhere safe and somewhere good. You know what I mean by that, don’t you? S:

Yes.

Igor: You’ve had that experience already, have you not? S:

Yes.

Igor: That’s right. Just breathe a little bit and realize that already your unconscious mind is doing something for you, you can feel something happen in the background, can’t you? It’s not complete yet, I know, but something is beginning isn’t it? That’s the process of your mind preparing itself to help you through this task. You know what the best part is? As strong as the emotion was a moment ago, and it was pretty strong wasn’t it? That’s how intense the relief will be when you get through it. Something to look forward to, isn’t it? S:

Yes.

Igor: So I want to do something in a moment and you will tell me when you are ready for this, okay? In a moment, I will present a signal to you, but not before you ask for it. When that signal comes you will have some of that fear come up, it will not be the whole amount. You will have enough that you absolutely know that you are there, do you understand what I mean by that? We will be able to follow that fear back and it will move you all the way back to a real early time, probably even before you were 10 or 7 years old. I don’t know where we’ll land, nor do you, but the point is it will take us somewhere like that. For a moment it will get intense, however as soon as we land I will help you, pull you back out, you will come right back out and the emotion will be like there is a glass panel between you and whatever happened. So it will only be a flash, kind of like when someone gets an injection or something, it will be a flash and it’s gone. Do you understand what I mean by that? S:

Yes.

194 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: You get to choose when we begin. And you need to know that that flash will be brief and then it will recede, and from that point forward it’s going to get easier and easier and easier, you understand what I mean, don’t you? S:

Yes.

Igor: So why don’t you just prepare yourself a little bit. S:

I’m scared.

Igor: I know you are. Just pause, we aren’t even going to begin now. We aren’t even going to begin, just let it off to one side. Let it off to one side, because before we begin, I’d like for your unconscious mind to give you a gift. To give you a gift, do you know what that gift is? There you go, it’s already starting there you go. I want to give you a gift, a signal that you know it’s onboard, because it really knows how to do this stuff already, how else could you be so afraid now, right? So I want you to, your unconscious mind to give you a gift where some unusual sense of comfort develops in an unexpected place to show you that no matter what happens, that’s right, no matter what happens you’ll be safe and we can pause this at any point. Just like playing pause on a video recorder, you know what I mean? So just scan your body up and down and tell me when you’ve found that. An unusual or unexpected sense of comfort, there, where is that? S:

My ear, because I can hear you.

Igor: It’s in your ear isn’t it. That’s pretty unexpected isn’t it? S:

Yes.

Igor: In fact, it’s both unusual and unexpected. What does that tell you? S:

That I’m unusual.

Igor: I think most people are. Do you want to know what that tells me? S:

What?

195 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: That your unconscious mind is right on point, that’s it right on your side, because you can have chosen something unusual or unexpected, it chose both, right? S:

Yes.

Igor: So I’m guessing some part of you knows how important this journey you’re about to take is, right? S:

Yes.

Igor: And that part of you is taking care of you, isn’t it? S:

Yes.

Igor: How else would you have had that signal? That’s right, knowing you have that on your side, and to be honest with you that is even more important than having your husband or even myself on your side, that’s the thing that will get you through absolutely anything. You know what I mean by that, don’t you? S:

Yes.

Igor: How’s it feel to have that? S:

Wonderful.

Igor: It does, doesn’t it? Notice how that fear, it’s still there and you can still feel the physical reactions, but it doesn’t impact on you much now, knowing that’s there for you, isn’t it? S:

That’s right, it’s not impacting me at all.

Igor: Exactly, your body can feel the fear but your mind can be free to know that everything will progress right as it should. You understand what I mean now, right? S:

Yes.

Igor: So prepare yourself and then you let me know when you’re ready to begin the process of moving back, knowing that that flash will happen and as soon as that recedes, that’s going to be like pulling the stopper out of the sink and letting the water drain away.

196 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 S:

Okay.

Igor: Yeah. S:

Yeah.

Igor: There is no hurry at all, take all the time in the world, because your mind it’s pretty much half way there already, believe it or not. S:

Okay, I’m ready.

Igor: Are you ready? So I’m touching the shoulder right here. The next time you feel this touch the emotion will start arising up, not in any way that is too much for you, it will go right to the point where you can handle it. So when you feel that touch the next time, the emotion will rise, I will ask you to drift back to an early remember, right to the earliest one, maybe seven maybe six, who knows, something in that range. You won’t know, you’ll just experience it. Once that’s happened, I’ll bring you right back out and the worst will be over. Do you understand what I mean? Are you ready for this? S:

Yes.

Igor: This is exciting because once the worst is over that’s it, you realize that, don’t you? Are you ready for it now, so go ahead. Feel that emotion rising up, there it comes. Not so bad now is it, because you have your unconscious mind on your side, but it’s still pretty strong. So three two one, full back, where are you inside or outside? S:

Outside.

Igor: Alone or with others? S:

Alone.

Igor: That’s right, one two three, adult in the room, the scene is away, let it fade all the way in the distance. All the way over there, do you see it, all the way – how old are you right now? How old are you in the room with me? S:

42.

197 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: You are 42 aren’t you? That was quite a thing wasn’t it. That was quite a rush, you calming down again now, that’s right. Did I fulfill my promise to you? It was intense wasn’t it? But you’re fine now aren’t you? You’re safe now aren’t you? You made it through whatever happened back there didn’t you? You are doing a good job Stephanie, you should be proud of yourself. Because believe it or not the hardest part is over, do you know that? S:

Yes.

Igor: In a moment’s time you will experience for yourself how you will never need to feel that intense feeling again. Do you realize that? How are doing right now? S:

I’m okay.

Igor: Good, now something very intense happened to little Stephanie over there, didn’t it? How old was she by the way? S:

I think I was 8 or 9.

Igor: Eight or nine, and it was a pretty intense period, right? Now there’s something she thought, something that happened at that time that you and I know isn’t true, do you know what that is? At the time she thought she wouldn’t make it through whatever that was, right? Because it was pretty intense, now you and I both know that she did make it through, that she was safe again afterwards, because otherwise we wouldn’t be having this conversation, would we, right? S:

That’s right.

Igor: And of course you and I also know that before any of this happened, she was also safe, wasn’t she? So, how long before this event would you say, was it five minutes, ten minutes, an hour, a day, a week? S:

Forever.

Igor: Say again? S:

The whole time.

Igor: The whole time before this event, right? So choose a time before this ever happened when you were safe there, what was that?

198 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 S:

Right before it happened.

Igor: Right before it happened, right? S:

Yeah.

Igor: Where is it? S:

I was outside coming home from the school bus.

Igor: Right, so there she is, little Stephanie, outside coming home from the school bus. She’s fine, isn’t she? S:

Yes.

Igor: Right, then stuff happened, we don’t need to talk about that right now, but then it’s over again, isn’t it? Come back, it’s over there, she’s over there. It’s over now, all the way back until she’s safe. When is she safe again, Stephanie? S:

A couple hours later.

Igor: A couple hours, where is she when she’s safe? S:

I’m sitting on my dad’s lap in the kitchen.

Igor: Okay, back in the room with me. Looking at little Stephanie over there. Looking at little Stephanie over there in the kitchen with her dad, right. She’s a little upset isn’t she? But she’s safe, isn’t she? What’s her dad doing? S:

Rocking her.

Igor: He’s rocking her, isn’t he? Does it make her feel safe, does it make her feel better? And eventually it all passes and she kind of forgets about the incident, doesn’t she, eventually? Well she doesn’t think about it all day every day does she? S:

No.

Igor: Exactly. There comes a point where she knows it’s happened, it’s still intense, but she is not really thinking about it anymore unless someone brings it up right?

199 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 When is that, how much after this whole thing, the rocking with her dad and so on? S:

While I’m sitting on dad’s lap.

Igor: Okay, once again, big Stephanie in the room, watching the scene. Tell me what little Stephanie is doing? Little Stephanie is over there, can you see her way out in the distance there, sitting on her on daddy’s lap? There you go, isn’t it nice to have a daddy like that. Isn’t it good? S:

Yes.

Igor: Did he look after little Stephanie? S:

Yes.

Igor: There you go, so I guess you now have four people on your side. You’re racking up allies aren’t you? You’re doing good, you’re doing a great job. Now here’s the thing. Look at that scene over there, right, you realize that when she’s getting off the bus, she’s totally safe, that’s no big deal, right? And you know it ends up over there with daddy giving her a big hug, rocking her and just being a good dad. And she’s safe again and she starts to feel safe again, doesn’t she? It’s all over and thank goodness it is, right? She made it through the whole thing. She doesn’t know it in the middle of it, but she made it through the whole thing, right? You know because you’re sitting right here. Now what do you think, what do you think would have been her reaction, even though it was an intense moment she would have known without a shadow of a doubt – without a shadow of a doubt that she would be safe again, sitting in daddy’s lap being rocked, comfortable and having all that love present – would it have changed things? S:

Yes.

Igor: It would, wouldn’t it? Now the trouble is, up until this point, she hasn’t had that experience yet has she? But if she did wouldn’t that have changed everything? S:

Yes.

200 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: So here’s what we’re going to do. In a moment and you tell me when you’re ready for this, right? You are going to have – you are going to be delightfully surprised because this is what’s going to happen. You’re going to step inside and be little Stephanie getting off the school bus, everything is fine. We’ll zip right through whatever intense period was in the middle right back until she’s safe in her daddy’s arms again. Does that make sense? Right back until she’s safe in her daddy’s arms again, and we will come back here and have a chat. Now here is something you should realize, how intense that thing was in the middle there, how you experienced it a few moments ago. It will already have changed. S:

Promise.

Igor: I promise you, it will already have changed. It will still be intense, I won’t lie to you, you will still feel a reaction but it will be nothing like what you experienced a moment ago. Do you understand what I mean? S:

Yes.

Igor: You will start at a place of safety, you’ll end at a place of absolute safety and there will be some turbulence in the middle, right? It will happen, I will not kid you on this. But it will be nothing like what you’ve experienced earlier today. Does that make sense? S:

Yes.

Igor: Then we will pull you back and we will have a little chat, sound good to you? S:

Yes.

Igor: How is your ear doing? There you go, you let me know when you’re ready to step in. You just let me know when you’re ready. S:

Okay.

Igor: Because I’ll come with you, you realize that, right? S:

Yes.

Igor: Are you ready to go?

201 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 S:

Yes.

Igor: Yes? I’m going to count from three down to one, at the count of one you’ll step in the safe scene, you’re still fine. S:

Yes.

Igor: Things will happen and they will end, guaranteed. Yes? S:

Yes.

Igor: Three two one, hey little Stephanie, what are you doing? S:

I’m getting off the bus.

Igor: That’s right, now Stephanie I want you to know something, stuff is going to happen in a minute, you won’t like it but it’s going to be just fine, I promise you this. Is that okay with you? That time passes, there it is, and then it passes all the way and you are sitting on your daddy’s lap being rocked. There, there, it’s all good now. One two three, adult in the room watching the scene. Wow. How was that? Back in the room. S:

Better.

Igor: Wasn’t that something? Now, admittedly, that little turbulence in the middle was still not very pleasant was it? It wasn’t, I know it, but was it anything like what it was before? Not even close was it? Do you know why? S:

Because I know it was going to be okay.

Igor: That’s right. Because you know it’s going to be okay. That is one of the most important things that little girl over there needed to know, isn’t it? S:

Yes.

Igor: And what you have just done, and this is something fantastic, by being brave enough to go through the whole thing, you’ve allowed that realization to occur. Isn’t that something? S:

Yes.

202 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: Would you like to make this even better now? S:

Yes.

Igor: Alright. Because you and I both know she started off safe, she ends up safe, and the stuff in the middle, well you know it passes, right? And she kind of knows it, because it kind of happened, but what do you think would happen if someone talked to the little girl getting off the bus and warned her – what if you warned her it’s going to happen, but it’s just fine. She’ll make it through and by the way, she might even start enjoying the thrill of it because she knows no matter what’s going to happen it’s only going to end up well, right? Kind of like someone going on a fair-ground ride. No matter what’s going to happen, it’s going to end up well, right? S:

Yes.

Igor: So what I would like you to do is to explain to that little girl just getting off the bus, that little Stephanie over there, I’d like you to explain to her in the ways that only you can explain it to her that something is going to happen, and it’s going to be unpleasant, however she’s going to get right through it and she’s going to get on with her life and have a fantastic life and if nothing else, she’s going to have great people around her. Do you know what I mean by that? Are you ready to prepare for this? S:

Yep.

Igor: Go ahead and talk to her. Let her know what’s coming and let her know that it’s going to be nowhere near as bad as she thinks, because well, let’s face it, she’s already experienced how quickly the emotions drained out, right? So go ahead, let her know this and tell me when you’re done. S:

Okay.

Igor: How’s she doing? How did she take the news? S:

She’s nervous but okay.

Igor: Of course she is, this is the first time she’s done this, right?

203 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 S:

Yes.

Igor: So I’ve made you a few promises so far, haven’t I? S:

Yes.

Igor: Have I kept them? S:

Yes.

Igor: You’ve experienced them, have you not? S:

Yes.

Igor: I will make you another promise now, in a moment we will step back into that little Stephanie getting off the school bus and this time with foreknowledge, the experience will be nowhere near as shocking as it was the first time around. And do you know why? Because now she’s expecting it, and all the extra energy that comes from some of the unexpected happening cannot be converted to fear, because she’s expecting it now, and she knows she’s going to be safe. There are so many different levels at which it cannot be anywhere near as intense anymore. Do you know what I mean? It will still be unpleasant, a little bit, but it’s going to be nothing like when it first happened. Do you know what I mean? S:

Yes.

Igor: You tell me when you’re ready to do that and experience it for yourself. How quickly that emotion can change, do you know what I mean? S:

Yes.

Igor: Let me know when you’re ready. S:

Okay.

Igor: You’re ready now, good. So the count of one, three two one, hey little Stephanie, getting off the bus, what’s going on? You know something is going to happen in a minute, right, but you’ll get through it just fine. Watch this, time passes, there it is, now it wasn’t as bad as you thought and all the way back into your home with daddy, sitting on his lap getting rocked. Wow. You did a good job, one two three,

204 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 big Stephanie in the room watching the little child over there. Wow, wasn’t that something? S:

Yes.

Igor: Did you expect that the emotion would drain away so quickly? S:

No.

Igor: You never expected that did you? S:

No.

Igor: You never realized you could do this, did you? Yet here you are doing it. How do you feel about yourself having done that? That’s pretty good, right? S:

I’m proud of myself.

Igor: You should be. I think, I know at least one other person in this room that is more than proud of you. Because you confronted pretty much one of the biggest things in your life, haven’t you? Now we aren’t done yet, you’ll enjoy what’s going to happen in a moment even more. I promise you this. But before we get there, as proud as you are of yourself, here’s a question for you. How do you feel about little Stephanie, because she’s so much younger and she was still willing to go through with it. S:

Very proud.

Igor: Right, as you should be, right? S:

Yes.

Igor: Tell her. Tell her how proud you are of her for what she’s achieved. How did she respond? S:

She’s laughing.

Igor: Of course she is. Of course she is. And now that she is and she knows it’s coming, what do you think will happen if we do it all over again? S:

She’s going to run right by.

205 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: Isn’t she? S:

Yes.

Igor: You ready to give that a go? S:

Yes.

Igor: Three two one, hey little Stephanie, going off the bus, time passes there it is and you’re all the way back to your daddy. Sitting in his lap, getting rocked, getting a big hug, wasn’t that something? One two three, in the room, big Stephanie watching the scene. Did you expect you could ever laugh at that event? S:

No.

Igor: Yet here you are. Here you are having the time of your life. We should all be this afraid, shouldn’t we? There is where my other promise comes. Remember, all the energy that was in the fear can you feel it now, being released. S:

It’s over here now.

Igor: That’s right, where it belongs. Do you want to do it one more time just to recement it in? S:

Yeah.

Igor: Yeah, why waste time, three two one, hey little Stephanie, all that time passing, all the way in your daddy’s lap, rocking away having a whale of a time. One two three, big Stephanie in the room watching the scene. Wow. How did that happen? How did that happen, wow. S:

Because I wasn’t scared.

Igor: You weren’t scared were you, not even one little bit, is that right? Not even one little bit, and you never knew you could do that, did you? I wonder what else you’re capable of. S:

Anything.

Igor: I agree. Let’s do it one more time just for fun, shall we?

206 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 S:

Okay.

Igor: Three two one, hey little Stephanie, are you off the bus, everything passes, you’re in daddy’s lap. What a day, one two three, big Stephanie in the room watching the scene. Wow. Wow, good job. S:

Thank you.

Igor: Good job. Take a deep breath, let it settle in. Let it settle in, you are doing a great job Stephanie, great job. S:

Thank you.

Igor: You can feel both proud of yourself and that little Stephanie for doing all that, right? S:

Yes.

Igor: Now let the scene fade, let the memory fade for a moment. There is something else you want to do, which is going to help you tremendously. And it’s going to add an even deeper level of relief to this whole thing, even though I know you’ve had a pretty good job already of it, right? S:

Yes.

Igor: Here’s what we will do, in a moment I’d like for you to go to a place where you feel really powerful, that you own, do you know what I mean? It could be like a campsite scene where it’s your space, it could be your home, your kitchen, a room that you like. Somewhere where you are totally in control, you know what I mean? S:

Yes.

Igor: Are you there yet? S:

Yes.

Igor: Where is it? S:

I’m in my kitchen.

207 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: Of course you are. This is your domain, right? S:

I’m baking.

Igor: You are baking. Now, in a moment I am going to ask you to invite some people into the kitchen to have a very straight conversation with them. S:

Okay.

Igor: The people I am going to encourage to invite in are people that have some relation to that scene. Maybe they should have been there to look after you but weren’t, maybe they were there didn’t warn you, I don’t know, right? Maybe they should have prepared you beforehand, who knows. But there are certain people that could have done something but didn’t, should have done something but didn’t, or did do something they shouldn’t – do you know what I mean? As you think about it now, who are those people? S:

My brother, younger brother.

Igor: Your brother, younger brother. Who else? S:

My dad.

Igor: Your dad, absolutely, his job is to protect you, right? You know those adult parents can’t be there at all times, right, but where the little girl goes, where was daddy to protect her when she needed him, right? S:

He was on the tractor.

Igor: Right, exactly. Who else needs to be there? S:

My mom should, but I don’t want her there.

Igor: You don’t want her there? S:

No.

Igor: Okay. So here is what we’ll do in a moment. S:

My grandmother.

Igor: Your grandmother as well.

208 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 S:

No my grandpa.

Igor: Your grandpa, sorry. Okay, what we’re going to do. We’re going to invite one person at a time into this room and you can have a talk with them about the incident, whatever the event was, right? The first thing I want you to do, it will be one person at a time, this is your domain. They will come in cap in hand, can I come in please, right? The first thing I want you to do is talk to that person and really express your feelings in terms of how you think they should have behaved or what they should have done to prepare you. It doesn’t really matter if it’s reasonable or unreasonable, the point is to just get it all off your chest. You know what I mean? S:

Okay.

Igor: And then you keep them there for a little bit and we will have another chat and go from there. Who would you like to invite first into your kitchen? S:

My brother.

Igor: Your brother, right? So go ahead and invite your brother into the kitchen. Put him in a place where you want him to be. Say hi to him, and now what I want you to do is talk to him about the event and tell him in no uncertain terms how he may have failed you, what he should have done – what you expected of him and so on. Let all those emotions out. Just really tell him, once and for all, everything that needs to be said, and let me know when you’re all done with that. Doesn’t that feel a little bit better, right? Now you and I realize we are all just humans, right? And I don’t know what your relationship to your brother is right now, but. S:

It’s close.

Igor: Is it a close relationship, excellent. So I want you to do now just really heal the past, by letting go of the whole event. Tell your brother you forgive him. Tell him you forgive him, it’s over now, it’s done, it’s finished, let’s face it – you know it’s done because you were laughing your head off a moment ago, right? S:

Yes.

209 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: So you said what needs to be said, he’s had to accept it. Now go ahead and forgive him and notice what happens inside you when you finally release that bond. Isn’t that something? S:

Yes.

Igor: Wasn’t that something? S:

Yes.

Igor: Now, let him fade away again. Back in your kitchen on your own, baking a cake. S:

A pie.

Igor: A pie, oh I’m sorry. I hope it’s a good pie. S:

Very good pie, I’m a very good baker.

Igor: I have no doubt. So who do you think the next person should be to come into the kitchen? What’s this – what’s happening now? S:

My dad.

Igor: Your dad, right, and there’s a lot of other emotions involved in that, right? I know, I understand. So just bake your cake for a while. S:

Pie.

Igor: Pie. S:

It’s okay.

Igor: Bake your pie, and then at your own leisure, bring your dad in and have a little chat with him. It’s nothing you need to do yet, just… S:

Can I bake while I talk?

Igor: Of course you can, bake whilst you talk. There is nothing specific you need to talk to him about, it’s just nice being with your dad again for a bit, right? S:

I should have said something.

210 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: It’s alright, we’ll get to that stage, right? Right now let’s just get comfortable in his presence again, it’s been awhile hasn’t it? So just let that emotion arise, bake your pie. Feel the emotion, let it flow through you. Because I expect a whole lot of new lot of feelings are getting there as well, right? We can have this conversation in a moment of time. Take all the time in the world to bake your pie and be with your dad again for a while. Until you feel that whatever you needed from that side of things is in the right place again. You will let me know when you’re ready, you take your time. How are you doing now, it’s emotional wasn’t it? But it was important, was it not? S:

Yes.

Igor: I know it’s not related to what we’re doing here, but it was nice wasn’t it? S:

Yes.

Igor: It was a little picaresque adventure, a little side trip. S:

He liked my pie, too.

Igor: Did he? I’m jealous. So, now that the pleasantries are over, there are some things you need to say to him about that event, right? Go ahead and say them in no uncertain terms, make him understand how you felt, make him understand what happened. He’s your dad, he’ll understand. There you go, let all the emotion out. Let all the emotion out. You are doing a great job, Stephanie. You’re doing a great job, that’s it. This is an important conversation, isn’t it. Go ahead and have it. There you go, and breathe. And let the emotion flow. Finally you get to release that, and I promise you at the end of all this you will feel even better than before. You can already feel that happening, can’t you? Keep doing it, that’s right. Keep saying everything you need to. Let it all out, you don’t need to hold onto it anymore. There you go. You are doing a great job, a really good job. Just let me know whenever you’re done, there is no hurry. S:

It’s okay.

Igor: Good, did it all come out. Isn’t it a relief when it all comes out?

211 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 S:

Yes.

Igor: Here’s something that’s going to give you an even bigger sense of relief. You’d like to tell your father that despite all that, you know he’s a human being, right? You know that no one is capable of everything; he did the best he could, right? S:

Yeah, he did a great job.

Igor: He did a great job, and you know we all fall down sometimes. S:

Yes.

Igor: It’s good that you got it off your chest, but now it’s time to cut those bonds. Cut the things that tied you back to that old experience, with the after the school bus and all that. Just tell your dad you forgive him. Tell him that the whole event, you can just let go of it now, it’s done with it. It’s in the past, you know what I mean? S:

Yes.

Igor: Forgive him, and notice how not only you feel relief but there’s a healing there for him, too, isn’t there? S:

Yes.

Igor: Doesn’t that feel good? S:

Yes.

Igor: You’re doing a great job. S:

Thank you.

Igor: Great job. And whenever you’re ready, let him just fade away again and go back to baking your pie. All good? S:

Yes.

Igor: There is another person waiting to come in isn’t there? S:

Yes.

Igor: You let me know when you’re ready to bring them in.

212 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 S:

I am ready to bring them in.

Igor: Yeah, is this your grandpa? S:

Yes.

Igor: Go ahead and ask grandpa to come in. S:

Okay.

Igor: This is fun, isn’t it? S:

Yeah. I haven’t seen him for a while.

Igor: No? So go ahead and catch up a little bit, have a little chat, enjoy. And let me know when you’re ready to continue. S:

Okay.

Igor: Okay? So there are some things you need to let grandpa know as well aren’t there? About that event, right? S:

Yeah.

Igor: So go ahead and get it off your chest, say it the way you mean it. Make him understand, you know what I mean. Really make him understand the whole event. And let me know when you’re done. S:

Okay.

Igor: That’s good, good job. S:

Thank you.

Igor: Good job. And just as you did with the others, it’s time to cut the bonds to the past. Not to your grandfather, because I am guessing you have a good relationship there, but you are going to cut the bonds to that experience, those events. You can forgive him so that when you let him go you let him go in peace, peace for yourself, right? S:

Yes.

213 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: So go ahead and do that now and let me know when it’s done. In a moment I am going to touch one of your hands, it’s going to have a handkerchief in it just so you have something for yourself, there you go. You can stay here and just use it as you wish to or not. How are you doing? S:

I’m doing good.

Igor: Yeah? S:

Yeah, very good.

Igor: Back to baking your pie? S:

Yes.

Igor: It takes a long time to bake a pie. S:

It takes a long time to make a pie, that’s for sure.

Igor: It does take a long time, I am learning this, right? You are really going for this one. S:

Okay.

Igor: Good? Is there anyone else who needs to come in at this point? S:

I could use my husband to give me a hug.

Igor: Hey why not, we’re having some freebies tonight aren’t we? Here he comes. Nice pie. There you go. You did a great job so far. S:

Thank you.

Igor: We aren’t entirely done yet, but we are very close. S:

Okay.

Igor: Let me know whenever you are ready to continue. S:

Okay.

Igor: Good stuff. S:

Yes.

214 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: I am going to make you an offer, but it’s up to you whether you choose to go down that road or not, okay. The offer is this – you have the opportunity to bring your mother in to resolve something’s relating only to that particular event. Knowing this, and this is the important part, knowing this – this is your place of power. This is where you are in control. And this is where you get to invite her in, if you decide to, on your terms. That means, if you want her to be silent, she will be incapable of speaking. Ah – that’s a bonus isn’t it? Not such a bad deal after all, is it? S:

She can come in. She can come in.

Igor: The purpose of this of course is for you to heal, for you to release whatever you need to. It has nothing to do with her and I will not ask you to do anything about whatever relationship you have with her, does that make sense? S:

Yes.

Igor: This is purely about your healing and your letting go of whatever happened way back then, you know what I mean? S:

Yes.

Igor: So are you willing to do that? S:

Yes.

Igor: Alright, bake your pie and bring her in. S:

Now she can’t talk?

Igor: She cannot talk, if you want we can her bound and gagged. In hypnosis we can achieve anything you like. S:

Okay.

Igor: You can have a couple of burley policemen standing behind her. S:

Okay.

Igor: So you are clearly in control here, aren’t you?

215 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 S:

Yes. It’s my kitchen.

Igor: It’s your kitchen, your rules, your life, right? S:

Yes, okay.

Igor: And there are some things that your mother needs to hear, right? There are some things you have been waiting to get off your chest, especially concerning that particular event, right? S:

Yes.

Igor: So here’s your chance. Do not hold anything back. Let it all out, tell her how she should have been, tell her what you expected from her, tell her everything, and that’s it – let it all out. There you go, you’re doing a good job. You’re doing a good job. It’s about time, isn’t it? That’s it, just let it all out – say it, get it off your chest. That’s it. And feel the relief of that. Feel the relief when you’ve done it. Take your time. This is a very important conversation, isn’t it? Yeah. You are doing great, you really are doing great. You really are doing great. That’s it. That’s it. Good stuff. After all, this is your kitchen, and your rules. Doesn’t it feel good to get it off your chest? S:

Yes.

Igor: It’s been a long time coming hasn’t it? S:

Yes.

Igor: Yeah. That’s it, just take your time. This is your kitchen. And let it all out, don’t hold anything back, there is no need, right? It’s good to be in your own kitchen. S:

Yes, making pies.

Igor: Making a pie. S:

My kitchen.

Igor: Your kitchen, your life, your rules, right? And she has to just listen. S:

She’s not liking it.

216 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: I know, tough right? There you go, she just has to take it at this point, because this is your kitchen, your rules, your life and she has no option in this. It’s all about you, isn’t it? S:

Yes. I’m done with her.

Igor: That’s good. And as you did with the others, I’m going to ask you to sever the bonds of the past. I know you may or may not have severed other bonds in other ways, that’s of no importance here. What I want you to do is when I say I want you to forgive her in terms of that event. I am not asking you to love her or respect her or accept anything that happened. You can do any of those things if you choose to, or none of them, right? When I say forgive, specifically it’s a question of you cutting those bonds. You don’t need to hold onto any of this anymore. You are beyond that, does that make sense? S:

Yes.

Igor: You can send her away, at peace with yourself. There is nothing left that needs to be said, nothing left that needs to be done. Do you know what I mean by that? In the spirit of those things, I want you to forgive her, tell her that it’s over, it’s done. You don’t need to hold onto anything anymore, and feel the peace that comes with it. Can you feel that coming? S:

Yes I can.

Igor: Isn’t that something? S:

Yes.

Igor: You did a great job. S:

Thank you.

Igor: Those were difficult things, I know. But don’t you feel so much better for it? S:

Yeah.

Igor: Yeah. Of course you do. We are right in the final stages now. There is one last person you need to invite in the kitchen. Someone you probably haven’t thought about yet. Do you know who that is?

217 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 S:

No.

Igor: It’s little Stephanie. Yeah. Little Stephanie, right? Because I know she’s only a little girl, and the event was beyond her ability to handle at that time, right? However you suffered a long time because of that experience, right? S:

Yes.

Igor: So I’d like you to invite her into the kitchen and explain to her what happened, but do it in a way that an adult speaks to a child. So she understands that you don’t feel upset anymore, it’s done with. You understand it wasn’t her fault, even though it wasn’t exactly a pleasant experience for you the last few years, right? S:

Yeah.

Igor: So make her understand. Say what you need to say to her, but of course remember that she’s also a child, so although she can hear it all there’s that understanding that’s underlying it all, that it wasn’t anyone’s fault, right. So get it off your chest. And make her realize that it wasn’t anyone’s fault, whilst it wasn’t in any way shape or form a pleasant experience either. Let me know when you’ve done that. Yeah. And as you have done with the others, tell her you forgive her. Tell her you can let go of the whole thing now, because as far as you’re concerned it’s in the past isn’t it? It’s over. You’re beyond it and notice how good it feels to put that final piece in place and really let go, right? Isn’t that a rush? S:

Yes.

Igor: It is, isn’t it? Now I want you to tell her how proud you are of her that she had the courage to do all this stuff. Tell her how you feel about her, how you can feel about a little girl who went through such a shocking experience and yet came out smiling, that’s something pretty special, isn’t it? S:

Yes.

Igor: Go ahead and tell her in no uncertain terms, make her ears glow. And whilst you’re doing that, give her a big hug and bring her inside you. Feel her growing up through the ages into those teenage years, where all those changes are happening, but now with all that extra vitality and energy that’s free. Snakes, ha! Still realizing the difference between safety and caution, but no need for fear as

218 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 she grows older, into a young woman, 18, 19, 20s and there’s a big wide world waiting for her, 25, growing older. Falling love falling out of love, falling in love again, finding the right person, getting married and the whole lifetime free from a fear. The relief that it brings. And that sense of conviction in yourself that you can have in yourself until one day you’ll find yourself sitting on a ship that doesn’t go anywhere. Feeling simply fantastic, right? S:

Yes.

Igor: Looking back on a life that’s been full of very good moments, hasn’t it? S:

Yes, very blessed.

Igor: So here’s the great part, as you look forward to the future as good as things were in the past, it’s only going to get better now. Because the anchor you’ve been dragging around yourself for all these years, it’s gone isn’t it? S:

Yes.

Igor: So if your life was this good with that weight attached, yeah – you know where I’m going with this, right? Exactly, you thought you had it good until now. S:

Yeah.

Igor: Before we finish up, though, I would like you to think of a snake, in a safe place, maybe in a zoo, behind glass or something and notice what happens. Have you ever been like that before whilst watching a snake? S:

No.

Igor: Is this something? S:

Yes.

Igor: Something else, eh? S:

Yes.

Igor: Now if you like, it’s your choice, the zoo-keeper can come out and bring a safe snake, a non-poisonous snake out and show you how to handle it? Would you

219 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 like to experiment with that? Just to maybe touch its head or something. You don’t have to. S:

Yeah.

Igor: Remembering, he’s a zoo-keeper, he knows his game, right? So he’s going to reach in and bring out a snake that is safe to touch. There you go, now the proof of how powerful you mind is. As you touch it, it’s kind of cold and a strange slimy consistency but it’s curious. Ridges all across its skin, and this snake, what the snake does – not again, not another tourist. How are you feeling doing this? S:

Okay.

Igor: Isn’t it an unusual feeling? Would you ever have imagined yourself being capable of doing this? S:

I wouldn’t look at it.

Igor: You wouldn’t even look at it would you? S:

No.

Igor: And here you are touching it. That’s insane. How do you feel about yourself? S:

Proud.

Igor: You should be proud. You did a great thing. S:

I touched it.

Igor: You touched it, you looked at it, it’s in your hand. S:

I didn’t pass out.

Igor: Not only did you not pass out, you sat there laughing. Before today, you didn’t realize you could do this, did you? S:

No.

Igor: And here you are doing it. How do you feel about yourself? S:

Very proud.

220 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: You should be, you should be. I’d like for you to picture yourself walking your dog now. There you go, realizing that in the area that you are that you need to be still careful, right? But notice how the experience is totally different now, isn’t it? S:

Yes.

Igor: Now you can be a real dog owner, enjoying the walk as you should be. Because you understand where the correct boundaries are between caution and enjoying your life, right? S:

Yes.

Igor: How does it feel to walk your dog like this? S:

Freedom.

Igor: It is freedom, isn’t it? Now I also realize that there are a thousand different situations that you might have avoided in the past because of the whole snake thing, right? I’d like you to go ahead and test them out in your mind, one after the other, in your own rate and pace, just to prove to yourself that you can safely carry on through your life without any of this leftover. What’s happening now? S:

I’m at Petco.

Igor: You’re at Petco. S:

I used to walk around.

Igor: You used to walk around it to avoid the store? S:

Yeah, they’re in the center.

Igor: Because they’re in the center, and now, you may even stop by and have a look. S:

I did, yeah.

Igor: Now don’t get too carried away, I don’t want you to go home and buying a snake. S:

No.

Igor: But it’s good to know that you could if you wanted to, right?

221 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 S:

Yes.

Igor: You have a choice, right? S:

Yes.

Igor: Wow, that’s something isn’t it? What else is happening? What other events can you test yourself on? That’s right. S:

The zoo.

Igor: The zoo. Yeah. S:

When you walk in.

Igor: Well walk on in, there’s the alligators right? And? S:

And I just walked out again.

Igor: You just walked out again. S:

But this time, I can go all the way through it.

Igor: Because now you can go all the way through the zoo, there is nothing to avoid. Do you have kids? S:

Yes.

Igor: What kind of gift do you think you are giving them by demonstrating that you don’t have any fear? S:

Bravery.

Igor: Isn’t it? S:

Yeah.

Igor: What kind of gift is it for them to see mommy was afraid of something and she’s transformed. What kind of lesson is that for them? S:

Big.

Igor: Big lesson, isn’t it?

222 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 S:

Yeah, you can overcome things.

Igor: You can overcome things. You can overcome things. Yeah. S:

That one is like red.

Igor: Strange isn’t it? Curious little creatures. S:

Yeah.

Igor: So go ahead and test it all out, throughout your memories, all those experiences you missed out on before, now you can just embrace everything again, right? S:

Yes.

Igor: No limitations anymore. That’s pretty good, isn’t it? S:

Yes.

Igor: How are you doing right now? S:

Great.

Igor: Are you sure? S:

Yes.

Igor: The snake. S:

Just don’t touch it, it might be bad.

Igor: Yeah, you don’t know, right? S:

Exactly.

Igor: Of course unless it’s in a picture book or TV screen, you can touch the TV all you want. You could lick it if you wanted to, but that would be a bit crazy. I don’t think the God of snakes like that one. How are you doing? S:

I’m great.

Igor: Are you sure? S:

Yes.

223 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: Any doubts about what’s happened? Any doubts about what has just happened here? S:

No.

Igor: Are you sure? S:

Yes.

Igor: No messing with me. S:

No.

Igor: You’re not being kind to me or something? S:

No.

Igor: You can tell me straight. This hasn’t worked has it? S:

Yes it did.

Igor: It’s kind of worked? S:

No, I don’t feel fear.

Igor: But we’ve been up here, what 20 minutes half an hour, how can it work so quickly? You have been having this for several years. S:

You’re the master.

Igor: But then what does that make you who did all the work? I guess that makes you the meta-master. S:

The master. I guess I’ll teach the next class.

Igor: You’re doing great. S:

Thank you.

Igor: Great job. Is there anything else you want to check out, test out, prove to yourself, I don’t know? Or do you feel like you’re done? Just search through. S:

One more.

224 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: Go ahead. There you go. Just feel how that energy that was coursing through your nerves becoming calmer and peaceful. It’s a good place to be, isn’t it? S:

Yes.

Igor: There, that’s it. And the others? S:

Gone.

Igor: Sure? S:

Yes.

Igor: No doubt about it? S:

No doubt about it.

Igor: Really? S:

Yes.

Igor: Really-really? S:

Really-really.

Igor: Alright, I guess anything that is left is in your own rate and pace. However you want to do it. Allow these lessons to really sink in deep, deeper than anything you’ve done before, because this may be one of the biggest things you’ve done for yourself in a long, long time, right? S:

Yes.

Igor: So I don’t want you to open your eyes too quickly, only the rate and pace at which all of this really solidifies and becomes part of the new you, so you can face your future with the kind of pride you have been experiencing throughout this session, do you know what I mean? S:

Yes.

Igor: Good stuff. Welcome back, rock and roll. This is for you. S:

Thank you.

225 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: Take a couple of moments you’ve earned them. S:

Thank you.

Igor: Just sit there. I am going to talk a little bit and then we will come back to you once you let things happen for a bit. In fact you know, if you’d rather. Why don’t you have a little walk around deck so you have a few moments to yourself just to let yourself decompress and stuff. You will miss nothing, I will catch you up on absolutely everything, I promise you, okay? S:

Okay.

Igor: Now would you like to go on your own or would you like to go with your husband or would you like to go with one of the assistants, it’s up to you? S:

My husband.

Igor: Alright guys, give her a round of applause and we will come back to this later. Thank you very much. Alright folks, they are having a little walk now.

226 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2

DVD 17 – Regression Therapy Secrets Revealed

Regression Demo Debrief

Igor: So as I promised you before the demo, this was pretty intense wasn’t it? It was probably one of the more intense versions that you will come across and you may notice how to do a few extra things. I’ll happily talk about them later in the last stage, but I’m going to delete them in terms of what we are doing as a Regression Therapy model because I had to spend more time in certain steps to enhance them because of the intensity. Does that make sense to you guys? So that’s the downside of taking a more intense demo because we have to step more carefully and it looks like I’m doing more. I’m actually doing the same stuff it’s just I’m spending more time elaborating on a particular step to make sure that we go through safely. Rest assured I will go through the whole thing at the same time. One of the reason you may notice that when she came back you see how she is very clearly still left in that trance state, the double-dip we talked about, you can see it very clearly now, right? This one is very good for someone when they’ve finished the work, depending on the situation. There are different things you can do, sometimes you just can have them sitting there for maybe 15, 20 minutes to let things process. If they came with someone like here, it’s great for them to go for a little walk. They don’t have to talk about anything in particular it just lets things settle down. In particular I can’t talk about what happened in front of her at this point because I don’t want her thinking about it, I want her to just let everything become more cemented, more natural and so on. It’s good for her to have a little walk and go around this stuff.

227 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 You can ask her questions about the experience just not yet, please wait until around lunch time it would give her a couple of hours to let it process through and I will make sure I make this point when she comes back. If she decides that she is not quite there yet, then just respect that, don’t make any hints, don’t make any comments or buy little toy snakes or anything like that. Just let her go at her own pace, until she is fine with it and then buy all the toy snakes in the world you can get your hands on. Buy picture books with toy snakes and by all means experiment. As far as I’m concerned the more the better. As an overall experience not about the steps or the process we will cover those step by step shortly, as an overall experience do you have any questions about what you have seen. Q:

Just a quick question to clarify at the start, you went back and tested her and you did it very quickly and pulled her out, can you test her still disassociated rather than put her into it?

Igor: So how do you mean, in the beginning when I talk about the fear and then pull that, you mean when she was a little girl or you mean at the start when we were just chatting? Q:

When she was a little girl.

Igor: Okay. You can do anything, you can achieve anything with any tool, with any method. However if you avoid that step and we’ll come on to it when we get to the step a little bit more, the risk that you are running is either that she doesn’t plug into it properly, so you are painting the wrong room, although it was less risky here or and this is what was going on here, she will never have the courage to face the whole thing. I want her to feel the relief of the emotion disappearing it’s a proof that something important has happened. If she never experiences the emotions how can she prove it to herself? Hence I spent a lot of time upfront sort of making her safe because you would always, you could see how I had to fight to keep her out of the regression rather than fight to get her into it. This is typically what’s going to happen I’ll show you how you get to that point.

228 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 So I had to pull her out more and more. Then I made that contract and this is where having the right rapport and so on, the trust is going to be important. You may want to start with other things before you go to big things like this to build that trust, because I made her the promise which I know is going to happen. It’s going to be very intense but it’s going to be very brief. Because as soon as they have got that shock, I’m going to pull her out and what happens as soon as that shock is actually pulled out, think about something in terms of their experience. What have they never experienced before? When she has seen a snake she has passed out from fear before. That’s what she said, what she has never done is seen the snake, been afraid and instantly calmed down again, has she? She if I’m doing that I’m not telling you that that’s going to happen, but while I’m doing that she had a flash of sheer panic of terror. I’ve helped to pull her out. So she starts calming down again and starts feeling safe again, it can never be the same again now. Because she has done something she has never done in her life, the therapy is already kicked in, because she has already learned to dissociate herself at this point. She has learnt that she is not the victim of the fear she is its master even though her intellect may not have caught up to that fact yet. Does that make sense? So those are all the reasons why I wanted them to dip in but I’m not cruel, I’m not going to leave her there. You may have noticed I could have got a much stronger emotion to start with to do the regression work with, once again, I’m not cruel I don’t need it, I know she is suffering enough as it is. Plus I may actually make a rod from my own back because what if she passed out on my chair from fear from before even we do the regression. So there is no point doing any of that stuff. So we set the right context upfront and then the way that I like to think of it is, I’m going to dip her toe in her biggest fear. So that when I help her pull it back out again afterwards she realizes that she can master it at some level. The rest will – then its relatively mechanical, it takes time but its more mechanics at that point. Does that help answer your question? There was another question

229 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 right in front, do you want to stand up so we can get a mic to you? Just stand up so we can all see you as well. Q:

Thanks I just wondered technique wise I was watching you had your hand on her shoulder and were rocking her and then I noticed the finger as well.

Igor: Right, so this is actually stuff that you did in the first day. Remember we did like the five touches going deeper and all that sort of stuff. The rocking motion, I just I have physical contact with her and she feels that sensation. Rocking is also a comforting sensation. Now notice again, remember the abreaction drill what is the one thing you don’t do. Oh really. Only three of you are going to say this. Oh my god I’m freaking out, what do you do? What don’t you do? What do you do then? Then what do you say? No only half of you only got this one, what do you say? What do you do then? Okay, abreactions are important which means you need to be on your ball on this one right. So why was I touching her when she was clearly going into what would otherwise be an abreaction any ideas? Because I’m going to work her through it. So the fact that I’m touching her and it creates a trigger for the abreaction means later on when I bring her back and I’m still touching her or I touch her again if there is anything left over I want to make sure that I catch it. So touching her allows me to have that extra connection to the whole thing as well. The next thing is rocking is comforting as well, so we are adding comfort to the whole thing. So that as a human being I am looking after her, right? I’m not shaking, I’m rocking you understand the difference right? As far as the tapping goes that’s just an emphasis, the same way it’s like in a moment I will tap your hand and you will go deeper in trance, deeper, deeper, deeper. Whenever I present a suggestion which I want to embed more deeply, I’ll do a tap just to emphasis it more, that’s all. Does that answer your question? Now there is someone here before or have you changed your mind? Go ahead stand up I’ll get you a microphone over. Q:

Just in relation to his question I couldn’t help though that you had started out by touching her even though she didn’t have the opportunity to experience anything

230 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 close to an abreaction. So what then I mean, I’m familiar with the process of anchoring, so if you are already touching them then how does it relate to the potential abreaction in order to work her through it. Does that make sense? Igor: At that point it’s irrelevant because the touching could be constant. Let’s put it this way, the only thing you’ve got to be concerned about is when in this strong emotional state with an absence of critical thinking then any stimulus present at that point in time is likely to create a hypnotic trigger, what you would call an anchor. So whether I started off touching her or I was touching her in the middle of it is irrelevant. The point is, the stimulus will become associated, the stronger the emotion becomes, the more likely it will associate. That’s the least of my concerns at this point because my whole point - so overall and I’ll just take the question in a second. So overall the purpose of the hand is minimal and can I do this without touching? Absolutely I can, it’s just extra icing on the cake that’s all, so please do not get too wrapped up on what the hand is doing. It’s if you want to do it, do it, if you don’t, don’t. Just realize there is a difference for my touching here than doing an abreaction drill. In an abreaction a drill when I’m pulling him out of it, I’m not going to resolve the underlying material. Therefore I cannot risk creating that association. Makes sense? Here I am going to resolve the underlying material. Therefore it’s irrelevant whether or not I have that association, make sense? It may be a benefit, which is the whole anchoring thing and it may not. But it’s of minor importance at that point. Does that kind of put it more in perspective? Go ahead please. Q:

I was just wondering Igor about the – we had a discussion on the forgiveness stuff. Is this a part of the process or did you decide to bring it in here?

Igor: No it’s a part of the process as you’ll see as we go through the process later. I’ll take you through the process step by step but its 100% part of the process and I’ll explain briefly why right now. It looked like I was done when the fear had eradicated is that correct? Did you see how much more emotion was left over afterwards with the whole forgiveness process? Here is what happens, if someone has been through a tough time especially when they were a child there are for example certain people who should have prevented those things from happening. If nothing else mommy and

231 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 daddy should have been there to protect them, that’s their role, their job. So at some level there may be a resentment present that that didn’t happen. Why wasn’t mommy and daddy there? Resentment is a kissing cousin to anger. If I don’t handle that, I don’t address it, could this work? Absolutely it can work, but the risk that I run is that that resentment continues and undoes whatever work I have done before. Because it needs fuel to justify itself in some way, does that kind of make sense to you guys? So it’s absolutely part of the process, the key players and we’ll come to that when we get to them a little more, will be, people who were present at the time and I don’t know if her brother was present but he may have been, could have been the bus driver for example right. Her guardians, typically her parents, if someone has – if someone was an orphan and didn’t have parents, then the parent they should have had, they shouldn’t have been given up may be needed to be brought in, because something – this could be anger towards someone. Finally the younger version of themselves, the child version of themselves, because after all they have suffered a whole lifetime as a result of whatever that kid’s ideas were about the whole situation. Sometimes they don’t care it’s like of course I’m not angry with them, great. But you just want to double check it, you want to make sure they clear it. This is a perfect example because everything that you are supposed to do in the text book shall we say, occurred here at quite an augmented intensity shall we say. Does that help? Go ahead and stand up. Q:

I want to ask about the ear thing. So the ear is supposed to be the unconscious mind that is like protecting her, so you didn’t use that very much.

Igor: Let’s do two things here, number one, the ear thing is totally irrelevant for the process completely, 100% irrelevant, has nothing to do with the process. The only reason I did extra things like the ear thing for example, you all heard a bit of Non Awareness Set coming in here, is because she was already so far in the fear when we started, it didn’t give me a chance to set up all the parameters ahead of time. What I don’t want to have happen is for her to go down the dark hypnosis tunnel without me. She was in this station, the train was building up steam, the engine was starting to role and I risked it running off without me on the train to run it. So I had to slow the train down, I had to take some of the pressure off before I

232 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 began so that I wouldn’t lose touch with it. It’s basically what I did beforehand was an augmented version of the safety and my voice will go with you. I would have said those things also but because of the nature of what was going on here, just saying those things was not enough. You saw like with the place of safety she got safe for a little while and she got all tense and nervous stuff again. That told me that what I did with the place of safety in this instance was not enough. Could I have worked with it? Of course I could. But I risked making life more difficult for myself later on. So instead of being in a hurry I went back to this place of safety again, I just made it bigger. So instead of having a place of safety feel the chair and know you are safe, it became feel your ear and know you are safe essentially. I didn’t choose the ear, she chose it that was where it came from. But essentially that is what I was doing, I was augmenting it and using Non Awareness Set in order to get a really strong version of it. It happened to be a lucky coincidence because then later on I could make jokes about hearing things in ears and so on which kind of would feed in as well. Again those are icing on the cake, not really that important. But it’s just a nice little extra thing that came by. So please, I’ll come to you guys in a second. Please do not as I told you when I took the demo, if I’m going to take this demo I will have to do extra things or things that look that they are extra things, because the emotion is so high, to help manage the process. I happen to think it’s a very useful demo for you guys to see but it’s also a slightly confusing demo precisely because of things like the ear which have no – are not necessary for the process. They were extra things I added in to make sure I tick the box at a particular stage through the regression process which we will cover in a moment. So that it was properly covered, does that make sense, does that help? By the way do you guys all see how there is no ‘this is the process’, right, you do not have to just follow it rigidly. How you can take your time but every single thing you do, there is no need to rush through just because the book says so. You have to take each step and you make sure you are ready with that step before you go on. Did you also see how she wanted to dive in, way before I was willing to let her do that? Because if I had let her go through it, what I was risking again is that she

233 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 would just go through it helter-skelter and get stuck in it. I’d have to work harder to bring her out, instead I spent so much longer preparing like the Non Awareness Set like the Mind Bending Language and all that stuff. Could you hear all the implications around, it’s going to be intense but it will surprise you, it will be easy or it will come back, or it will end. These are all suggestions, I’m reinforcing over and over and I’m checking, do you see me checking in, do you know what I mean by that? Do you understand? Do you see how that works? She went, yes, as soon as I got those congruent signals that told me we are ready to begin now. Do you also notice how putting those extra safety bits in the beginning emphasizing essentially that place of safety, how it put her in a calmer state. She was more willing to engage with what was pretty huge fear. She was more willing and able to engage with it, because we had spent time doing all those safety things. Think of it this way, in Toronto, Canada for example the CN Tower real tall building as you may or may not know, they have one of these walks that you can walk outside it. There is no barrier, you have a ledge about this big, you can walk all round it and then you hang off the side of the building which is kind of nice. Exactly, more phobias are coming up now right? Think about it, if you turned up and someone said, alright here is your safety line, click, click lets go out. Would you be like, oh hold on a second is this safe? What if they spent half an hour ahead of time saying, okay folks here is your safety line, you put it on, put it on, check, check, test, test. Alright, here is the line that’s going to keep you safe, it’s made of this material and so on, let’s hook it up. Let’s do a practice thing, fall back, notice how it carries your weight. You see it carrying your weight? This is the line that’s going to be carrying your weight outside there is exactly the same thing, there is no difference between what you are doing in here, on the safe concrete and out there when you are hanging off the edge of the world. If they’re spending half an hour running you through these things, how much better will you feel about going on outside? I know not all of you want to do it right at this point, I’ll do it. But if you had the choice between the first version, click go, versus half an hour of getting you ready and so on which would you choose? Exactly so take your time build it up, really

234 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 let them know that at every stage of the way they are going to be safe. Does that kind of make sense to you guys? Go ahead stand up and. Q:

Hey Igor, you actually hesitated to go into my question which had to do with, because I noticed that you actually began. You began by grounding your client in a place of safety and resource. Now –

Igor: Let me just pause you a second, because it’s useful for everyone. Do you begin to see the boiler-plates in a completely different light now? They’re not just little drill you do, we do it here linguistically to get you used to the idea of it. However it’s the idea that is of importance, not just saying the words. It is in some instances and this is one of them, possibly more important than anything you do afterwards. Right, sorry to pause you, because this is a point worth emphasizing, go ahead. Q:

Depending on the client’s presenting problem, would you do more. I mean I actually saw you did more work in this regard. How, is it dependent on the individual client as to how much you would do?

Igor: Yeah pretty much. It’s a mixture of two things, it’s a mixture of that personality, how adventurous or gung-ho they are and it’s a mixture of the experience they are having, how intense is the experience. You could clearly see she was already regressing, she is becoming a frightened little child just thinking about the idea of thinking about snakes. She wasn’t even thinking about them directly just the idea of having to think of them at some point was terrifying her and you could see her mannerism becoming more child like. That tells me I have to treat her more like I would a child in the sense that I have to do a lot more work, to prepare her, to calm her down, to encourage her to let her know there, there everything is going to be fine. Good things are going to happen and so on. Does that make sense? Is she still walking around or? That’s fine, exactly it’s better for her to hang out than to listen too much of people talking about her. I just wanted to make sure that she is in a happy place doing those things. Does that make sense to you guys? Q:

I do have one more question.

235 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: Go ahead. Q:

Which has to do with if the presenting client has a problem with the term forgiveness can we use forgiveness as just a nominalization. As a label that can be deleted.

Igor: Some people especially if you get to more like, certain countries like Greece and Cyprus and parts of Spain and so on, they have a revenge culture. If someone harms you, you must get your own back. They have been socialized this way almost, it can be a very destructive thing, but it is what it is. So in those cases and in other instances forgiveness is so tied with the concept of love and we got close to it here. Notice how she didn’t want to bring her mother in. If I said you have to love and accept your mother, would I have had any chance or hope in hell of making this work? Hell no. So if the word forgiveness gets in the way then cut it out, use something else. Hence you notice I’m saying I’m emphasizing letting go and attaching the idea of forgiveness around that. Because it is about letting go primarily and by doing it the relief comes in and so on, does that help? There was a question over here first do you want to stand up and it will come over there? Q:

First of all I want to say it was really incredible to have watched the whole piece and I‘m really grateful for that and just grateful for your years of study and mastery.

Igor: Thank you, I appreciate that, thank you very much. Q:

That’s the main thing I want to say. The small question I have is I noticed at no point did you ask the details about what happened when she was eight. I wondered if that’s always true or it was just in this case because of the extremity of it.

Igor: So it’s a great question and the answer is, sometimes I will ask for more details, sometimes less. I will only ever ask for enough details to have a handle on the situation. If I know I can very clearly directly go to this experience now, go to this experience, go to this experience, as long as I can direct it very clearly without them getting confused which one am I talking about now then that’s it. I do not

236 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 need to be a voyeur in their world and in their history and their memory. It doesn’t concern me, it’s their life. So I personally will get the minimal details I need to be able to functionally and easily move them through the various transitions. I do know some people who spend half an hour basically glorifying that person’s past. Look at the pictures and this and that and so on. I don’t think it’s necessary, the only time I would do more of that is if I’m having difficulty getting into the memory in some way. But then I never had to do that because as I’ll show you later on this afternoon there is a way you can do the regression that basically guarantees you are going to get there. So it makes life easy. Does that help? Q:

Thank you.

Igor: Alright there is a hand here first and then we’ll come forwards in a minute, stand up. Q:

I would just like to thank you for that in particular because I think I have developed a much greater respect and compassion for other people’s phobic responses. I think the change work field with the development of fast phobic cures and my understanding of phobia’s, not having had anything as intense, I have been guilty of dismissing someone’s neurology and response and perhaps connection to that phobic response that I will never do again.

Igor: Thank you. Q:

Thank you.

Igor: That’s a great point, I think it’s worth applauding for sure. This lady over here. Let me just emphasis here and this is true in general regard that the reason we sometimes trivialize other people’s problems is because they are not our problems, right? There are things that we do that other people look at and go, how could that be a problem for you? But of course because it’s not a problem for them there is no way they can empathize with what we have, so sometimes you have moments like this which opens our eyes to it. By the way this will make you a much better therapist as a result. Because understanding people in this way it changes your attitude fundamentally. When a

237 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 client comes in, they will realize this person is actually going to treat me not just with respect, but in a way that I will stay safe. Because one of the dangers of being all gung-ho about the thing, I think the fast-phobia cure is a great technique that works great in a lot of cases. But the danger of being too gung-ho about it is that the client does not feel safe to even engaged in it. Because if you are being casual about it, it’s like the guy that goes, I’ve done it a million times, click, click lets go. Its fine for some people and it’s not fine for others. Remember I told you about the lady who came in who was ultra shy and I tried to fix everything at once. That was my moment of awakening. I pushed way too hard, way too soon. All the right things but all the wrong times. So this hopefully gives you more of the sense of the pace and stuff you can go with people. Other people have done this in five minutes and it has been bam flash in the pan. It would go at the pace they would need to go at. This lady here first then we will come back to you guys in a second. Q:

I probably missed a couple of steps.

Igor: We haven’t done the steps yet, we will recover them, we will do them step by step as we go along. You are not expected to do any of this yet, we will cover the steps, step by step after we have talked about this in general, so carry on. Q:

Her fear was snakes and then we got into this deep other situation.

Igor: We didn’t know it was another situation, it may well have to do with snakes. My hallucination is she got off the bus, she walked home, got attacked by a snake or saw a snake and freaked out and then ran home. That’s my hallucination. I do not know unless I ask. It may have had nothing to do with snakes, it might have been a stick she thought was a snake, who knows, right? The point is, it doesn’t matter what the situation is, it’s the fear that counts. She had to learn to be afraid like that somewhere, that’s all that matters. Q:

Okay, perfect.

Igor: Doest that answer your question?

238 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

Yes it does.

Igor: Alright back here again. Q:

Hallo, alright so.

Igor: Did you just move? Q:

Yes I did.

Igor: You are like Speedy Gonzales. Q:

I’m walking around the class.

Igor: I’m thinking do you have like a twin brother. Q:

Yeah well the yeah it’s the guy in the back. Alright so you brought up like pretty much when would one judge when to use say a regression style technique as opposed to say like an NLP style blind technique?

Igor: Sure. I will talk about that later on when we put the whole model together, so that’s still coming. Q:

Thank you.

Igor: There was another question up front here so this lady, go ahead. Q:

When a phobia is not attached to a memory are we going to use a different style of technique?

Igor: So first of all every phobia was learned somewhere. Q:

Okay like fear of flying but yet they have never crashed.

Igor: Sure, but it doesn’t matter how they learnt it. It was learned somewhere. By the way flying is an interesting one. Not all fears of flying are actual phobias. A phobia is stimulus - response. Most fear of flying are people talking themselves into being afraid, a very different situation. But every experience that one has was learned somewhere. In order to know how to be afraid, there must have been a first time. To be honest with you, whether you hit the first time or not, even that’s irrelevant. If the unconscious mind brings it up as the right thing, then I’ll

239 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 treat it like that. What to me matters is can you see the emotions resolving and as we are progressing through the method and you are starting to do your tests, are they cleared? Now here is the crazy part, feared whatever she thought happened to her, did she ever get off that bus and whatever happened to her, did she ever get off her bus and whatever happened to her, get rocked by her father? I have no idea. Honestly I do not know. Chances are very high that it did happen. It probably didn’t quite happen quite the way she remembers it now, it almost definitely did happen, not quite the way she remembered it. It could still be an invention, I don’t know I don’t care. These are questions that I don’t need to ask myself as a clinician as a practitioner, but as a question that needs to be answered by academics studying something. I do not need to concern myself with that. Does that help? Then right in front of you is this – go ahead. Then right behind you is another one and then we’ll come forward. Q:

My question is about the forgiveness/letting go part which I really, really liked and see the benefit of. What I’m curious about is if somebody has really entwined an identity level kind of understanding about themselves with that, either the experience or the feelings about the family or the people round them during that time. Do you find that it takes a lot more work to get them to somehow separate their resentments about that experience from their generalized experience?

Igor: No it’s not a question you can answer in that way. I understand where you are coming from. But I’ll give you a bigger answer if I may, which is every human being is different. You will have no way of knowing how to deal with them until you are there. For example when we did the forgiveness thing here. When she initially refused the whole idea of her mother, that put me on notice that I may have to work very hard with that and I will have to be willing to back off because I can’t push on that one and say fine, you don’t need to deal with this now. The other thing you put me on notice on is that I might have to deal with. She may – probably does have a lot of other issues relating to her mother that don’t relate directly to this. Did you notice how I had to out-frame them? I said, this is about only this

240 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 experience, the other things you are having and so on, leave them aside, its only about this experience and so on. So yes, some people you will work with much harder than others. How do you predict that? That’s impossible to say. If you’d asked me before we came up to the demo just knowing her from the seminar and so on, if I would predict something like that happening, I would have said no way. But then I don’t need to know anything, they are the experts in their own lives, right? Q:

Right. So you just essentially work with whatever comes up and tailor it as needed, if somebody really can’t go there you just let it go.

Igor: Right, I will try and assist them, I will try and reframe it, I will try and explain what I’m doing is not something that you need to have, like that. But why would I push it? If they came back and so on then we might have a little chat about the whole forgiveness idea in a more intellectual capacity. I might leave it open to them saying look, it appears that there are other things here that at some point in time you may want to deal with. If you are ready with it, that’s fine. If you don’t want to do it that’s your choice, it’s something you have to decide. I just want you to know that in my professional opinion if and when you should decide to start handling that, you are going to have tremendous benefits from it. I can already see it happening, right? It’s just you need to decide if and when you are ready for that. If you are never ready for that, that’s entirely your choice I can’t make that choice for you. So I’m making it easy for them because here is something else you guys should know, what you saw happening here, a lot of things I would work with I would simply get done within one session. This is in one session clearly right? What you saw happening here might also take three sessions. It’s not very common but some people for them it’s enough to tip their toe in and I’ll stand back, and think ooh, right? And that’s great let’s go to a happy place. You did a great job you really confronted it and its fantastic and from here on in things will get easier and easier and easier. Whenever you are ready for the next step you know it doesn’t have to be today it will be another day. Yeah not today I have had enough for today. Great come on back have a little chat and say well let’s make an

241 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 appointment for maybe next week, let it all settle down and we’ll do the next step. Some people require smaller steps because their neurology can’t handle as much intensity as others, fine. So you take three sessions. I used to think I was a poor therapist if I couldn’t fix it straightaway. Then I started realizing it that it’s got very little to do with my skills, it’s got to do with their neurology. They are built differently, we work with what they are built with. So the skill is, think of it like an old circuit board and a new circuit board. New circuit board you can put a lot of energy through it, it will handle it. The old circuit board the skill comes in putting just enough through it to do its job without blowing a fuse. Does that help? Q:

That’s great thank you.

Igor: Thank you. So we’ll come forward first and then we’ll go back again. So go ahead. Q:

The question I have is, let’s say you don’t think it’s a fear, but it’s not as overwhelming as her fear of snakes was. So you go to do regression.

Igor: You might do a regression, you may do something else. We haven’t covered at what point you decide to do regression we haven’t covered that yet. Q:

Okay maybe that’s not my –

Igor: But feel free to ask it and I will be happy to go if it’s the right time to do it. Q:

Okay. So basically what happens is you start to go into it and your neurology just won’t go anywhere. I mean you start to hyperventilate you start to sweat.

Igor: You mean if it’s too much for the person. Q:

Yes.

Igor: Right, so – Q:

Is that when you take them to a relaxing place?

Igor: Did you see we were very close to exactly that situation here right? Hey how is it going? Do you mind if we talk about you a little bit is that okay with you? So do

242 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 you notice how Stephanie was very close to hyperventilating, passing out just taking about the snake? Would that be fair to say, you were right on that edge right? So your job is to be able to recognize that and move only as slowly as they can cope with it. So notice once again, what was my starting point? My starting point was spending more time than I would normally do at the beginning building up safety, building up calmness, pulling the energy out of it so I only had enough to work with. Think of it like the circuit board metaphor we talked about a moment ago. I was pulling up all the potential energy, all the electricity backed up ready to go through the board, so that we had only enough to go through the board without frying it. Right? Q:

Right.

Igor: Once we had that, then we released it one little bit at a time and then come back in. Now if you had someone more intense than that, what I might have done at that point is, let the fear rise only to a point that you can handle. Instead of regressing back on it, I would have said something like, well only to the extent you can handle it then we’ll shut it off again, so you realize you can turn it off at any time we need to. I would have said, here is the emotion and now let if fade, gone, gone and it passed all the way over there. That was exciting wasn’t it? Yeah. Because if they can’t handle all of that yet, well then give them a taste of it, take it away so they feel more in control of it, then give them another taste. Once they get used to that taste then we might be able to go back. So you see it’s the same step it’s just you are more cautious about taking that step with some people because either the energy going through it is higher or their neurology, the capacity is lower. You just fit it to the person. Q:

Okay so I already felt safe because I knew this person very well.

Igor: Are you talking about you are the therapist or you are the client or how? Q:

I’m the client.

Igor: So you are the client and someone else is your therapist helping you through something?

243 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

Right. So that’s what happens. It takes you three visits to get past –

Igor: It could do. Q:

Just the initial part where your –

Igor: For sure it can, its exactly what we talked about a moment ago, there are some instances where exactly the same thing will take three or four sessions because the person needs to do it, just one step at a time and its exactly what we were hoping for. If you recall didn’t I say it when you came up Stephanie? That if at any point you want a time out we’ll have a time out. If at any point you want to end this we’ll be done even if the demo is not complete. Because as soon as someone sits here, my only concern is for their well being, that’s it. Alright as far as you lot are concerned you can get stuffed. I’m not doing the demo I’m not forcing the demo just so you can see it I’ll happily sit down and role play it. I’ve done this before by the way, I’ve had to role play on one instance I’ll explain why another time, because to go beyond that would not be appropriate I cannot force that. It would be highly unethical to try and force a client to change and also highly counterproductive. Q:

Now we are going to be the therapist.

Igor: Don’t worry about how we are going to do all this stuff we’ll do it in a very safe way, there will be no qualms whatsoever trust me. When we get to it we’ll cover it. So we’ll bring it forward those. We’ll slightly move forward and come back. There is a lot of questions in this room, this is good. Q:

So my question is with relation to something that might be even more intense for example a rape victim, how would you – ?

Igor: Same field, we’ll deal with that later. The basic function is actually the same. The only thing that exists is emotion and how you release it, that’s the only function. The rest is a question of intensity and framing to get leverage for people to be willing to engage. If they are willing to engage and you have a process for releasing the emotion everything is the same as far as I’m concerned. We’ll get into that later on. Let’s take one or two more questions and then we need to take a break because otherwise we’ll be here all day asking questions

244 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 and not doing anything right. So we’ll go forward first and we’ll come back and then, go ahead. Q:

I just had a real aha with that that I wanted to share and check and see if you had anything to say about it but. Yesterday you said that fear is simply the anticipation of something dangerous that it’s designed to make us to move away from that. That you can take away either extreme hope or take away hope and what I saw you doing was looping there is no hope this is not going to happen. But it’s safe before and after and all the way through.

Igor: Exactly so we then, you did very well, did you spot what he was saying? Essentially we were attacking fear on both ends of the loop. On the one side we are taking away all hope that this will not occur. Because it will happen 100% guaranteed. That takes away one of the reasons for fear to exist. On the other side we are going from safety to safety which means they will know not just hope, they will absolutely know that they will be safe. Which means once again the purpose of fear has been served, it is no longer relevant. What their intellect hasn’t done yet is caught up to that fact and that’s why we run the loop. Very well spotted, thank you for that. Then behind go ahead, no that’s fine. Q:

So the comment that you made about it doesn’t matter if it’s real or not real that was really useful in respect the experience that I had the other day that I referenced about stepping back into my childhood. At dinner my comment was I don’t even know if that was real or not, I don’t know if I made that up. The experience was just as real. I still don’t know whether I did or didn’t and it didn’t matter because the experience was still there.

Igor: Exactly there may be a way of checking it but that’s only of interest if you are an academic. What matters is what is the result? This lady just stand up so we can get a mic to you and then we’ll have one more and then we’ll be done. Q:

This might be similar kind of to the rape question but I was wondering would it be kind of the same but maybe just different reframing if you were dealing with somebody with post traumatic stress like someone in war?

Igor: Absolutely and once again we’ll handle those things once again, experience with the method and the answer is exactly the same sort of idea. If you have a strong

245 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 emotion that threatens to overrun the person, overload them, then you have the right conditions and it will make much more sense once we’ve got a little bit more experience with some things. Over here and then we’ll go next to you, go ahead. Q:

Just really quick, so do you always set up and exit strategy when beginning any type of a regressive process?

Igor: What do you mean by exit strategy? Q:

Like at anytime we can come right back into the room.

Igor: The answer is almost always, sometimes if a person is that medium intensity of emotion then I pretty much know it’s going to go running smoothly. Here I had to do the exit strategy because I needed to let Stephanie know that I’m not going to push her beyond her limits. Think about it and would it be fair to say that if someone had asked you, we are going to go all the way back to the first event and you’ll be experiencing it intensely and then we’ll – you see that reaction? There is no way she would let anyone do that. So I need to let her know that we’ll only progress at a rate that’s safe for her hence if we need a time out, we’ll do a time out. Didn’t that help you to – do you want to get that mic over here so we can get some reactions here? Would it be fair to say that that helped you to be willing to even engage to realize that at any point you could stop, right? Q:

That helped a lot and also – actually that helped tremendously because it was – I knew that there was an exit.

Igor: Just stand up so everyone can see you as well if that’s okay with you? Q:

Yeah. What also helped a lot, I’m not trying to ramble, but when you have like an almost debilitating fear of something - I mean I have passed on vacations because there is a thought that I might see a snake. I have not done activities, my brotherin-law owns a beautiful lake house in Texas out on the river and they go boating. I saw a snake one time and like lost my mind and I passed out. Part of it is just embarrassment because you have no control.

Igor: No I understand.

246 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

But the fact that you made it so fast, it’s like you are going to start here and then boom and then you are here was what made it – I mean part of it is that I trusted what you said. But part of it was that it was so fast that I didn’t have time to process the fact that. Because what happened I was coming home from school, I got off the bus. My dad was taking out one of those like 200 year old oak trees, it had a huge root ball and they had pulled it over and I was a silly kid thinking I’m going to sneak up on my parents and I jumped down into the hole. I haven’t talked about this or thought about this in 30 years. But I jumped down into the hole and I was like squatting down, he-he-he. I felt something, I looked down and there was hundreds of snakes and from all sizes.

Igor: Very Indiana Jones, right. Q:

They were all, there was part of me that was like in trying to deal with this they were all garter snakes, they are not poisonous snakes. I mean it’s in South Dakota.

Igor: Right but it’s a shock right? Q:

They were crawling up my pant legs they were wound around my legs, they were crawling all over me and I lost my mind.

Igor: It’s something shocking for a little girl to experience, right? Q:

I just ran screaming and they were like falling off me and it was a horrifying experience.

Igor: Right. Q:

The fact that I can stand here and talk about this is amazing.

Igor: It’s pretty much, there you go. Q:

Thank you very much everybody, it’s like I’m tearing up because if feels good. But knowing that you were just going to go really super fast, my brain didn’t have time to focus. I mean I knew what was happening but I couldn’t focus on it.

247 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: Let’s put it this way, it was happening enough to know it was real, but not enough that you were left wallowing in the thing that rhymes with hit again. Don’t worry. Q:

Yes that’s right.

Igor: Exactly. Q:

The poo.

Igor: Exactly, Winnie of course will all of that. So thank you for saying that because your insider view shall we say, is the important thing here. So going back to the original question, which is basically you are only moving at the rate the client can handle. If the client doesn’t think they can handle something they will actually be able to handle a lot more when they realize that they can take time out. Let’s put it this way. How many of you would be willing to swim from New York to London, anyone? Really? Cold water right? How many of you would be more willing, not necessarily willing but more willing to do it if there was a boat travelling next to you and you could get out any time you wanted? Take a breather as long as you wanted and then decide when you would get back into the water? Anyone? See. So you are presenting a situation, a context for the person where we are saying basically you don’t have to do it all at once. The whole elephant does not need to be eaten right now. That makes it much safer for them to be able to do it and then of course it’s a lot easier to do the work. Right? So go ahead. Q:

Igor this is a quick question. I have seen another regression by another hypnotist before and they never call it Conversational Hypnosis. So how conversational is this? Or it’s not conversational?

Igor: This is not conversational yet, this is right now I’m teaching you the principles right, you will be doing this as a standard normal, relatively normal hypnotic thing. So please don’t feel disappointed that there is no conversation and so on. But in order to do this conversationally you need to first understand how to do it when you have all your things set up in a row. Does that make sense? Because if you do not, then you have no hope in hell doing it conversationally because you

248 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 have no maneuvers, you have no idea of the direction to take it in and so on. Does that make sense to everyone? Would you like to have a very quick example of where it can lead if you do it conversationally, yes? I will role play it a little bit. Can I have someone just to role play with this lets say for two minutes. Come on up, we are not going to do anything -proper work. So it’s just purely role play, let’s grab this mic for you. Alright have a seat up here. So let’s say we are having a chat, let’s say this is like – I’m in a coaching meeting with a client in an office somewhere, no one else around because it’s kind of going to get intense. We are talking about stuff, straight off emotion comes up and it gets all emotional. Right so you get nice and strong emotion there you go. So what my last question is? Very good I like that. So what’s happening now? He probably won’t be able to answer its – something is happening isn’t it? Something is happening isn’t it? Tell me where are you in your memories? There is the regression folks. Is this conversational? All:

Yes.

Igor: Now what I want you to do, is take that memory and then just put it all the way over there just way in the distance. So there is that little kid over there, hey that was pretty intense wasn’t it? There is that kid over there and they didn’t realize it was going to come up. I’m doing exactly the same stuff aren’t I? But I’m chatting with them because I haven’t done anything overtly hypnotic. It just seems like a crazy ass conversation you have sometime, usually when you’ve had a few drinks with someone. Right? That’s what it seems like, because I haven’t put in the overtly hypnotic context. The maneuvers are identical it’s just a little more chatty, does that make sense to you guys? But there is, this is almost impossible to do if you have no idea how to do it formally like close your eyes, go into a trance, do this, do this, do this. If you don’t have any instinct about the actual steps, the processes with normal hypnosis, how an earth are you going to do it with Conversational Hypnosis when you have extra variables to deal with. Does that make sense to you guys? So you are 100% correct, there was nothing conversational about this demo. Because if I had done it conversationally none of you would have any idea what just

249 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 happened. The only person who would, would be Stephanie, she would love it and still would have no idea what happened to her, just she would be really glad that it did, right? What’s the point of that? Did that help you? So you can absolutely lead it to something conversational and you will take it somewhere conversational with experience if you want to that is, except you do not want to start there. I would strongly recommend you do not begin there. Does that make sense everyone? Does that help? Thank you so much, give him a round of applause, thank you I appreciate that. Alright folks, I think we’ve all deserved a nice little break. Let’s take 15 minutes, let’s walk around, chill out and let’s come back here and we’ll do some hypnosis.

General Comments

Igor: How is everyone doing? All:

Great.

Igor: Did you enjoy the demo? All:

Yes.

Igor: Didn’t Stephanie do great? All:

Yes.

Igor: Yeah I think so. Who would like to be able to do that? Good I’m glad to see this. So here’s a couple of things you should know before we get into the thing of it. This is a therapy training program, not a therapy course. Which means it’s inappropriate for us to start doing the Regression Therapy with everyone forcing it. You’d better bring a problem up or else you failed the course. You see what I mean? The other reason that it’s inappropriate to actually do a full therapeutic regression here at this point is because you haven’t got the experience yet to get

250 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 all the moving parts down right to make sure it happens safely for people, does that make sense? So here is what we are going to do. 1. We are going to go through the whole Regression Therapy thing as a role play only. So when they take you back and ask questions or whatever it is, I want you to give answers that never occurred to you, in other words things that did not happen. I don’t want you to be in a trance at all we are just going to roll play it in exactly the same way as we role played the happy regression yesterday to get the steps out. Does that make sense to you guys? Then we are going to break it down step by step. However I realize you also need to get fluent with the hypnotic elements. That is what the Days Of Wonder regression you did this morning and you saw last night that is what it’s for. You are getting fluent over having strong emotion, in this case it’s a positive emotion and running back with it and maneuvering around in space and time and playing with memories. There is no difference between creating a place of boredom and looping that into excitement and having someone who is afraid and creating safety and looping through that. The conversation is identical, the whole forgiveness bit is a little different but that’s pretty straightforward isn’t it right? In terms of the mechanics the Days Of Wonder regression and the therapeutic regression are virtually identical. So what I’m going to encourage you guys to do if you want to get good at this therapeutic kind of regression which will be of value, we’ll talk more about where it fits a little later on, probably in the afternoon. Then you will find friends, you’ll find a practice partner, find people, maybe even get together with people you met here when you leave the course. You’ll practice the Days Of Wonder regression, the happy regression. So you get used to the language, the movements, the maneuvers of looping. Seeing the emotional rise intensify and so on, the conversation you have with people in that process, does that make sense to you guys? As you get more experience with that, you can also do the therapeutic regression as a role play like we are doing right now or we are about to do in a moment. So

251 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 again you get more fluent with what you might say. Get more fluent with the steps. Once you’ve done that you can combine them and when the client comes and you’ll get the conditions, they will be unmistakable, and you will do a very good therapeutic regression that will be only of benefit to the other person. That’s the most ethical way, shall we say, of getting to do this stuff, does it make sense to everyone? That requires you to do practice, the one thing we can’t do in here is give you the time of experience that you would have to put into to be able to put stuff smoothly and so on. As I said if I was going to do that, we would probably be spending five days just doing the regression stuff on its own. You wouldn’t be able to either learn any of the other stuff or more likely you wouldn’t come for the whole month that it would take to do all the content and drilling to the point where its automatic for you guys. We can give you a good running start. We have the assistants there to help you with the exercise in the evening to continue with that drilling process and eventually you’ve got to pick up the ball and run with it on your own. This is kind of the point at which that whole process begins. You will now all of a sudden become more responsible for your skill set because soon you will be certified and then after that you will be seeing real life people with real life problems. You can appreciate the depths of the intensity shall we say, that some issues can bring up with them. Which brings us to another point which is if you don’t have any experience in terms of hypnotherapy or therapy in general, why start with a big fish? Remember don’t fight Tyson, get his little sister in the ring first, kick her around for a while, when you feel confident step up to his little brother. So work your way up to these things, there is nothing that says you’ve got to work with every person, every time. By the way even as fully-fledged therapists it’s still true, there are people who came into my therapy room when I had a clinic and after five minutes I would hand them a referral saying, you are better off calling this person and making an appointment with them. They’ll do a better job helping you than I can. It’s typically because either I just really didn’t like them and I couldn’t get out of my own way enough to be able to do my work. So there was just something about

252 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 them that just set me off. Because I couldn’t get into H+ there was no point in me beginning with them, it just doesn’t do it for me. Some people ask can I deal with certain things, the answer is I could if I really had to but I don’t want to work with those particular things. So again it’s useful to have a referral network of psychologists in the neighborhood, psychiatrists for the really big cases or other hypnotherapists who like to specialize in things that you don’t like to do. Just so when a client comes in and says can you do this, you will say, well actually I know someone who really specializes in that, they will serve you much better than I will. Because usually you do not need to do, or rather you don’t need to work with every client that comes in the door. Your job is not to save the entire world. Your job is to help those people that you feel confident to help with and it helps them whilst helping your life as well. Everyone wins that way. Does it make sense to you guys? All:

Yes.

Igor: It’s kind of a little bit of perspective around the whole thing. So here is what we are going to do now in terms of the Regression Therapy. What I would like you to do in a moment is find a partner. If you are going to be doing this in another language like Korea and Spanish I know there is a few people around. Please find someone that speaks that language, so you can do the exercise in that language with them, makes sense? Otherwise if you are happy doing it in English and you are happy with that, find someone, anyone in the room. Remember there will be no trance involved in this process, or at least there will be no overt trance in this process. Most importantly you will not be using any material, any genuine emotions, negative emotions and so on in this process. It is only a role play to get used to the steps. Does that make sense to you guys? All:

Yes.

Igor: So if you want you can channel some other person you think might have a problem and so on. Can we have a mic over here so we can hear properly just stand up so we can get the mic to you. Q:

It’s a fake thing.

253 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: It’s a fake thing exactly, a fake problem, a fake person. You may even give someone a fake name if you prefer. It’s purely to do a dry run to go through the steps, is this understood? Which means two things: 1. Therapist. Do not ask, if you see your client having any kind of genuine emotion in that experience, stop the process right away. We are not here to do therapy at this point does that make sense? You will stop at exactly the point that you see an actual emotion arising which is anything other than positive. You might laugh in the middle of it, just because it’s fun, that’s fine. Are we clear on that point? This is a very important thing at this stage in your training. So because you can’t handle doing the regression work, at some point very soon you will be very capable of it, but this is not the time for it. 2. When you are the client it is your responsibility to stay out of your own stuff to do this. So whatever stuff came up and I realized watching this demonstration, stuff did come up for you as well didn’t it, personal things come up. It’s just natural. It’s your responsibility to put that aside, you will not be dealing with that here. If your unconscious mind is smart, which I think it is, it may want to learn the steps first and then do it when you are dreaming and sleeping tonight in a safe comfortable way. That is absolutely appropriate. But it is not for this particular exercise have I emphasized this properly, yes? All:

Yes.

Igor: Alright guys, so what I want you to do, it’s a question stand up so we can get the mic to you. Q:

It’s just really quick, so are we going through the same steps as this morning except we are choosing – ?

Igor: So the question is what steps are you going to go through? I will walk you through the steps, step by step as you do them. So that’s my responsibility at this point, you need to know nothing at this point. There you go, blank your minds out. Isn’t that a relief at this stage? Alright so as quickly as possible find an appropriate partner, sit down and face silently this way.

254 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2

Step By Step Regression

Igor: So you’ve all seen what it looks like, is that correct? All:

Yes.

Igor: What we are going to do now, is we are going to walk through it step by step, I will demonstrate the role play first and you will follow up. So actually maybe I can have an assistant up here so I can just have the same person constantly for the role play, any assistant will do, just come up so we can do the whole chatty thing. So what is step 1 in any hypnotic process that you are going to engage in, any ideas? All:

Context.

Igor: Context, right. So you can have your little chat and you can have a little act of compliance and all that sort of stuff. My act of compliance would be, look here a second there are some important things we need to talk about first. Done, simple, yes, do that, come back. One second folks. Who didn’t get done with that? Anyone not get done with that yet? One or two people? Alright guys work a little faster this is not rocket science right. We need to keep these steps really crisp to make it easier for your mind to understand. If we take too long with each step, it all starts drifting apart again. So I’m not harassing you because I’m the harassing type. I’m obnoxious, that’s true, but I’m doing it because it will be a lot easier for you to understand the steps if they are short, simple and clear with no extra stuff put around it. Does that make sense? So please once again, get a – quick question. Yeah everyone, both of you will do it, so when I say go ahead and do it, one person will do it then the other person will do it back and you are done, face this way silently don’t get into a conversation. The conversation will actually break the flow that your mind is going to build up. If you turn silently that unit will stay there and it will be easier for you to attach other steps onto it. Does that make sense to you guys? You can

255 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 converse if you want, I’m just warning you right now it will make your life more difficult more later on, guaranteed, but it’s up to you guys. So let’s try that again. Turn to your partner, get one simple act of compliance, takes half a second then, then do that and you’ll come back facing slightly off you go. Anything extra you put around the edges folks remember it’s going to make your life a little trickier because you are putting extra things in your memory that you don’t need to have there. So act of compliance, simple, what are the boiler-plates, remind me quickly. Sounds around you what else? Safe voice, my voice will go with you safe place. So I want you to do those three things with as few words as possible. Can you look at me for a second, what I’m I doing? Compliance. Look at me for a second, in a moment we will do a process, what you’ll know is that we will be very safe, feel the chair and know you are safe. You’ll hear sounds the will help you deepen the experience more, my voice of course will continue to guide you, you will hear it at all times. Makes sense? Just pass on back here. C:

It does make sense.

Igor: There you go good. Alright three steps, really minimal words in and out because we haven’t even started the interesting stuff here yes. When you are done, resist that temptation to say well done, congratulations, that was good, wasn’t that good? Resist that temptation because that will fudge the edges of the step and it won’t hang on to the next step as easily for you. You can do it if you want but it will make your learning less easy. Off you go. Easy, yes? This is something you’ve done already. Next step is to prepare him for what’s going to happen. It will be slightly different from what you did for real, but we’ll see that. So in a moment I’m going to touch your shoulder and that emotion we talked about will come up. It will be strong enough that you will feel it but weak enough that it won’t overwhelm you, it will be controllable. Do you know what I mean by that? C:

Okay.

Igor: Excellent go through that action, but we’ll do that in a second, just give them that little bit of talk. We are going to start, get used to that bit of talk off you go.

256 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Simple, quick, easy to do, yes. Everyone follow that one so far? Okay. So when I touch you in the shoulder you’ll have this emotion come up it will be strong enough you will feel it, it will be weak enough so that it won’t overwhelm you. However I will then count from three down to one. You will go back in time to the earliest time you experienced this. Don’t worry, as soon as you get there I will pull you out nice and safe. However it will be intense for a moment in time are you okay with this? C:

Okay.

Igor: Do you understand how to set up the parameters? Yes off you go, quickly. Say it again. You are only role playing. Say it again. We are pushing you on purpose guys just say less, this is the easy part. Honestly if you say more you are making life a little harder for yourself. A lot of people are finished and you all have plenty of time to do this as long as you need when we actually get to using this. When you are training something however, the less you say the clearer the step becomes in your mind, does that make sense to you guys? So I apologize for pushing you guys in terms of time I realize it’s not a lot in it, but there is a purpose, there is a method behind my madness. Is it okay for me to carry on doing this? All:

Yes.

Igor: Yes. It will make your life easier in the long run, even though it makes it slightly less pleasant in the short term. Right. Okay the second one didn’t get a chance to do it, how many people did both ways? So a lot of people are actually doing it which means one person is being a little slow on doing it and once again it makes life a little harder. Makes sense? To help this round, if you have the other person starting the second time round I will make sure as we are going through, you’ll get a chance to repeat each step again several times. So make sure you alternate who starts off and if someone misses out because they are a little bit on the slow slide, then you don’t have to miss out because of it. Does that help you guys? I’m going to encourage you strongly once again, I’m speeding you up on purpose, it makes your life easier, I know it’s not as comfortable for some people. But if you say less and just get the step done in as

257 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 short and quick time as possible, this whole thing will make much more sense to you. I have done it the other way and believe me, it makes your head go on a spin if I try to do all the steps in a different way. I have done it that way too, does that make sense? All:

Yes.

Igor: Alright guys so back to the client. We can do the whole thing again from the beginning so that gives you a chance to catch up on that side. Okay. So if it makes you a little comfortable, have a look at me. I want you to know some things; You will hear sounds around, you they will just help you have this experience. My voice will continue to guide you, I will be here at all times. I want you to know that you are safe, you can take your time out whenever you want but right now feel your chair and know how safe you are. Finally in a moment I’m going to touch your shoulder like this. The next time I touch your shoulder like this, you are going to feel that emotion, it’s going to get pretty strong but not too strong. Then I’ll count from three, down to one, you will move backwards in time with that count. At the count of one you will end up at some memory in the past when this first happened. It will be intense for a moment but rest assured I will pull you right back out. Does that make sense you? C:

Okay.

Igor: Then feel that now, three, two, one, go back to that time. What’s happening now are you inside or outside? C:

I’m outside.

Igor: Alone or with others? C:

With others.

Igor: Great, one, two, three, adult in the room watching that scene way in a distance, way out there way in a distance. Whew, that was quite something wasn’t it?

258 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 C:

Wow it was.

Igor: Easy step, you just counted them back and as soon as they have experienced it you pulled them out, easy? Do the whole thing from start again, off you go. So notice how you can get a lot of things done with relatively few words, is that correct? Yes? Regression Steps 1. Trance & Boiler Plates 2. Emotion - Regress 3. Orient - Dissociate All:

Yes.

Igor: Good. So did you do a trance and the boiler-plates in terms of what we are doing here in the role play, did you get an emotion and regression on it yes? Was that a no somewhere? Okay fine. So once you regressed did you orient them there just a token amount to get a handle on it and then disassociate them pull them out of the experience is that correct yes? So far so good, right, simple. Okay. So what we do now is in the understanding of this, I’m going to do the whole, all the steps again as a role play only I’m going to shorten the step. Look at me you know you are safe, the sounds around they will help you, my voice will be with you. The emotion will come up, you’ll go back in time, you will be there for a moment and then you’ll come back out. You see how I have just shortened that all down, just to get the idea out, you ready? Okay, three, two, one going back, where were you inside or outside? Good, back out watching the scene way back there that was quite something wasn’t it? C:

It was.

Igor: That’s pretty much what we just did. Now just like sped up in super quick time right? Notice again I’m not concerned about the language. I’m not concerned about how eloquent and involved anything else is. We are just really getting used to the steps because they are intricate. At this point as an adult, you can see that

259 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 memory over there. Now we have the chat. Now that was pretty intense wasn’t it? C:

It was pretty intense.

Igor: You are feeling good now right? C:

I’m okay now, yeah.

Igor: Fantastic. So I want you to realize that you are safe right now and you know that right? C:

Right.

Igor: There is something you know that that child does not, whilst he was in there he probably didn’t think he would survive that. But you know he made it because you are here. Do you understand the nature of this conversation? The reframe. So there was a time before any of this happened when he felt safe, when was that? Five minutes ago, ten minutes ago? C:

20 minutes ago.

Igor: 20 minutes before that what was he doing? C:

He was playing with friends.

Igor: Okay great so he is playing with friends then this thing happened and at some point it’s all over, right and he is safe again. When was that? C:

It was back with his family at the dinner table.

Igor: Okay so the dinner table with his family. So now we have the end points, visually speaking here is what you have. Here is our moment of terror. What we have done is, we have found a safe place before and a safe place after it. Does it make sense to you guys? Real easy isn’t it? All we did was we talked to him, we coached him to get the information out of him that’s all it was. Is that an easy step to do? So I want you to do steps one to three again but in token effort you’re feeling safe, sounds will happen, my voice like literally in seconds so you can get to this

260 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 stage as quickly as possible. Then you can feel your way around that a little bit more. Makes sense? Off you go. Okay most of that is done. Was that easy to do? 4. Find two safe end points. All:

Yeah.

Igor: It takes a little bit of talking to get those things set up, but you actually get that very easily right? All:

Yes.

Igor: Okay. So once again, starting with the other partner we are going to do all those steps again this time again very fast to get them to that point and then we’ll add another step, right? So look at me you, you know you are safe, the sounds will continue to go round, my voice will guide you, in a moment you will feel a feeling, go back on those feelings for a moment. Okay ready, three, two, one be in there. Step back out, watch it over there. You know where you were safe before, right? You know where you were safe afterwards right? So we’ve got those three things, excellent. I have now in about 10 seconds, 20 seconds got the same point again, is that correct? All:

Yes. 5. Run the loop – safe memory, quickly through the intense period, safe memory.

Igor: You all follow that without any hint of confusion is that correct? So the next step will be to run the loop, right? So in a moment I’m going to ask you to step inside that first safe memory when you are, what did he say? Playing with his friends. We’ll move through that intense period, notice I’m not even naming it properly, until we get back to a place of safety. What I want you to notice is how even at this stage it will be nowhere near as intense as it was a moment ago. Do you understand what I mean by that?

261 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 C:

Okay, yes.

Igor: Now I warn you, it will still have a strong emotion I understand that, but it will be nowhere near as intense as it was a moment ago, is that cool? C:

Okay.

Igor: Let me know when you are ready. C:

I’m ready.

Igor: Excellent step inside, hey little Carson you are playing with your friends, good stuff, move it all the way through the scene, it’s all over now, you are having dinner at the table with your family it’s all fine. One, two, three big Carson watching the scene, easy. Right. Visually speaking here is our place of fear, here are our two places of safety, what he is doing is the grey man is stepping inside here, running the scene. Over here we are bringing them back out. So we are running the first loop, we’ll call that the loop right here. Over here – it looks like spectacles, see here? But you get the idea right? You are preparing them for what to expect, then dropping them in, run the scene when it’s done, when you are feeling safe and comfortable again you are pulling them out and that’s all we need to do, just one extra little step. Is that easy to do folks? All:

Yes.

Igor: Okay remember we are going to start at point 1, only with token things so you can really zip through that. When we get to step 5, we’ll spend a little bit more time so we can feel our way around that. Right? Off you go. Was that an easy step to do? Even though you are role playing, when you are being the subject, you are going to feel a little bit of something happening there. That’s free therapy folks well done. So far so clear correct? 6. Hypnotist coaches adult – adult coaches child. So once again we are going to go through all those steps again in a fast forward format, then we’ll add one more step where we coach … the hypnotist coaches the adult version of the client.

262 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 So once again. Would you look at me, you are here, you are safe, sounds around you will happen, my voice will take you deeper, there will be an emotion, three, two, one go be there now. Stepping back out, watch it away back there all good fantastic. There was a safe place before, right and a safe place after, right? So in a moment we will step in a loop, ready, one, two, three, stepping inside, things are happening, all the way to the end. One, two, three back in the room watching that scene. That’s pretty much what you have done so far. Fast forward pace, how long will that take? 10 seconds. So you don’t need to elaborate time on it, you will just put in the step, the idea inside your mind. The next thing we are going to do is coach the adult. So Carson as you know first of all, that you feel pretty cool about that. C:

That was interesting.

Igor: Wasn’t it? Was it anywhere near as intense as before? C:

Not as bad no.

Igor: Right, so the emotions are already receding and the reasons for it is because now he is starting to realize that everything ends up safely, it ends up well right. Now you and I both know that. The one who doesn’t know it yet is little Carson over there. C:

He doesn’t.

Igor: How do you think he would react, if he knew when he was playing with his friends and it’s the first scene, if he knew stuff was going to happen, but would all be okay in the end. How do you think the whole event would have impacted on him? C:

He would feel a lot better.

Igor: It would wouldn’t it? You see the coaching situation going on? So how about you tell him and he has told him right. So you see how we’ve got the coaching, I have coached him, he coaches the child and then we step inside the loop. So let’s just do to that point and then we’ll do the loop in a second. So literally I’m just going to coach the adult and he ends up going … the kid needs to know … I’ll come to

263 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 you in a second and he coaches the child. It’s an easy step to do yes. Let’s have a microphone over here so we can see you. Someone come forward with a mic. Q:

Another question is first we go to the safe place.

Igor: We have no safe place. The safe place is here just sitting on the chair that’s the boiler-plate. Q:

On the picture.

Igor: Oh in the picture sorry. Q:

We go to the safe then we go to the scene and then we go to safe place again.

Igor: Exactly. What’s happening here is, this whole thing here, let’s have another color, green. This whole thing here is being turned into one memory. Its three memories right now and by running through the scene it all becomes one memory. Let me explain a little why, would like to have a quick why on that one guys? Think about something that happened to you in the past that was at the time unpleasant but now you don’t really care about it too much, it’ so done, anyone think of that? Now compare to something else, something that happened in the past, when we think about it now, there is still a bit of emotion attached to it. You’ve got that scene in your mind? Would it be fair to say that the first one which you have gotten over, you’ve got more perspective, it’s a bigger memory. It’s not just the event itself, you know stuff that happened as a result of it and you have in more context, you don’t care about it as much. Is that relatively accurate? The second memory, the one which still feels a bit charged, when you focus on it it’s a much smaller memory isn’t it? Typically it will be just the height of whatever went wrong in that situation and you have no more context you don’t have the rest of the other things going on in your mind at that time, is that correct? That’s why it still has a charge, because when you’re focusing on it, all we are seeing is this, which is the fear, the anger or whatever. With the stuff that you resolved, what you are seeing is all this, its book ended by safety or in your memories by other things that put it in context.

264 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Remember we talked about framing? You only understand something by referring it back to the context it’s in. If the only context you have is fear how are you going to feel? Right. If the context you have is being safe, is fear anywhere near as relevant at that point? So what we are doing with this safety and safety loop is creating a new context for the experience which will automatically reframe it and allow the emotion to drain. That’s why the second time they go in when they start at the place of safety is nowhere near as intense as the first time. Does that make sense to you guys, does that help? Does that answer some questions there? So back to the idea of hypnotist coaching the adult and of course lets go here. As part of that same step, the adult coaches the child. Right and you understand the three different roles. Hypnotist, adult, child. You all understand those things. So please zip through steps one to five in token effort as quickly as possible in ten seconds and then spend some time on step six getting to feel how you might frame that with people. Okay, off you go. Okay everyone manage to get through those steps relatively quickly and easily, yes? It is starting to feel a bit more familiar to you guys now? Notice how speed actually does help with this, hence the pushing a little bit. It will help cement things into your mind. So you’ve had the coaching chat is that correct, what do you think is going to happen next? Now that they know it intellectually, cognitively, they need to have it experientially. So we do the same loop again, only this time the way I’m going to write the loop up is like this. Because now the loop is being joined together it’s all starting to blend into one memory, which happened to have this strange reaction in the middle. Does that make sense to you guys? At the end of it of course once again, you bring them out and once again the hypnotist coaches the adult once again. So here that’s how the whole thing is going to look like. Is this useful guys? 7. Coach & Loop. All:

Yes.

265 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: Okay, a quick question. Can we just stand up so we can get a mic to you? So everyone can hear you as well. Q:

Just Step-5, this loop is also started going out and I think also used the same.

Igor: The same loop? Q:

Yeah but I couldn’t distinguish what’s the difference between …

Igor: Between the loop or between … ? The difference what you do in between it. Q:

Say something is just …

Igor: Say it again? Q:

The words.

Igor: So in step 5, we do not talk to the child at all. Q:

Don’t talk to the child?

Igor: No I’m just talking to him, I’ll show you once again all the steps and if you keep the microphone turn it off now. But if there is still a question then I’ll address it again is that okay? So we’ll go step by step you call out the step and I’ll do it, does that sound good? Okay so just give me a number and I’ll do it. Okay just would you look here, you know you are safe, there will be sounds around you, that’s fine, my voice will guide you. Two – in a moment the emotion will come, you see I’m faster than you guys, haha. In a moment the emotion will come, okay three, two, one be there now, oh I’m bad. Three, okay step back out, watch the scene way down over there. All:

Four.

Igor: Four, here is number four. There is a safe place to four right and a safe place afterwards. Can you see all three now, excellent, have we done four? Good. Now we get to step 5, that’s your thing. Step into the first safe place playing with friends we’ll move all the way through you will come back out it, will be less. Ready, step in, feel it, come in to the end, come back out, watch that. I’ve talked to him, I have not even talked to the child, now it is ready for which step?

266 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 All:

Six.

Igor: Slightly different coaching, still coaching but slightly different coaching. You and I both … now that wasn’t so bad right? C:

That was good.

Igor: You and I both know that it got easier. How much easier would be if the child knew? Much easier. C:

Much.

Igor: Exactly. So tell him - that’s the difference, you tell him that its happening to make it easier do you understand the difference now? Beautiful. Tells him. Okay ready step inside you are playing with friends and stuff happens at the dinner table, come on back, hey how much easier was that? Easy right? Is that at the point we are up to at this point. Okay now do the whole thing once again. So I’ll spend less time on step 5 and 6 now because I’ll just spend a little bit longer just to clarify that step. I’ll do the same thing again faster because speed really does help here okay? So … Well we haven’t done it yet. Good question I would be curious about that too. So look at me, you are safe, sounds will happen, my voice will guide you, at the moment emotion will come, three, two, one go back on that. Step on back out, watch the scene over there. You were safe before, right, you were safe after right. So go ahead and step inside, safe all the way through until you are back safe here, come on back here. How was that? Not so bad. Okay now what if you told him, wouldn’t that be easier, yes of course it would be. Go ahead and tell them, well done. Okay now let’s step back inside and experience it. Step on in, experiencing from kitchen … sorry playing with friends, stuff happens, you are at the kitchen table with your family come on back. How much easier was that? Now it’s step 7. How much easier was that? C:

A lot easier.

Igor: Wasn’t it? Emotions are starting to go now. I’m reaffirming what’ happening, aren’t I? So what do you think would happen if you did it again? Do you think it can get even easier?

267 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 C:

It would.

Igor: Well let’s find out. Step on inside, run the scene, come on back how was that? C:

Better still.

Igor: Right. So you think if you did it one more time it’ll get even better I agree. Step on in, run the loop come on back how was that? C:

It was great.

Igor: Do you see the … this is where the loop starts looping over and over again. So now what we have, let’s do another page on this one, we’ll do step 7 on another page. My handwriting has regressed. Very well we’ll make that easy. We’ll do this easy like this. We’ll just call it overall, that’s probably an easy way of describing it, isn’t it. So what happens visually is its all one memory now. He will step in, he’ll go through, he’ll come out, he’ll come through the coaching loop and back out the other end and you may do that three times maybe. Do you see that as a loop? You talk to the adult, that’s here, it’s here … You talk to the adult, the adult talks to the child, maybe, maybe not depends on how you feel at the moment. They’ll step inside, they will run the experience, they will come back out and the whole thing happens again. Is that easy to do folks? There is a question here just stand up so we can get a mic to you please. Q:

For the purposes of what we are doing right here, am I correct in understanding that it’s only in step 6 that we are asking the adult to talk to the child?

Igor: If you feel like it, exactly. You won’t do it at step 5, after step 6 I don’t care. Whatever you feel like. You can technically do it in step 5 as well if you wanted to, it’s just I like the extra surprise that comes at that point is all. Does this make sense, is that easy? Would you rather I leave up this page or that page? That’s an easier page to leave up isn’t it? Alright let me just move this up a little bit so you guys can see the whole page. Remember from step 1 through 6 really spend 15 second on that and no more.

268 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Then spend a little bit more time looping around step 7. Two or three loops then let your partner have a go, off you go. Was that easy? Each step on its own is not difficult is it? It’s just there are a lot of little steps, little intricacies on the way and I understand, it takes a little while for you to kind of acclimatize to the whole thing, that’s why you have notes. Its real simple, so you get all those steps from 1 to 7 is that correct? All:

Yes.

Igor: So believe it or not you’ve done what most people think is the trickiest part all the little complicated loops and all that sort of stuff. Very simple. What’s left, what’s the next step any ideas? 8. Safe/Power Place All:

Forgiveness.

Igor: So how do we forgive the forgiveness whole thing? Here we go, exactly. Safe/power place. What were we going to say after the power place? 9. Introduce the Characters Igor: The next thing we do here is we introduce the characters don’t we? Now you can introduce to us all the characters you want or just the main ones, knowing there may be certain characters that they may forget about, or miss out on which we will remind them about later, does that make sense? But you want to have the general field play or whatever you want to call the word. You are going to have them lined up so you have enough idea what’s going to happen, you want to make it safe for them. Easy? So let’s just do that step for now and then we’ll actually do the discussion itself, alright? So look at me, you’re safe sound, voice, feeling. One, two three, go all the way back. Three, two, one all the way back, feel, all the way back here, one two, three. Watch, safe, safe, right, step inside feel through all the way to the end come back, pretty good, right? Here is the crazy part - you all know exactly what I’m talking about. You know he doesn’t, tell, good, step inside, run through, come back. How was that? Good, okay let’s do it again, in, through, back, out, good, all one through, out, one, more to it. Wow.

269 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 C:

Feels good.

Igor: So far so good right? You are all on drugs. So now we do step 8 right? Okay, so let that scene fade for a moment, you did a great job, always ego boosting, self-esteem stuff. You are doing a great job. One more thing we need to do here. I think you are really going to enjoy it. It’s going to be a very powerful moment. So the first thing I want you to do is take yourself to a really safe place, a place where you feel powerful, where is that? C:

A park.

Igor: The park? So you are in this park and what are you doing? C:

We’ll I’m there I’m training, I’m training kung-fu.

Igor: Excellent, so you are training kung-fu in the park and you feel strong there, excellent. C:

I feel very strong.

Igor: So you have a safe place, a power place. For in a moment, I’m going to ask you, I want you to bring in certain people into the scene. There are people who may have been present or maybe they should have been present. Maybe they did something there, or maybe they didn’t do something they should have done. Maybe they should have said something or done something, you know that kind of stuff I mean. Who do you think those people are? C:

My two friends who were with me.

Igor: Your two friends. C:

My brother and my parents.

Igor: Excellent so we have our usual suspects lined up, right, exactly. So we are pretty much done in that step is that correct, yeah? Off you go. A few of you fell into a chatty mode did you? So how are you guys doing, enjoying this, useful? All:

Yes.

270 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: So now that we have created this safe power place and we’ve got our usual suspects lined up what do we do? We do the work right. So real simple. Look at me, safe, sounds, voice, feeling, back, one, two, three, right, coming back, watch the scene, safe place here, safe place there excellent. Step inside go through come on back, all good, fantastic. Let’s do it again, tell him. Very good, step inside, go through, come back. So far so clear? You guys are smart. Alright once again let’s do it one more time, step in, go through come back, getting better. Step 2 come back, better still. All the way through, all emotions gone. Let it fade, place is the park, kung-fu park, nice, good. People, friends, brother, parents. Good we are kind of caught up at this point, yes? All:

Yes.

Igor: Please do it that with speed, because it really cements the steps in for you. I know there are a lot of steps, so this is part of the whole thing. Okay so which one do you want to bring in first? C:

The first friend.

Igor: Excellent bring in friend number 1, make sure it’s a place of power, if you need to do whatever you need to do to restrain them, but I don’t think you need to. Whatever you want to do. Do you know where he is? Tell him what he needs to hear, tell him without reservation, tell him what he needs to do, what you have been wanting to say all these years. Just get it all off your chest, emotions, boohoo, right? All done? Yes of course you are. Excellent. Now here is the important part, it’s important to now let go of this, so this whole thing can heal. Let go of him, let go of what happened because let’s face it, we are all human, we all make mistakes. So can you forgive him, can you let it go, can you just let it get … well tell him. Tell him that you are at peace now, that it’s done, that this incident is over and you don’t need to think about it and you don’t need to carry it around anymore. C:

I forgive you.

Igor: Excellent, very good. Was that easy to do folks? Shall we do another one just for the hell of it?

271 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 All:

Yes.

Igor: Bring the other friend in as well, okay tell them what you need to, perfect. All the way through, right? C:

Yeah.

Igor: He is quick. I’ll give you the other ones, once again just let go, forgive it’s time to heal we are all good. Doesn’t that feel good? Fantastic. C:

You are forgiven.

Igor: Easy, whose next? C:

My brother.

Igor: Brother, brother in, tell Grey to come back, forgive, right. C:

Right.

Igor: Done, good, next. C:

Parents together.

Igor: All together? I like your style. C:

Bring them all in.

Igor: Off you go. Done, that was quick, good. Forgive? C:

Forgive.

Igor: Forgive, fade, fantastic, so far so good? All:

Yeah.

Igor: No, was that a no there? Q:

A little one.

Igor: A little one from whom? We haven’t exactly, correct? We are saving that for last, because there are special things that happened at that point. So he is absolutely correct he is saying that he hasn’t forgiven his younger self. That is the only one

272 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 of the whole pantheon of people that are going to come in that is going to be treated slightly differently. So we are going to save it for another step, is that cool with you guys? All:

Yeah.

Igor: Remember one thing, in the usual suspect list, if they haven’t mentioned the parents up front which a lot of people do not, then mention them at this point, because at some level or another mommy and daddy are always responsible for what happens to us as kids. It’s just the way it works. So if they don’t want to do it then they don’t want to do it but we don’t need to do all that we are just doing the drill here. So up to this point are you all cool, yes? Off you go. Was it good for you too? Alright was that easy folks? All:

Yes. 10. Coach & Forgive 11. Child 12. Integrate & End

Igor: Exactly. So the final stage is here, real simple I may as well deal with them at once. So 11 we’ll do the child and 12 the integration and ending. Right, easy? So very quickly once again, looks, sounds, voice, stuff, feelings. Three, two, one back. Okay feeling it and come back out watch, safety, safety right? Good step inside, feel it go through, come back out, great good job. Tell him, well done, step inside, run the loop, come back, much better. Do it again one, two, three all the way through. Come back and again and again. Good, well done let a scene fade, safe place kung-fu park nice, good. Usual suspects, friends, brother, parents, right. Okay, bring him in, one friend, good, done. Second friend forgive, done, parents done. Okay you, you are rock and rolling. One person you forgot isn’t there? Oh yes there is. It’s you that little child, I guess you suffered and it made you have … you may have some resentment and so on. It’s time for you to bring him in and have a frank conversation. But bear in mind, here is the important part. Bear in mind, it’s a little kid, he didn’t know any better, right?

273 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 C:

He didn’t.

Igor: He didn’t. You still had to suffer from it, so acknowledging the suffering without being vindictive about it. Do you understand the idea here? So I realize you suffered from it but he is a little kid he doesn’t know any better than that. So I want you to let him know what happened and what the consequences were and how you don’t really blame him for it. Some people will have a real problem with this by the way, you’ll have to work a little bit at this step, it just happens. But you’ve got enough instincts to be able to help people through that. So go ahead and tell him what you need tell him making sure that he knows that it’s really not his fault, and you hold no grudge or anything like that. Yeah very good forgive him, lovely. Now how do you feel about the child? What am I doing here? I’m getting him to make beliefs about the child, to have ideas, thoughts which will be superimposed, because if he thinks about these things, emotions will arise and they will be part of the resource that appears. They will be things like pride. There will be things like amazement. Things like he is courageous and so on. All these things will be automatically revivified when they talk about these things and as they tell that to the child they will feel it. Have you ever given someone praise they really deserved, did you feel yourself welling up with it? Isn’t that a wonderful resource to add on top of something when healing whatever thing was happening, right? That’s basically what we are doing here. Tell him excellent, now give him a big hug, bring him up inside. Growing up all the way to the adult, until you are right back in the room, eyes open feeling fantastic. Rock and roll, good job you did great. Done. Was that so hard? Quick question just stand up so we can get a mic over? Q:

You said done, but are you leaving the testing phase for later?

Igor: We’ll talk about testing after lunch break. For a moment I just want you to have a clean idea of the model and you are correct but well spotted. But we want to separate it a little bit otherwise we’ll overcomplicate stuff. You cool with this? So I would like for you to race through this one to let you do the entire thing in under a minute each. Because I said integration at the end doesn’t require a lot.

274 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Then we’ll come back, we’ll do one last thing and then we’ll do to lunch, sound cool? All:

Yes.

Igor: Off you go. So there’s a couple of things I’m going to do. Rest assured because I know this has spread over two pages. We are going to write up these notes, somewhere on these boards, so you can look at it at your leisure as one piece, it will makes it easier for you right? Also after the seminar’s over we’ll have all of these diagrams we drew up here, there will be PDF, you will get a copy of them in your email. You will have them available to you guys. Yeah I know. Just sharing the love. It will only cost you $1,000, but that’s okay. I’m kidding on that. Thank you. The other thing you should know and this is something I would like for you guys to do over lunch break is on page 62 of your manuals, those of you who have them, those of you who do not feel free to just look over someone’s shoulder. You have exactly the same process just written up a little bit more linearly. The steps don’t necessarily match, one to one with what we wrote on the board, but there is the same process you are going right through it, makes sense? So what I would like you to do over lunch time, is take your manual with you and just go through this all. I do not need you to look at the whole thing and know, oh I can do this. Can you look at step 1 as one step and go, yeah I can do step 1 on its own. Can you look at step 2 and go, yeah I can do step 2 just on its own. Can you do all those, can you look at each step one at a time and if you can do each step just one at a time, that’s all we need. Is that okay with you guys, is that cool? So just stand up if you wanted the microphone, someone wanted a microphone here. Q:

I just wanted to share why it was so important not to chat. There was a few times we did fall into chatting and it was those two times when we both had like mind melts. We were going through it fast, those were the two times when we just kind of like … so I get it now.

275 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: This is not random stuff, guys. As I say you are welcome to do all the chatting you want, I’m not trying to be a conversational Nazi; oh you will talk on my terms. I’m literally trying to make your life a lot easier that’s all. So you understand the process now, we’ll have that process up on the wall over lunch time so you can have a look at that as well. You have exactly the same process in your notes, slightly less pictographically. But you still have that there. So please go through them. How many of you guys went through your notes last night? The whole booklet I mean. Good, let’s give Carson I a great round of applause for being a wonderful client.

276 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2

DVD 18 – How The Total Reintegration Method Works – Important Principles & Full Demonstration

Q & A Session

Igor: Okay so what I’d like to do to start off with on this session is to go through a bunch of questions you guys have put on the wall again and see where we can take them. Some I will answer real quickly because – I’m going to focus primarily on the questions that will help you as a hypnotherapists. There are other ones which are of curiosity I will answer either briefly or put to one side because they will take up time that we don’t necessarily need to do in terms of what we are doing here. Is that fair guys? Is that okay with you guys? Okay so if you question isn’t directly answered please don’t take offence it’s just the question of managing what time we do have again, so we can do things like spend the day teaching pain control in the final bonus day right? So in terms of NLP and hypnosis are they different are they same? Here is a quick answer I think NLP is a form of hypnosis. If you take the hypnosis out of NLP then you have really nothing worthwhile, you have a hit or miss affair. If you put the hypnosis back into NLP it’s a wonderful process and I think very valuable so hope I’ve answered that question. How do I study Erickson primarily, books, videos his students? Yes. Virtually anything I could get my hands on whether it’s a book something written his papers – his got a whole, a CD-Rom which has his whole collected papers, if his students ever taught anything, I would go and train with them. I’d watch the DVD’s, I have everything I can possibly get my hands on and I have been through it several times so hopefully that answers that question.

277 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

I think there is a library in Arizona that you can go watch his recording.

Igor: Is it really? I maybe going to Arizona, if you can find out where that is you may see me there. Q:

Arizona State University I think.

Igor: I know there is the Ericksonian Foundation but they don’t release his materials, which is a shame. Here is the irony in the Ericksonian field, all lovely cuddly lets hug the world, there is a handful of people who have incredible amounts of stuff because Erickson was videotaped, audio taped a whole bunch of stuff but they won’t release it. So unfortunately I don’t have access to that if you know a better place feel free to look it up and if you let me know I will see you there. Q:

How much is charged per hour to watch.

Igor: Do I look like I care about that? Exactly I will not mind I will be sitting there because he was a genius innovator and it’s really worth looking at what he did as work. I’m actually thinking of doing like an advanced hypnotherapy course all based on Ericksonian principles which will be built on the back of this, so one day you might actually see one of those too. Anyone interested in that one? All:

Yeah.

Igor: I thought you would be. Can you explain the certification process in detail so we can prepare? Sure, tomorrow before certification begins. And I’m not being cruel. I will explain to you after certification exactly why and what that happens. So I will make sure everything is clear. There is a method behind every bit of madness I indulge myself in. Everyone is getting more nervous and I can feel it. What is the origin of hypnosis? There are millions of books that will talk about that so please feel free to peruse those. Your time is much better spent looking at that. It’s a fascinating history but it’s not one for this point right now. Someone here has got the resistance to the words hypnosis trance and that sort of stuff. I understand some people have issues with this. It’s a loaded term either because some religions think that it’s a bad thing, then they go and use it themselves on their flock. Then there has been a lot of novels and video and films made that have the evil hypnotist and so on, so I get that.

278 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 So what can you use instead of that? There is lots of things. Relaxation, focus training, sports psychology, meditation, you can frame it anyway you want it really doesn’t matter provided the ideas come across that they will use focus and their attention will be primarily internally oriented, right? I have heard it called deep reflection. There was a whole philosophy movement which unfortunately was caned by Freud, which is a big shame, called the introspective movement where it’s all about looking inside for answers and so on. Once again you can look through the history of psychology, the history philosophy I know there are lots of different frames that you can borrow. Does that kind of help you guys at this point? Sometimes or a lot of times when I’m doing Conversational Hypnosis I don’t even call it anything. I will literally just start talking as you’ve seen me talk to people here before and I will just do it. There is no need for them to know that I’m doing anything so I guess at that point we call it coaching. Does that help? Is there an elegant way to gain someone’s compliance if someone is resisting? Really if someone is resisting and you have tried a couple of compliances, my first stop is to figure or really ask them what are they afraid of, not like, what are you afraid of man, what are you afraid of? But really there is a concern about entering hypnosis or doing hypnosis that they haven’t voiced. I need them to voice it so I can reverse it, reframe it, do something with it, does it make sense? And I think about 90 percent of times that takes care of it. The other 10 percent of the time it’s usually an interpersonal issue. In other words they are someone who doesn’t trust easily, then you need to spend time building trust, simple as that. So literally some people will require more time invested in them to build that rapport before they are willing to do something. It’s really not a big deal it’s just if you are therapist you can still charge for that time because it’s still part of the therapy right, but do not be in a rush at any point. I push you at times here for specific reasons. To increase your learning curve and to realize that some things can to be done more quickly than you thought, but when you start doing the work, you set your own pace. It’s your job, your responsibility, your practice will rise or fall based on what you do, not what I do. I will give a start point whether or – what you do with that, that’s your choice. Does that make sense? Does that help?

279 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Having trained in NLP and hypnosis is there a time when you would choose the more traditional NLP, the more traditional NLP outcome frames? Yes and no. this is specifically an NLP question I will answer it in a more broad perspective. I will use anything that I have access to, to help the client. When they are sitting in a chair, whatever I’m capable of doing I will do. I will not hold anything back on a point of philosophy, point of honor or whatever it is. I worked with clients, like for example a lady came in who was convinced that someone who had hypnotized her in a party 10 years ago was psychically controlling her even to this day. Do I believe in the fact that that happened, or do I think she was more maybe shall we say on the border of losing touch with reality? My mind possibly closer to the latter than the former, but that’s not my job diagnose. So I work within the belief system, did exactly the same sort of stuff, some Mind Bending Language, a little bit of switching stuff around. She felt free. The voices disappeared, she was happy, I was happy, she went home and I breathed a sigh of relief, very good right? So would I use NLP? Of course I would. My primary approach is the one you’ve been seeing me do all the time because I like it, it works best for me. It’s smooth and so on. Does it mean I won’t do any other things? Of course not I will throw them in like candy whenever I need to, right. So there is nothing wrong with learning more and knowing more, it’s just a question of what frame work you put it into and typically I will do something if I have this I guess urge, or spontaneous urge, something comes up and you go, you know, this might work, so off it goes. Does that help? So I think NLP’s are a very useful technique if you understand the principles that drive it. What's the difference between Street Hypnosis and hypnotherapy? Well hypnosis is hypnosis. You are creating trance. As far as I’m concerned hypnosis is an amplifier of experiences and the ability to create altered realities so that what is normally real does not have to be. So the only difference, the question to ask yourself is what are you doing hypnosis for? If you are doing hypnotherapy it is to resolve a problem. If you are doing it in coaching it is to help people achieve bigger goals which could involve therapy. If you are doing it in sports coaching it’s to achieve greater results like Matt and Sherry are doing the firearms training. I mean they are creating amazing results. No one else can do this. So they are

280 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 using hypnosis for that. Is that therapy? Not really but it’s still fixing something in some ways does that make sense? Then there is Street Hypnosis which is done for entertainment, if you are going to entertain people, entertain them but do it respectfully. So it’s not a functional question to ask, what is this hypnosis and that hypnosis. It’s a more a question of asking what are you training to achieve with hypnosis, and that’s it right and what we are doing here is of course achieving, helping people breaking through things where they are stuck emotionally, primarily and then the consequences of that that come with it. Make sense? So in trance, how does telling someone to feel awake, alert and refreshed yet be in trance work? I’m not entirely sure what the question is. I’m presuming that you are asking about how you bring them out of hypnosis is that right? Well if you are asking to bring them out of hypnosis the idea is to come out of hypnosis, but they will still have some of that trance hangover you saw happening. For example Stephanie had a great example because she had a very profound experience. You could clearly see there was still that glow of trance shall we say when she came out. Wouldn’t be fair to say when you walked around the ship that glow continued for a while and then over lunch time sort of started settling down, so you are back into a normal frame, so you’re still kind of happy right? Would that be fair to say? So that’s pretty much how it works. What are the mechanisms? Can I tell you what the bi-chemistry is and the analogy? I don’t think anyone can but it is an observable phenomenon it’s predictable so that’s kind of how it works. All cool? Is there a difference between imagination and visualization? I don’t think so. It’s a thought process. You can think about something. Consider something imagination, visualize it, remember it. You are using your mental faculties in pretty much the same way. There is only going to be little variations of nuances of how people understand it. So I think it’s exactly the same thing. So if you want to tell people this is not hypnosis we are just going to use imagination therapy. Knock yourself out, right? How do you address the situation when a client has an experience that seems to be not useful? I’m not entirely sure again what the context of this is. If someone

281 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 is going down in terms of training, someone is going down a negative road the answer is real simple. You stop what you are doing. You clear whatever is starting to happen. You bring them back out of trance and then either you start again on a different track or you leave it there for now and do something else. If you are doing it in therapy, well you will have the tools, if they start moving down the road, so if they are going down the wrong way and you need them out of it for example, if I may use you again because it was a very clear example did you all see how Stephanie was falling into the regression several times even before we started right? She was getting sucked into the experience before she even got up and sat here right? And did you notice how I had to work a little bit harder before allowing her to sit down to pull her out of the experience enough so she wouldn’t sit down and have a full blown abreaction. So the key to this is real simple you saw me do it. You insist. Remember that friendly but obnoxious thing. It’s easy to fall over the edge I’m going to be that thorn on her side that’s going to say nope, nope, nope, there you go now you are getting better. Keep going, keep going, no not that way, keep going. So we are prodding them, we are pushing but in a friendly sort of way. So there is no uncertainty about where they are going to go with it. Would that be fair to say once again, of the experience you had? It was very easy for you to fall into the abreaction – the state that you had building – just standing up there talking about it and then by prodding and prodding you, first a little bit happened and then we built on that until it all calmed down enough and you could sit down comfortable again right. Does that make sense? So you’ve pretty much seen it in action now. How should a past life regression regress be handled? How could you test if it worked? First of all it’s up to you. You are the therapist it’s your office. Do you want to do one? Do one if you don’t, don’t. Past life regression is apparently quite a growing field and potentially very lucrative. A lot of people want to experience it. There is no different between a regular regression and a past life regression, you just go further back. Whether it’s real or not that’s another matter. I don’t know. Some people claim its real, some people claim it’s basically

282 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 the same as the Dynamic Induction just with more real ideas placed into it and honestly I don’t care. The way you test whether it’s worked not is exactly same way as you test anything else. You find out. They come back and you do your test, same as with the classic regression. You saw me do a test didn’t you? The snake here, the snake there, the snake there, each one building on the other one, right, there is no difference between that and a past life regression, should you choose to go down that line of work. Whether or not it’s a real thing, is irrelevant, because I have seen some tremendous therapeutic results come out of it. I happen to not engage in those sort of things, I don’t really do them. so I’m not the expert on it. But I can’t knock it because people have clearly had some amazing shifts out of it. Does that make sense? How do you get to the point where you can be stable in this line of work and ready to quit your full time job? Great question isn’t it? You need to make one big realization. You have to work as much on your business as in it. Right now you are learning to work in your business aren’t you? Some of you have already got business experience. You’ve taken courses on marketing, on sales and advertising, on direct response mail and all this sort of things and you know what it takes to start building your business, getting a client list, getting referral groups and all that sort of stuff, its effort, its work. If what I just said in the last few minutes it complete Greek to you and you want to have a hypnotherapy practice then you really want to make sure you go out there and you educate yourself about the business of doing this. There are lots of people out there that will teach you how to learn to run a professional services business, right? There are books out there on Amazon. If you are really interested get the Make A Lot Of Money Master Class, where the fundamentals are laid out for you really clearly and there is a lot of material, a wealth of material you can educate yourself about to learn those things. I strongly urge you to do that, because I didn’t for a good two or three years and to this day I have no idea how I made it through that time. Honestly I don’t. I was lucky in the sense that I got some bigger commissions, especially when I started

283 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 getting into more corporate work, but I have no idea how I survived it because I was clueless when it comes to the whole idea of business, so educate yourself. What is a spontaneous regression? Well, once again, my favorite person in the room you saw it. Did you all see something significantly different happening when Stephanie talked about her problem to everyone else? And did you all notice that if I had just shut up when she sat down, rather than talk to her a little bit longer, that a less than happy consequence might have ensued at that point? That is a spontaneous regression. How do you regress a person to have positive expectations, when a tragedy occurred to them that negates all of the experiences, for example if a mother lost her only child in a car accident like three years ago. I’m presuming this is a bit of a personal question you are asking here. So I won’t necessarily ask the person talk about that up front. But essentially it’s exactly the same way. Terrible things happen. It’s true and people have overcome terrible things. Everyone can, right? Doesn’t make easy, but it makes it possible. If you have doubt, read Victor Frankl, As a Man Search for Meaning something like that. Those of you who know or already familiar with this, he was a Jew who was interned in a concentration camp in Nazi Germany and he noticed two kinds of people those who were crushed by the brutality of the whole thing and died or even if they survived were left feeling more pessimistic, broken people and those who strangely went the other way who lived bigger lives, better lives, who had more of an appreciation for life as a result of it. The big realization he comes to and it’s worth reading just for that insight, is that it doesn’t matter what happens to you. What matters is how you let that affect you. And that’s one of the things that you need to help someone see when they’ve had a tragedy like that. There are a lot of reasons to keep living life despite such a tragedy, does that kind of make sense to you guys? The whole idea of grief and so on is again a little bit of a specialist topic. There is a lot of great material out there to read up about it. Do so it’s a wonderful thing to look at. A little beyond the scope of what we are doing here just because we are going to give you core processes that have the most things, but honestly…

284 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

Do you have any good example of materials we could look at?

Igor: I don’t have any personal materials and I can’t think off the top of my head of something that has that. Basically here is a way you can tell if something is good material. Would it be fair to say that you’ve had good experiences here in this seminar, yes, right? If you use your experiences here as a yard stick to evaluate whatever new materials comes your way, you can make a decision, this element I like, this element I think that’s a little cranky or inhumane or whatever. I will polish up a bit or won’t use it at all. It’s as simple as that. That you will come across some author, some people who really get it. You saw a powerful demonstration or regression here didn’t you? A lot of you have come up to me during the breaks and told me that it didn’t just move you, but it changed you as a person just watching it as well, would that be fair to say? Use that instinct when evaluating what you are looking at. Does this person really get people? Is what they are suggesting, you know, is it something you would like your own grandmother to go through if she needed it, or do you think it’s something a little cold or wrong or whatever about it, does that kind of make sense to you guys? I’ve read I don’t know how much stuff, a lot of which was useless. Some of which was brilliant and a lot of times in between, in other words is a lot of useless with the odd nugget in, which is like pure gold. That’s generally what you end up doing. So you have to educate yourselves guys. If you want to have stuff that is already pre-packaged and ready to roll, that’s what we do our products for. But I am not capable yet of stepping out of time long enough to be able to create an answer to everything in minutes. So it takes time for me to start producing that kind of material. So you’ll either have to wait or go out and educate yourself and do the work on your own for a while. That’s just part of what a good therapist does. So does that kind of make sense to you guys yeah? As a rule in terms of regression and handling it, you know I’d start with the idea of – we’ll talk about how the process goes, but I do the same protocol here I talk to them, do a bit of Mind Bending Language, maybe some symbolism and then in terms of regression maybe exactly what you saw here.

285 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Because grief is a like any other emotion, it’s something they learnt at some point and when they learn to handle grief overall, they will be able to learn to handle this particular grief and whilst it may be a tragedy, it can heal, it does heal, you all know people who have been through terrible things and have come out stronger as a result right. So that’s the general outline for that one. I have seen other trainers with your kind of clothing cool colors and yeah. Is there some hypnotic reason for that? No. I like it. Ask any one of the – like Meg or anyone else who knows me in my own time shall we say, I dress this way. If you caught me on a Tuesday afternoon going shopping I’ll probably look this way as well. Maybe a little bit scruffier but that’s about it. So it’s just a personal thing. What is the difference between state of consciousness where you are hearing versus only remembering a black out? I guess what you are saying is what if you have memory gaps in terms of what you had and there is amnesia going on? Really essentially nothing. Sometimes the unconscious mind will step in and will blank out things you’ve heard in terms of therapy and so on because you are not ready to hear it yet consciously. It will catch up to you later. It’s happened to many times. Other times it’s fine, go ahead and listen to this, its fine for you. The only time you have a problem is if the person is over active with a conscious mind and starts interfering with the whole process, then you have something else. That’s where things like the Non Awareness Set help you resolve it. Mind Bending Language, really they have no chance when you start playing those cards, but essentially there is no real difference, it’s just how they happen to need to process it at that point in time. Sleep walking is unconscious experience. I’m not sure if its hallucination but that’s a person who thinks so. How will you help someone stop having such hallucinations? Well I won’t necessarily call sleep walking a hallucination because they are doing something physically as opposed to just having the mental experience. In terms of how you deal with things where they have no conscious involvement like sleep walking, things that happen when they not paying attention like classically when a smoker comes in and says, I don’t know when I

286 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 smoke it’s just I end up having – I’m half way through a cigarette before I realize it’s there. Does that make sense? What you are catching is the unconscious moment. You saw a great example when Renee sat up here doing the smoking session, right? We went through lots of loops where she had no idea what was happening, but then eventually it kind of popped out and then resolution, do you all remember that sort of thing. So one of the ways you do it is your re-vivification as you revivify experiences and you cycle around them again and again and again you start placing conscious attention where unconsciousness was purely there and you can penetrate that veil and you have lots of stuff to work with. Otherwise you have other regular functions for example, you have the Dynamic Induction. They can symbolically resolve it and see if that works. It can do a very good job. I like to use the Non Awareness Set especially when there is a situation where people have no idea what's happening or how it’s happening, they just find themselves in the middle of it because the whole point of the Non Awareness Set is they have no idea how it’s happening. So the beauty of the induction process parallels the actual problem that they are having, so the induction is doing good stuff when it must be able to influence the same place as the problem, do you see how the analogy works? So that’s kind of how it works with something like that. Why doesn’t AMA endorse hypnosis? Actually I think it does. In 1957 or so they changed their mind about hypnosis. It’s now a valid therapeutic modality as far as they concerned, I’ll come to you in a second, and if you are interested in this background story it’s kind of quite funny. They choose Erickson of all people to crucify over the use of hypnosis. One short plane ride later with the two heads of the crucifixion team and they thought Erickson, hell of a guy, nobody told me but hell of a guy. The following year they changed the whole ruling, I presume you have some other information, do you want to bring the microphone up there or? Q:

The AMA recently released a statement within the last year or so saying that all resolutions they made before 1960 they were rejecting.

Igor: Oh really?

287 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

Yeah.

Igor: I’m not aware, I’m sorry I didn’t even know that. In that case I don’t know what the current position is. They would be very foolish to reject it, I mean that could be a political thing right? Q:

It’s very much as political, they don’t interfere with people doing hypnosis but they are very touchy about the word therapy in the states.

Igor: Right I can see – it’s a political thing at that point right? Don’t get your knickers in a twist as they say in England. Do, do your due diligence check with a lawyer so that your country and your state allows you to do what you are going to do. Don’t get yourself in hot water. Every country, every state has different rules, I can’t tell you all of them because I’m not a walking dictionary and it would also be giving legal advice, which would be illegal for me to do in pretty much any jurisdiction. So do go and find out for yourself what is allowed for you to do and just go off and do good work with that. Aside from that yeah, there is a lot of politics in medicine because there is a lot of money in it right? Money brings politics and we don’t need to go down the particular road, but you get where I’m going with this right? Let’s put it this way, do you all think that hypnosis works? All:

Yes.

Igor: Right have we demonstrated at least one or two occasions that has a potential value to the tool right? Q:

Yes.

Igor: So why concern yourself with what games they want to play, right? How do we give reference points to someone who never experienced love in their life? Is an excellent question, right? First of all every human being will have had positive experiences even if they are very, very small. They’ve experienced kindness which is a form of love, it maybe a puppy that they looked after even if their twisted parents went off and slaughtered it afterwards. You see where I’m going with this? It’s part of – I cannot conceive of someone surviving all the way through you know adulthood whatever, without that fundamental need at some

288 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 level having some amount of it presented to them. Does that make sense to you guys? So you can find it, it may be more difficult to find and that’s just part of it. The second thing, which is more of an overall question, what you can do is you can help people reshuffle their experiences. There is a famous induction called the February Man from Milton Erickson which I love the concept of, which answers the same – addresses the same sort of point. Here is another expectant mother who is terrified, she had abusive parents. She didn’t like them very much and the problem is because I think her own mother was very cold and the father was very distant or abusive, I don’t know what it was, but she was terrified that she’d make the same mistake with her own kids. You can understand why right? So what Erickson did was charming, he, in a series of inductions would regress her back to various ages throughout a childhood, throughout her development period from a little girl all the way to young womanhood and he’d go back to her birthday and show up in the regression itself as a kindly sort of uncle sort of figure would come for her birthday, they’d spend some time together and he basically taught her what a good parent is like just from those little slices. You do not need a lot folks. One slice is enough to totally transform a life. Does that make sense? Does that kind of answer the question for whoever it had? Is it still a question or is it dealt with? Q:

I just wanted to ask what do you with cat ladies.

Igor: What do you do with cat ladies? Q:

Yes.

Igor: What the heck is a cat lady? Q:

Has many cats.

Igor: Oh you mean like the woman who lives on her own with lots of cats and so on? You say are you happy? Great, well done. There is nothing for you to do unless they are asking for help. If they are asking for help, well you have lots of resources, let’s face it, there is a lot of love in her life, otherwise she wouldn’t have 40 cats in her house because they stink, they do. Have you ever been in a

289 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 house with 40 cats in it? I have and it’s not a pretty smell and then there is the fur that gets everywhere, it’s pretty grim. So you must have a lot of love for these creatures to allow them into your house and so on. So you have a lot of potential resources there on its own. So everyone will have reference experience. They maybe few I admit, that’s true, some people have had a really rough hand dealt to them. But everyone has had them. Does that make sense? And by the way if in doubt if you don’t know how to help a specific person, refer them on to someone till you do. You don’t have to help every human being who crosses your path. You can do your best and with those things that you can’t work with yet move them on. There are people capable and some day you’ll be that person that is referred on to those people if that’s where you want to build your way up to, but why start all the way on the difficult clients? Start with the little baby sisters and work your way up. See where I’m going with this? Can we have a quick microphone over here please? Just stand up so we can get it to you. Q:

Where we live I don’t think there are any other hypnotherapists, like we live up north in Canada. So we are getting each other emails. So is it possible maybe to email somebody or?

Igor: Absolutely it is. You have to put your name on the email list before we can… Q:

Yeah I did it.

Igor: If your name is on the email list you will all get each other’s emails on that list and you can cross refer to each other. Some people here have a tremendous amount of experience already, which is fantastic. You can ask each other questions and so on. Some of the people here have other specialties. I don’t know about this particular group I have had clinical psychologists, I’ve had psychiatrists. I’ve had medical doctors, in fact Arthur here is a medical doctor. We’ve had social workers. We’ve got people who work in drug and alcohol abuse programs, basically all kinds of people have come through this and they have their own specialties and there is a lot of knowledge and know how to understand about unique fields. Learn about them, ask each other who knows about this sort of thing and they can help you. It’s a great resource, absolutely.

290 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

Great.

Igor: All clear on that one? What are common applications in corporate America. It’s not really the purpose of this course to go into the whole corporate thing and coaching and so on. This is for therapy right? You treat a human being like a human being whether they are CEO of Glaxo Smith Kline, if that’s the right one, I don’t know or if they are the homeless person who is asking for change, when it comes to therapy, it’s all the same. If it comes to actually setting up a practice doing coaching and so on that’s a whole different ball game. The similar tools are being used but they are being presented in a slightly different way. It goes outside of a scope of particular seminar to go into that so I hope you don’t mind if I kind of brush a long that little bit. Sometimes when this person is working as a client they got pulled out by observation of that, oh you know the hypnotist is a little bit hesitant or is thinking too hard and so on. Have you all experienced that at some point? It’s natural. At that point you should be really happy with yourself do you know why? You’ve just had an insight has to how your client will be feeling around you and you had an insight especially as to why H+ is so important. If you are sitting there reading your script and hesitating and thinking about it, the client will hear that more clearly in trance than out of it. Does that make sense? So you want to be in that free flow that we’ve been practicing the whole week so that all they can hear is, this person is really with me. I haven’t lost touch with them. Let me ask this and this, and this is not as an ego boost for me although it probably will be when I get the answer. Those of you who have come up here to do a demo with me which I’m very thankful, would it be fair to say that you felt looked after throughout the whole process, would that be fair to say? All:

Yes.

Igor: So I didn’t sort of drift away or get lost or get out of touch, you didn’t think like oh, he is struggling now, or he is thinking to hard, or is trying too hard. Would that be fair to say that none of that came up? It’s not because I wasn’t afraid, it’s

291 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 not because I thought, oh man I’m messing something up here, it happens from time to time. It’s because I can get out of that quickly enough that my H+ is back so that when I’m talking again it doesn’t come out. If it happens and it has happened by the way, I fall of the path and I come back on the path and carry on. Do you know what I do during that period? Yeah I say nothing, let them do the work for a while right. Remember the magic thing, I have a sense you need to close your eyes and just think about stuff for a while. Okay breathe, breathe and you get back again. You get back on the pony and keep riding. You’ve all seen me do it. You may not recognize it because I’m very good at getting back, but I have been there 100% guaranteed, does that answer that question? How would regression work on a phobia based on natural body processes exactly the same as any other phobia right? The only thing you need to do a regression is a strong emotion and the emotion, you saw clearly how a strong emotion automatically creates the regression. Didn’t you see that? The Affect Bridge when the emotion is strong enough, the Affect Bridge sucks you back. The difficulty is keeping them out of the regression long enough to make sure it happened safely. So it is irrelevant at what point, or for what condition you use the regression provided you have that emotion. So that brings me on to a – an important step to bring everything together we’ve being doing so far. First of all let me ask you this, have you all managed to get through your manuals up to the regression thing and just to kind of read through it quickly, to check out what’s in there, yes? All:

Yes.

Igor: Would it be fair to say that everyone as you are going through it you recognize everyone as you are going through it you recognize everything it’s like, yeah I understand this, oh I remember this, oh I remember that. It may not be easy to do the whole thing, but looking at one step at a time you can do each individual step on its own is that correct? All:

Yes.

Igor: In that case you are in a great place, that’s all that we really need.

292 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2

Ledochowski Protocol

Igor: What we are going to look at now is how do you decide what to do with all this stuff? Because we have packed a lot information into a very short period of time haven’t we? I don’t know if you have seen other hypnosis courses out there and so on, there some great ones out there, there some great schools, but on average what you have done in here so far, far out strips what you’re likely to meet in a regular hypnotherapy training out there. Anyone taken other hypnotherapy courses? Is this true yeah? All:

Yeah.

Igor: Just to give you a perspective on what we are doing. So there is a lot of information here and I understand at the moment it might seem a little bit like what am I going to do with all of this stuff? I’m not too sure. Where do I begin with it? I have a client here what do I do with them? I know it because I have exactly the same experience. When I came through the field I had – I mean I’d spent two three years preparing myself before going live. That was a – yeah it was more my issue than the content you know what I mean. So I had a huge repertoire of techniques. I’d been to I don’t know how many NLP trainings and hypnosis trainings and this training and that training and the list was virtually endless. Then I had the following problem. Client comes I go what's the problem, dump. And I was going, what do I do with that? Because in the training they said, okay someone have this kind of problem everyone got that? Yes good of you go, do this technique on it right. It was real simple. Now I had to choose the right technique for the problem. I was lost at sea. I’d start one technique and then just abandon it and try something else. I have no idea how to go through it. I mean I had some spectacular failures and embarrassing ones because of it. Sometimes too much choice makes things problematic. There is nothing wrong with having choice by the way. Its – if the only you have is choice, then that’s the

293 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 problem because where you do begin with it? It’s just too much. What I’d like to present to you with is a very simple format and whatever – even the skills that you have right now, so that if at any point something you are doing fails and they can do, the only reason it really should fail, the only reason it could fail once you’ve got used to the actual processes a little bit, is because a situation has a arisen which is the perfect context for another process to be easy to do. So let me give you an example of what I mean by this will that help you? So let’s say a client comes in and says oh I have a fear of heights, whatever. Let’s say you start off by just doing a simple blitz just like we did on the first day. 1. Blitz You remember the blitz where we looked into their eyes, we asked them how does it feel? I’m terrified and as a result I can’t go up buildings and so on, right? You had an emotionally result, behavior, remember that stuff? And what do we do. We just go oh great. We have the opposite. The emotion is calmness and being able to get up on those heights, right? So you are sitting there going away, going blitzing away going like and you will feel comfortable getting up those stairs and look at that view and what a wonderful thing and the client is meanwhile sitting there going either, they are going to go, at last I feel so much better, are you doing a good job so far? All:

Yes.

Igor: Right easy isn’t it? So you carry on, this might be the only thing they need to do. Fantastic you are done. But what if you end up getting the client that goes, no you see that’s what I want but I can’t… and they keep arguing with you. You therapists you have experienced that have you not? As soon as that happens folks, you should laugh and jump with joy, because the very fact that they are saying this makes it absolutely easy to do one of the dynamic processes. 2. Dynamic Processes ( Dynamic Imagery, Non Awareness Set, Mind Bending Language)

294 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 What are they dynamic processes? Well we have let’s put this over here, the Dynamic Imagery, the Non Awareness Set or one of my favorite right here, Mind Bending Language because all of them need material to work with. So you are sitting there doing your blitz they are resisting, how about you do the Dynamic Induction? You say that’s right, you’ve come here to be able to do all those things and yet you have all this stuff coming up don’t you? Here is how you can get into a Dynamic Induction without even the whole – you know the whole visualization model and so on. “Tell me as you think about it now what comes up that represents all of this stuff?” “It’s like an iron chain around my ribs” and they usually – therapists isn’t it true that clients talk like this sometimes? Have they given you the symbol? You bet they have. Of course if you are not there yet, that you can’t handle this conversationally, you go great, you know what, I have a sense that this will work great for you. Close your eyes, fantastic, place of comfort, relaxation, some other place, some other symbol. Pop, how do you feel? Fantastic. Come on back. How are the heights now? Transformed, right, because it has come to life for them now. Same is true for the Non Awareness Set. You are doing your blitz and they are going, I don’t know – I wish I could but you know the more you say that the more I get all anxious. That’s right, you are getting anxious aren’t you? How do you do that? I don’t know I wish I didn’t. I know you wish you didn’t and that’s why you are. So what's happening now? I’m kind of anxious but, huh? That’s right, so you are telling me you can be anxious and something else at the same time, is that what's happening? Yeah, what? Do you see how naturally you are flowing into the more linguistic things, the Non Awareness Set, Mind Bending Language. What's happening now? I don’t know. Now you are getting it? Do you see how quickly you flow from one to the other? The very fact that your blitz has failed is giving you the very fuel that makes these processes easy because they require content, right? Now admittedly some of you may want to drill each of this levels a little bit more to get more familiarity with them. I understand that. That’s part of what you have to do when you go home. You can call each other up and play the exercises. You’ve got every single exercise we’ve done in here in your manuals, so you can

295 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 go on drilling those things so they become natural to you. Make sense? So understand, that’s fine. Assuming you do that or those of you who have done that, who stayed the in the evenings to do that with us and they have – by the way those of you who stayed in the evenings, have you not noticed how much more confident you got real quickly just by doing those drills? Would that be fair to say how everything else you did after that starts making more sense, that you realized it would based on the fact that your experiences now are more solidified. Will that be fair to say? All:

Yeah.

Igor: This is important for everyone else who didn’t stick around to realize, not because you should stick around, that’s your choice, you’re adults, this is your – you learn how you want to, but it’s for you to realize that when you do the drills, the exercises that are available to you, you will get a tremendous pay off. Hands up if you stayed around in the evenings. Hands up if you were glad you came in the evenings. Hands up if you regretted staying around in the evenings. Wow, shock, horror, no hands. So do the drills, they will really help you to get to that point. Now there is one reason – before I go into this let me make one thing abundantly clear and hopefully you understand what I mean by this. You can achieve any outcome, any therapeutic outcome with virtually any tool provided you know – you can use your principles, your hypnotic principles through it right? I can do a phobia with Mind Bending Language. I can cure a phobia…in America I’m not sure if I get arrested for that. I could help someone to spontaneously relieve their own phobia, with the Non Awareness Set or the Dynamic Induction, in fact I have done it with all three. Just because we have the regression doesn’t mean we have to use it. So you can use any process to achieve any outcome do you understand what I mean by that? It’s just some processes lend themselves more naturally to certain things than others. They are a little easier to work it. Does it make sense? So the one thing that would make those three processes, those Dynamic Processes difficult to work with do you know what one thing is? Exactly, too much emotion. When there is too much emotion present, it’s a little harder to get them to process the ideas you are presenting to them. It can be done. It can

296 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 be done, but it’s a trickier navigation that you have to take. So if you get intense emotion. Did you see intense emotion at some point today? All:

Yeah.

Igor: If you get that once again, jump up for joy because you life just became very easy. 3. Regression Okay at that point as you can imagine this point we do the regression. So the beauty of this is, you don’t have to try and force the regression, you are out of that whole pool which is, what if I can’t get – in touch with the feelings what do I do then? You don’t have to do the regression, it’s simple. You’ve got lots of other processes that will work as well, in fact better at that point and whatever happens is best. You will do some Mind Bending Language, either a strong emotion emerges, fantastic go right back with it. Resolve it that way or a strong emotion doesn’t arise in which case fantastic, you carry on with what you are doing. No matter what happens the process will naturally guide itself down the right track. Do you see how we work in this? Do you see how that works? Any questions on this as model? There is one more thing we haven’t put up there, which we’ll talk about in a moment, but do you have any questions about this? This is really a – just stand up and we’ll get a mic over to you. This is really a – this is something I wish I had had when I started as a therapist. It would have made my life so much easier because it tells you exactly where to begin and it’s almost like it allows you to do a linear process out of something that is totally non linear. You know what to do, you start with some blitzing and see what happens. Usually, but now personally in terms of my own work, sometimes I’ll do the blitz for some minor things, but usually I’ll jump straight into the Mind Bending Language or Non Awareness or something like that, because in the very process of them talking about the problem they have already oriented me to which one of those that I do.

297 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Sometimes they talk about a problem in one way and I can just run with the blitz and its taking effect and I’m running with. Other times they talk about the problem in a different way and as I ask a question, it ends up being mind bending without any particular intention and suddenly we are in that track. It chooses it for me at that point. Admittedly I have a little more experience, I understand that’s true. But you can make up for the lack of experience by starting with the blitz and if it’s going nowhere do you know what you do? You ask them what's happening now. “Well I’m listening to what you are saying but it’s full of BS.” Oh really? It can happen. So how do you know? “Well you are talking about me being able to up heights and I clearly can’t, because I feel terrible.” How terrible are you feeling now? “Well I’m…” Where are you in your memories? You just skip straight to the regression because they took you there, didn’t they. Do you see how simple it is to navigate? Or they might turn around and say “You know, it’s not that heights are scary it’s just they are dangerous aren’t they?” That’s right. How dangerous is it to continue being afraid of heights when you need to go up. “Huh?” You’ve gone straight into it. It chooses itself. It’s a very natural process and they’ll have no idea what you are doing because as far as they are concerned you are still in the conversation, if you want that to be. Do you see how smoothly this all runs together? Does it make your life a lot easier, because all you have to know is that when a client comes in the chair you are going to ask them what's the problem? When and where, give me a specific example. When and where? How do you feel when that problem is starting? Or how do you feel about that, maybe you ask both questions, how do you want to be different? Somewhere in that process you won’t be able to help yourself, you’ll start talking with them. You will talk with them in a caring, heartfelt manner. Your H+ will light up and suddenly you will find yourself in the middle of a hypnotic conversation without any idea of how you got there and that is a very good thing. Because you don’t need to know what you choose ahead of time, you just need to know how to begin and I think you all know how to do that don’t you? Does this make sense

298 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 to you guys? I’m rather proud of this so hopefully you enjoy this too. So there is a question over here. Q:

You know I just had an aha moment for example utilizing say like the DMI processes, you could use say like the entire imagery that we were doing before involving like the journey etcetera, you could also just sort of use NLP style almost abstract imagery and that would work too. I was about to – I considering how the hell would I like fit in like ideomotor responses and so on, and then I just realized that’s Non Awareness Set? So yeah no – just standing here I just answered by own question, but anyway thank you.

Igor: Well done and that’s exactly how it works. You guys have instincts now. You’ve been developing this whole week. Especially when you thought you were really stuffing things up and let’s face it, everyone here at one point or another in this week had a little crisis, didn’t they? We thought oh man, I can’t do this. Oh I’m messing this up. It happens right? That was the time when you probably learned the most in the entire course and you didn’t even know you were doing it, did you? An interesting thought to ponder about isn’t it? When you consider your hypnotic future. So we got – this is all making sense? So fine, you can pretty much navigate through those three simple stages? It’s just going to require you to have a little bit of – all you’re going to do is have a little of – how shall we say, experience doing these exercises to get facility to flow with each of those steps. Some of you are great, everyone pretty much good at flowing with the blitz you know the 60 Second Hypnotist, stuff like that, pretty straight forward? Most of you probably feel comfortable of the Dynamic Induction right? Many of you – not quite as many will feel comfortable with their Non Awareness Set. Some of you are getting it, but you are not quite there yet. That’s fair enough right? A lot of you will be good with the Mind Bending Language. Someone who thinks like, oh I don’t know about this yet, but it’s just a steady progression from one to the other right. And the regression, well you guys all did a sterling job just before the lunch break. So again its straight forward, you just need to rehearse the steps to get them engrained inside your mind so they are natural to you. They are

299 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 intuitive to you. That’s just a question of practice and you can all do that can’t you?

Secondary Gain

Igor: So there is one thing – there is one thing that could evade this little ladder here, is usually picked up with a Mind Bending Language, Non Awareness Set sort of stuff, but it could escape or fall through the cracks and that is what happens if you’ve done all these things right and the client leaves, you test everything and the client is all excited and is fantastic, there you go, done, right? They go away and two weeks later they call back and say it didn’t work. And you ask them the magic question, what didn’t work? I’m not a hypnotist – I’m kidding. What didn’t work? It’s always the, ‘it’ didn’t work. Well the hypnosis didn’t work. We’ll talk me through what happened. Well for like the first 10 days or so it was fantastic, I was on cloud nine. I was doing all these things. Did it work, or didn’t it work? You know what it is, of course it worked, right? And then it stopped working. So clearly it worked, but something occurred and it stopped. This takes us to an idea called a Secondary Gain. A lot of you may be familiar with the term, essentially what happens is this. Some people create problems all for themselves, because they need those problems to function better in other ways. It has a pay off. There is a great story, I think Grinder and Bandler tell this one, about a lady who came in with a paralyzed arm. By the time they finished with her they paralyzed all her finger nails, finger nails because they are very mobile. Of course what the problem was for her, she was an elderly lady she had a few friends and so on and her way of socializing was to complain to people. If she has a paralyzed arm doesn’t she have something to complain about? So she feels important. She feels like people are paying attention to her.

300 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 If you take the paralyzed arm away, what happens to her source of self esteem, importance, attention? It’s gone. She is now less capable of functioning in the world than if she were sitting around with the paralyzed arm. Do you see how we are talking about this? So she is better of being paralyzed, or having that paralyzed arm as far as she is concerned, because the payoff is better than not having it right. Now she doesn’t know this stuff consciously. Consciously it’s like it’s a pain to have a paralyzed arm. She is trying to get rid of it so she can move around again properly. So by paralyzing her finger nails, what have they done? They have given her the functionality of the arm, she can still complain about it, without any debilitation in her movement. Now we don’t have to go to these extremes, this is just a fun way of demonstrating what I’m talking about. Let’s say we have your typical soccer mom. You know the ones you see on the TV and she’s got a phobia of driving. She’s got a drivers license but she has got a phobia of driving, she doesn’t drive. What might be the secondary gain there? People with kids will probably know this one. All:

Free time.

Igor: Free time right? She doesn’t have to drive all her kids to all football practices. She can say oh you know what, you are going to have to go next door neighbors, see if they will take you there. The neighbors go doing the magic shuffle. She just sits there at home and goes, no kids, this is beautiful. So what happens when she comes in and you do a sterling job of removing the phobia, you don’t know about any of this stuff? She goes home what's going to happen now. The first thing, look I can drive. She is going to be excited isn’t she? She’ll drive down the road. This great and mom this is great and dad this is great. Everyone this is great and then Mrs. Summerfield from down the road says, this great, now you can take the kids. Huh? What happened to my me time? Of course a few days later it’s like oh, I don’t know, I’m having some panic attacks, some hot flushes right? She is not doing it on purpose necessarily, but she has lost her pay off.

301 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Now a lot of this stuff we are doing here will take care of that automatically, the whole life circumstances will kind of switch around with it. A lot of the times it happens spontaneously. especially with things like the Mind Bending Language, it tends to flush things out because people come up with the excuses like – but what will I do for my time with myself? You saw a classic example of that with the stop smoking didn’t you or the smoking session. You saw the excuses starting to come out. The drinks and the socializing and the time for myself and the de-stressors, these are all secondary gains, aren’t they? If I just broke the habit on its own what do you think the chances are of that process surviving? Slim to none, because she’s lost all the pay off right? As it is, the pay off was the way she is going to break the stop smoking session. It’s one of the simple ways of doing it. So would you be interested in a process that will allow you to handle those ‘what if’ clients that they’ve left, its all worked out great and they come back and it’s like fix me again. Alright let’s do it this way. Anyone here have like a conflict like I know they want to do something, but something holds them back, like maybe I don’t know you I want to be a hypnotherapist, but you are a little bit afraid, what if I can’t do it? What if I don’t have those skills, what if I fail? I don’t know anyone here who has that sort of thing, but you know something similar to that, you know? Or there is another kind of conflict which is more like a toward, toward thing, you really want this, but you really want that, but you can’t figure out how to have both at the same time. So let’s have some microphones around here. What kind of things do you guys have in mind when we are talking about this stuff? Just click it up there you go. Q:

I have a conflict in that I want to do so many things with my life and really get ahead, but I’ve got a wife who has lots of medical problems and as soon I want to get things rolling, well I’ve got to look out for her because she has a situation.

Igor: So you see a classic conflict. I want to do things, but then I want to look after my wife and I can’t see how the conflict can be resolved right? What other things do you guys have? Over here just stand up we can get a mic. There you go.

302 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

Well I’m really interested obviously in hypnosis and hypnotherapy but I’m also a professional musician, I found a found interest for math and I just got married recently so now I have to take out the trash too. The thing is I feel sometimes like I can’t do all of them at the same time, so I end up sometimes doing none of them.

Igor: Alright classic toward, toward conflict. I want this good thing, I want this good thing but I can’t seem to be doing them all. What else, just stand up and we’ll bring a mic to you. Just stand up and we’ll get on to you. Q:

I want to work a lot and I’m afraid I can’t be healthy or exercise or feel well if I’m working.

Igor: Alright so, on the one side you want to do work? Q:

More hours, more time of my life.

Igor: More time and hours in work because it has pay off, which we don’t know about yet and the other side what's preventing you from doing that is you want to stay healthy and you feel that this might get you more unhealthy right? Q:

Yes.

Igor: Exactly, what else do we have? Here we go, hello. Q:

Hello yeah I want to be a coach and I also want to be a hypnotist and I am certified in both I’m like, Oh God what do I do now?

Igor: Which one do I do now, right? Q:

Yeah, what do I do and I love both of them so much.

Igor: Okay, so again, do you see that some toward, toward, you see where we are going with this? What else do you guys have? Q:

For me I guess one of the big problems I see is that when I come back there is my social environment in which I have some position or identity and it’s kind of different from this confident and I don’t know the guy who helps people because he has the strength to do it. So I’m for example afraid that I will get sucked back to my old demeanors which are not so compatible with the…

303 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: Okay so where is the conflict? Q:

Conflict is in the thing that I want to come here, but if I see myself in the future and there, that I’m not able to.

Igor: Okay so it’s kind of like you want to do this work, you’ve enjoyed your fun here and you want to run with it, but some part of you thinks you will be sucked back in some other kind of life and it’s not going to work out for you. So it’s been sapping your confidence in this, is that correct? Q:

In a way it’s true.

Igor: Excellent, we have one more. J:

I’m not sure if you can relate to this one but I’m already a professional in another industry and doing quite well, but experiencing different levels of burn out. But because I’m successful, we have a standard of living that has gone a certain way but there is no drive and yet the real drive to teach, which is something I really enjoy and specifically teaching anything to do with the mind, seems – it’s very, very appealing, but seems almost unattainable given that we are this far along our career path.

Igor: That’s a beautiful conflict because I sat in that conflict for two whole years. So it’s a wonderful conflict to be in. So which ones of these do you like guys? Which one here – this last gentleman here? All:

Yes.

Igor: I’m so glad he said that because that’s one my favorite.

304 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2

Reintegration Demo

Igor: Give him a round of applause folks. Come on up. If I understand you correctly – just talk me through it again what you just spoke about. J:

I run a financial planning company and it’s doing quite well by all external measures. We are well on track for a great career path, but I have lost the juice for really enjoying anything to do with the career.

Igor: Okay let me just pause you there for a minute, is it okay if I just pause from time to time and we just carry one from where we are? Did you notice something interesting about his mannerism whilst he was talking about that? What was the mannerisms? Show me. His hands were doing something weren’t they? On the one side we have this successful career but that’s not where the juice is that. Do you see that? I have a successful career, external things, by all external measures, its successful, I’m exaggerating a little bit right? So let’s take a wild stab at the darkness. If I take these hands here for a moment and I ask you of the two things, you know the successful career versus the thing that has more juice in it. If one of them were to come out in this hand as an idea or a metaphor, which one would most naturally fit here would you reckon. J:

In this hand?

Igor: Yeah in this hand. J:

Probably the career fits in this hand.

Igor: I believe him do you? All:

Yes.

Igor: Because we saw it clearly beforehand didn’t we? So we’ve got the idea of the career here is that correct? J:

Yes.

305 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: So in this side what would you describe this as? J:

A desire to continue learning and teach what I learn.

Igor: Continue learning and teaching right? J:

Yeah.

Igor: Fantastic. So there is a symbol, some visual image that represents this idea, this idea the stable career, the one that makes the money that funds your lifestyle, that would symbolize this to you right now. What would come out in this hand as an image? J:

Like a rock.

Igor: Like a rock right, interesting symbol isn’t it? And this side, if you were to think of a symbol that symbolizes what this expresses, the purpose of this, what that would be. J:

What came to mind is like a crystal ball.

Igor: A crystal ball, fantastic, so you’ve got like a rock and a crystal ball and they are kind of pulling you in different directions. Now here is the interesting thing. Clearly this is kind of what you are doing, but it’s something that you are less enamored with is that correct? J:

Absolutely.

Igor: Now this part of you, the part that’s running the whole says let’s say on the safe track, let’s make some money, lets live a good life style and so on, that part of you is clearly trying to do something of benefit for you. Something positive for you. What is that? J:

To care for my family.

Igor: To care for your family, that’s important isn’t it? So if you are running this successful career and you are caring for your family what does that do for you? J:

It allows me to care for my family which is very important.

306 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: Of course it allows you to care for your family, so you are caring for your family and what is the purpose or the intention behind caring for your family, what does that do for you as a person? J:

Makes me feel good.

Igor: Exactly it makes you feel good, doesn’t it? J:

To care for my family.

Igor: Absolutely and that’s important, I understand that. So if you turn your attention here for a moment, what's it trying to do on this side, that wants to learn and teach and so on, what is that all about? J:

That feels really good.

Igor: That feels really good. Now have you noticed something about both these sides? Both of them really want the same thing. They want you to feel good don’t they? That’s right, up until this point they have been pulling different directions but really both sides want the same thing. Now I know something that you may need to have a little though about first. For example this side has some qualities that are of tremendous importance, of great value and will assist the whole process of making you feel good overall, of some abilities that they have shall we say. What qualities does this side have, which if this side had more of it would of course be really useful in your whole feeling good saga, shall we say. J:

This generates the income. It allows me to be here today.

Igor: Exactly right, so the ability to generate an income or let’s put it this way, if this side had this ability to generate income, well your ability to feel real good would just skyrocket, wouldn’t it? J:

Absolutely.

Igor: Right what else does this side have? J:

It has caring. My business literally takes care of thousands of people.

307 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: So this is a lot of caring involved. So this side could show the same kind of caring in terms of how it looks after people, that of course would go a whole long way to make you feel good about yourself right? J:

Very much so.

Igor: Absolutely what else does this have? J:

Stability.

Igor: And the stability right? Stability is important, because if this side could help you feel as stable with all the things that you are doing, feeling good would be much easier as well wouldn’t it? J:

Yes you’re right.

Igor: Now of course this side here has things also, qualities and skills that if this side had more of them would help it make you feel good as well, right? J:

Yes.

Igor: Like what? J:

The intellectual curiosity.

Igor: Intellectual curiosity, because if this side was a little more intellectually curious, well your ability to feel good there would be much higher wouldn’t it? J:

It had that at the time.

Igor: Exactly, so now this side has it and this one has forgotten it, hasn’t it? So if you could borrow some of it, it would definitely help you in the whole overall thing of feeling good wouldn’t it? J:

Yes.

Igor: Exactly what else does this side have? J:

Potential.

Igor: Potential right? Because potential is important isn’t it?

308 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 J:

It feels important and it feels good.

Igor: Exactly so that kind of answers the question, doesn’t it. So this side had more potential in it, in whatever endeavors it was doing, it could really make you feel good in whole new ways that you haven’t even considered yet, right? J:

Yes it could.

Igor: Exactly. Now I wonder if you notice something happening whilst we were talking about these things? J:

Yes I did. I felt…

Igor: You did, didn’t you? J:

It’s starting to move together a bit.

Igor: They have, haven’t they? Because I think those hands realize something now, they realize something, that’s right there you go more and more. J:

I can’t... magnetic hands. (laughs)

Igor: They realize something - that really both of them have wanted exactly the same thing all along. They didn’t realize it because it doesn’t matter what your ultimate thing looks like, whether it’s a respectable job or it’s a lead teaching job or learning or this, what matters is, that ultimately you feel good whilst you are looking out for your family, with all the potential that that includes and the ability to learn and help other people. All those things in one big grab bag, that’s right. And as they start to work together, together they are going to achieve so much more than they have achieved on their own so far, right? J:

That’s right.

Igor: That’s right there you go. Now you will notice something very interesting happening. As those hands touch the two symbols in your hands will transform, a third symbol will spontaneously emerge, something that might even be totally unexpected to you and when you have that then something pretty amazing is going to happen. For the moment just feel those hands coming together, that’s pretty much something isn’t it?

309 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 J:

Yes.

Igor: And you had no idea that’s going to happen when we started did you? J:

Absolutely not.

Igor: But you are enjoying it aren’t you? J:

I am.

Igor: Learning something, with a little potential in here. J:

Yeah, potential.

Igor: So keep that state going. Let those sides of you start to talk at last, bringing together all those resources so when these hands finally touch, that whole symbol emerges and lets you have a clear direction of how to just feel good doing all the right things, all the right things of feeling good, feeling really good and let those hands come together at their own rate, as that process of coming together brings all those resources, all those skills and abilities, all those life experiences together so that they can both pull in one unified direction to make you feel good. Whilst you are looking after your family, helping people, learning, full of potential in a stable way, with real finances and you don’t even need to know what that direction will look like when you get there. All you need is those hands to touch and that symbol that will show that a greater part of you is already working on it and you can feel that happening can’t you? J:

I can.

Igor: Those hands coming together and in a nice stable rate. That’s right. When they touch and when they touch, you will really get to experience something that’s right so close now, so close there you go. Closer and closer now and you can feel the changes beginning inside, can you not? The two sides that were at war are coming together and feeling good. There you go closer and closer. Closer and closer you may even notice the images of the original symbols starting to fade already blend into something else. Can you make it out yet or is it – it’s not quite

310 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 there is it? That’s right when those hands touch it will become clear to you and you are so close you can sense now can’t you? J:

I can.

Igor: So close, hands coming together. Sides combining, one unified direction, feel good with all the potential, the money making potential of finances and the stability of learning something new. That’s right, hands so close and when they touch there it is, there it is, do you see it now? Do you see it now? Wow isn’t that something? Now in a moment, something even better is going to happen. This feels pretty good right now doesn’t it? But in a moment I want you to allow these hands to lift up and bring all this into you. Bring it up in your chest and let it just soak right into you, so every nerve, every fiber, every cell understands the purpose of that symbol and its relationship, to make you feel good about the things you’ll be doing in the future. Your finances, the stability, the respectability of it, with the potential and the learning all coming together. Let those hands just lift right up and bring it all inside you and feel your whole neurology, your whole nervous system opening up, there you go, opening up the whole new thing. That’s it, just let them bring it right in. You get to have a part in this one as well. When those hands come right to your chest and you feel that all sinking right in, you and I both know that you’ll come back a changed man and there is no doubt about that now is there? That’s right. So take your time and let that happen. Let your whole neurology adapt to that, all of you, bring it in and feel good. You’re doing great, but then again I think you already know that. All the way, all the way, all the way, that’s it, inside, changing everything, that’s it all the way inside changing everything and all the changes that it brings, what an amazing experience, that’s it, that’s it really absorb it all. And don’t come back into this room too quickly, really get a chance to appreciate what just happened, to enjoy it. Good job. What a rush. Can we have a mic back up here? Give him a round of applause folks, thank you.

311 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2

Demo Debrief

Igor: Just take a few moments; I know it’s a personal thing. In a moment I’m going to invite people to ask you questions about your personal experience. Remember as with everyone, if it is anything that is something you want to keep private between yourself, your unconscious, your family, whatever, then that’s absolutely your choice and they will respect it. So before we get to the whole question phase, did you clearly see the conflict in terms of how we were speaking about it, yes? Did you also see just a little hint that something might be happening along the lines of integration, things coming together yes? It’s really simple isn’t it? We’ll walk through the process step by step once again in a moment, but for the moment before you ask any questions, is there anything you want to say about that process right now to everyone or just in general? J:

I’m still not sure if my cognitive mind has caught up with what happened.

Igor: Exactly and let me just pause you on that point there and this is exactly very typical, when I did this whole process it took me probably six months for all the chips to fall into place, but would it also be fair to say that’s it’s a feeling like there is a direction even though you are not quite sure what it is? Would that be fair to say? J:

Even more than that.

Igor: And even more than that. Exactly, so as the idea is starting to percolate, it’s not crystallized yet, because think of it this way, how can you formulate the whole plan of action in a few moments? What's happened is we’ve resolved the conflict so there is a shared purpose, a shared vision and now everything that was spending energy fighting can now spend the same energy on creating a better way of being, shall we say. Will that fit? J:

Fits perfectly.

312 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: Thank you. So you guys have any questions about his experience as opposed to the content. I will run through the process later on. Just stand up with your mics and we’ll go from there. J:

I had exactly the same, but it’s very easy, just what the outcome I did already. I think it is not clear for you to see the possibilities. I think that’s the problem. If I do it right now…

Igor: Let’s just pause there a second, ask him a question about his experience, the thing you need to realize or remember at this point is it’s very easy for us to see how other people conflicts are illusions, because we don’t have them. If you’ve overcome it, by definition you can learn to resolve that on your own, does that make sense? For him or for someone else who has got a conflict, they can’t see that. Have you ever given someone advice and they just go no, that can’t work for me. Because they are in the conflict, it’s very much like saying to Stephanie over here, oh don’t be silly, the snake can’t harm you, it’s just a photograph. Did you know that the photo of a snake could not harm you? So logically she knows it can’t harm her. But if you saw a photo of a snake what would happen? Right so this is not a question about the advice you give. That’s a fantastic thing to have, but that comes after the block has been removed you see now if you guys were to have a chat, you can say you know what, I have been in the same place you are Jules, here is what I did and Jules will go, yeah that’s a good idea that’s a great idea, my god that’s ingenious, right? J:

Yeah.

Igor: If you had had the same chat five minutes ago Jules, it would have gone I know you see, because then I will have this problem and then I will this, and I have this problem right? You’ve all experienced this haven’t you? All:

Yes.

Igor: And it’s really important you understand this because, especially if you are coaching or mentoring people or training people, you need to understand that

313 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 when they hit a wall like that, first you remove the wall and then the advice you have, all the other things then the fit in. Does that kind of make sense? Q:

Yes, we all have the possibilities.

Igor: Exactly, exactly and you hit it exactly on the head and do you feel those possibilities now? That’s what where we are trying to get people to. So thank you for that. Just stand up if you need the mic just… Q:

Jules actually I just want to say thanks for that, because you know first and foremost that was awesome and I feel really happy for you that really worked out well. I just wanted to say you know I mean you are very sincere in the fact that you are open with that issue and how that really plays out for you. I kind of forgot where I was going with this – that really made me feel good and the way that you did that really helped me in a lot of ways and I’m not as sincere in the way that I can openly express the way I’m going through difficulties such as this one, so thank you.

Igor: Did anyone else find yourself sort of jumping on the bandwagon with the trance building going you know what, I like what he’s doing, I’m going to take a little bit of that too. See, you are helping people already. J:

You’re welcome.

Igor: Please go ahead in the back over here. Q:

Hi did you feel an opening to the possibilities or did you feel yourself thinking of possibilities?

J:

One of the problems was that I had many, many possibilities. It wasn’t a very limiting thing. The problem wasn’t the limiting thing unfortunately, I have some opportunities, it was that they all seem to conflict with some of my core desires or beliefs. So it’s not that more possibilities became visible, it’s that on integration, they became possible. They were all possibilities, but all of a sudden integrating with what I want became a lot more real. So the symbology I picked, in case people are interested, the rock I picked was a little bit tongue in cheek, because I do feel weighted down and I made up that symbol or it came to me and I processed it as though I made it up.

314 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Then the crystal ball was almost like being a magician and I love the possibilities and the strange thing happened when it integrated, it turned into a bright diamond and then rocks from our area of Northern Ontario are dark and black, it was just interesting that the dark black rock became a shinning diamond and the possibilities are – I already do a lot of training in my field, usually for free. I volunteer on national boards and stuff like that all over, and suddenly an entire training program came out as a possibility. Igor: Good job, good job, yeah give him a round of applause. Stand up and we’ll get the mic to you stand over there as well. Q:

I just notice that every time you are talking about the rock you keep switching hands and then you are talking about the possibilities and you are going back and forth so that’s pretty…

J:

I am French though, so we tend to speak with our hands.

Q:

Yeah but it was symbolic for everything you were about.

J:

That’s good, glad you noticed.

Igor: You over here. Q:

It was very interesting to see that your hands as they were coming together it was pretty smooth. Did it, I mean it was not like one was trying to come faster than the other, but in your experience you felt the same way that both were equally trying to come back together, one not faster trying to merge with the other?

J:

I really wasn’t aware – I was aware they were moving like a magnetic hands and intellectually I was kind of saying, uh jeez its happening anyway. But I wasn’t aware of the speed of either of them I couldn’t tell you. I would have to look at the tape.

Q:

Alright.

Igor: You’ll enjoy it when you see it by the way. Any other questions about his experience just directly, was that pretty much good? Alright give Jules a nice round of applause thank you so much for coming up I really appreciate this.

315 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2

Reintegration Principles

Igor: So I’d like you to just – so let’s just put this on the list, where did I put my magic writing stick. 4. Re-Integration So this is a classic Re-integration. Those of you who are familiar with NLP you’ll recognize this as a Visual Squash and there are many variations on this theme. What I’d like to do now is just briefly run you through some of the core principles involved, then we’ll have a break just to freshen up a little bit. We’ll come back and we’ll do one of these and then that’s pretty much the end of the day, you’ve pretty much caught up on the all material. So it should be a relatively easy end towards today. So what are some of the themes that of importance here? Did you notice a difference between behavior and intention? There are lots behaviors and lots of possibilities interested in the current finances and all that sort of stuff. The possibilities of learning and so on, but here is one of the secrets and this is true of pretty much every human being on the planet. When you chunk up high enough when you go to the highest level of intention behind things, not only are they all positive, as we discussed yesterday, but they all tend to be the same thing. When you have a conflict as soon as you go high enough, you will eventually come out with exactly the same words. Where were they here? To feel good, right? Now that is already the first half of the integration starting to happen. That’s probably when you started feeling stuff happening right? There is other things we did on top of that, we’ll talk more about that in a bit, but this one of the fundamental things and this by the way is an assumption I have tested in terms of corporate work, which is kind of interesting, you can do the same thing with people conflict, although you have to be a bit more careful at that point. When you get to the point of common interest, when you chunk up high enough, they will both have a vested interest in working together rather than fighting each other, right? It’s a lot easier to predict with people because it doesn’t take very many levels.

316 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Now here is where it may get a little bit tricky. We had a relatively benign conflict right? Both were good things, one was just not as satisfying any more, but it had important things in it. The other one was very satisfying, but had some risks involved, that’s kind of where we were at. What if the conflict is like I hate this part, I wish I could cut my hand off and get rid of it? You’ve come across these things before. I want to lose weight, but I keep eating that chocolate, I hate the fact that I have to raid the fridge and raid it four times a night. And you ask them; well what's its positive intention? Nothing. People can speak this way. They will say it this way. right? I believe on the original hypnotherapy DVD’s the ones that are in the back there, when we did this version here, I can’t remember if the demo actually said exactly that or one of the students came through afterwards and said this sort of thing and you will see the same thing. He wanted to exercise and some part of him was lazy. I asked him what's the intention, the positive thing or the lazy thing. He said nothing, I wish I could kill it, I wish I could get rid of it. Do you accept that? No. That’s why they have the problem, because they are fighting themselves. How can they resolve something they are resisting like that? Incidentally later on he sent us an email saying what we did about reframing that side of it was one of the most significant shifts he had, because when he got to realize that the lazy part of himself had a value to him, its ability to rest and recuperate, now I can’t remember the details they will be on the tape somewhere, but it’s something along the line of to enjoy life. And the other one was also to enjoy life through physical fitness, health and so on. It was a fair amount of effort to get him to accept that this side could do anything positive for him and why do you think he would resist the idea? Why would anyone resist that idea? Any ideas? Q:

Because it is harming him.

Igor: Because the behavior was harming him, because he is so locked on the idea of the behavior that he dislikes, he can’t separate the intention from the behavior and whilst he has both in the same thing how could it have a positive intention? Because the behavior and the result of the behavior is something he detested. Does that make sense to you guys? So you need to be able to separate intention

317 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 from behavior and sometimes that is really the big key. Once you’ve done that really the rest becomes a lot easier. Go ahead just get the microphone over here, just stand up so we can get a mic to you. Q:

Just wondered if you have a standard reframe that you use when someone is determined that there is no positive intention?

Igor: Sure absolutely. They are no standard-standards, there is no glib answer to anything, and in that spirit I will give you the following ideas, right? 1. Is to be able to separate the behavior from the intention. So I understand you hate what it’s doing. What it’s doing is no good I understand that. But it’s doing it for a reason and that reason, whether you recognize it right now or no, is ultimately doing something positive or trying to do something positive although it’s failing at it. So I’m constantly reaffirming that the behavior is failing so they can be free to contemplate the intention. 2. Then I will get to the low level things like, so what do you think it’s trying to do for you? Well it’s not doing anything for me? Well what do you think it is trying to do for you? Well it’s trying to sabotage me. Why on earth would it want to sabotage you? What could it possibly gain from it? At some point you’ll notice they fall into this more trance like state, you noticed it happening here when he started trying to come up with to go past the point where he saying it will take care of my family, do you see how he looped around that twice? Some people will stay stuck in that loop for a while and what do we do? We re-emphasis what he already had, so it’s taking care of the family it’s doing all this things, what's the point of this? What does it do for you as an individual? Then invariably you get – we just got there a little bit quicker which is great. You get to the point where they are saying, well I guess if I’m not having to do sports and this that and the other its – I guess it’s trying to make me feel at ease, maybe so I’m not pushing myself so hard. It’s a semi positive isn’t it? Great, so when you are not pushing yourself so hard, what are you doing, what are you getting, what's the benefit of that? Well I guess if I’m not going to – you see now

318 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 the idea of not pushing yourself so hard is no longer related to behavior is it? It’s just a general idea isn’t it? So now he is freer to release this idea of the behavior, well I guess when I’m not pushing myself so hard I’m going to sit back and enjoy life. Do you see how they may get to that point and then what do you do, you jump on it and say that’s right, this is all about enjoying your life. And some people sit there and they will literally have tears coming down and they’ll be going like, I can’t believe this, because the behavior, the result they are getting from that part has been such a pain to them, that suddenly realizing that it’s trying to achieve something positive is this weird conflict starting to resolve already. You are doing half the work at that point. Does that kind of make sense to you guys? Is this making, you can kind of follow along and put yourself in that sort of scenario, does that help? Now what you are looking for – do you want to stand up and we’ll get a mic for you. Q:

So what it while growing through the integration process, the re-integration process more underlying stuff ends up like coming up.

Igor: Just hold that thought for a moment, let’s just talk about the principles first and then feel free to ask that question again a little bit later, is that okay? Q:

Sure.

Igor: Over here. Q:

Would you please explain me, in his case, what kind of a behavior he has.

Igor: The behavior? Q:

Yeah it was positive?

Igor: Well its simple, the behavior is carrying on with my current job versus doing stuff I love, like training, teaching about the mind and so on, those are behaviors. Right now I’m engaging in a behavior, it’s called teaching you. So he’s engaging in those behaviors, they are not as easily pointable as you might say going to the gym, or eating a sandwich, those are easier behaviors to spot, but it’s still a behavior, he has to engage it as an activity right? So you get this idea of intention. Now here is

319 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 the secret you want to look for you, want to start off with the negative side, we will take you through it step by step in a moment and you want to get to a high what's called a high level nominalization. Nominalization is basically a verb that’s been turned into a noun, like it was a thing. You want it to have a high level so it’s like a kind of a global meaning. If someone says what's the purpose of this? Oh the purpose of this is so I can have more ice cream, is that a high level nominalization? No. The purpose of this is so I can feel like a feel a good person, is that a high level nominalization right? So things like to bring me love, to give me joy so I can enjoy life, so I can have a good life, so I can be a good person, these are all high levels things, right? It’s going to take a little bit of experience to get a sense of when you’ve hit a high point. When you’ve hit that sort of high point you’ll switch to the other side and invariably it may take a few layers, you will get the same point. Typically the negative side will have more layers than the positive side and if they are both positive you may have several layers each person is different, but you will always get to exactly the same words or phrase. When you have that you’ll have little chat, which I will show you later how to encourage those hands to start coming together, they will very often do that anyways and it’s more likely when you start pulling these extra things around it too. Make sense? So you all get the behavior versus intention and chunking up on the behavior on the intention to get the highest positive intention of both sides, which will always be the same. At that point we just give it more reasons, to get the hands closing, more reasons to work together. The hands are representative of different parts of his neurology. How do we do that, well we get skills and resources. What can this side do to help this side, what can this side do to help this side? As soon as you meet another person, aren’t you more likely to cooperate with them if you need them and they need you, even if you can’t stand each other guts, you will work together right? You know the old thing the enemy of my enemy is my friend. So you are giving them more reasons to cooperate and of course that’s just accelerates things and so on. So get the general idea of what we are doing here? Do you have any questions about that as of this point?

320 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 So let me just address quickly the question Andrew here asked which is what if other stuff comes out as a result of this. Recall we talked a moment ago that you can achieve pretty much any result with pretty much any tool. The way I’m going to encourage you at least initially to play with this particular tool is in this specific sequence. If you’ve done the first few steps properly, there is nothing else to come out because it’s already even flushed out, in fact you already created the change. It’s just handling that one last little bit that where might be a conflict, a secondary gain. Well I want to drive the car, but I enjoy my ‘me’ time when everyone else is off at soccer camp. That’s the one thing that may not have been flushed out there. So you are handling it here. So there really shouldn’t be anything else that comes flushing out because the other levels, the layers of what of you have done should have flushed them out and handled them already. Of course if you are doing this technique just as a first response type thing, which is possible, you will be doing it in a moment, then the risk of that happening sure, it exists. Well then what do you do? You are hypnotist, make something up. You deal with what's in front of you. It’s a simple as that. Does that answer your question? Q:

Yeah.

Igor: So it’s really a simple process. There are a couple of mechanical pieces we’ll go through them in a moment, but do you get the overall idea of it? Yes I will come to you in a second. Do you get the overall idea of it yes? And you’ve the seen the value of it yes? Now the key to recall here again is, the purpose of this is not so that the person suddenly has a life plan and knows exactly what to do. Do you know exactly what do yet? J:

Getting closer.

Igor: Getting closer is the answer, so notice how as more time goes by the more concrete it becomes and for me it took me literally six months when I did this process to be clear about the idea. You start off with a sense of I know it’s coming. Like the conflict is gone you don’t know what it is, but you know you are getting there and the things start catching up to you. So I’ll come to you as well in

321 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 a second. So it’s important that you guys realize that this is not about finding an answer it’s about removing an obstacle. Do you understand the difference? So we had a question here first. Do you want to stand up and we’ll get a mic to you and then we’ll come back to you over here. Q:

Is there a technique to help with re-integration to where it’s a little more global to handle those?

Igor: How do you mean more global? Q:

Like he said the other stuff coming up. Couldn’t that also be grabbed in there because the…

Igor: Sure you can do – as I said you can pretty much achieve any result with any tool. You could sit there and say okay on the one side all your life problems and on the other side everything you want to achieve in life. You could do that, but there are chances that they’ll lock into the whole of those experiences, they will activate that whole neurology is less, you’ll have to work a lot harder to activate all the appropriate parts of the neurology, but in theory of course you can achieve that. This lady over here and we’ll come to you after. Q:

Hi what if it seems as if the choices couldn’t be integrated. They are so diverse and disparate?

Igor: Excellent question. The choice is already integrated because he does not care whether he is working… let me just make something up for this purpose. I’ll give my version, I don’t care if I’m a solicitor, a lawyer not the person asking other things, I didn’t care if I was a lawyer or a hypnotherapist right? Those are the conflicts in behavior and sure they are – you can’t marry those two together necessarily. I can’t be a hypnotizing lawyer for example it just doesn’t work. That’s a conscious mind solution to put them together, right? You create Frankenstein’s monster with a goat head and a human foot. The unconscious mind doesn’t work at that level. The level its working at is the level of intention. The intention is to enjoy life and there are a million ways to enjoy life. Now can he enjoy life if he is on the poverty line? Not on his current model of the world which is fine and by the way I’m not encouraging poverty. So whatever solution he comes up with must have built into it the elements he liked

322 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 of whatever the conflict was. The elements in this case might be cash and respectability. For me it was stability, respectability and working with smart people. I get to do that now. I have income, its stable and I get to work with people who are smart. I don’t work with people who are shall we say more intellectually challenged, although actually it’s very difficult to find someone like that, partly because most of you are here because you have seen one of my products. So if you didn’t like it you would come. It’s perfect. I’m very happy I get smart people, thank you for coming. But do you see where I’m going with this? The integration is not at the level of behavior. That’s where the conflict is at because you are right there are behaviors that just don’t match. I want to love my mother but I want to kill her, they don’t match but then intention will create something completely different you had no idea of that before and that’s where you want to lead people to. It’s the possibility where they come up with some third path that is not a mixture of the other two, it’s actually something that they couldn’t even have conceived of before. For me that path initially was coaching. I was a coach, I worked with business leaders. They were smart people, they were wealthy people, they paid me handsomely and I enjoyed working with them. I had everything I had as a lawyer plus everything I could do as a hypnotherapist. So I enjoyed that work for a while and I’m enjoying this more. Does that make sense? Does that help you? Over here. Q:

Can you do step one, two, four skipping three?

Igor: You can skip anything. You can start anywhere and do anything absolutely. The point of this is that first of all, if you are following the steps as things arise each step makes it easier for the next step to succeed. Now let’s say you do something with the Mind Bending Language and it works great, they go off and then come back and say it all worked out great but then it came back and let’s say with a soccer mom you did it with Mind Bending Language. No strong emotion came up, you just dealt with it with the Mind Bending Language no regression necessary. Great she comes back, why on earth would I regress? I have no emotion to regress on. The only time and I’m quite serious about this – I like regression work, it’s very rewarding right, it’s very powerful, but I don’t do it very often do you know why?

323 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Because I rarely get the kind of strong negative emotion arising that makes my life in regression easy, so I don’t bother going down that road. Could I search for it? Of course I could. But sure I can – I will typically not do it, not because I don’t like it. I think it’s a great process it’s just the context hasn’t come up. So can you do one, two, four? Sure, usually all I will do is two. That’s usually the only thing I have to do or just one. Sometimes I’ll just start with one and it starts going alright and that just kicks me into two, I go up a gear shall we say and it’s done. I occasionally go into three. I almost never do four. It’s very rare I can do it and I can do it very well. I enjoy doing it because it helped me a lot but I almost never do it. In fact the only time I can really think of doing that in recent history is when I’m doing these seminars, because as far as I’m concerned and the way I work it’s a cleanup technique and the same with the regression. I love doing regressions when I hit the right point. I don’t go searching for regressions. I don’t go looking them out and if I see a regression starting to – something that might require regression starting to pop up its head I’ll actually work quite hard to avoid the regression to do it with other things because I enjoy doing it with Mind Bending Language and stuff, but when the conditions are ready I’ll go right into that. So yep you can do anything you want. Does that help you? Stand up and we’ll get a mic to you and then we’ll this gentleman here afterwards. Q:

Two part question. Is it possible that just going through the process with Jules your problems will work out better as well or do I have to search out for that therapy myself? And the other is what if what comes out of it, is that you should really enjoy more what you are doing because the grass is greener on the other side and maybe it’s not really true.

Igor: Okay let’s deal with the first one first I’m not quite sure about the second yet so I’ll ask some more question about it. The first one absolutely, how many of you guys just rode on the coat tail of his trance and enjoyed it right? So it’s very easy to do that, especially when you have good rapport, empathy with someone you get into it. How many of you rode on the co-tails of Stephanie’s trance when she had more the emotion, right, again very easy to do. I have worked with clients where at the

324 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 end of it I felt like I should pay them because I have had such a blast, right and really it’s helped me figure things about myself too. So that’s how I think is a – it’s a really happy day for us as hypnotherapists, so yes, absolutely. Now let me see if I understood the second half of the question which is what if they think it’s better to do this thing and they end up doing it and they regret it because actually it was a worse choice to make, is that correct? Q:

Which is a certain fear.

Igor: So let’s put this way. J:

I think I have an answer.

Igor: Okay just go ahead and answer it. J:

What comes to mind when he asked the question was because of the higher intention it’s setting the goal behind the intention rather than – my whole issue earlier was I thought one had failed to meet my goals now that it… so my every plan as long I keep the intention in mind, there is no failure.

Igor: It becomes his north. It’s his compass to test whether or not this is a good path to take. You see the field you go to is irrelevant, it’s not a question the grass greener over here or over there, that’s again looking at the level of behavior, just like the lady was asking over here. It’s irrelevant which field you go into, the test will be that high level thing and yes is it possible that Jules will make mistakes? For sure it is in fact I encourage it. We all make mistakes, that’s how we learn. We must make mistakes in order to know how to do things, better shall we say. So will he at some point go down the wrong path a little bit? Absolutely, but the beauty is now that he is aware of that intention, the thing that’s driving him, he will stare down that path and he is going like something is not quite right here. I’m going to go this way for awhile and he’ll avoid it much sooner than if he made a conscious plan, a goal of it, this is what I want and he gets there – he gets everything he planned for, but nothing of what he wanted. You may have experienced it yourself or you’ve at least met people who have had this, they are real go getters, they get everything they want but they hate their lives. They work hard to be millionaires, have the fast car, the fancy toys but

325 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 they are miserable why? Because on the path they were so focused on the goals they’ve lost touch with the intention that drove those goals, that were supposed to be satisfied by those goals. So there is no satisfaction left. Does that make sense? Exactly and the experience of that should hopefully bring them to bear. This gentleman was first and then we’ll come over you in a moment. Go ahead. Q:

I’m wondering if some of these behaviors is positive – the positive intentions some of them are so secret that I’m wondering if you ever use something like revivification to actually bring out what the secret positive intention is?

Igor: You mean they are so hidden that even the person themselves doesn’t know? Q:

That’s correct.

Igor: Oh its very typical, most people when you ask them what the intention behind something, especially what they would consider the negative side of themselves, they get stuck they don’t know. You saw a little bit of that happening here when he got stuck at the level of it helps me care for my family right? You notice how the loop was there and you had to break through that and the things you do to get re-vivification or to break down on a symbol, those are exactly the same things you do here to pop through to the higher intention. The same cycles are happening, 100% correct yes. This gentleman over here and then we’ll come back. Q:

I wanted to go on the co-tails of that thing there. For me – to my ladder against the wrong wall is what I have been for a long time, but what I got out of this and for me was the – actually came out of your mouth was the resolve conflict and now I have a shared vision. So it doesn’t matter what wall I put my ladder on I’m still going to be okay.

Igor: Yeah 100% correct. Are you starting to get the feel of what we are doing here? We are not finding solutions, we are putting the client in a position to find his own solutions that are better than anything we could think up, right? Do you want to stand up and we’ll get a mic to you over here. Q:

Just real quick you said that you usually do the blitz and then number two rarely three and almost never four inside of number, of number two is there one of those three that you – or…

326 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: I love Mind Bending Language that’s my favorite it on the – to me they kind of blend into one with me because I still have Mind Bending Language but you have heard me say, well I wonder what's happening here. So I’m going to a lot of Non Awareness Set as well and occasional when they say something especially if they throw out a metaphor, well I’m into the Dynamic Induction straight away right. So I’ll do that but my primary focus is Mind Bending Language just because I enjoy doing it so much. Q:

And how does a metaphor lead into…

Igor: It’s a symbol. If someone says it feels like someone is crushing my rib cage there is a symbol right there. So it feels like someone is crushing your rib cage. I wonder what's happening there. I wonder what that’s supposed – what it’s trying to teach you – I don’t know it’s nothing that’s right you think it’s nothing right now. Or they might say, you know, it’s like I’m grasping for something made of air. That’s right, it right there isn’t it? It’s made of air and you can’t quite touch it. It’s frustrating isn’t it? When you can’t quite touch it, it’s made of air. I wonder what needs to happen for you to get a solid grasp of it. I don’t know. You really don’t know do you? Yet there is it. Is it happening yet? It’s the strangest thing, yes it is. What is it? I don’t know but it’s happening. I know isn’t that strange. Do you see how the start blending and mixing together? I just kept them separate for you guys so they become nice training devices and they are very useful on their own but that’s how you might do them more conversationally. Q:

Okay I think I misunderstood the DMI. I was thinking the path and the...

Igor: It is exactly that. That is exactly what DMI is, but here is the thing, you are mistaking the path and different levels of orientation and so on as having any importance. Let me put this way to you. I have a box right here I’m going to pull something important out, now what is this? Q:

An orange.

Igor: An orange, great there is a symbol right there I have it already. Do I need a path? Do I need a secret garden? Did I need any of that? No, all I need to wonder about is what that orange means to you. And you really don’t know yet do you?

327 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

Not yet.

Igor: Yet there it is. An orange, it’s there right? It came out of your mind. It clearly is something important only you don’t have any idea what is it yet do you? Q:

No.

Igor: And can you already hear the trance beginning to occur in his voice right? Do you see how do I don’t need any of those paths or anything like that. It’s very conversational but I’m putting those things in place because the mind is so fluid those things help stabilize the mind for you. It’s for you that we have the path. It’s for you that we have the sanctuary to make your life easier doing the method. I can do it very happily without any of those things. Let’s face it I invented the path. So don’t get too caught in the technique of something, it’s the principles that runs these things that’s of more importance. Q:

You’re right, I confused all that as – did a technique versus just a metaphoric symbol that you would normally use.

Igor: Exactly that’s the operative principle going on there, very good. These guys over here go ahead. Q:

Just a quick question the Non Awareness Set did you develop that and pull it out of Erickson or did that come from somewhere?

Igor: I pulled it out of actually Erickson’s students. Erickson was doing something when you read his induction but it’s very difficult to pull a pattern out he was actually doing the Non Awareness Set, but it’s difficult to pull that pattern out because like a conscious/unconscious disassociation that’s what people classically call it. And there were two students I saw doing this whole playing with people and the language and so on, because I would primarily watch a lot of these seminars in trance myself. There was this weird thing it’s like I know something is happening I have no idea what it is. Can you feel the Non Awareness Set starting? It did it to me first, I have no idea what it is, but it’s there and I really know it’s there and then one day it was just one question. It was just one question someone asked and I can’t even remember what the question is now, I just remember the look on the hypnotists face, looking at him going you know, what

328 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 are those hands doing and it’s like I get it. Then that’s when I got the Non Awareness Set and I started putting it together as a sequence you that you can learn because what they are doing is very intuitive so they don’t have to teach it. They didn’t even know they were doing it. They will call it all kinds of other techniques but that’s actually what they are doing. Q:

So I just need to check in on something here I feel like I have just had this like oh I get it moment.

Igor: I agree with you. Q:

Thank you, so what just occurred to me is all we are doing is really tapping into and I know you’ve said this probably 17,000 in the last four days but tapping into somebody’s unconscious where everything they need exists and all this is, is tools that we use to facilitate them getting to – everything that they already need and know which exists already over here in them.

Igor: Exactly. Q:

Awesome.

Igor: Exactly I think so. See this way I don’t have to spend 10 years getting a PhD in psychology to learn all these facts that are useless in many ways because the biggest PhD in psychology that I need, will be sitting in my chair right there. They know everything they need to know about their life, their mind, their existence is right there and so I can just tease it out – sure they are themes that I can help them with, but yes. Good stand up we’ll get a mic to you and then we’ll have a break. Q:

Regarding technique, I have one more question.

Igor: Which one? DMI? Q:

No, as far as I understand when I cure someone with the fear of something sometimes I can use two or three, four separately as far as I understand.

Igor: Yeah.

329 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

But here I try to use two, three, four continuously I couldn’t find two, three connection or a three or four – three four connection I couldn’t find any, I couldn’t imagine.

Igor: So what's the connection between step two and step three? Q:

Two and three and three and four.

Igor: Okay it’s easy. So step one you just talk at them like you are a wonderful person this good thing is going to happen and they are going to go yes, tell me more. Well they are going to go no, you don’t understand, as soon as you get this no, a little bit of push back they are going to give you ideas. I’m not that good or I can’t do this because I’m scared or this phrase and so on right when they say that you are straight into step two. Aside from what you can’t do what can you? Do you see how naturally that fits in? And you need to run around with that for a while maybe it solves the problem, most of the times it will right? For me it’s probably about 80 or 90 percent of the time it just solves it right there. Now occasionally we are doing something like you know, aside from what you can’t what can you and they’ll sit there, an emotion comes up, strong negative emotion. Now I’m already in step three they have done it for me. It’s already happened right. We’ve resolved it all they go home. Step four there is really kind of a strange little line here. there kind of a line here because they will go home at this point I won’t typically do that on the first session there is no – there is very few time I just feel like doing it in the session. They will typically go home they will do life and I have done everything right I have tested it its worked great they go home they call up and say it hasn’t worked. I say come back in I say well what happened? Well I was – and you actually see this happen quite often though. Well I was driving along it was great and everything like that and then you know I was getting really stressed out and suddenly that stress and – I just couldn’t drive anymore. So I go great so there is a stress side and here you being able to drive aside and coming together right. So this is kind of a cleanup technique. It’s to fix when the problem they had was giving them a pay off they didn’t realize. It’s rare. As I say I have rarely used it other than the training environment. I’m giving it to you for the sake of

330 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 completeness. I doubt many of you will use it just because you won’t need to. Some of you will use it just because you like it, that’s fine, enjoy it because you can pretty much achieve anything with any tool. Does that help you a little bit? Alright guys I think it’s time for a break. So let’s take 15, no 20 shall we?

331 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2

DVD 19 – How To Do The Total Reintegration Method Yourself With Step By Step Guidance

Igor: Alright guys so what we are going to do now is going to do the reintegration process kind of step by step like we did the regression right? You guys have a choice. In a moment I’m going to ask you guys to find a partner, anyone will do. With your partner you have choice of either presenting a conflict like I’m trying this but this stopping me, so it’s a toward/away from or to do a toward/toward, I want this and I want this and I don’t know how they could combine. So you have those choices if you are going to work through a problem. If you prefer you can just role play for your client once again. At that point I’d like you to use something like Jules as an example for you, because this becomes totally useless if you are not working with a genuine problem, because basically you can spiral up on the intention to infinity and beyond, when it means nothing to you. So if you are going to roll play, please use Jules as an example as something more real work with, otherwise this becomes a farce, it becomes really less useful than more useful for your subject for your hypnotist. Really the easiest way of doing it is if you actually are willing to use a genuine problem. Whether you do or not that’s your choice. I’m not going to force you one way or the other. It’s a choice you have to make. Does that make sense to you guys? Easy thing to make? Go ahead. Q:

You said this or that and then what was the other choice?

Igor: So there is two things it’s called the toward/away conflict, so I don’t want this and I do want that. I don’t want to be lazy and I do want to go to the gym, but the laziness is preventing me. I do want to lose weight and I don’t want to eat the wrong foods. I do want to be a hypnotherapist, but I’m afraid, you see how that’s the same away from conflict. I’m afraid of it, its preventing me, but I still want to do it. That’s a toward/away from. I want to go towards one side, away from the

332 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 other, but somehow the thing I want to get away from is preventing me to go in the direction I want to go to. The other kind of conflict is a toward/toward. This is good and this is good and I kind of want both, but I can’t do both and they are both interfering. The classic one is I want to be a full time mother, but I want a career. No one’s ever experienced that conflict before have they? This is a great example to answer again one of the questions that people have raised earlier on. Here is a great example at the level of behavior is probably impossible to resolve the conflict, because both require more time than can be invested in them, but when you bring it up to something higher then maybe you either become very satisfied with the idea of motherhood, or you take the elements of motherhood that are important and you satisfy them in your career or as people have done, you start your home business as a part time thing whilst you are at home – you see how many different possibilities or options, but the point is you need to resolve the conflict first so that your neurology has even – or your mind has even got the possibility of coming up with choices, make sense? Quick question here can we have a microphone over here? Q:

Yeah very quick question, in this parts therapy there is only two parts left or right, what if you have three or four parts?

Igor: Great, handle two at a time and remember this used specifically at the end of a process. It is not a general parts therapy that you can do more complications if you want. If you use it at the end of this, there will only be two parts which is, it worked and it stopped worked. Those are the only two parts you need to deal with. Right at the back and then we’ll come on to you. Q:

Can reintegration be used for generative change?

Igor: It can be used for anything. You can achieve any result with any tool provided you use the right principals inside of it. Q:

Of course thank you.

Igor: So exactly there you go. Come on stand up.

333 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

So with regards to the towards and away from conflict, what would say would be the best way to work with someone who says I want to do this, but I feel like I can’t.

Igor: Perfect you have them. Do you also see his mannerisms? It already came out. I want to do this but I feel like I can’t. On the one side I want to this play music say. On the other side I really feel like I can’t. What is the side that’s stopping you from doing what you want, what's that doing for you? Nothing it’s just stopping me. Do you see where we are doing with this? Beautiful, yours is probably the simplest one to do this whole process with. Q:

Thanks.

Igor: Easy? I would like to have my beautiful Carson sit up here again because he did such a wonderful job as a volunteer. Do we have a Carson in the room? Give him a round of applause, folks. Can you just hook him up with a mic because we’ll need your hands for this one? Q:

Is the person finding the answer or it’s the therapist finding the answer?

Igor: So the question is the person finding the answer or the therapist finding the answer? I never find anything. I’m clueless, honestly. I’m clueless but I have a lot of faith, which is really going back to what Vicky was saying here. It’s all on him. It’s all there.

Step By Step Reintegration

Igor: So for this purpose I’d like you to have a classic conflict. I like his version, I want to do X, but I can’t, right? Or you want be hypnotist, but I’m afraid, that sort of thing. You choose whatever you want. Don’t make it real for now, we are just going to play with it a little bit it. You know what I’m talking about right? C:

So I can’t make it real or not?

334 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: Sure make it real, I don’t care, it’s all good. Not the biggest thing in your life because I want to have a nice steady progression for this folks. So this is not a time for massive therapy, I want to have a simple thing to demonstrate the steps so they can do them step by step. C:

Right for example.

Igor: Time is ticking. C:

Okay I would like to be able to sleep less, but on the other hand I feel that for my health…

Igor: Can you see it coming out already? Get with your clients – sorry find a partner. Do this, find out what hand is coming out and what and then come back here, it just takes two seconds, thank you. Let’s have mic here folks like gets the mics ready assistants please. Q:

My partner completely baffled me by asking a question which wasn’t an internal thing. He came in saying he wants to start a business but he has problems with the laws in his area.

Igor: Fine. So here is the bigger thing. It’s not the laws in the area that are the problem. How those laws, what are those laws preventing, what is the problem about those laws. There are laws everywhere right? So there has got to be a problem – there is interaction with the laws. Q:

It affects the cost of doing business it won’t make it profitable.

Igor: Exactly so they are saying it affects the cost of doing business. So there are two possibilities you can do here. Number one you can still do it this way. Number two the easier version, he has asked me to switch to a simpler version of the problem because you are just doing the training wheels, does that make sense to you guys. You can still do it, you have to just work harder, remember any tool can do anything, normally it would get to this stage after we’ve already done the MBL and all that sort of stuff. So that version of it won’t come up. It might be more along the lines of let me give you what would probably end up being the problem after playing with it for a bit. It would be like I want to start a business, but it seems a monumental task

335 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 working through all the red tape I have to get through to do that, or I want to start a business in this state but I’m afraid of how much it might cost me to do it. Do you see what I mean? So it will take work to get to that sort of shape. So the easiest way is just get him to a simple problem, like I want to do this but I can’t type thing. Does that help? Q:

Yeah.

Igor: Stand up so we can get a mic. Q:

What are some good questions that you can ask to get the kind of response that you are looking on the hand and on the next?

Igor: Great what's the problem? Q:

I eat too much.

Igor: Great so how is that problem for you? Q:

I didn’t use a real one so it’s kind of hard to figure this out.

Igor: So here is what happens, you feel uh well you know I eat too much but I want to lose weight how can I do both? Do you see already happening? Q:

Yeah but now I forgot what you said. I’m sorry.

Igor: So how is that a problem? These are simple questions. It’s irrelevant or you can say tell me more, or what is the problem about it, when someone says I eat too much that is not a problem right? I sleep too much and I love it. I’m very happy about it. Some people tell me I work too much. I don’t care I enjoy it do I have a problem? No. The problem comes when I work so much, you see its already happening, I work so much I can’t do the things I enjoy doing that are not work. Can you already see it happening automatically? That’s more of what you are looking for. Does that help? Q:

Yes, thank you.

Igor: Okay great so very quickly you asked the problem, oh very quickly stand up so we can get a mic to you.

336 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

I have a little question, it maybe tiny bit complicated. Everything is based on really subtle things, when I asked him his question he said something about keep your business open or keep it closed. He just took one direction and another direction. There is two parts to this question. Does that have anything to do with logical left brain and creative right brain, and if it does, may or may not if I gesture since I’m right handed, if I may gesture more toward another direction would that possibly alter his vision.

Igor: Excellent. So number one, the second one, yes you could actually end up suggesting it with your own gestures, so you’ll notice when I ask these things I’m very still. So what's the problem or I might have subtle gestures, something like that. The first question is of no value to us. Unless you want to do the research on it by all means do so? I don’t know anything of it. It matters nothing to me in terms of how – I can’t give you any better answer than that, makes sense? Q:

Alright.

Igor: Alright guys so you can all ask the question what's the problem is that right? And most of you, not necessarily all, well I know, some clients are less responsive there is a way around it, but most of you can see them going like – once again what's the problem? C:

I would like to sleep less but…

Igor: There we have it, you all see hands doing their magic. It’s not rocket science, it will come out. I’m doing it constantly as I’m talking to you guys anyways right? I am describing my mental environment to you as I move my hands. I can’t help it, it’s just how people are. If you really want to get an easy chance to spot this, work with Italians, they are really expressive. Alright so the next step you want to do is you want to start developing some called catalepsy. Catalepsy is when the hand does this. Now how do we get to this point? Free movement returns. It’s very simple, whenever you talk to someone and you hold the hand up. Right now I can feel the weight of this hand. So I’m going to start moving his hands around as I’m talking to him and eventually it will feel like I’m holding his hand up. Can I physically be holding his

337 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 hand up at this point? But it feels like it because he is used to what's called ambiguous touch. So I’ll take his hands, I might take both, I might take one at a time and I will start talking to them about the problem. So on the one side you want to kind or I don’t know, you want to sleep more is that right, or its less, sorry, there you go. That’s me I’m talking about right now. And we had the catalepsy already right? Do you see how that simple was? Off you go. Thank you. Alright guys so once again there is a lot of chatting going on. You really don’t need very much for this. It’s just a few sentences it’s like what's the problem? C:

I would like to sleep less, but on the other hand I’m worried for my health.

Igor: Can you see how each time I ask again he gets quicker to the answer anyway? It’s kind of like the regression training we did, because you may as well make life easier on yourself. Then all you do is you are going to pick up his hands and you are going to start talking about general things as you move your hands around gently until this is the case. That’s all. It literally is – its moments. We haven’t even said which hand, what comes out here and what comes out there we haven’t said any of that stuff up yet. Q:

Move around like this till you are at the top?

Igor: Yeah so the question is do you move your hand around till you are top? Yeah because look at it this way. Right now give me your weight, give me the weight of the hand there. I’m support it. I let go this happens. If I try and hold from here it still happens, right? So if I start holding his hand but I’m moving my hand around constantly so my support is changing, his hand – his unconscious mind starts to keep this forward going. Look at this, it looks like I’m holding them up but I’m not. C:

It actually feels like you are holding it up.

Igor: For my next trick, does that make sense to you guys? C:

Yes.

338 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: People over complicate this idea of catalepsy. I was terrified over it for many years, but it’s really simple if you treat it as casually. Will you get everyone this way? Of course not, but 95 percent of people will get catalepsy if you hold up the hand, you start ambiguously moving your hand around as you are talking to them, maybe because you are trying to make your gestures and you are getting all Italian on them and woo look at this crazy stuff, look it flies. Right it will happen every time. Thank you, free movement returns. It really simple, it’s really quick, the less emphasis you put on it the more likely it is to occur, because there’s no attention on it. And I’ll never mention this in the session because as far they’re concerned, their hands are just there. So very quickly, ask the problem that will take you what? Two seconds yes. And go straight to playing with the hands until they just rest up there. Most of you did it, but literally it should take less than a minute. Alright guys off you go. Alright is that really easy? Any difficulties to the catalepsy anywhere? Hand up just stand up so we can get a mic to you and we’ll come to you over there. Q:

Harry actually pointed something out that’s really interesting that when you actually – when you pull their hands out and extend your bicep is activated and then that just automatically holds it in place as well.

Igor: You can do all kinds of things again I want really deemphasize the process of it because people put too much emphasis on it, it’s kind of cool I know, but it’s much cooler what you are about to do with it and I would like to get on to that rather than anything else. Is that cool with you guys? So very quickly the question at the back here. Q:

That answered my question.

Igor: Thank you, alright guys we are ready for – go ahead stand up. Q:

When I asked him about he wanted to do business but he was afraid but his hands were clenched and I was watching and I didn’t see any movement.

Igor: Fine, if you don’t see any movement would you like to see what happens either because their hands are clenched? You can unclench them and ask them again or you do this, don’t move your hands on the initial bit, what's the problem?

339 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

I would like to sleep less but I’m worried for my…

Igor: He has already told me with my hands anyways right, but that’s beside the point. He is cheating a little bit. But your… Q:

I did move.

Igor: You want to sleep less but? Q:

But I’m worried for my health.

Igor: Excellent so here is what I’m curious about right you realize of course on the one side you want to sleep less. If you were to look at these two hands for a moment which side does this feel most like the one, the one that wants to sleep less or the other one? Q:

It’s the one that would like to sleep less, yes.

Igor: Wow I’m surprised by that. That’s interesting okay. What about this side that’s obviously that side, that? Q:

That wants to stay healthy and comfortable.

Igor: Wants to stay healthy and comfortable right? Easy? Q:

Yes.

Igor: Just because you are doing it automatically at first, you can still ask him. It will still come out one way or the other. I want you to add that step in, get him to dedicate consciously one hand for one, one hand for the other, because even though you have seen him do it, you want him consciously to do it again anyways. You are not going to tell him this hand will now represent this. No. Just because you saw it, doesn’t mean you have to use it that way right. Easy? All:

Yes.

Igor: Okay off you go free movement. Alright was that easy? All:

Yes.

340 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: Everyone getting catalepsy pretty quickly? See the less emphasis you pt on things the more natural they work and natural things work well. It’s as simple as that. Great so what's the problem? C:

I would like to sleep less.

Igor: Less but? Exactly right let’s go straight to this. So of course which side do you think is going to have catalepsy there now really because he is kind of well trained by the state? What do you think this side would be? C:

Sleep less.

Igor: Sleeping less and this side being healthy right? C:

Yeah.

Igor: Excellent. Now if you look at this hand for a moment and there was a kind of a picture or an image I could fit in here, that would symbolize sleeping less. What would that be? C:

I don’t know it’s a sailboat, I don’t know why.

Igor: A sailboat and that’s fine. So you got a like a sailboat there that says about sleep less right? C:

Yes.

Igor: So what about on this side what symbolizes the idea of being healthy and so on? C:

Like a golden coin.

Igor: Like a golden coin fantastic. Do you see even in his expression, he has no idea what these symbols mean, just like in the Dynamic Induction isn’t it? All:

Yes.

Igor: I’m not going to go down that particular road now but I so easily could. Do you see how you can do it conversationally at this point? Alright free movement returns to your hand. That step of you go. Alright so everyone got a problem yes?

341 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 All:

Yes.

Igor: Everyone got catalepsy yes? All:

Yes.

Igor: Everyone had the problem delegated to each hand yes? All:

Yes.

Igor: Everyone got a symbol to represent this problem yes? All:

Yes.

Igor: Beautiful. A question? Would you stand for the microphone? A:

If when you are looking for a symbol no obvious symbol came about..

Igor: Like you did exactly the same… A:

You look at it and your brain just kind of stops.

Igor: Is that what happened to you or your partner? A:

To me.

Igor: Okay do you want to come up? A:

Sure.

Igor: Come on up. Would you hold a mic for him seeing as we are doing a double duty here? Everyone this is Andrew you know him very well excellent. So what's the problem quickly? A:

I feel like I want to – I want to start a business but at the same time I don’t feel like I have the resources.

Igor: You see the things already, excellent – he’s already in catalepsy, I didn’t even have to do anything here. I was just pointing to it to make it a little more obvious, okay? Which is which hand, quickly? A:

Business - lack of resources.

342 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: And if you look at this side here just look at this hand what would symbolize this business? A:

An old style cash register.

Igor: That’s right it would, wouldn’t it and what about this side here, what symbolizes that? A:

I don’t know I look down and I see my hand.

Igor: You see your hand. So what is this about again? A:

Lack of resources.

Igor: Lack of resources to start the business. A:

Yeah.

Igor: Have a look at it again what do you see? A:

Blank sheet of paper.

Igor: Exactly, well done, off you go. Thank you, it’s useful right? So right now are just at the set up stage okay, just at the set up stage. So we’ve done what's the problem quickly? Sleep… great fantastic hands out this side is what? C:

Sleep less.

Igor: Fantastic it is less sleep and this side is healthier. What's the image here? C:

Sail boat.

Igor: And this one here? C:

Golden coin.

Igor: Correct, okay we are ready to continue is that right? C:

Yes.

Igor: So which of this two carries more, more of a negative charge if they were both positive, then it would be irrelevant where you start. But of these two, which do you think has more of a negative charge? This side here the coin? Or the

343 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 sailboat? Sailboat? Coin? Hands up, it’s the coin. Hands up it’s the sail boat. I’m going with the coin do you know why? Because he wants to do this, it’s what he was telling me, this is kind of preventing him from doing it. It’s still a positive thing right? You see him nodding? It’s because he knows I’m right. You are correct. So got to have a bit of fun right? Okay so now we are going to choose the lesser side, the one that they find less pleasant to go with first, because it is more dramatic and more drama means more power in what you are doing. Remember the Amygdala, right? So, this is the side that wants to sleep less and this one wants to be healthier and somehow you just don’t know which way to go, is that right? What did I just do? (Igor clapped his hands together) What does that do for him? It’s preparing him for what's going to happen. (unconscious suggestion that his hands will come together) I can say so, you are ready to do something here right, or I can go, all you want to do is make sure that you are going in the right direction, right?. It’s this, this woo if you are happy and you know it clap your hands. Not yet we haven’t finished yet? C:

No.

Igor: Slow down a bit. C:

Okay.

Igor: But this folks here. Alright so we start at this side. If you think about this part here, the one that wants to be healthy and so on what's the purpose of that? What is it trying to do for you? What is its positive intension? C:

Well, make me live long enough.

Igor: To make let – make you live long enough for? C:

For happiness.

Igor: For happiness right? C:

Yeah.

344 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: So when you are living long enough you are getting happiness, is that what you are saying? C:

Yes.

Igor: So this is all about really getting happiness, is that what you are telling me? C:

Yes.

Igor: Is happiness a nice high nominalization? C:

Yes.

Igor: Chances are really good that we will be in the same sort of position here, but let’s find out. What's this all about? C:

Getting more done in my life.

Igor: Right so if you are getting more things done, what happens, what does that do for you? C:

I’m generally more happy.

Igor: You are, aren’t you? Do you see how quickly you get there and I have to apologize, these guys are far too good for you, because sometimes you may do the three or four layers, the longest I have taken was like seven, eight, nine layers. That was a bit of work. Was that in Amsterdam? I can’t remember, anyway it doesn’t matter. The point is it doesn’t matter if its two layers or three layers or three layers or seven layers or 15 layers, you will get there eventually. Does that make sense? Occasionally you’ll notice that this guys has gone to really cool thing and you have to come back a little bit and kind of slide – really come back to this one again a little bit more right, it’s not a big deal, it really is not. So you now have both things wanting the same thing. Wow what a shock, did you realize that both things want the same thing? Am I a genius? Do you understand? Okay free movement returns to your hand here, thank you. Do you understand what we are doing here?

345 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 So you are getting to the same point you had before the symbol comes out now we are going to first of all, if you want to just do a little couple of this in between, you can never clap too much, your client is well done, right? Whatever you want to do, it doesn’t matter. Folks on the negative side, first find a high level of nominalization. I’ll come to you in a second. Skip to the positive next it will get exactly the same thing and you’ll go, what a coincidence, wow did you realize that? Did you notice that? Did you notice that? Do you see where we are going with this? As soon as he notices it, there will be a lot of psychological energy shall we say, pulling things together already and we are going to start converting them into physical movement for the drama, which of course has the impact and so on, make sense? Do you want to stand up for everyone? Q:

Yeah are you wanting us to go through the earlier steps?

Igor: I want to get you through every single step; knowing what the steps are already you can skip through them real quickly what's the problem? That’s right okay let me have your hand which one is this? C:

Sleep less.

Igor: That’s right and this one here is? C:

Health.

Igor: This is a picture of? C:

A sailboat.

Igor: This is a picture of? C:

A gold coin.

Igor: Great what does this one want? C:

Happiness.

Igor: That’s right what does this one want? C:

Be more happy.

346 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: That’s right so they both want – happy – you see it still has the same impact. Did you see his face? Right let me do this again. What does this one want? C:

Happiness.

Igor: What does this one want? C:

Happiness.

Igor: Did you see it again? It’s because his mind likes it. It feels good to not be pulled apart at the same time anymore. So this is what we want yes, I want you to start from scratch each time, practice the steps, but you can race through them really easily right. Free movement returns to your hands thank you. Go ahead stand up – wait we got some more questions here stand up. Q:

So my question is where does the determination come in as far one being more positive and one being more…

Igor: Irrelevant. If you make a mistake it doesn’t matter. It’s just more dramatic, with experience you’ll get a feeling for it. If it’s a stumbling block don’t concern yourself about it honestly. Stand up. Q:

Quick question is this happiness the same thing, what if it comes different?

Igor: It will not be. Q:

Not be?

Igor: No the only way it can be different, the only way it can be different is you stayed too low. So if you go up and up and up eventually they will always be the same thing and you know why, because every human being has a few guiding themes in their lives. You just have to go up high enough and you’ll always find it. Q:

So if difference continually ask to the end to this day.

Igor: Exactly and they go this hand and they go by this hand and go, I have had to do it a few times. I have had to like do two or three goes in each hand, I was working hard and I was little inept, but that was just me getting used to the process. You will always, I guarantee you, you will always get to exactly the same idea provided you go up high enough and it’s a real problem. That’s why I was having

347 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 a little issues with having a fake problem, because that’s when people start playing silly buggers just to be silly, right, because there is nothing genuine coming out. Over here. Q:

I have a question this is something that I have friends who – a lot seems to – came to me and lets up this way…

Igor: Can I just pause you a second? Does this actually relate to the exercise we are doing right now in terms of to be able to do this particular step? Q:

Yeah.

Igor: Okay carry on. Q:

Just to put an example. I have a friend who came with me and said I have a girlfriend and I have lover so I don’t know what to do?

Igor: That’s a classic toward/toward conflict right? Unless they didn’t like the girl friend which is a toward/away from conflict you are done, same thing. Over here can we have mic please over here? Q:

Is it possible I have two negatives?

Igor: Like what? Q:

Like I don’t want to do this and I don’t want to do that.

Igor: Sure, but it’s a rarer situation, because that’s basically being caught between a rock and a hard place. I don’t want to sell my house but I don’t want to go bankrupt what do I do? Sure it is? You remember every tool can achieve any purpose if you are getting it at this point the four step is this process, it will not be there because everything else has been cleaned up by the other stuff. You will have a very clear, a very clear conflict. If you do it as a step on its own, then sure your life, can be a little bit more interesting. Well it can work, it just it will be a little more interesting. Alright guys. Ready to do the exercise? Off you go. So let’s try to get a couple of questions whilst we are waiting for the final person to finish up.

348 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

I just wanted to say that with my partner when I was the hypnotist asking him – he would try to keep going back to an intellectualization of it and I just had to keep kind of putting him back in to that place of the nominalization.

Igor: Yeah absolutely right. You have different people, different reactions, it will always work, it’s just some people you have to work a little bit harder with so well done, good lesson. Any other question or comments? Over here just stand up so we can get a mic to you. Q:

I found that the hands started moving together automatically.

Igor: Did anyone else notice this? When you get to the point of agreement do your hands start coming together automatically? Q:

Yeah, yeah.

Igor: It doesn’t always, it’s true. It doesn’t always, but there is a strong tendency for it and you’ve enhanced it with this (hypnotist clapping their hands together). Q:

How am I doing this?

Igor: I will show you a few extra tricks you can do along the way as well, but we will get to them when we get to them. Nicely done. Anything else, anyone else. Go ahead and stand up. Q:

Before I present to you there is something happened to him.

Igor: Say again. Q:

So I asked him in case I couldn’t find the answer, what's the purpose of the both hand, you happiness something but I…

Igor: Oh you couldn’t get a positive intention for one or for the other hand. Q:

Yeah so he asked question, but I couldn’t find it.

Igor: Oh for you personally? Q:

No his hand.

Igor: Oh on his hand right?

349 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

Yes.

Igor: So do you mind if we talk about it a little bit is that okay? So you are going to hold the mic for him. I won’t do the whole version of it so what's was the conflict? Q:

The conflict I have a current job and then I have a something else, a new career that I want to work on.

Igor: A classic conflict right. So when you think about your current what does it do for you? Q:

I have security of income.

Igor: Security of income right. So when you have security of income what is the point of that? What does that do for you? All:

It just makes me feel comfortable knowing that I’m not going to go homeless.

Igor: So it’s about having security of income and being comfortable in the fact that you are not going to homeless etcetera right? All:

Right.

Igor: So this is an important question here. When you have security of income and you have the comfort of knowing you will not be homeless, what is the point of all this? What does that allow you to be or do? Q:

Feel free.

Igor: Feel free, right. Feel free, can you hear the nominalization, would that be a decent bet that it’s going to be a good one? Let’s go back to the other one the one you want to try the new job. What's the purpose of that? Q:

I want freedom from this job.

Igor: Hallelujah. Notice how this is a more typical case. We struggled a little bit and normally it’s something that will stick at low level. I want to have security. I want security so I’m not losing my house. I want security so I don’t lose my house and I can have a good life and you’ll just go around and around those circles, so the way you contain it is you ball them all up into one big ball park. So when you have

350 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 money and financial security and you are doing this and you are doing that and you’ve got the comfort of not losing your house and the respect of people and all these others things are happening, what is the point of it all? What does that do for you, or how does it allow you to be as a person? Some people will require, just like with the Dynamic Induction, a little bit of attention on the idea before it starts popping. Does that help? Anyone else have a problem with this? It’s really easy isn’t it? And there will be some people with which it will be less easy than others it’s just as long as you get the general trend of which way to take it. Shall we continue the next step? All:

Yeah.

Igor: Alright what's the problem? Q:

Less sleep.

Igor: Less sleep and? Q:

Health.

Igor: Excellent so hands come up here, we have a nice catalepsy, see this is a sailboat there is golden coin. Excellent I’m just racing through the course a little bit here. So what does this side want? Q:

Happiness.

Igor: That’s right what does this side want? Q:

Also happiness.

Igor: There we have again. Do you see expression lighting up? That’s beautiful, now we’ve gone over this a little bit, now watch the magic hands or really the magic finger, I will attempt to do it from a distance. What just happened there? You see a classic non verbal suggestion right here? So as I’m talking to him and say, isn’t that amazing that both sides want the same thing? It seems like I’m emphasizing the point doesn’t it? But look at what the hands are already doing, look how much closer they already are. I don’t want this to happen too quickly because I still want to have these shared resources, which are going to make it a little

351 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 easier. So I’m going to dive in and ask, so what does this side have to offer this side, like skills, resources, abilities, that could really help it make you get happiness? Q:

I‘ll be able to work out and…

Igor: Right so when you are working out, what is the skill, or ability, or resource it brings to the table? Q:

Well being alert and fresh.

Igor: Exactly, so when you are alert and fresh it’s a lot easier no matter what side is doing it, to be happy right? So if this side had more alertness, more freshness well you’d be doing a much better job of making you happy right? Q:

Right.

Igor: What else can this side do? See how it’s getting on a roll slowly, right? That’s it what's that? Q:

It makes me more efficient.

Igor: It makes you more efficient, isn’t that interesting, right? So this side could be more efficient, hey wouldn’t your ability to be happier just increase? Q:

It would.

Igor: It would wouldn’t it? You see the integration starting replace in his face? What about this side. What does this side have to offer here? I’m just giving – around two or three it doesn’t matter how many just getting there. What does this side have? Q:

Be organized.

Igor: Be organized. So if this side were more organized well then your ability to get happy that would be just be much easier, wouldn’t it? Q:

Yes.

Igor: What else does this side have to offer?

352 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

Freedom in a way.

Igor: It’s kind of freedom right? If this side had more of that kind of freedom, your ability to get happy would really increase significantly, wouldn’t it? Q:

It would.

Igor: Now here are the magic words, have you noticed a tendency in those hands yet? There it is. What's that? That’s right. Q:

It starting to come together.

Igor: They are starting to come together. He just presented the suggestion. Now let’s run this through because you may as well – this is the easy part and as soon as those hands touch, these two symbols will change into one, which is only about your happiness. So allow this process to continue only as quickly and smoothly as you need those hands to touch, so that everything else changes. You know what I mean by that don’t you? So that you have the organization of happiness, do you notice how I’m moving the resources across, the organization of happiness. The freshness and alertness that it all brings and they can both just pull together in the same direction, your happiness. And when those hands finally touch, not only are you going to have an amazing feeling inside, but those symbols with spontaneously change, probably surprise you. That’s right, they are already changing aren’t they? They are aren’t they? That’s right and when those hands touch, something else will emerge and that something you may or may not understand, but that’s irrelevant. It will be your sign that now you can just pull in the same direction and be happy, no matter what you do. That’s right. Let those hands continue their journey until the touch and that symbol changes. Is that easy to do? Would you like to watch him complete it or do you just want to go and do it? All:

Go ahead.

Igor: Go ahead and do it, let him complete on his own time. So there is a question here stand up so we can find you.

353 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

Okay so we ran into a problem where, and I will just tell you what it is because it’s easier than explaining it.

Igor: Sure. Q:

So on the one hand I want to exercise more and on the other hand I said I had – that I didn’t have enough time.

Igor: It’s a classic dilemma, yeah. Q:

And when she’s chunking up the time, it turned out that it was sort of at my current exercise options, it’s actually stressful for me to go to the gym. If I could travel…

Igor: Hold a second, let me just pause a second. When you are chunking up on the time, how did you get to the idea of stress? So the purpose of your having not enough time is to get stressed? Q:

That was actually the question that we – I wasn’t sure how to ask, like do I ask what does having time do for you?

Igor: Exactly very simple, whatever it is when you don’t have enough time, so you feel a certain sense of not having enough time right? So there is clearly some part of you that’s making you feel like you don’t have enough time to exercise, is that correct? Q:

Right.

Igor: What do you think that part of you is trying to achieve? What's it purpose? Q:

Okay the purpose is actually to avoid the stress of…

Igor: So its purpose to help you avoid the stress of other things, is that correct? Q:

Yes.

Igor: Perfect then that makes sense doesn’t it? So when you are avoiding stress what is the point of doing that, what does that do for you? Q:

Helps me to feel calmer.

354 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: To feel calmer right? Q:

Yes.

Igor: So when you are avoiding stress and you are feeling calmer what does that do for you? Q:

It makes me feel good.

Igor: It does make you feel good doesn’t it? Q:

Yes.

Igor: It does make you feel good. Now here is the thing if you go the other side the chances of it being – coming to feeling good are pretty high. Q:

Sorry there was a misunderstanding, we had that this next step, what's the resource of that side?

Igor: Oh the resource? Q:

Yeah, yeah.

Igor: Fantastic. Hold that mic for him would you. Okay so the side with the lack of time and so on it’s got some skills and abilities that if the other side could have them would really help it in making you feel good right? Q:

Right.

Igor: Only right now you may or may not be aware of what they are, do you have any ideas of what those might be? Q:

No.

Igor: Let me give you a hint of at least one of them. It’s been a around for a while hasn’t it right? You haven’t forgotten to not have time, have you? It’s persistent, just makes me think, oh I wish you would be doing exercise it pops right up and says oh wait a second, or am I wrong? Q:

I don’t know.

Igor: What do you mean? You tell me how long have you been wanting to exercise?

355 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

For years.

Igor: For year’s right and every time, would it be fair to say that this whole idea about not having enough time would that have come up at the same time? Q:

Well I changed jobs recently and so my job is taking more time and the exercise schedule at the gym as well for the classes I was supposed to take.

Igor: Great, so in that time period when you changed jobs, so it’s known something about your whole living situation that the one who wants to do the exercise doesn’t necessarily know. So at least it’s aware of the ecology isn’t it? Q:

Yes.

Igor: So that’s at least one good resource, it knows your whole life and what could fit into it. There do you see that? Q:

That makes sense.

Igor: He’s now starting to find recourses. Sometimes you have to fish a little bit. You have to prod a little bit, but usually the negative side will be really persistent that’s the one you can throw out as a pretty standard thing. In this case it just confused him a bit, but we found the idea of ecology, the idea that it can – in looking at his whole life at once, you know what fits into your whole life versus the other that just says train, right, or whatever? And we’ll find more of those so then you’ll ask something like, so what else can or does that side have as a skill that you haven’t even thought about before? See him searching? Q:

I don’t know.

Igor: It’s worth finding out isn’t it? Really think about that. It’s clearly paying attention to the whole of your life and its reminding you that there are certain things you have to pay attention to, right? What else does it do? What else is it capable of? When does it arise? Q:

Well it does kind of know what stresses me.

356 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: Right, it knows what stresses you and if the other side knew more about that stresses you, it could help you feel good, much better, wouldn’t it? See, so you have to fish sometimes, but does that help? Q:

Yeah.

Igor: Thank you very much that’s a great example. Can you stand up and we’ll get the mic to this side next. Q:

Real quick, do you ask what skills and abilities does this side have for the other, or for you?

Igor: Yes. Really the key idea is this side has certain skills, abilities, resources that its kind of inherent within it. In this case it’s the idea of paying attention to the whole of their life and then the deal is this, if this side had more of those skills this side could do a better job, that’s the key idea you are trying to get across. So side A had a skill, let’s say persistence and if side B had more persistence it would do a better job of feeling good, wouldn’t it? Because you would be persistent about feeling good, that’s a pretty good deal isn’t it? Do you see how that works? Does that answer your question Mathew? Q:

Yeah.

Igor: Any other questions at this point? Okay excellent. You guys are doing a great job. You’ve basically done all the hard work, now we are going to have some fun. Are you ready for this? So what's the problem, lack of sleep? C:

Yeah.

Igor: Okay hands up which is this one? C:

Sleepless.

Igor: And this? C:

Health.

Igor: Okay what's the picture? C:

It used to be a sailboat.

357 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: It used to be because we’ve already fixed it right. It used to be coin. This is really quick stuff. So okay so what do they want? C:

Happiness that’s right.

Igor: Happiness, that’s right and notice how this hands are wanting to come together, it’s happening fast because the integration already took place. This side wants this, this time you’ll have that all together. Notice the hands coming together and as they do a third new image emerges. What is that? There what is that? C:

It’s a heart.

Igor: It is a heart isn’t it? C:

Cheesy but it is.

Igor: But it makes sense, because it is about making you feel good, isn’t it? It’s about making you feel good. C:

Happiness yeah.

Igor: Oh so having happiness, his was feeling good, you’re happiness. C:

Exactly I’m happy.

Igor: Exactly, I feel good about your happiness but that’s… so here is the final step you all got to the stage didn’t you? Hands touching, new image, right, if you didn’t then just get to this stage the next time round, it’s really easy, just letting that complete right. So at this point let’s do this over here. Exactly, all I want you to do now is bring all this (his two hands), this time I’m helping him lift it until I release it and it carries on, on its own, bring all of this inside of you, close your eyes and bring that heart, that symbol right into you and let it integrate into all of you. Bring it into all that you are – feel it throughout your whole body and notice how everything changes. There you go, really let it settle right into you. You can see the integration happening now. It happened out here at first in his mind and now it’s becoming a physical experience shooting up in his body. I wouldn’t be surprised that there is a fair amount of energy just shooting up and down, right? Doesn’t look like much to us, but it will probably feel a bit more

358 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 interesting inside there and really enjoy that sensation. That’s right, let those hands come down only when you are ready and whenever you are ready to join us just open your eyes and notice how you see things differently when you do. Can we have the mic back just so you can – there you go just grab that? Good fun? C:

Good fun, very good.

Igor: And as you think about the whole idea of sleeping less or staying healthy and so on what happens? C:

It’s not two ideas it’s more of like one idea now.

Igor: Right, are you sure? C:

Yes.

Igor: You are not lying to me? C:

No.

Igor: Because this was kind of a conflict before wasn’t it? C:

Yes.

Igor: So what gives? C:

Well there is still stuff to integrate. Still stuff to develop from this, but there is no problem really, it’s more like there is more ideas actually, there is actually more…

Igor: Do hear similar themes coming out as last time? Do you believe him? All:

Yes.

Igor: I do. Did you notice the whole testing cycle a little bit? I’m not going to do too much, because of time, right, but I’m just testing a little bit. Now I’m not testing whether he already knows, what I’m testing is about whether he’s resolved whatever was pulling him in different directions right. Because they were pulling in different directions weren’t they? C:

Definitely yeah.

359 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: Well they still sure do, because you still want to sleep less don’t you and you still want to be healthy don’t you? C:

Sure but it’s fun. It’s going to be fun to work with this actually.

Igor: Really? C:

Yes.

Igor: It doesn’t sound like much fun to me. C:

It doesn’t?

Igor: No. C:

No?

Igor: No. C:

Sounds like fun to me.

Igor: See this, now he’s convincing me that it’s working and I’m quite alright with that. Does that make sense to you guys? Is that really easy? I mean the final step is a no brainer. The key is just let this hands come together and make sure that there is a new image that emerges, the old ones disappear, the new one emerges in its place and then just bring it in and really it’s a simple step at that point. Does it almost make sense? All:

Yes.

Igor: There is a question do you want to stand up for me? Q:

One question and this kind of goes to the same thing which is how do you deal with negatives so her thing was, Nellie’s thing was…

Igor: Are we allowed to talk about it? Thank you. Q:

She wants to start a business but she doesn’t want to do marketing.

Igor: Excellent it’s a classic conflict. And by the way if you want to talk to me afterwards there is something you need to know about that, which will help you immensely in other things as well. Go on.

360 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

So I was confused as to, do I say you know what does not marketing do for you or what does…

Igor: No it’s very simple which – you have two hands. I want to do a business, don’t want to do the marketing right? Q:

Yes.

Igor: What's this side do for you? Well it’s about getting rich and wealthy and famous and fabulous or whatever and what's the purpose of all that? It’s to live a good life. What's the idea of not doing marketing? Well I don’t want to just take money from people, I don’t want to steal from people or I don’t want to get involved in dodgy politics. I don’t know what it is. People have strange ideas about money sometimes right, so when you are not involving those things, when you are not doing those things, what are you doing, what does that allow you to do or have. Then they’ll go it allows me to have my integrity. So when you have your integrity what's the point of that? What does that do for you? Well it allows you to be a good person. Oh so this one is to make you be a good person and this one is to make you a good person. Do you see where we are? Q:

But doesn’t that convince her not to do marketing.

Igor: Not at all. Have I convinced him to not sleep anymore? Have I convinced him to sleep more like me because that’s clearly the best idea? No I haven’t. What I have done is I have resolved the conflict enabled spontaneously, to view the whole situation differently. Now I’ll jump the gun, I’ll let you know where it’s likely to end up if this idea of integrity and watching reaction, does it have anything to do with integrity or the idea of marketing? Exactly right. What if all your marketing had more integrity than not, wouldn’t that be worthwhile doing? So at some point when the integration comes in, what I will predict is if you do the whole thing fully is she’ll step back, she’ll look at it and go, you know what I can do this in a way that helps people rather than does damage to them. At that point are you really marketing? No. Let’s put it this way, if you had a cure for cancer would you keep it to yourself. All:

No.

361 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: I would… no. Sorry I get these silly spells. So you get a cure for cancer you would share with people right? That’s called marketing, because if they don’t know you can cure cancer, they need to know, if they don’t know, how can you cure it, right? But there is a difference between marketing where you are helping people live and the kind of marketing where you are helping lose all their money and sell their house and go into poverty, sell their children into slavery and go into debtors jail, right? There is a whole range. It’s just whilst your focus on this must be marketing, I don’t want it, that’s where the conflict is. Now I’m not here to resolve anything like that, but do you see where I’m getting with this? I’m not persuading anyone to do anything. They will come to the conclusions on their own. Q:

I think the difficulty was I was sort of thinking about what the right outcome was.

Igor: Exactly. Q:

And it was getting me off track.

Igor: You are trying to put your fish in their dreams and that’s hard. Q:

Exactly.

Igor: Does that help? Q:

Yes very much so.

Igor: Does that help you guys? All:

Yes.

Igor: Any other questions or its pretty simple isn’t it? The final step is really the simplest. Alright guys so let’s just take a few more minutes and if you want to just dive right into this, because this is kind of a fun part to do. Dive straight into it. Finish the piece up, watch them glow. Alright guys we’ve got the last few people just finishing up. Carry on finishing up what you are doing, we’ll just talk elsewhere as you finish up. It’s easy to do just finish up the thing you are doing right now, that’s fine. So let’s have people with

362 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 mics running around please. Those of you who have finished, how was that? Was that interesting? Powerful? All:

Yes.

Igor: Who feels pretty good right now? Yeah? Worthwhile doing right? And remember folks you’ve just done it the hard way. Did you do any blitzing before this to clear things up? Did you do any Mind Bending Language to spin things out and flush them out and clean them up? Did you do a regression to like really heal any emotional elements that they are going on there? No you didn’t, did you? You did this live and dangerous. And how did it work? Great didn’t it? So it’s a simple process. There is a couple of possible stumbling blocks really around the area of the intention, that’s really what people find hardest to grasp and a variation of the intention is also the resources. It’s a related thing really those are the two ‘hard parts’ but were they really so hard? Sometimes you’ll have to work more to get it than others, but really that’s all there is to it. So who enjoyed that? Yeah who is glad they did it? Well guess what, you’ve just learnt the entire CHPH protocol also known by the marketing people as the Ledochowski Protocol. Oh yeah TM my name is not going to be taken in vain here, oh no. Do you see how simple the whole process is yes? One thing leads to the next thing leads to the next thing. You only go to the next step on the ladder if the step you are on has failed sufficiently spectacularly to make it easy for the next step to work automatically and you get to decide what sufficiently means with our own experiences.

Q & A Session

Igor: So you have questions or comments on what we’ve done, we’ll wrap it up in a moment. Do you want to stand up so we can get a microphone to you? Q:

I hope this isn’t rhetorical, but this so easy why wouldn’t we just start with step four and ignore all the hard stuff before it?

363 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: Again as I mentioned more than occasion, you can achieve anything with any tool its most robust used in this sequence in my experience anyway, but I’m not going to sit there and I’m not going to be the hypno-police going to come and kick down your door and say hey you did the integration at the wrong time. Just have fun with it, absolutely. Stand up at the back. Q:

I felt like my partner when I was doing – when I was the hypnotist I was still taking it a little bit too literally when the symbols came together, so I just sort of spent a bit of time vivifying that for him and like really getting the symbol to like you know come alive for him.

Igor: And sometimes you know that will happen. If someone has got like – over intellectualizes things, one of the typical spots is you have the coin and the sailboat they’ll go oh look, I have a sailboat with a gold coin on its mast. That’s the conscious way we resolve conflicts like that and that’s why it doesn’t work. So we are trying to do both and let’s face it sailboats with gold coins on its mast would just look silly, they don’t work in the real world. And as opposed to having a totally different symbol and they had something different like the stone and the crystal becoming a diamond. Can you see how elegant the metaphors in that are? Could you even conceive of coming up with metaphors like that on the fly on your own? Well the answer is you can, because you have an unconscious mind, just like they do. It’s just you won’t find it in the place you normally look for it. It’s a beautiful metaphor isn’t it? So are all of these. The other example with Andrew, if I may use you where he had – he couldn’t find a symbol, why? It was blank. It’s a perfect symbol isn’t it? It goes back to what we talked about in the dynamic induction doesn’t it. Blankness becomes the symbol at that point and they become a blank – as soon as it triggered, you could see him, he was laughing and then it became a ‘proper symbol’ a blank page but he had to pop the symbol – did we do a Dynamic Induction in the middle of the reintegration. Did I mix my processes? But you see how conversational that was, right, did I do hypnosis? No one outside of this room would think that was hypnosis would they? But you know differently now don’t you. So yeah you are absolutely right, thank you for that. Do you want to stand up?

364 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

It seems like the integration process is something that you could do by yourself as a form of like self hypnosis.

Igor: You can do any of this stuff by yourself, it’s just a question of how fluent you are of taking yourself through a process, guiding yourself through it. Some people will be able to do this easily, some will have a hard time. I have seen people do regressions like that (snap of his finger) and they did a phenomenal job. Others will find it hard at times, so yeah. Q:

Okay.

Igor: Anything else? Are you guys good? Do you want to stand up quickly? It’s possible this one is pretty easiest. Q:

You probably answered this before but it’s still in my mind so I’m going to ask it anyway, conversational blitz.

Igor: Oh the Hypnotic Blitz at the start? Q:

Yeah.

Igor: When you look at someone and you starting using a trance theme, that’s it. You know as you go like, the more you relax, the deeper you go, the more comfort you can have, or you can change it to focus and power. The more you focus, the more powerful you will feel. The more powerful you are, the more you can find places in your life with real focus. Do you feel the intensity beginning to build? That’s why it’s called the blitz because it’s like wow, I’m being struck by lightning, hypno-lightening, but it doesn’t have quite the same ring. It’s also been known as the hypnotic rant. Does it help more? Q:

It doesn’t have such a nice ring.

Igor: It doesn’t have such a nice ring does it? So folks all I can say right now is congratulations, you know why? You have covered every piece of content that you need to know to do the work of hypnotherapists. Tomorrow we’ll talk a little bit about how to run your office, what to expect and those sorts of things, but in terms of doing the actual work you’ve done it all. Its right up there, four steps. Its real simple isn’t it?

365 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Ledochowski Protocol 1. Blitz 2. Dynamic Induction – DMI, NAS, MBL 3. Regression 4. Re-integration Admittedly some of those steps will require a little bit more polish I know, I understand that, but you have the time to do that don’t you? And here is the beautiful part. Did any of these processes take particularly long? What was the longest of these processes? The regression wasn’t it? How long did it take? Less than half an hour, half an hour or so? I don’t know, we’ll have to look at the tape to know for sure. Its somewhere between 20 and 30 minutes right? The average therapy session is an hour long, that means you got half an hour to mess about and get things wrong before you get down to business don’t you? Aren’t you glad I pushed you a little bit along the way? So now you can use your private practice to practice in private. Do you want to stand up and ask your question? Q:

I have a question, in my particular case which I don’t really want to go into it in great detail, but if that was a client that I had, wouldn’t I want to take them maybe back into regression so that it would be much more productive to go back to shore?

Igor: Sure, remember this is a sequence I presented to you here, the easiest way to do work, the easiest way, not the only way. So you start with a blitz it fails, you go on to Mind Bending Language or The Non Awareness Set, if it works great, you are done, if it doesn’t, you go straight to a regression and you only get to the reintegration if they’ve all worked, they’ve gone home, its worked for a while and they have come back. At that point you don’t need to do the others because you’ve already cleaned stuff up with it. So you are 100 percent correct. Q:

Okay thank you.

366 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: Now does that mean you can’t like this gentleman was asking, can you just do the reintegration and nothing else? Of course you can. I spent probably six months, using only power words. Does that make me a great hypnotist? No, but it made me very good at power words. There is another person. Yes do you want to stand up? Q:

Just so you know, I can answer your question. I have actually had ‘difficult clients’ that I have actually had to cycle through most of this a few times. Some I actually have had to spread it out to several sessions. So just because you’ve failed with one doesn’t mean you will fail altogether, it just means you have to keep going and be imaginative and create something new. I have done a reintegration and all of a sudden it spectacularly failed on me and I had to go back to a regression and then I had to go back to it, then to Dynamic Mental Imagery. So you can go back and forth through these processes. It’s not one and done, you can keep going back.

Igor: Let’s face it there are no rules folks. This is just a simple way for you to think about it and move through it. Ultimately do you know what you do? You want to know how you do work with your clients, you’ll sit down, you’ll ask them a question, what’s the problem what you want to work through, a couple of questions follow up. Then you just start talking, you have a chat, that’s it. Stuff will come out, stuff will happen. That will invariably guide you down one path or the other and then it becomes that simple. Then when one thing is worked out, great, and then something else pops up great, you go down that path. That’s something that only experience can do for you folks. It’s only experience. The one thing I would advise against doing, is giving up, it’s like I have done it all, now that’s it. I’m giving up because that’s it, I’m done. Just keep going, something will invariably give, provided you are feeling that H+ and you are letting these tools follow through. Does that make sense? Do you want to stand up so we can get a mic to you? Q:

I started off a little confused this morning and then I came to realize that the important part of H+ is to have H+ for myself first and to pay attention and make sure that I’m feeling H+ for myself and appreciate myself. Then H+ for my client.

367 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: Right because how else can you have H+ for someone else if you have nothing to base it on? To get a little metaphysical here. Everyone else in the world is a reflection of you, because you don’t see the world out there, you see it in your brain. It’s a hallucination caused or created by your brain. Which means every person you are looking at is actually a part of your brain seeing itself. So how can you have H+ towards someone else if you don’t have it towards yourself. It’s still all you. I’m not even talking of the metaphysical realm, I’m just talking of the purely neuro-scientific version of what I’m talking about. You are seeing the image inside of your brain, it’s part of you. Does that make sense? So yes, I agree it’s a good insight to have. Go ahead. Q:

Can we implement like Mind Bending Language, Non Awareness Set set at the same time?

Igor: Yeah. Simple, yes. Q:

Okay thanks.

Igor: Go head. Just stand up so we can get the mic to you. Q:

Would you work on weight loss in the same way?

Igor: Everything works, I would say 90% of things that people come to hypnotherapy for you start in the exact same sequence and work the exact way through. Of course there are some ways that you can create your own little processes that fit a particular type of issue better with your experience. For example those of you who have done my stop smoking method will recognize elements of this in there. The Dynamic Induction, the regression and so on. Yet I happen to do the whole thing with only Mind Bending Language. Which if you’ve listened to the Master Class, I don’t even touch upon there. So absolutely, all the stuff will work with virtually any problem it’s just your facility with the tools and your insight into the nature of that particular style of problem, that will expand with time shall we say. Does that make sense? Q:

Yes, thank you.

Igor: Just pass over here to this gentleman.

368 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

Igor since you are being in the state of H+ so frequently is it becoming your default state or are you becoming H+ or?

Igor: I’m becoming the light. Q:

Yeah if you would describe it like that.

Igor: I’m still a human being, guys. I have normal functions, I sit in the toilet from time to time. Sometimes longer, sometimes shorter. I annoy my girlfriend, we have fights, we make up. I make mistakes, I’m a human being, this is not on all the time. What I can do though is, I can hopefully I can recognize more of this sort of stuff in everyday life and switch over to it. Sometimes it’s easier, sometimes it’s not. Because I’m still a human being and I still have the same fallacies every other human being does. So yeah, could I become a saint? I’m sure with lots of effort and other things I could. But ... it is normal, this is life, I want to just live the life like a normal person does. I want to be in a supermarket and be ignored sometimes. Just because I want to do my shopping and go home and have some toast and that’s it, it’s real mundane at that level. Q:

Just needed to be sure.

Igor: Yeah, I’m a normal person I am. I’m not hypno-robot Igor, must hypnotize, seminar over find more people, hello, sleep. Alright just sort of stand up quickly. Q:

A question in the Mind Bending Language. In the beginning when we were learning it, it seemed like it would like get as crazy as possible but I’ve got a sense that just finding, just something to twist was better than the end.

Igor: It’s just enough. Just enough to make the mind think more. There you had one again. Alright guys, I think we pretty much squeezed that particular sponge out.

Closing Remarks

Igor: All I want you to do guys just to bear in mind is I know you’ve covered a lot of ground its true, right? But in order to cover that ground, you had a lot of

369 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 experiences. Those experiences are inside of you now. They will remain with you for the rest of your life. I’m sorry guys you are now damaged goods. Luckily the impact of those experiences will be available to you one way or the other as your life continues. Does that make sense? So I want you to instead of complicating things, learn to simplify them. Would you like to know the simplest way of simplifying something is, you just start. You take one step. You do not decide how it should end; you just take that one step. As soon as you have taken that step the world will respond, usually in the form of a client, doing something or saying something. At that point, the next step becomes apparent. If by a crazy fluke of the stars crossing, you should not get a reaction out of your client, you always have the get out of jail free card. What’s happening now? Does that make your life easy? So with that thought, a couple of things I would like for you to do tonight. 1. I want to take your manual and I want you to read through everything. You don’t have to read it word for word. What you will notice is you will recognize absolutely everything, except for the practice building stuff at the end, the forms, the therapy room, all that extra stuff. That’s technical stuff that we haven’t really discussed yet, we’ll talk about it tomorrow. But in terms of the actual activity of doing hypnotherapy, it’s all in here every exercise and you will understand each step. So please convince yourself of that. Because if at any point you are missing something, the time for you to realize it is now. Tomorrow we can still fix it. Once you leave, believe it or not you can’t all call me up every day and say, what about this and what about this and what about this. It’s not going to happen folks, let me just give you a heads up on that one. Tomorrow you 100% can, I’m here for you to make sure you get it all. My expectation is and this has pretty much happened in every seminar that everything here is clear. One or two of you may look at something and go, what’s this again? As soon as I remind you they’ll go, oh I get it and they’ll connect up. So please do make the effort of going through this and do bring this in tomorrow. You will be very happy that you did, trust me on this one.

370 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 2. The second thing I’m going to ask you to do, is in a moment when we finish up here, as your assistants are around again. Once again you can do some exercise with them. But because we are coming to a formal close with this thing tomorrow. Your assistants will help start off your circle as they have done in previous nights and they have been asked to slowly remove themselves from everything. So you carry on. Just because your assistant is not there it does not mean that you don’t have to be there anymore. Because let’s face it, at one point these assistants will be gone. I sincerely hope that it means that you won’t be. So this is a chance for you to really step up and really make something of what you are doing here. If you want to get really adventurous. Then don’t go to the assistant, grab a few people here and form your own circle and say, I don’t need you anymore. I would be very happy to see that. The only people I’m going to ask to not do that are those of you who are interested in taking part in trainers training. Please bring your completed forms with you into that corner and we’ll have a more in-depth chat about the whole thing. Does that make sense to you folks? Tomorrow we’ll start again bright and breezy at 9:00 AM. Please be here a little early to do some work and make sure we just stick around a little bit, so we can have a quick chat. Aside from that have fun tonight guys, enjoy your last night of hypno-mayhem.

371 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2

DVD 20 – All Your Questions About Hypnosis Answered

Final Q & A Session

Igor: So we have a whole bunch of extra questions on the wall. Before we begin the formal parts of today and stuff, I thought I would really go through these as best as possible and answer whatever questions you’ve got left over, sound cool to you guys? First of all, Why do we say relax, why not be less tense? – you can say anything, the idea is what’s important. The benefit of saying relax over less tense is that for most people, not everyone, but for most people when you ask them to be less tense, they start putting their mind towards their tension as opposed to putting their attention towards the idea of relaxation, right? Try this for example, everyone please resist the following hypnotic suggestion, whatever you do, do not think of a red elephant. Do not think of a red elephant wearing a red hat. Don’t think of that little red elephant with the red hat kicking down a door and going – hey, don’t do that. As a rule, it’s the picture you create in someone’s mind that’s important. If I say relax or someone who is relaxed, the picture is someone doing this. If the conversation was less tense, it’s not quite the same place. Does that mean you cannot say less tense, of course not, you can say that, it will work, it’s just…you see where I’m going with this? Is it okay if I smoke whilst with clients? Ask your clients. It would be interesting if you were doing that and it was a stop-smoking session, wouldn’t it?

372 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 You did say you had a cigarette, didn’t you? Can you do it? You can do anything. Is it going to interrupt the process, it might. There is a certain odor attached and there will be a significant proportion of clients who will be put off by that. Even if not smoking with a client, again, we talked about this before. If you have a smoker’s breath, then take a mint, can you do it? Of course you can do it, but you’re making life a little more difficult for yourself, most likely. And if it works for you then it works for you, make sense? H+ is so powerful, how do you handle clients who are other than wanted in a romantic interest? That’s an excellent question. • Rule #1 – never date your clients. • Rule #2 – never date your clients. • Rule #3 – never sleep with your clients even if you are not dating them. This is important because there is something called transference and it’s actually quite accurate, remember hypnosis is anything but a casual relationship, would that be fair to say now? You get this idea, they will feel this wonderful love vibe and they can get infatuated by it. And then the problem is sometimes that rebounds right back on you and you can get infatuated with them, if that happens, please do not take it seriously. If you can carry on doing your work, fine then send them home. If you cannot, refer them on to someone else, right? It is very bad practice overall to start dating your clients, if for no other reason it’s this. When you’re working with them, stuff starts coming up, so you now become a projection of their internal turmoil, right? Over time what is likely to happen, not always, but is likely to happen is, they will start projecting their issues onto you especially in the dating relationship. You have the dating issues plus what other issues with them as well, suddenly they start blaming you for stuff that happened to them 20 years ago, and it has nothing to do with you, right? It’s a very messy, messy-messy world, you really don’t want to get into that. On the ethical side, it’s bad form, on the personal side you’ll pay hell for it later, so either way you don’t want to go there.

373 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 So how do you handle unwanted interest? It’s very simple, you’re protected by your code of ethics, right? I am very flattered by … I have been invited on dates by clients, and I say I am flattered by that, thank you very much, but you can realize as a therapist I have a strict code of ethics where there is no way I can date a client. There is no way we can see each on a more social scene, I wish you all the best, thank you very much and good-bye. Sometimes they will pester you a little bit, and well are you sure, are you sure, yep, absolutely. And if they start getting a little more down that road, pull them back to the responsibility and say look – what are you doing now, we have talked about this. Either stop that train of thought or I will have to refer you to someone else, because we won’t be able to work this way. Do you see how that works? We have a question, could I have a microphone over here, please, also a glass of water? Q:

You’re saying not to date one of your clients I understand that, say you’re working with your spouse or something?

Igor: Okay this is a great related question, who do you work with right? If you can do little things, like little confidence boosts, maybe in a smoking session, if you work with your friends/family, no big deal. I don’t mind, I have done it and I will continue to do it. However, please realize that when you’re doing therapy you are fundamentally altering the nature of your relationship, right? Things may come out they don’t want you to know. Let’s say I was working with my mother, this is all hypothetical, just so we make sure, I was working with my mother and I find out she was raped when she was 16, right? Do you think that might alter our relationship? Can I relate to my mother in the same way anymore? Can she relate the same way to me, knowing that every time I look at her I know this about her, right? Do you see how it fundamentally changes things? So for these bigger issues, unless you can just throw positive suggestions and stuff like that at it, but in terms of actually diving in and pulling stuff out, I would avoid it. I would strongly recommend against it. You have some great hypnotists in this room, refer them to your friends here, because then they can do it in the privacy of something where…here is

374 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 something a lot of clients like to do, right? Once they have seen you, they want to lock that door and pretend it never happened again. They are very happy they saw you, they are very happy they have resolved things, but it’s done now it’s in the past, it’s over with, they don’t want to be able to – they don’t want to revisit it, does that make sense to you guys? So you need to give them that option, and with family, with close friends, you can’t do that – well you can, but then you lose a family member in that sense. Does that make sense to you guys? Does that answer your question? If someone has an addiction, can you make it so they can still do it but in moderation? No, that’s the whole point of an addiction. What you can do is this, here is my experience with addictions, I haven’t focused on them, I haven’t done a huge amount of work around them, so please take everything I say in a moment with a pinch of salt, is that okay with you guys? My experience with addictions is that, addictions is kind of like – the way I see it is basically like someone who is really thirsty. Have you ever had those dreams where you are really thirsty and no matter how much you drink you don’t get satisfied, it’s because your body is thirsty in your dream, reality the water won’t do the right thing, if you drink a glass of water it would change it, right? That’s kind of what addiction is, having a need, a thirst for something and somehow the addiction, they think whatever they are addicted to will fill that need. Maybe because when they first engaged in it they had a rush that masked the need for a while. Does that make sense? The way of the behavior they are addicted to is, it’s a symptom, it’s not their main thing, so somewhere in their life, they learn to have this need, this void, this emptiness shall we say, and they can’t fill it no matter how hard they try. So if you work with addictions, when I have worked with addictions it’s basically been a regression, you get that feeling, that void, that emptiness. I have regressed back on it, typically some parental issues. Parents fighting, the parent runs off, the child feels like oh my God, daddy is leaving me, right? It was my experience along those lines. As you fix those things the need for the addiction disappears because it’s being satisfied, does that make sense?

375 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2

A couple of warnings here: 1. People who have been through the whole chronic addiction thing, we are talking about alcoholism, drug abuse, and so on, they have grown up with a completely different life path to the rest of us. When the behavior suddenly disappears, they have no functional social skills to deal with things that you and I would deal with in normal ways, right? It’s an alien world to them. So just because you clear up the driver of the addiction doesn’t mean the addiction will disappear, because they need a huge amount of support learning to re-socialize, learning to have coping mechanisms and coping skills and so on, so you’ll probably be like – with a chronic person you will probably be working over the course of several months to keep building self-esteem, to keep helping them find new skill sets, and so on, does that kind of make sense to you guys? 2. With shall we say, a softer addiction, you can work…I will give you an example of what I mean. A lady came in for stop smoking, worked great, fantastic. She comes back, this is a very typical thing, she comes back next time and says what I would really like to deal with is binge drinking. She basically, if she has friends around and they open a bottle of wine, even if she hates the wine and no one else is drinking, she will have to finish the bottle of wine. She can’t not, right? And then of course the whole night gets very messy. She also used cocaine, right? As part of the social circle she was in. So we did exactly what we just talked about. We’ve got this feeling of emptiness, this feeling of need that is driving her, regress back on it. I think exactly the situation of what happened there, her mom and dad had a fight, her dad left without saying a word, she thought she’d never see him again – panic, basically got locked inside her and that has been driving her stuff ever since. Once that got resolved, there were some fireworks around that as you can imagine. When she came back, first of all the desire to take cocaine

376 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 anyway, disappeared. Because all that was doing was creating an artificial confidence, right? And the next thing is, she was very happy with the idea of having a glass of wine without actually drinking more now. I haven’t heard back from her, I am guessing that given the nature of the relationship she would come back if something needed tweaking, so it seemed to have worked in that case. What I am not suggesting by the way though is, that you go up and say yes, alcoholic yes, sure I can help you drink less. It’s a totally different mindset. The original idea is, as long as they are happy never to drink again then you can do your work, and then once they have socialized to normal reality if some years down the line they go have a social drink or something like that, it’s going to be a very different case than if they have a drink right off the change work, because now they still have all the other associations, all the other coping mechanisms in that alcohol or drug, whatever they are taking. Does that kind of make sense to you guys? Also bear in mind that certain substances are more addictive than others. For example, are you going to help someone to motivate their heroine or crack use? No, because the chemical, the whole chemical driver on that causes an addiction even if you are not an addictive personality. Everything we just talked about is the mind set of an addictive personality, and that is a classic mind set. You can look through the literature, right? Again these are my points of view on that sort of thing. But then there are certain substances that will addict anyone no matter how un-addictive their personality is, it’s just the nature of the drug and you want to help people stay well-clear of that if you go down the road. One thing I will say, if you want to work drug or alcohol abuse or any kind of bigger things like that, please get extra training. There are some great places out there with great experiences and support mechanisms and so on. Please do not get too gung ho about this, you are going to be going through some real fireworks and if it’s a serious addiction it will not be a one-shot deal, you will be seeing this person for months to slowly help them rebuild a life. Because addictions really do destroy lives, does that make sense to you guys?

377 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 This is not a thing to get into casually in any way shape or form, and what you’re doing here, the skill set will be applicable, however you want more experiences, you want to have more understandings of the issues involved before you get involved in that sort of thing, right? Having a stop smoking session, that’s easy right? The issues are much lighter. You can still see the addiction patterns going on there, like the coping mechanisms and all that sort of stuff, but they are much-much-much weaker in terms of when you compare it to a proper full-blown drug or alcohol style addiction. Does that make sense to you guys? Does that help, useful? How has as all this info helped you in your life, and what was the most profound changes as a result? The answer is absolutely it has, I am a totally different person. If you would have met me as a lawyer, you probably wouldn’t have liked me very much, maybe you would. But I have totally changed. One of the biggest things it’s done for me is I have a completely different appreciation for people, right? People I wouldn’t have given the time of day to before or would have been dismissive of or been upset by, those very same people come in as clients and then when the mask of rudeness disappeared, when the mask of whatever personality they presented was lifted, and all you saw was a person in pain trying their very best to cope – how can you not help but empathize with that person? Then you start seeing people who act in strange ways or do strange things, and sure, I’m still a human being, sometimes I don’t want to get involved, or whatever. But I have a much higher tolerance for people and the strange things that they do, because I have seen the other side of it. It doesn’t necessarily mean I accept it, because I don’t need to see someone get abused by something, but I don’t get upset by it, because I realize that it’s not, they are not doing anything, they are caught in some unfortunate trap, its automatic behavior that they can’t help themselves about. Does that make sense? So that’s a huge thing, and as a result I have gotten a lot more insight into relationships and hopefully have formed better relationships as a result of it, which doesn’t mean I’m the Zen Buddha and everything is calm and cool and

378 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 control, life blows up constantly. I annoy people, believe it or not, yeah, I have arguments with people, believe it or not, I regret things I have said from time to time, believe it or not. But I like to think that those certain things happen far less frequently and my tolerance of people and hopefully the reverse has increased because of the work. Is this is a good question? I am sure it is. That’s what it said. How do you attack a DMI symbol to…oh sorry, attach. I was going to say, you don’t attack a problem, a DMI symbol to a problem to see the problem is resolved? Well very simply, you don’t attach a symbol to the problem, what you do is you presuppose that the symbol will be important to help you resolve the problem, right? In a moment I am going to bring something out, I have a session symbol here waiting for you, something that will help you resolve a problem that is of importance to you – what is this? Quickly now? Everyone? Ball, orange, it doesn’t really matter right? If you have accepted the presupposition, then when the symbol pops, all the resource, all the stuff we talked about before, should start realigning stuff, and then to test, you test like everything else. Now, you came here because let’s say it’s smoking, right, and your symbol is a symbol that will help you quit smoking. In fact that’s exactly what we do on part of the smoking program. The symbol pops, you feel fantastic, and what do you ask them? Well how do you feel now? Fantastic. So if you’re feeling fantastic, what’s happening to cigarettes? I don’t want to smoke. Are you sure? Yes. Really? Yes. Can you hear the testing cycle once again. But you used to smoke in all kinds of situations, didn’t you? Yes. Like what? Well when I wanted to have a drink. Well, just think about that time when you had a drink with a friend, do you still want to have a cigarette? No. Really, are you sure?

379 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 So the testing cycles are identical, it’s just if you presuppose the symbol is about resolving whatever issue they came in with, then that’s the symbol that will come in with, make sense? When we have been training the DMI, the presupposition is that the symbol has some meaning, some significance to them, right? Because we didn’t work on a specific problem. The unconscious mind got to resolve that. Those of you who’s symbol popped, would it be fair to say that you had an important change in your life, a perspective inside being able to do stuff, would that be fair to say, yes? If that was narrowed down to a specific problem, which it actually was in your case because it was just a problem that wasn’t selected ahead of time, you just test for that. Does that make sense to you guys? Is that kind of clear? Yes? Can I hypnotize my clients to go into trance? That’s kind of the idea. Unless we’ve been doing a different training the whole last week, if there is a follow up I will gladly take it. Unless you’re trying to amuse me in which case it worked. Can we leave late? Sure, stick around, it’s just I’m going to be going home after this. I think it’s the same person who wrote can we leave early. They weren’t quite sure, there’s a dilemma here, somebody needs to do a reintegration with them. When do we learn to swing the watch? I don’t think you need practice with that, just go and do it, have fun with it. Alright, there are some interesting questions, like can you hypnotize me to be taller? If you’re a teenager it will happen naturally, otherwise, you know? Alright, they are amusing for a while and after a while it’s not really useful. What do I do if my client starts snoring? That’s a good question. You do not assume that they are asleep, right? What you do is you give them a suggestion to test whether or not they’re asleep. So something for them to respond to, now if you’re doing Conversational Hypnosis, rather than just talking at them you’re constantly getting feedback from them, it’s virtually impossible that they’ll snore.

380 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 They might snore a little bit in the middle of it, but then they will start speaking again two seconds later and it’s over. So provided you’re doing things like what’s happening now, and being engaged with them, the dynamic approach we have been doing for the bulk of this training, this really will not be an issue. If you’re sitting there just talking at them, which is a different style of therapy, shall we say, then you should test whether or not the person is actually responding to you, but seeing we have much better ways of dealing with it with an interactive style of trances, this really should never become an issue for you. Does that kind of answer the question? Can I say nap instead of sleep? Try it out, right? Seriously, try it out, if it works great, if it doesn’t try something else. Look, I am not giving you guys any hard rules, you have to do it this way, right? All I can give you is my experiences, what’s worked for me and by all means go off and do your own versions of it, try it out. If it works then great, if it doesn’t work, then go to something else. It’s the principles that are important to me, how you translate those principles, how you utilize those principles, it’s – you have an infinite variety way of doing this because you’re all totally different people, right? Is there anything specific you’ve done to train your calibration skills? It’s the hypnotist trance, the H+, the way I started that whole thing was by putting myself in very deep self-hypnosis, coming out, couldn’t help but glow with happiness because I like hypnosis, I’m a trance-junkie. I just started spotting things, and here’s the strange part, I didn’t even know what I was seeing when I was seeing it, I just knew that something happened and you know what I did then? Exactly – what’s happening now, and I cannot begin to tell you how often I have asked that question, and you probably heard me say it, ask it a few more times here as well, right? So really the key thing is, you put yourself in an altered state so that you’re perceiving things that you normally would delete and you keep asking the question, what’s happening now, so that your unconscious mind begins to correlate. Here are the kinds of things we have been perceiving over a period of time, here are the kind of responses that are pretty typical of those times, well this must mean that, right? It’s a very simple process, it just takes a little time and experience to get to that point.

381 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Did anyone find my keys? You should probably ask this in person because I have no idea who you are and what your keys are, so if you have lost your keys or haven’t found them, please talk to me and we will make an announcement. Would it be easy to start trance with a closed one-eye? Really? Okay, so I think those are the questions answered. Some interesting ones. There is a question, can you stand up and we will get the microphones to you guys. Can we have some mics guys? Q:

I was just wondering, is it possible to hypnotize somebody through a translator if you want to work in other countries or is that ill-advised?

Igor: Is it possible to hypnotize someone through a trans-site? Q:

Through a translator.

Igor: Oh, translator, sure I have seen it done very successfully. The only thing I would advise you against is using things like Mind Bending Language because if you put your translator in trance, and they don’t keep going, it gets a little difficult. But sure, I have seen it done very successfully and I have even seen Mind Bending Language done successfully, you just have to prepare the translator a little bit ahead of time to give him a head’s up. Q:

So, I am a little bit back to the symbols. Could I see the symbol as being like a new context or new set of inputs that if I focus they help me to see the problems or stop my unconscious mind in a new light so that they are, it allows them to rearrange the dots in this new context. So it can be basically anything which allows some novel, to break some old connections to form. Would it be accurate to describe it like this? The main function of the symbol?

Igor: Does it work for you? Q:

Um.

Igor: When you think of it like that, does it work for you? Does it make it easier for you to do the induction?

382 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

It helps me to see it in perspective which is in alignment on my understanding of the human mind, maybe.

Igor: Great, if it helps you do the work then I’ll agree with you, if it makes it more difficult to do the work then I think you may want to have another look at that one. Q:

Okay, thank you.

Igor: You’re welcome. Q:

I have a few questions I didn’t get to put in that, I wonder if you’re doing it again or if I should just ask them now?

Igor: Just go ahead. Q:

Okay.

Igor: This is pretty much the last Q&A session, so go for it. Q:

Okay, any inside sort of things to know about doing phone sessions?

Igor: Phone sessions, yeah, you are going to ask ‘what’s happening now’ a lot, a lot more than you would do physically and listen out for things like (heavy breathing), those will be definite cues you will want to pick up on. The rest is pretty much exactly what you’ve seen happening here, exactly the same thing. All the Master Classes have been done over the phone, I haven’t seen a single person whilst doing it and we do The Non Awareness Set, we do the Dynamic Induction. You can hear all those things in the Master Classes, so it’s pretty much the same stuff. You just pay a little more attention and you ask for a little bit more feedback, okay? Q:

Excellent, and in doing the regression work, two part question about the resources, do you ever bring in other resources, other than just safety before and safety after, like into that experience?

Igor: Whatever the client needs. At the moment, that’s really the main thing, because most regressions I’ve done are based around fear, just because they come up so often, and normally when there’s other things involved – it’s very rare to get

383 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 across an overwhelming emotion that isn’t fear. And I don’t do regression unless I get an overwhelming emotion, so I tend to work with those things other ways. Can you do it, absolutely you can, experiment, knock yourself out. You understand the principles so it’s a good question. Q:

Okay, and what if you do the regression and take that emotion in a moment and touch your shoulder, three two one, go back to an earlier time. They don’t get anything or it’s something much earlier.

Igor: Did you notice that when Stephanie came up there was a relatively strong experience, is that correct? Q:

Yes.

Igor: Excellent, did you notice how quickly she actually got the memory back even though she hadn’t thought about it for years? Q:

Yes.

Igor: So this is called the Affect Bridge, when you have a very strong emotion, it’s very difficult for them to not have the memory, right? So the likelihood of that happening is very-very low. Is it possible? Of course it’s possible, anything is possible, at that point you just work with what you’ve got, right? Do you see what I’m saying – no, I just feel this thing – come out, look at a memory over there, what do you sense? I don’t know – how old are you? I’m about five but I can’t really access it. Fine, it’s way over there, and you have that sensation, you are not entirely sure what happened, but it’s clearly there isn’t it? Yes. And before that it was clearly safe, right? You may invent categories around it, provided they put their faith in it, their belief in it, they treat them as real, it will have the same affect. Personally I have never had to do it that way, because I have always had someone actually get enough details from the memory to emerge. And the stronger the emotion is the more likely that is to happen. Q:

Okay, and last one for now – what I have seen so far in this is that you work a lot with behaviors. A fear of this or I want to stop smoking or things like that, if

384 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 someone has someone that I would consider more like an identity issue of I can’t connect with people or I…? Igor: Exactly the same thing, the only reason we work with more behavior, partly because those are the ones that you guys asked for, and partly because they are more, they are easier to spot in terms of maneuvers around it. But if you recall when we did the Mind Bending Language, where there was a selection of possibilities, it’s just that you guys selected the smoking demo which is a more obvious behavioral demo – I can’t remember what the others were, but at least one of them was a more of a I can’t do this or I am not that kind of person. We had an example with the reintegration the other day with someone saying I want to start a business but I hate the idea of marketing, right? You could call that a behavior in some respect, but there is more of the relationship issue there. You surely do it exactly the same way. The thing to realize is, you’re looking for changes in state and with things like Mind Bending Language you can very easily spin around people’s ideas of themselves and the world, is perfectly suited for changing beliefs. Q:

Okay thank you.

Igor: There were some hands out front here first and then we will start coming backward. Q:

I have a question and a request. The question is, how would you handle something like insomnia where someone is waking up in the middle of the night?

Igor: So insomnia, if it’s a condition where the person has no conscious involvement because they’re involved, my preference is to just start with a Non Awareness Set, because you are already teaching them that good things can happen with them having no idea what’s going on. And then it’s real simple, when they are spinning around in trance in the Non Awareness Set, maybe the hand starts lifting up or whatever you end up getting from them, you’re implications, your curiosity starts shifting from the idea of something happening, it’s crazy and unconscious and so on, you shift toward a therapeutic outcome, in this case which is, well I guess if something has made your arm lift and you didn’t make it lift, I wonder what it has to do with whether you sleep deeply all night long?

385 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 And they will go, I don’t know, that’s right you don’t know but that hand is lifting isn’t it – yes – you can feel things happening in the back of your mind, can’t you? Yes. So I wonder how peacefully you will sleep tonight, right? And so you just make sure you load those implications and I like unambiguous things like a hand levitation because then you can make a simple attachment, by the time that hand touches your face you will know without a shadow of a doubt that tonight you’ll sleep fantastic. You’ll wake up if it’s appropriate, but otherwise you’ll stay asleep all night long. And then touches you, all the way integrated, that sort of stuff – did that help? Q:

Just quickly on regression, on Step-6 it talks about safe instructor, we didn’t really cover that because it was a real scary situation, and I was wondering what was meant by that?

Igor: Safe instructor? Q:

In the manual.

Igor: Let’s have a look here. Step-6, explain safety to safety loop. Oh sorry, sorry, yes, yes, yes – let’s put it this way, let’s use Stephanie as an example because she was up here. If, she stepped in she came right back out, we have safety, we have safety, now we are going to run the whole loop again. And she says no I can’t, I’m too afraid of this, right? I might just bring in an extra resource, a symbolic resource along the lines of, I’ll tell you what – if you could have brought anyone with you in that situation to help you through it, who would you have brought? And the might say oh Superman, or my Auntie Melvis. I will say okay bring her along and together step into the memory, run the way through come back. Was that so bad? No, it was actually pretty good, now see if you can do it on your own all the way through. So it’s just like we spend extra time creating safety at the start, it’s another way you can create it in the middle if you didn’t get enough at the beginning, okay? So let’s start moving backward, go ahead and start up, we will come to you in a second. Q:

My question pertains to the PCAT formula and you said use of the Non Awareness Set, usually when practicing a Non Awareness Set it’s regarding

386 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 working with positive emotions, but in the bypass conscious mind section as an alternative to using Mind Bending Language, about how to use the Non Awareness Set in a smooth transition so as not to make the problem worse. Igor: Okay very simple right, what’s the problem – whatever, right? How are you going to be different – whatever, right? So, you’re here to resolve X, right – yes. And I’m curious, which of your hands feel more unusual right now? My right one. Did you know it was going to feel unusual. No. Basically the same answer as here, right? It is getting lighter yet? Yes it is, look it’s starting to lift. Now I wonder what that hand has to teach you about resolving that problem. It’s as simple as that, right? You’re just switching implications towards resolving the problem, it’s not about the problem, it’s about resolving the problem – do you understand the distinction? Does that help? Q:

Yes, thank you.

Igor: Good, pass it next to you and we will ask you to pass it forward and then we’ll go back and then we’ll come over here. Q:

I am assuming this is probably a workshop in itself, but anything that you can say about working with couples?

Igor: At this point you want to look at family therapy, there is a lot of great literature. Let’s put it this way, I have worked with maybe one or two couples in my whole career, so I’m not the greatest expert on it. The biggest thing I’ve – I would do, and my mind says that so I will share with you – my caveat is I haven’t done very much of this. 1. The biggest problems happen in relationship, in my opinion, is when one or both people start treating the other person with disrespect, right? It may start accidentally, it may start as a revenge, you do something back, so they get their own back and they get their own back and before you know it they’re treating each other poorly essentially, right? So you have to somehow get around that without having to get sucked into whatever the drama was. It’s not important who said what and who did what anymore, something’s are but really overall it’s more important that it get back to the basics, right?

387 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 So the basics are what – intention, aren’t they? What’s your purpose for being in this relationship, because that’s what unifies things, so you get people back in touch for the purpose of being in that relationship. That gives you a lot of leverage for different things. 2. The second thing is to help people translate what’s going on, when you do X I perceive it as Y. Really? When I’m doing X I am actually doing X, right? So you need to be able to manage that conversation without people’s issues being flared up, right? A useful kind of, you want to get the couple back with H+, part of the purpose is getting the H+ so a useful way of doing it is, asking the second member of the couple, like the husband to explain what’s going on inside the wife’s mind. Now if he gets it all wrong, which is typically what will happen, then she can address that as opposed to attacking that. Do you understand the difference, attacking is like – you see, he didn’t listen and then you have to stop them right there, and say what did we talk about, right? You’re only purpose here is to correct the mental movies, so what does he need to know to be able to answer my question? Well he needs to know this, this, this, and this. You want to take the emotion out of it a little bit. And slowly but surely you are going to manage that conversation, so the stuff that needs to come out comes out and ultimately people will realize, or are in this position or want to be in this relationship, all these behaviors are basically silly things that have built up over time, there is no point continuing with that. And then they basically learn to communicate better. That’s the big broad picture version of how I would approach it, and big caveat, I am not a family therapist, I have done almost no couples work, so please don’t think that what I’m saying is any particularly insightful thing. It’s just a real basic approach to stuff, you definitely need to do more investigating. Does that help? Q:

It’s not a question, more as a statement or some insight, for those of you who maybe like me who approach things traditionally from a very logical rational standpoint and still have lingering doubt, or maybe you’re thinking is this a good thing or is this the right path for me, is this really beneficial to people? I am sitting beside a completely changed person. I thought I would test, we have a long drive

388 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 back home in traffic and stuff, so I thought I would throw out just a simple little test, and we were going along in traffic that was barely moving. Traditionally I would have never even mentioned the word snake. Igor: I understand, we saw the results. Q:

And we were just casually driving along and I said oh did you see the snake over there. And she just, no reaction and on the way in today, we actually had a 15 minute conversation about snakes and the things she would like to do. She said you know I really want to go somewhere and kind of test this out. I think I would like to take a picture, wouldn’t that be great to have a picture of me holding a snake and send it to Igor? I’m like oh my god – who are you?

Igor: It would be good, it would be very good, I would love that. Can you pass it back again? Q:

Parts of that, after that, from the sessions yesterday are kind of a blur to me still, but and Chris said this is actually covered, but this morning I want everybody to know, even though I feel absolutely over the moon fantastic – there was something happened in my head last night when we were sleeping, and it’s like my brain said well if you can handle that which was a hideously traumatic experience and feel this good, I am getting a little emotional – then there’s other things that as adults we have all put away in that special place in our head, and we can rationalize and say I’ve dealt with this, I have forgiven, I have done all these things and I live my day to day life without even thinking about it. Example here would be my mother – and we think we’re okay with it, but then last night something happened where my brain said well if you can deal with that you can deal with all this. And I had what I say some kind of crazy like mental meltdown this morning in the bathroom. I was just sobbing and luckily he came in and was like oh my god. And just put me in trance basically, but what it was, was everything that I had put away was like this mind movie and I was vividly seeing it and it was really fast but it was there. And every emotion that I had that was attached to those just came pouring out. And with his help I was able to say okay, because in my head I was like I can’t deal

389 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 with this, I have to wait because I have a class today, I’ve got this going on, I cannot handle this, it needs to be locked back up. But he was like just let it hang out back there and do what needs to be done, because you don’t have to think about what’s going on. But I just wanted everybody to know that that part of me, the snake part of me, has opened the doors to everything else and even though there is some underlying stress in the back of my head and I have a lot of anxiety, right in here today I feel fantastic. I feel like the future is brighter than I ever could have imagined. So it’s like everything is coming out, so thank you – from the bottom of my heart, thank you. Igor: You’re welcome. Give her a round of applause. And just to kind of re-emphasize the point to this, there are a couple of people who have come up to me during the course who have had similar experience. It’s one gentleman, if he wants to tell his own story, he’s welcome to do that I won’t point him otherwise, came up and said he had a dream in the middle of the seminar, at home, where for about an hour he had all this crazy rush of energy coming up from the bottom of his feet. He would start crying, have no idea why, he wouldn’t even feel the emotion, just the physical act and then would just pop disappear and then another wave would come and another wave, and he mentioned how it seemed like all his life experiences were slowly being presented to him one after another, and this one check off, this one check off, for a whole hour. And the way he described it sounded pretty intense. So your capacity to cope with things, to resolve things, it’s huge. All the unconscious mind needs is a process, a direction in order to take it in, and that is kind of what we’re doing here, isn’t it? Is giving the mind a process, say hey, here’s how to do it and they’ll go great, thank you very much – off we go. Does that make sense to you guys? We will take a few more questions then we will get onto the actual content of today. Q:

Hi, so first and foremost, you guys are awesome and that was awesome again to see that happen. I am really happy for both of you for being able to go through that and work through it. And actually I had not a similar experience, but I guess

390 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 we have all had an experience where we all went home and some weird stuff happened. My wife told me that she went to do stuff before bed and came back and I was in my clothes curled up in bed, hey don’t you want to get undressed, get into bed in your pajamas? Apparently I was just like, I can’t I’m shaking. She says what do you mean you’re shaking? I’m shaking. It’s neither a positive thing or a negative thing, I’m just shaking. I don’t know, was I shaking? No I wasn’t shaking, but I thought I was shaking I guess. I don’t remember any of this and then I guess I just passed out with all my clothes on, not even under the blankets or anything like that. Yeah, so that was crazy – but my question actually. Igor: Unusual experience. Q:

Yes. My question is, I am a little bit concerned even with H+ that using Mind Bending Language will piss some people off.

Igor: Sure, it’s understandable because you’re learning the routines of it, right? So there are two answers to this. 1. One is practice all the crazy spins and so on, just for the practice of it. 2. Two, realize, that when you’re talking to people you are just having a conversation, right? And as you’re talking to them, you can just put little spins in. Because all you’re trying to do is get them beyond the problem they were thinking about, that’s it. So aside from whatever they tried, there are certain things they have not, and when they understand that, well then it’s easier for them to make the transition. Now of course you will notice a little Mind Bending Language going on there, right? Does it sound like it’s anything crazy, they are only small little spins. What will end up happening in practice, once you get used to it, and admittedly that’s a practice thing, those spins will come out just conversationally, just normal. How can you annoy someone just speaking to them normally, right? Of course, if they are annoyed to you speaking in any event, then you have a bigger issue here, right?

391 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Really when you’re doing this kind of conversation hypnosis, you’re not doing anything to them, you are just talking to them. And these things will be there for you to assist that process. Does that help? Q:

Yes.

Igor: So drilling is one thing and then have a conversation that’s heart-felt, that’s a very different thing. It lets it all out. Any more questions, or are we good? Do you want to stand up, my goodness, it’s like the Hydra, one question down two more pop up. Q:

It’s about the Days Of Wonder process. I was wondering, if you have to worry about that you find a boring spot, an exhilarated spot, if you have to worry about the space in between having mind-field problems?

Igor: What do you think? Q:

Probably not.

Igor: I agree with you. Next. Q:

I was wondering what are your views on using regression work over a distance based medium such as phone or a Skype session?

Igor: What do you think? Q:

Personally, I know a lot of people think it’s a good idea, personally I can see the dangers involved, I just wanted to get your opinion. But I have a feeling I know the answer.

Igor: And the answer would be what? Q:

I would say no.

Igor: And how could my opinion be any better than your own instinct? Q:

Thanks.

Igor: Right? Back here there are some questions and we will come back forward again.

392 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

I was wondering, if you can explain your process on how you teach your clients self-hypnosis?

Igor: How would you teach your clients self-hypnosis, knowing what you know? Stand up, how would you teach your clients self-hypnosis knowing what you know? Q:

Well first I would get them in the trance, and then from there I would relate to them in trance, how easy it is to get back to that point, and give them a trigger.

Igor: Like? Q:

Oh, maybe touching their fingers a certain way or… thinking about a certain trigger word.

Igor: Then what would you do? Q:

I would have them practice on their own and ask them how it was, and then end the session I guess.

Igor: Sounds pretty good to me. Will you stand up? Go ahead. Q:

Igor, what is your approach, when you were practicing hypnotherapy with your patients to weight loss, and combine that with your cocaine example I am wondering if you plumbed that, or if you just do it in a smooth..?

Igor: So there are two ways to answer this whole question. • What would your approach be? Q:

I have been hypnotized many times by different hypnotists.

Igor: Let me pause you there, I am not asking what they did with you, I’m asking knowing what you know right now, what would your approach be to helping someone to lose weight? Q:

I probably would look for root problems.

Igor: Okay, and then just see what happens from there? Q:

See what happens from there.

393 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: I think it’s a pretty good idea, the only thing I would add to that is diet is a significant element of it, there is a biochemistry involved too, so you want to have a simple, give them simple dietary advice as part of the process and then hypnosis will help them to actually be able to implement the dietary advice rather than know about it and never do anything. You see, half the people – it depends on which part of the world, for example in the US I think half the people who come to weight loss sessions don’t even know what they are eating and what they are not. They just don’t know, they have grown up in a particular culture where the information doesn’t exist and of course it gets even more disguised with all the numbers and the ingredients on the back of the packets where there is no sugar but it has high fructose corn syrup which of course has no fattening potential. That’s sarcasm for you to take home, just in case you’re wondering. So a lot of people just need to be educated on what is a healthy diet in terms of just those little things, and the rest is facilitating, being able to do that. So I think you’re 100% correct, get a little bit of dieting around there and you’re a winner. If you’d like to know which diet I think is the simplest diet, and I think really, by diet I don’t mean you eat less, I mean what food you consume, is a simplest approach to this whole thing – would you like to know, as a freebie? It’s called a Slow Carb Diet, it’s phenomenal and it really works in terms of your biochemistry. So just look up Slow Carb Diet and you will find lots of information online. It’s a really simple diet, it’s really simple to get your head around, simple to do and then everything else can be using a skill to make that one work. Q:

Did that have an S?

Igor: Slow, S, yes exactly. It has nothing to do with low, it’s a special carbohydrate called a slow carbohydrate. Your body processes it different to the regular sugars. It does very different things, it’s much more stable sugar for your body, it does not attach as fat anywhere near the same way as fructose or corn syrup or high fructose corn syrup or any of these things does. Does that make sense to you guys? Can you stand up so we can get a microphone to you?

394 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

Yes, I was noticing that, let’s see if I can verbalize this correctly. It seems like I’m noticing my projections more and more.

Igor: Yep, that’ll happen. Q:

Yeah, and able to go, before I go into react mode.

Igor: Right. Q:

I’m like, oh, that’s just a projection.

Igor: That’s one of the benefits of doing this work. Remember we mentioned this before? One of the ways I become more tolerant is because I realize I’m reacting my own fish not theirs, right? Thanks for realizing that, I appreciate that. Q:

Yes.

Igor: We will come over here and we will come back, go ahead. Q:

Sorry to keep dragging this out, I just thought of something the other day that I wanted to address. When you put me in a trance the other day, I am very much one of those people that is a traditional a shielder, and I could feel myself. For one I had doubts about hypnosis at that point, anyway, and I could feel myself mentally gearing up, like he’s going to do battle with me, and I felt myself, as soon as you said something about the blink I was like oh he’s doing it, and I felt myself kind of changing and tensing up. But my wife, I didn’t see it, my wife said she saw a subtle change in you, like you were challenging, but, I am trying to figure out what you employ to people who tend to resist? What was it that you did that kind of broke through that?

Igor: It’s nothing I do necessarily on purpose, H+ really is the whole thing of it. This friendly obnoxiousness is I guess the best way to describe it, I am willing to push but I am not going to be unpleasant about it. It’s just friendly, like come on, come on. I will give an example, this may help – maybe my brother taught me this. My brother was, was, a bastard, I love him to pieces just so you know. But he used to do this, he’s an older brother so I had a lot of admiration for him and so on. When we were kids he would do something to really, really upset me and I would

395 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 be mad, and I could be mad for days. I was good at being mad. But somehow he had this way, he would come up and go I’m sorry, it’s alright, let’s just be friends again, I didn’t really mean it, come on. And I would sit there and I was trying to hold onto being angry, tried to hold on tried to hold on and suddenly like, alright. That’s really kind of the mindset that I have I guess, did that kind of make sense to you a little bit. It’s really hard to be annoyed with someone who is being really nice to you, not nice like can I do anything for you, can I get something – you see that’s a very different energy, right? Versus, come on, I’m sorry, come on, give me another chance, just one. It’s fun, it’s playful, it kind of acknowledges what’s happening without really having to acknowledge it, do you know what I mean? Q:

When you said that about don’t approach it like this, for someone like me, if you would have done that, it would have completely failed, because I would have been like, now I see a weakness, I see a chink, now I’m going to stomp on it. So that was very key for me, that it’s not weakness, you’re just presenting – I actually care about you and I am just trying to nudge you in that direction, just go that way.

Igor: It’s your choice, right? If you don’t want to go there, am I going to push – heck no, why would I? But that’s what the H+ does, this is just a fun way of looking at it, but the whole point of the H+ is that you realize fundamentally that I’m in this for you, not for me, right? I can do this with anyone, pretty much, so the reason I’m doing it with you is because it’s fun, it’s good, why wouldn’t you want to do something that’s going to help you, right? So yeah, it’s a careful balance for some people about how far you push and how hard, ultimately it’s just kind of if you do it in the spirit of fun and friendliness and cooperation, shall we say, most people will be very happy to go along with that, even if at first they have some reservation. You have to maintain that, if you kind of go you know, and your eyes are blinking aren’t they. Okay, now clearly you’re doing something that has totally destroyed the credibility that is built up with some people, does that kind of make sense to you guys? Does that help? There is a hand back there somewhere, do you want to stand up, we’ll get a mic to you.

396 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

More of a question for Joe, in the stop smoking sessions do you find that there’s a lot of big extraneous stuff that you can’t deal with in that session, and how do you deal with that on logistics basis?

Joe:

What do you think?

Q:

I think that you might come up with some big stuff, do you reschedule them for a bigger appointment? I am just wondering, not like how do you handle it with the skills that we’ve learned, but just in more of a practice sense?

Joe:

You answered it right there, occasionally stuff comes up, bigger stuff, but the smoking will get taken care of in that session, most of the time, and if other stuff comes up, schedule another appointment. Sometimes if I have time that day, if I don’t have other clients, I’ll offer we can continue to do some work today if you’d like, but usually I like to send them home for a few days to sort of let things settle, as you’ve seen with a couple people around here. They said I’ve had some weird dreams and I had some things coming up and I have had some amazing things resolving in my life. Most of the time because they’ve been smoking, for a lot of smokers is a huge thing in their life, especially if it’s been around for years and decades for some people, will start spontaneously resolving those bigger issues that they think they have. And they never call me back.

Igor: Do you want to pass the microphone for these people, the lady in the back has been waiting for a while. Just stand up and we will get a microphone for you next time. Q:

Two questions I have, first of all you mentioned on the PCAT formula that we have to isolate one event. Does that one example of the issue resolve the entire issue, usually?

Igor: What do you think? Q:

I don’t know, because I don’t have experience.

Igor: I realize, but what do you think is mostly to be the case?

397 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

I’m just thinking that the client might come with an exemption, like yes this particular, I don’t feel afraid about that particular example because they already received a gift.

Igor: So let me pause you, your instincts are getting close, they are correct, they want to make a hard divide but if you leave it at just that one problem, that one example, then maybe it will expand to everything maybe it won’t. That’s why you test right afterwards, remember, with smoking for example how we tested, we tested a specific example then we tested other similar examples. Then we started bringing in other stuff like drinking and so on, and we paused that for a moment until we were done with the pressure. When that was tested every possible example of pressure had been tested, then that’s basically that area covered. Then we brought all that resource, all that win shall we say, to bear on the other examples, on drinking on socializing, those sorts of things and we tested again. So let’s say you’re going to go out for a drink tonight, what’s going to happen then? Right? So you’re test takes care of that, because you’re systematically going to take care of all the different situations and you get them to start thinking about stronger and stronger situations until really they’ve covered all the big ones and a search through mind cannot think of anything else. You saw another example with the snake phobia, right, where at the end of it all saying you know, the only thing I knew is that – well first of all, just saying the word snake would cause a reaction and it didn’t anymore, right? So then we started talking about thinking about snakes, no reaction. Then we had the idea of walking the dog that was the only thing she knew from a real life that might involve snakes, so that was set as a memory, no reaction. Then we had her testing different scenarios out, again no negative reaction, it was still working. Then at some point I don’t know how we got there, we got to the zoo, at first just with the safety barrier with the glass and so on. Once that was proven, so it was a conditioning and a test at the same time, then we went for the extra-extreme of actually touching the snake and that was a big reaction in a positive way. Do you remember that, right?

398 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 So your test cycles take care of all of that. There are sessions when I spend more time on the test cycle than on all the work. Does that help? Q:

Yes, so basically put in some other words, we generalize the solution through the testing?

Igor: Yes, exactly that’s a great way of putting it. You generalize the solution through the process of testing. Q:

And the second question I would have, when working with kids, is any of the techniques which works best or one we should avoid?

Igor: So I have not done a lot of work with kids, but here are my instincts about that. 1. The Dynamic Induction, they love it. I have done that sort of thing with them all the time. I wouldn’t put as much pressure on kids to know what symbols mean, they have a different mindset, so I wonder what it means. I will probably just tell them straight out, do you think it might mean, do you think this might make you more courageous? Yes. Let’s try it on, do you feel the courage? Yeah. You can be much more direct with them because they have fewer filters to reject stuff, right? With adults you have more circumspect because you have mechanisms in place to reject things. The Dynamic Induction is great for that. Q:

Thank you very much.

Igor: Go ahead. Q:

I just wanted to share a little thing interesting that happened last night.

Igor: Okay. Q:

We left here a little early, went and got our yoga instructor certificate and went home and my niece was preparing studying for her Step-2 medical boards.

Igor: Can you repeat that, you just kind of cracked up. Q:

My niece was preparing for her medical board exams Step-2, and then I sat with her and she said I’m getting pretty anxious Auntie. Then I just, I don’t know I

399 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 think just automatically came out – what are you beyond anxiety. Then she started smiling, what do you mean and started smiling. Now look at the problem of anxiety that’s all I said, she was studying, I didn’t want to take up too much, she was relaxed. Igor: Beautiful, great job. Well done. Q:

And then now – thank you, thank you.

Igor: Pause a second, notice how, was that crazy Mind Bending Language pattern? No, one simple mind bending power word just thrown in there is enough a lot of times, because most people’s problems are little problems, little humps, and you just need to bounce them over them a little bit, right? So you really don’t need to so much sometimes. Q:

I am now coming to the question, I don’t know if I missed somewhere along the line in the last five/six days, but we went over the steps dos and don’ts for abreaction, in a similar fashion if somebody is really deep trance and we are trying to end the trance to bring them out, what are the dos and don’ts?

Igor: That’s a great question, so how do you bring someone out who is really in a deep trance? The first thing you want to do is no one can get stuck in a trance, the worst thing that will happen is they can fall asleep and at some point they will wake up and go wow that was kind of interesting, right? The only reason someone might get stuck in the trance is if they already have psychological problems ahead of time, I mean by that they have a psychotic break or something before they come see you and basically you can tell these people. When you talk to them they sound like they are already on drugs, they might be on drugs or they’re having more psychosis issues at which point and we will come onto this a little later on, every time you hear that fog horn – feels like I’m getting a salute, this is nice. So if someone comes in and before you even start hypnosis you think there is something, they are the kind of person that if they sat next to you in a bus stop and they started talking to you in these ways, you would want to edge right to the end of the bus stop and maybe consider getting a taxi, you know what I mean?

400 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Don’t do hypnosis with them because you have a whole other set of issues potentially opening at that point. Aside from those who you will be avoiding trance with anyway and we will talk more about that later, what do you with someone who won’t come back? The first thing is you realize what is probably happening, the most likely thing to happen is they are having a great time there, it’s nice in there, they are enjoying it. So then simply just either, if you have the time, let them sit there and say you know what, just stick around there for awhile and come back whenever you’re ready. Or if you need them out because you’ve got another client coming in, one therapist I know liked saying – well you know you can come back anytime you’d like, anytime you’d want, but you should know that I charge by the hour and the hour is up. If you want to pay another $100, just carry on staying in there and enjoying the pleasant trance. They like that, it’s kind of a joke. I haven’t really used it, but it’s funny. So you’re welcome to it. What I end up doing is I insist, it’s kind of like the abreaction drill, again, if I can use Stephanie’s example because we had a strong emotion there, did you notice her tendency to want to fall into the feelings and not separate herself. So I had to be very insistent, that’s it the image is over there, way out there, all the way over there and you’re here that’s there, you’re here it’s there. You see I was very insistent by that. You insist in the same way, that’s it I want you to come it’s time for you to end this trance. Coming back, that’s it, start moving your fingers, move your legs, move your fingers, that’s it, move your fingers, move your legs. Let your breathing change. So we are slowly talking them back with a lot of vigor, with a lot of energy, with a lot of insistence. What you don’t want to do is like, and now you’re coming back, one two and three – all the way back now, I said now. Please. (said very slowly and soothingly) Right? Your voice has to be much more in concert with what you’re trying to achieve. If you’re interested in the notes, we have a couple of notes in an

401 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 escalation of force in terms of what you can do. By force, I’m using a metaphor, you’re not going to start punching people. I can’t remember which page it’s on, let’s have a quick look. Which one – 25, here we go. Now this is just kind of for your consideration if you’d like. Again you can look at your own time, the basic principles are you’re using suggestion to end suggestion, right? You’re going to use your voice, you’re going to use your insistence, you’re going to start suggesting anti-trances, like cognitive processes, alertness and so on, right? Then you’re going to start engaging the very processes that you have been trying to shut down in order for the trance to occur, thinking processes, right? You are going to start asking them some simple questions like, if they are coming out of trance a little bit woozy or still are not quite there, you might ask them some simple things like what’s the time, what’s your name, where are you from, right? Isn’t that the kind of questions paramedics ask people when they’ve had a head injury, and the reason for that is they’re testing for cognitive functioning, they are testing to how well the neo-cortex is functioning, because if they can’t answer those questions chances are there maybe some brain damage or lesion or something is going on, does that make sense? We use the same ideas in hypnosis if someone is having a little difficult orienting, because we are re-engaging the same mental processes again. Does that make sense? So then you can go one step further and ask them technical questions like, what’s 25 x 5, and they go what? Seriously this has worked with me, my math is not the best. Well work with me, what’s 25 x 5, get them to really start thinking about this or maybe simpler things like 5 + 3. Well that’s easy. Well if it’s easy tell me what it is, right? Get them engaged in normal rational conscious conversation. Chat to them about day to day things, right? This pulls them out of that trance reality back into regular reality. Another thing you can do is, where it helps ground them, is movement. A lot of time you have a catalepsy over there and they come back and there like yeah I’m back. You can clearly see that their whole body is still hovering in that trance, it

402 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 can happen sometimes. So get them moving, say you know what will you stand up for me a second, right? And they’ll go oh, alright then and the energy they need to invest in physically moving again will get them more out of that trance again, because now you’re suggesting it of course as well. Another way to ground someone is by consuming something, now you want to be careful with this, depending on what state, what country you’re in, offering someone food may be considered medication, right? You have to be real careful about that, because each jurisdiction is different. What I used to do is I used to have, I would give them a glass of water, it’s pretty much standard, drinking water is good. And I used to have a thing of cookies, and I would say we have some cookies there if you want to grab one, feel free to do that, right? Then it’s a choice rather than a prescription. And of course if they are diabetic, they can decline or whatever because they know their own condition best. Does that kind of make sense to you guys? These are kind of more sensible run of the mill approaches, but what you’re basically doing is you’re reversing whatever you’re doing to get them into trance by changing your tonality, by changing your pace, by changing the nature of the suggestions back to alertness and consciousness, by suggesting movement, by getting their critical faculties – not the critical factor, but the critical faculties, the ability to analyze information and testing for that so they have to start analyzing. All these things start basically re-booting their brain again and they come out more easily, does that help? It’s not very common, I haven’t had to do it very often. But occasionally it happens, yeah. Go ahead. Q:

At that point, before bringing them out, would you still want to do a re-induction suggestion?

Igor: Here’s what will typically happen, you would have done your boiler-plates, the induction suggestions for next time, we agree to go into hypnosis, and so on, you end the trance, they are coming back – one two three four five, that’s the way you know they haven’t responded, right? So you’ve already been through all that. So, I don’t think it matters that much, but yeah, you can do that.

403 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

I have been looking back to at home, all the people I know, and their behaviors, and I am seeing or at least I’m feeling that like everybody has some form of hypnotic ability in them.

Igor: I agree. Q:

You do agree?

Igor: 100%. Q:

How would I help somebody that is like I think is really good and has all the techniques and actually does to realize about what they’re doing?

Igor: So what context, techniques for what, abilities for what? Q:

To be hypnotic, they have very…

Igor: Oh you want to help them become a better hypnotist? Q:

Yes. And they don’t even know that they have these abilities.

Igor: Sure. Q:

Like they do it naturally.

Igor: That’s call training, right, that’s what we’re doing right now. Q:

Yeah, but it’s somebody who’s not open to the idea of…?

Igor: That’s a whole different ball park, then we have to go into the whole training dynamics and so on. You can foster maybe some of their attributes of their personality, saying you know I really like when you treat people this way. It’s fantastic, I see some great results. So just by complimenting something, it will tend to augment. But really you’re asking how to go way beyond the scope, unless they are asking you for something in which case, therapy is appropriate. You’re still imposing something on them if they haven’t chosen it, you can definitely augment traits that are already there by complimenting them by putting more attention on them by admiring them, those tend to grow that way. But beyond that, you have to ask yourself if they don’t want it, why give it to them? And if you want to go down

404 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 the whole training route, that’s a whole different kettle of fish again. Does that help? Q:

Yes, thank you.

Igor: Alright folks, are we all good with the questions? So what we’ll do is – oh one more over here, just stand up. Q:

I wanted to ask, what’s your experience with drugs and stimulants and depressants?

Igor: We just talked about that, remember we talked about drug and alcohol abuse? Q:

No you’re experience?

Igor: My personal experience, as I mentioned at the time, I haven’t done very much of it, I have worked with a few. A few people with alcohol, I have had a few people who had minor drug abuse, like the cocaine thing and so on, I worked with a few more people that used marijuana, basically with the stop smoking practice. Depending on where you are, you’ll get a few people there asking to quit smoking but carry on smoking dope, so that’s interesting things like that. Q:

I’m sorry, let me rephrase the question, you have a client and you know that he is been taking a stimulant what would be the was to induce?

Igor: Okay, so if someone comes in and they are on drugs or they are drunk in your session, exactly – so if they are drunk or they are on drugs in the session throw them out. Do not work with them. Can you work with that, sure. There is a whole process of therapy where you use controlled uses of, like Timothy Leary did that with LSD and stuff like that, I don’t recommend you get into that, apart from the fact you will probably get arrested and spend the rest of your life in jail, which is not a pleasant place to be. You don’t need to deal with that. If someone is drunk, if someone is on drugs: 1. First of all they are probably not taking the session seriously, you don’t have the right investment by them. 2. Second, your ability, they are in their own altered reality and your ability to join that reality has been severely hampered.

405 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Can it be done, of course it can, but it’s been severely hampered. So it’s more difficult for you. 3. Third, typically they will come like that because that’s their problem, and they need to be in an altered state, a different state to act, resolve that problem, you haven’t got them lucid you can’t even begin the whole process. If they are that sort of crazy hyper eye staring and all the rest of it, and they are not on drugs, then they probably have a medical issue. In other words there is probably some form of psychosis going on at that point and do not work with them, that is a completely specialist niche area. Really that’s the area of the psychiatrists and if you are a psychiatrist then you can start adapting some of the stuff you learned here to possibly help there, but you need to be much more cautious. That’s a totally different ballgame. Does that help? Okay, everyone good? Rock and rolling, oh we have one last question. You see this always happens on the final day. Everyone is like just one more question, if I just ask one more question then the inevitable certification process will be delayed and I won’t have to do it. I understand, I’ll play your game for a while, go ahead. Can we have a mic over there? Q:

Hi Igor, it’s actually not a question, it’s a compliment and thank you. I have had plenty of hypnotherapy training, before. I just wanted to let you know this is probably the best that I’ve attended. Mainly because you have incredible talent to make all the concepts incredibly simplistic and take an immense amount of time in breaking everything down, and giving us practical time with theory as well as practice. It’s amazing.

Igor: Thank you, I appreciate that, thank you. Q:

It’s nice to be impressed by somebody, I have trained with masters like Gil Boyne and Orman McGill and so forth, so they are amazing, you have a tendency to feel they’re amazing, when can we do this, but it’s different when you’re actually able to do. Thanks.

406 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: I appreciate hearing that, thank you very much for saying that. Thank you very much. Okay guys, what we are going to do is this. In a moment we will have a little break just to kind of clear the air a bit, we will come back, we will talk a little bit about practice management, so some of the nuts and bolts of running a practice. Then the certification. It’s alright, we will let you know everything that is expected of you before we get into it. It’s not going to be an ambiguous exercise in any way shape or form. So just have like a 10/15 minute quick thing, clear the air a bit, come back nice and pronto so we can get the practice management out of the way and then we’ll finish up the day.

407 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2

DVD 21 – How to Successfully Run A Hypnosis Office The Right Way & End Of Training

Practice Management

Igor: Alright, guys. How’s everyone doing? Everyone having a good time? All:

Right, yeah.

Igor: Today is a much easier day. This is a more letting things come together sort of day. One of the things you really start thinking about at this point is, I’d like you to put yourself in the position of opening your first therapy practice, and how that whole thing is going to be looking, right? The first thing you want to start thinking about is your environment, what kind of office you are going to use. Essentially, there’s two options open to you. I’m sure you can think of another one, if you try harder than I did, but two main options that people have is: • They rent space somewhere. Either its own office or, better still, inside some kind of a clinic. • They work from home, right? Both have upsides, both have downsides. The upside of working from home is, clearly, you have no rent, right? All:

Yes.

Igor: There are two downsides. Clients will know where you live, and you don’t always want that, especially if they start getting a little hang around-y and lots of stuff. It depends on what kind of stuff you’re doing. If you’re doing stop smoking session, not such a big deal, if other stuff’s happening, then you may want to have separation. Make sense?

408 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 The big advantage, of course, is you save on cash, but another downside of that is, if it’s in your home, it’s clearly in your home. Well, first of all, people will be more hesitant to walk into someone’s home than into someone’s office, because it’s to do with the whole territorial space, and so on. Plus, it may–I’ve seen people do great work this way–but it may provide a lesser context, hypnotically speaking, than an office would, because you’re communicating a slightly different message, right? Remember, Milton Erickson worked from home for most of his career, so he did a very good job of it. He had his garage converted into an office. I know a lot of hypnotherapists have their garages converted to an office, so it clearly can work, but just realize that’s the trade-off that you’re making. Make sense so far? When you rent a space, there are a couple of options. If you rent it in another office, like a dental office or a medical practice, it’s fantastic. You get great referrals that way, or a physiotherapy practice, chiropractors often rent spare offices out, and so on. These are all pretty good things, because people are coming assistance anyways, so they’re in that mind set, generally speaking, already. Do you see how that works? The options you have for renting space are either you pay straight rent, so you agree what the rent is, you check around to see what’s appropriate in the area, or, and this is my preference, you pay a percentage. In other words, instead of paying rent, you’ll pay a percentage of your income and depending on where you are, they’ll ask for anywhere from 15% to 50%. I’ve seen a whole bunch of range. You need to determine for yourself what you’re comfortable with. The more your percentage, hopefully, the more they’ll do work to get people into your clinic as well. I have no problem paying half my income on the rent, if they’re doing a whole bunch of marketing for me and really driving clients my way. It’s free money, as far as I’m concerned. Does this make sense? Plus, you can always put your prices up, so it works out both ways, right? The reason I personally preferred working on a percentage basis–if you’re interested by the way, I pay 25% of my intake to the clinic I rent a space in–is because I only pay money when I make money, right? Especially when you’re

409 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 starting off and you’re getting yourself stable, it’s a nice way that you don’t have bills and overhead over your head before you’ve even started, right? Once you start establishing yourself, you have to do the calculation if it’s worth you either offering to pay stable rent, because you’re getting stable income, or you moving to a new location to be able to just have a fixed rent and keeping more of the profit. Those are decisions you can make as you go along. Does that make sense to you guys? The space itself, you look at the space itself, and what kind of clientele is going to come through. As a rule–and this is only a general rule of thumb–I recommend that you keep the space neutral, because then the largest amount of people coming through your doors are going to feel comfortable, right? I know some people, for example, who rent a whole display in one of these shopping malls in…what do they call the little shopping malls where you just drive your car in and whatever? Strip malls, is that what they are? There you go. They’ll rent a couple of windows in a strip mall. They’ll have an office, a big “Hypnotherapy Practice”, whatever. They’ll have two or three clinics, and they really drive business in and then they start hiring new therapists, you build a whole business. Fantastic, but it does take effort, because you have to know your whole marketing. You have to have a whole system in place to make that happen. Make sense? So overall, I recommend a neutral office. If you only want to work the specific kind of client, then cater towards that person, right? So, if you end up working with someone who’s more into the alternative spiritualities and New Age mysticism and all that stuff–it’s now called the Now Age–then you may want to have incense in your thing. You may want to have, you know, like you go to a yoga spa and it’s got the whole Eastern vibe going on. They’ll feel comfortable in that, because they’ll know that environment, and that’s what you want. You want them to feel comfortable and at ease there, right? If you want to have a general audience, it’s a toss-up. You may try it out, but you’re going to see how people feel about that. Just realize that anything extra you put in could be an impediment, right?

410 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 People often ask me about music. Do you want to play music in your sessions? The answer is sure. Do you what you want. Just be aware that some people, the presence of music will be profound. It will augment whatever you’re doing significantly. For other people however, it will be the reverse, if they don’t like the music, it doesn’t really suit them, if they feel uncomfortable around it and so on. Does that make sense? So, just think about these issues ahead of time, so you’re ready for it. Yourself, personally, you should be clean, right? Make sure you scrub down properly. Probably put a little bit of extra deodorant on. The reason I say this is because we don’t realize, especially when you start off, nerves will be included, right? When I saw my first client, I was more frightened than he was, and he was terrified. It’s true, right? It’s not a big deal folks. Just understand it’s likely to happen. It really is not a big deal. You’ll get through it, and soon enough, that will pass, because you get used to the whole “what’s expected of you” thing. Make sense? But if you are going to be a little nervous in the first time, which pretty much everyone is likely to be, then you’re probably going to have a physical response, and over time on the same day, that physical response will sour. You see where I’m going with this? So, even if you think, “Normally, I have good hygiene”, and so on, please take care extra care. When you get ready in the morning, put extra deodorant on. Maybe even have a deodorant in your office so you can spray something on between clients. Whatever it is you do, just realize that, initially at least, you want to pay extra attention to these things, because they’re going to be more of an issue for you, just because of the way we’re built. Does that make sense to you guys? I think breath mints or chewing gum is a great idea. Don’t do (chewing sounds) chewing gum hypnosis. That’s not necessarily the most attractive thing. But it’s good, because once again, you’ll be getting close to people, and even if you don’t think your breath … you think your breath is fine, do it anyway, just to be safe. Because why risk having an impediment? Does that make sense? Now, I’m not telling you what to do. You guys get to be adults, do whatever you want. I’m just

411 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 presenting my experiences, right? All this makes advice pretty straightforward, yes? The next question people ask is, “What about furniture?” and so on, right? All you really need is a place for the person to rest. Right? I could imagine that in the right context, just having a little bean bag for them to lie on would be fantastic, but for the most part, if you’re having just a general practice, you’re going to have something that looks, shall we say, relatively professional, right? So, a couple of choices is, when I worked, I was working in a physiotherapy practice, so what we had were those massage couches where people sit on– wasn’t really appropriate for the work–or chairs, pretty much like what you’re sitting on right now, so I just used those chairs. They worked just fine. I did all my work in pretty much the same conditions you’re sitting in right now, right? I did, at one point, go out and buy a nice reclining chair with a stool, and that’s kind of fun. Clients love that sort of thing, so again, that helps it a little bit. But you don’t have to go to a great expense. It’s just a nice thing to do if you feel like doing that as well. So far so good, everyone, everyone kind of clear on that? Now we need to start looking at a couple of things that will augment what’s going to be going on, and hopefully, kind of boiler-plates to overcome potential issues. Would it be fair to say you want peoples’ mind focused on what’s going on in the experience, rather than being hyper-aware of their environment or possibly embarrassing themselves? Would that not be fair, right? So, it is specifically of importance, if a woman comes in to the clinic, whether they’re male or female is irrelevant–if they’re wearing anything like a little short skirt, they’re going to be more concerned about doing “this”, because they don’t want to be doing “this”. You see where I’m going with this? So, there’s a couple of ways to overcome this. Always have a blanket nearby, like one of these little airport blankets, so that when they sit down, just give it to them and say, “Look, just tuck yourself up in this so you can cover your legs and everything, then you’re nice and safe, you can really relax into what’s going on, and you won’t have any concerns.” Right? It just takes care of it really simply.

412 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 You may also want to, when you take the appointment, ask them to come in loose clothing, better still, like a track suit, a running suit, whatever you want to call it. Two reasons for that: 1. It’s nice and relaxed. People can just slouch in these things. It’s designed for that, right? 2. On occasion, and again, this is particularly true of the male/female relationship, you have some people whose coping strategy with the world is to seduce it, right? When they get nervous, they’ll get flirtatious and that can interfere with things, right? So they start coming in dressed like a sack of potatoes, the chances that they’ll engage in those behaviors are diminished and the chances you’re going to be sucked into those behaviors are also diminished, right? It’s a nice thing to encourage them to do. It can help you out in the long run, and it puts them on notice that this is not a flirting workshop, this is a hypnotherapy practice, so they can treat it with respect. Make sense? It should be pretty sensible stuff, right? So far so good, one thing I always recommend to people is have lots of certificates. Assuming you pass your certification at this point, which we’ll talk about, put your certificates on the wall. Display them, right? They’re a part of the hypnotic context. They show people, “this person is good at what they do”. The larger the certificate is, the better. Don’t ask me why … well, actually, I kind of know why, because size matters, apparently. Right? So, rest assured, those of you who are taking certification and those of you who pass that certification will be getting a large certificate, right? So display it. Other things you may want to do, and this worked really well for me, is if you’ve written a book on hypnosis or therapy, display it in your lounge area where they wait, because it basically ups your credibility. I wrote a few books, they are there, people usually leaf through them, and then they go, “Did you…?” and I go, “Yeah, yeah”, and I won’t make much of a deal out of it, but it definitely made my life a lot easier than when they weren’t out there, right? The other thing is, if you’re doing your marketing right, you’ll have a couple of things:

413 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 1. You probably have little articles in the papers. Local papers are starving for pieces to write, right? So, either talk to them about hypnosis, which is an easy piece, or do some little publicity stunt like you may go to a local old peoples’ home to do some therapeutic hypnosis for them, arrange with old peoples’ home, they’ll probably get the press engaged. It’s good press for them, because they’re getting advertisement. It’s good press for you. Cut that paper article out and put it in a folder, once again, on the desk, so people can see you’ve been in the press. It ups your prestige. Once again, hypnotic context is stronger there. Does that make sense? Nothing made my life easier teaching this seminar, than the fact that most of you have bought a product already. Right? It’s already built a relationship. I don’t have to spend as much time doing that, because you’ve pegged me at a certain level. Rather than having to prove myself at that level, I can come in at that level and just go from there. It’s a lot less work involved, right? Of course, I can fall off that pedestal as well, so I can’t be blasé about it, but you can definitely up the ante there. 2. The other thing I’m going to ask you guys to do, and this is a simple task you can give all your clients, is ask them to write you letters, ask them to write you postcards after the therapy session, on how they’re doing, how they’re getting on. It’s good for them, because it gets to reinforce what’s been going on, plus, you can then display those letters in the same photo album or album there of success stories, right? Once again, it sets a great expectation of success for clients. See how that works? So, you really want to think about, how I’m going to set up my lobby area to create the maximum expectation of success in people. Easy? You kind of like these ideas, yes? Coming back into the office. So, the office is kind of neutrally decorated, you’ll have at least two chairs, one for you, one for them. You may have a nice comfy chair for them to sit in, that’s fine. One thing I’m going to recommend that everybody does, is have a small, cheap video camera, that is angled so that it catches all of the client’s body when they’re resting in their chair. You can pick up these little cameras, you can see

414 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 one over here for example, for $100.00. Right? Slightly low quality ones might be even cheaper nowadays. It’s really not expensive. Why do you think it might be of use to do this? Any ideas? For your protection, exactly. You want to record all your sessions, because unfortunately, we live in a litigious society, right? There’s a couple of things that could happen: 1. Number one, some people are just claim junkies. They’ll invent stuff, just for off chance that they can get something. It’s very unfortunate, but it’s something you’ve got to be aware of. 2. Secondly, in hypnosis, people, shall we say, people’s fantasies can take on a form of reality, right? What if they feel like you touched them in an inappropriate place? It’s a hallucination and you say, “No, I didn’t do it”. “But I felt it.” So now, they’re convincing themselves, right? You see where this is going? It’s good to have the video camera there. By the way, this never happened to me, just so you know. It’s rare, but it’s good to have it there as an insurance policy, so if someone ever does try and claim something, you can take the tape out and say, “Look, nothing happened. We can watch the whole thing.” It protects you, right? Of course, if you have that footage, you’ve got to ensure client confidentiality. It’s an ethical thing, right? Remind them that this is just for your records, you’re not going to be releasing these things. The only way anyone else will get to see them is if there’s a court order and there’s really no reason for that, and so on. Does that make sense? Bear in mind that in different jurisdictions, there are different burdens of information that you have to carry. In some states, some countries, you have to keep your records for ten years. In some places, you have to keep no records. In some places, if you have records, you treat them in this way, and if you don’t have records, you don’t. You see where I’m going with this? You need to really just sit down with someone in your state, in your country, who knows about this. A lawyer or a citizen of the vice bureau, something like that, and talk through the issues so you set up your practice in a way that conforms to your local laws. Make sense?

415 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 So, a video camera is going to be important. How do you deal with that, in terms of the client coming in? It’s real simple. You have them have a seat, just point at the camera, saying, “I’m going to be recording these sessions for our record. It’s a standard practice in this industry. Every professional hypnotherapist does this.” Just in case they’ve been to someone else that hasn’t done it, right? “Rest assured we keep our records confidential. The only way anyone will ever see them is if there’s a court order, which by law, obliges me to do so.” Okay? It’s a real simple thing. Can we have a–just stand up and we’ll get some microphones up. Just stand up if you need a mic. Q:

I thought it was going behind me. Wouldn’t it also be a good learning tool for myself?

Igor: Absolutely. It’s a great learning tool. You just review your sessions and discover what you can do better, right? Q:

Right.

Igor: Do you want to pass it back? Q:

Hi. I don’t know if you’re going to cover this, but do we need E&O insurance, or malpractice?

Igor: What is E&O insurance? Q:

It’s just protecting you in case someone…

Igor: Oh, I see. It’s like operating insurance for that, right? Q:

Yes, right.

Igor: Absolutely, yes. I would strongly recommend you get an operating insurance. Just click it off and they’ll grab it for you. Again, different countries, different states have different rules for how to get insurance. I’m afraid I can’t advise you, because a) You’re from different places.

416 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 b) I’m not from the US, so I haven’t been involved in that. But just do a search for hypnotherapy insurance online, and I’m sure you’ll come up with lots of providers. They’ll tell you what they need to see, and sometimes you have to jump through hoops, sometimes you do not. It’s important to have it for several reasons. Number one, there’s just the physical running of a business. Someone trips over your doorstep, once again, we’re in a litigious society. It’s good to have $1, $2 million liability insurance, just for physical accidents that may occur in your space. That’s just a standard. I would also recommend that you have coverage for professional malpractice insurance. At least in the UK, this is the case, in the US, I think it’s very similar. Hypnotherapy has a very low litigation ratio. Very low, right? So, it tends to mean that the insurance rates tend to also be very low. To be insured for a couple of million dollars for malpractice or your physical space shouldn’t be that expensive. I strongly advise you get it. It’s a very good thing to have. If you get a certificate, an insurance certificate or, if they have them, ask the insurance company to send you a nice big one. Put it on the wall again. It’s just part of that whole professional thing. I should say that I never had one, because they gave me a stupid little letter that looked like a dog wrote it. I had it current at all times, because it is an important step. Absolutely right, okay? Go ahead. Could we have a mic over here please? Just someone come around. Q:

With regard to videotaping the client in the session, what would you do if the client asked for a copy? Would you give him?

Igor: No. Tell him, “This is for my personal records. As a rule, we don’t hand it to clients, because there’s material that can arise in a session that your unconscious mind is processing, your conscious mind does not need to know about.” Right? So, I would have as a standard policy that we do not give copies of sessions, which is purely for personal records. A lot of doctors have the same sort of thing,

417 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 right? What you can do though, as a return offering, shall we say, is record your own little hypnosis induction. Like a half an hour relaxation induction or maybe a sanctuary or something nice, and you might just give them that at the end of the session as a freebie they can take home to continue to integrate whatever has happened. That’s kind of a nice gift. CDs … to burn your own CD nowadays will cost you what, ten cents apiece or a something? It’s really not expensive. So, you can make a whole stack of these and just hand them out. It’s just a nice little thing you can do for them, right? You don’t have to. I just enjoy doing it. It’s a nice thing. Does that help? So, we’ve got the general idea here. You’re setting up a practice– Oh, so, go ahead. Q:

Is there any written documentation?

Igor: Yes, we’ll come on to that. We will come on to that. So, you get the general gist of the kind of layout here, right? The last thing we haven’t really talked about is, it’s useful for you to have things available for them during a session, especially water. If you have a water fountain nearby, excellent. It’s standard practice for me to come get them a glass of water, give it to them, sit with them for a minute or two whilst they drank it, and I get a chance to check that they’re ready to release into the wild. They’re not going to start crossing roads without looking and getting hit by trucks, right? If you have some cookies as well, on a little plate, that’s fine. Again, you can’t medicate. You can’t say, “You should take a cookie”. It’s different to saying, “We’ve got some cookies here. If you want, just help yourself.” That’s a very different place. Does that make sense? So far, so good. I think I’ve covered everything–oh yes, the one last thing I was going to say is, if you’re a female hypnotist in particular, if you can arrange it, it will be useful for you to have other people in the nearby environment, just in case. Right? Again, it doesn’t really happen very often, but hypnosis does not make you a Superman or Superwoman. You always need to have an eye out or consideration ready for

418 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 your own safety, right? It kind of is true for men as well. It’s less likely to have problems with that. But really, the rule of thumb is, if you feel unsafe in someone’s presence, do not override your instinct. Refer them on. It’s useful to have someone nearby in case something ever did happen. It’s very rare, I’ve never really heard of it happening, but why take a risk? Does that make sense to you guys? Can you just stand up if you want the mic, someone? Yes, behind you. It’s on. Q:

As a therapist, sometimes, some of the females that come in feel uncomfortable being alone with you, so it’s nice to have somebody close that’s female.

Igor: Yes. In Markling, we had a female staff, the receptionist and so on. Sometimes they were invited in. The other one was, usually, if they feel nervous, they’ll ask about it ahead of time when they’re booking, so just say, “Yes, sure, bring a friend along. Let them sit in on the session.” Right? I just say normally, “Make sure it’s a close friend, so you’re okay with whatever you talk about.” So yes, you can do that, absolutely. Some people feel more comfortable if you leave the door open just slightly ajar, so they know there’s an exit route. You just do whatever you need to, to make sure that person feels safe in your presence. This is kind of common sense isn’t it? Does that make sense to you guys, yes? Please stand up. Let’s get a mic over here. Q:

I was just wondering if you’ve had experience or known anyone who doesn’t have an office, but especially, I was thinking Conversational Hypnotherapy, you might meet like–

Igor: A coffee shop or something? Q:

Museum or somewhere outdoors, where they might, one thing, they might feel more comfortable being in an open situation, but they’d be less comfortable to do private type things.

Igor: Exactly, so, I personally haven’t done it that way. What I have done is phone coaching, where I’m cautious to avoid certain kind of issues, just because there

419 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 are risks involved with going to certain places on the phone, where you don’t have as much physical presence. But I’ve done a lot of stuff, Mind Bending Language and Dynamic Induction, a lot of that stuff over the phone, really no problem at all. It’s great because you can work across the whole country. Actually, technically, you have a whole planet at your disposal that way, right? So, there is that available to you. I haven’t personally done it in coffee shops or restaurants, or stuff like that. Can it be done? Sure. Are there benefits to a public space? Sure. Downside is exactly that. Do you think someone is going to be willing to have a strong emotional outburst like a snake phobia, for example, in a public place? Less likely to happen, so, you can try it, but my instinct is that people are going to be more wary in public than in private. People like to keep their problems private, you know what I mean? But please don’t think that I’m telling the gospel truth. Just try your own way out. I could be dead wrong about that. It could be a new age, a new dawn of hypnotherapy. Go ahead. Just stand up, so we can get a mic over here. Q:

In addition to liability insurance, to protect and separate yourself, do you see a lot of hypnotists setting up LLCs or separate companies, so it’s an identity beyond yourself?

Igor: Right. Once again, that’s where you’ve got to get legal advice. I would probably get arrested if I tried to give legal advice here. As a rule, it’s good to put those things in. Here’s the way you look at it, right? To be a hypnotherapist, you’re wearing two hats at the same time. 1. One is the hat of a therapist, who does the work. That’s primarily what we’ve focused on over the last week or so. That make sense, yes? 2. The other hat is that of a business owner, and exactly the same things that any business owner has to think about, you will have to think about. You’ll have to think about a venue. You’ll have to think about insurance. You’ll have to think about your taxes. Alright? The tax man is the only one who can put you in jail for not paying your debt, right?

420 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 You’ll have to think about the red tape. Different states, different counties, different local jurisdictions have different requirements in order to be able to open a business. So, those requirements do not go away. You must inform yourself. I think most places have a business network or business advice bureau. A lot of places have these things. Sit down with someone there. Tell them what you want to do, and they’ll hopefully help you build that up, or go see a lawyer. They’ll help you build it up in a way that’s going to work for you. Right? A lot of hypnotherapists just go gung-ho. They just see the clients. That’s fine, it works, but it’s just a question of if you’re not doing it with the ambit of what you’re supposed to be doing legally, if there’s ever a problem, that escalates the problem. So, why get yourself into trouble in the first place? Right? Thank you for sharing that. So, the whole setting up your practice is pretty straightforward, isn’t it? Yes?

Contraindications

Igor: What I want to look at now is contraindications, in other words, who you should and should not work with. If you want to look at this, you don’t have to, it’s all in here anyway, it’s on page 72 for you. As a rule of thumb, if you have any doubts about working with someone, don’t work with them. You do not have to work with every client that comes through your door. You do not. You are more than permitted to refer people on. That’s one of the biggest mistakes I made when I started off, was I kept trying to work with everyone and say yes to everyone, because I wanted to help everyone. I actually helped fewer people by trying to help everyone, than when I learned to refer on or say no, right? If your client is in the wrong state of mind like, for example, you make this change and going, “Yes, you know, just do your thing”, they’re really in the wrong frame of mind for this, right? There’s no psychological energy that you have to work with.

421 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 One of the single biggest lessons I ever learned, and we go much more into depth with that with the Making a Lot of Money Master Class, is learn to fire your clients, right? If they’re not in the right state of mind, they’re just like, “Yeah, yeah, sure, I’m going to do it”, and “Just do your thing, I’m sure it’ll work”, or they’re like, “Yeah, I want you to just hypnotize me to stop this, but I really kind of like it still.” Or, this is the best one. “My wife made me come.” Fire your client. Right? Don’t waste your time, don’t waste their time. Be polite about it. Leave the door open. And what you’ll find is that most people you try and fire will totally change their attitude and they will stay, but now in a very different frame of mind. Right? Some will leave, and that’s just fine, right? But, if they’re in the wrong mind set to start with, then whatever you’re about to do, the chance of it working are slim to none anyways, so you’re about to engage in an expensive process of wasting everyone’s time. Right? So, fire your client. Your results will go up. Your hassle will go down, and you’ll be far happier as a result. The next thing you want to do is… (phone rings) Oh, is that for me? The next thing you want to think about is–we’ll talk about the client intake sheet in a moment–there’s certain conditions you want to be careful about. You want to be sure you get a medical referral letter, right? What kind of conditions? Well, we’ve got heart conditions, clinical depression, pain, diabetes, epilepsy, pregnancy, asthma, or if they’ve been in a doctor’s care in general. Here’s why. Let’s once again use the regression as an example. If someone has a heart condition, and you stimulate their phobia and it’s a strong as the one you saw up here, what do you think the risk is, in terms of their health? You can put a strain on the heart. Do you want to have to resuscitate someone who’s just passed out, and then explain to the police why someone had a heart attack in your office? Right? You need a medical referral. The doctor has to say, “Sure, this person can work up to this point, but if it gets really kind of intense, then you can’t do it”, and let the doctor make that decision. It’s not your decision to make, right? Otherwise, you’re prescribing things and that’s not so good. Just stand up, we’ll get a mic to you over here. It’s coming over here on this side. Q:

You know, heart attacks are the silent killer. What if they die in your chair?

422 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: I wouldn’t scare yourself with these things. Life happens, right? You could ask yourself, what if I’m driving my friend to the airport and they die in my car? So, those things can happen in any fork of life, and as rare in hypnotherapy as somewhere else. If someone has a heart condition, right? If they don’t know about it, how does anyone know about it? You could– Q:

That what I said, it’s the silent killer.

Igor: Right, exactly. So if you don’t know about it, then why worry about it? Right? You would do exactly the same thing you would do in any other place. If you run a restaurant and someone dies in your restaurant, you don’t know about it. It’s not your fault. It happens, it’s life. So there’s really zero reason to concern yourself about something that you have zero control over. What we’re talking about here is how can you practice as safely as possible? Does that make sense to you guys? Did you still want to add something, or you can just stand up. Just add a microphone over here, please. Did you see where I’m going with this? You could go through “what ifs” until the cows come home, and you could scare yourself silly, right? What if an airplane comes crashing into my clinic and I get sued for it, right? I’m exaggerating, but you see where I’m going with this? Focus only on those things that anyone could reasonably ask you to be predictive about or … negligence has to do with someone who could have prevented something, but didn’t. That’s where your negligence is, right? If you could never prevent it in the first place, there’s nothing to think about. Go ahead. Q:

What about epilepsy?

Igor: We’ll talk about these in order. We’ll go through them one by one. It’s on the list. Q:

It’s on the list?

Igor: It’s on the list. So you get the idea of the heart condition, yes? Let’s look at clinical depression. Now, this is a tricky one. Here’s why. I don’t know if you realize this, but most psychiatric evaluations are based on something call the DSM-4. It’s basically a document where a bunch of psychologists get together and they vote on whether they’d like this to be a new

423 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 disease or not. Right? There is really no data behind it. It’s just a whole bunch of psychologists think, “You know what? Let’s have a new problem as this. If people have this and they have this problem.” That’s how it works. Clinical depression sits really in the amorphous thing. If someone comes in and they’re feeling blue, are they depressed? That’s what we call it, right? If a psychiatrist or a psychologist has evaluated it, now they’re going to a very different stream. They’re going to a medical stream, and now you have to be cautious because of legal reasons, right? So, if they’re just being blue, by all means, work with them. If they have been diagnosed with clinical depression, the two issues you have is: 1. You need to have a doctor’s referral to say you can work with them, just to cover your own backside. 2. If it is actually more than just general depression, but has been diagnosed as clinical, because they feel like it–and by the way, you cannot diagnose that. You can’t say, “Oh, I think you have this.” You will go straight to jail. You will not collect $100 no matter…in most countries, right? So, in some instances, when people have more severe forms of depression, they will re-evaluate everything they hear. All the information will be reevaluated in a negative way. So, for example, going down, deeper, deeper, down. Can you imagine someone taking that as an instruction to get even more unhappy about things? On those extreme cases, you’ll be very careful about your suggestions. Get more training and so on. Here’s the beauty of it. Those people are really easy to spot. Within two minutes, you’ll know exactly what’s going on, because they are responding in abnormal ways. It is not a normal conversation you’ll be having, before you even get anywhere near the idea of hypnosis, right? So, if in doubt, refer out. When we talk about clinical depression here, we’ve got those two potential streams. On the one side, they have a diagnosis. As soon as there’s a diagnosis present, they’re in the medical stream and you must work within that medical stream, purely to safeguard your own self.

424 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 If their behavior is abnormal, in other words, you spoke to most people in this room and everyone here is normal, conscious, lucid. Different ideas, different directions, right? But you have some people that’s like, this person is totally in a different planet. Or you talk to them and you think they’re really going off on a weird tangent here. You don’t work with those people. That’s a specialist case. Can you work with them? Absolutely. Get more training, get more experience, for that kind of person. Do you see where I’m going with this? Again, this is not rocket science. Stand up, we’ll get a mic to you. This is not rocket science, but it is important that you take care of the people that are coming through your doorsteps, and you’re working with those you can help, not the ones that you cannot. Q:

Hi. We are in a society where everyone puts everything on Yelp, and some of the other places on the internet. So say you pass them on and they get all mad. “Oh, you know, she wouldn’t even do me, because she thought within ten minutes… I don’t know something happened, so she referred me to somebody else, so I don’t recommend her, because she’s just…” And then you have the Yelp on the Google, and people are always looking at that.

Igor: You see, I understand where you’re coming from. It’s rare for it to happen. If you’ve managed conversation with H+, right? Most people tell you … you don’t tell someone, “You know what? I don’t like you. I’m not going to work with you.” That may be the H minus way of dealing with it. We’ll come over there in a second. The way I’d recommend you work with this, you say, “Look, we’ve talked for a little while. I’ve got more of an idea where you’re coming from now. What I recommend you do is, that you talk to this person here. They’ll be much better at working with the kind of thing that you’re presenting than myself.” Right? And people respect you for referring them on, right? Let’s put it this way. Let’s say you came to me for, I don’t know, foot control, whatever that means, right? And we start talking and you say, “Oh, my feet”, whatever … “Oh, let me just pause you there, I’m the hand control expert. My friend down the road, he does feet. Do you mind if I refer you on over there, because he’s going to be able to help you much better than I can.” So it’s just

425 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 how you manage the conversation. Over there. Over here, and then we’ll come to the back. Right in the back, we’ll come to you in a second. Go ahead. Q:

Okay, it may be just a terminology difference, when you say medical referral, you mean medical clearance from the physician? Because you know.

Igor: Exactly. Q:

In practice, most of the physicians.

Igor: Yes, when we say referral, I don’t mean like the doctor says, “Oh, you should go see this hypnotist” I mean, you will ask your client, “Please talk to your doctor or psychiatrist, psychologist, whoever’s care you’re under, tell them that you’re intending to come to me for this particular problem, and ask them to write me a letter saying that.” Q:

It’s okay.

Igor: That they are happy for me to work on these issues, despite the fact that you’ve put down on your medical form that you have these other issues as well. Like, for example, a heart condition. The doctor can write a letter saying, “I am aware of so-and-so’s heart condition. I think it’s within normal acceptable parameters for you to work with them on these conditions” and so on. Q:

And another question. In your practical experience, have you had any real medical referrals, a physician asking a client to go see a hypnotherapist? Because we don’t see that around where I practice.

Igor: No, it doesn’t happen very often. Q:

It doesn’t.

Igor: Basically what happens is, you have a handful of physicians–a handful of medical doctors, who really have faith in the process of hypnosis, hypnotherapy and so on. Either they practice it and just do it themselves, or they will happily refer to local people to the extent that they won’t get in trouble with their own regulatory body. Most people in the medical community have no time for this, because they’ve been educated in the chemical paradigm, and they’re just looking for “What drug can I give this person?”

426 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

That’s right.

Igor: It’s just the current politics of the game, I guess. Q:

Thank you.

Igor: Go ahead. Q:

So, speaking of the medical paradigm, we live in a society where an awful lot of people are taking a SSRIs or other forms of antidepressant. How do you work with them and do you–

Igor: If they’re on any kind of medication, you need to, once again, get a medical referral, and one of two things is possible. Either the medication will prevent you doing the work–for example, if someone’s on an antidepressant, it’s going to be very difficult to do work with them, because you can’t plug into the problem. The whole point of the medication is to put a blanket and dampen down the problem, so they can’t access it. So it’s hard to work with it, right? It’s like locking the door to the sad room. You can’t get the paint in there. So, you need to ask the doctor to essentially give permission for a reduced intake of whatever medication they’re on, or to actually pause the medication entirely, for a period of time to do the work in. If they say no, you can’t work with that person, right? However, just suppose again, there’s other medication. If you don’t know what that means, just talk to the doctor and inquire about it. If it does not interfere with the process, just carry right on into your process. Does that kind of make sense? Q:

Yes, so as part of your intake, you’re saying, “Are you on any medications?”

Igor: Absolutely. Q:

Okay.

Igor: Basically, the cover all position is, “Have you been under a physician’s care, or doctor’s care, in the past year or so? Please give details.” Right? If they’re on medication, then they’re under doctor’s care. If they don’t tell you, then you can only be held accountable for things that you fail to do, if they’re reasonable. It’s

427 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 unreasonable to get you to do like a 20 hour manhunt to know everything about this person’s life, to see if they’re lying to you on your intake form or not. See how that works? Go ahead. Can we have a microphone over here please? Is this kind of stuff helping, guys? All:

Yes.

Igor: Okay. Q:

With regard to the medical referral, would you demand that for the client who comes to you to work on an issue like sexual drive, or erectile dysfunction?

Igor: If they haven’t seen a doctor previously, no. It’s just straightforward hypnotherapy. If they have, and they’re in the care of someone in the medical community, they’re in that medical stream, then the answer is yes, pure and simply because you run the risk of being accused of trying to practice medicine or diagnose, anything like that. So if they just say, “I’ve been having a problem having sex recently, can you help?” No worries. If they fill out the form, and they’ve not been under a doctor’s care, or anything like that, go right ahead. If, on the other hand, they’ve seen a doctor about it, to be safe–again, some countries are more relaxed than others, but to be safe–ask the doctor is it okay? Otherwise, you just risk opening a door. It’s just safer. Most of this stuff is to protect you. Some of it is to protect them. Does that make sense to you guys? Yes? So, one last question. These are all pretty much the same kind of questions, so if they keep repeating, we may pause them at this point. Q:

Thanks. As a prescriber myself, let’s say that I’ve worked with a lot of people on drugs, SSRIs and similar medications, using hypnotic type work, it’s worked pretty well–

Igor: Okay, great. Q:

With former clients and so, it’s not a … you just need to step carefully.

428 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: Exactly. It’s just a question of realizing that if it interferes with your work, you can’t ask them to stop taking these things, the doctor has to do that. And a lot of medication doesn’t interfere, so you just carry right on. Q:

Yes, because usually the people you’re seeing have got ongoing depression and traumatic issues and so on, so it works, is what I’m saying. I guess the other thing, I just wanted to point out was risk. So when you mention clinical depression, what people need to be very careful of is anyone who might be at risk.

Igor: Say again? Q:

Risk of self-harm. Suicidal risk.

Igor: Yes, exactly. Q:

That’s the key issue.

Igor: Now you’re in a more extreme scenario and, once again, you can tell those people very clearly, very easily, from the conversation. Until you have the right experience for that, the right kind of training for that, don’t deal with those things. Right? You don’t have to solve every problem with every person. These are bigger issues. The same material can still work there, but you need experience before you can get there. Does that make sense? This is just common sense stuff, isn’t it? Thank you. Appreciate that. There was a hand here. Has that gone down? One hand here, then one hand there, and we’ll just call it quits, because we’re really kind of cycling around the same idea, basically. Q:

Because of all these other questions and reasons, would you recommend doing like a 20 minute free talk session, just to see what the rapport is like, or–

Igor: I used to do that. I did that. And some people don’t like to do that. You can experiment. Just try what works for you. Q:

Okay.

Igor: Over here, this lady in the red. Just stand up, so we can get a mic to you.

429 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

I just want to say that I actually run a busy clinic and this referral thing is powerful, because it really presents you as a professional. I have doctors and nurses that come to me, refer to me, and the more you ask for doctors’ permission, they start to be like, “Oh”, because so many people in our field, they’re scared of that, or “Doctors don’t like me”, or whatever. So when you’re actually saying, “Hey, I have this person here, I want to know that you know that they’re in my clinic,” they start thinking of you in a different way. It’s huge.

Igor: Yes. Q:

I do this a lot.

Igor: So, we can move on to the next point here? It’s pretty much … you get where we’re going with this, right? It’s pretty much a simple idea. Do it, it’s good practice. Let’s move on. In terms of the other things here, we want to look at each one a little bit, just to get a sense of what the risks are. What is the risk with pain? Why would you not want to work with pain without a referral? Any ideas? Because pain is a signal from the body that something’s wrong, right? If you ignore the signal, it can get worse. Right? What if it’s a tumor and they could have been rescued then, but now six months down the line, it’s too late, right? What if they have a back injury that they didn’t even realize they had. You get rid of the pain, a few weeks down the line, they can’t walk anymore. Do you see the risks involved? So, with pain, as a rule, do not work with pain unless you have a medical referral. It’s good for you and it’s good for them. It’s pretty straightforward, right? Diabetes, what do you think the risk with diabetes is? Blood sugar, right? So, there’s two things with diabetes. 1. Medical referral. It’s a medium one, depending on what sort of range. If it’s extreme diabetes, you definitely want a medical referral. Sometimes it’s enough just to know it, and ask them, you’ve been training in terms of taking insulin and watching stuff. “Make sure when you come, you have all your equipment with you,” and we warn them, “When we go through a session, sometimes it can be very intensive. You’ll be using a lot of energy, so be it’ll be kind of line you’ve gone for a run or something like that, so whatever you

430 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 need to have present to make sure that you’re in a balanced place, make sure you have it with you in the office.” Right? This is kind of a midstream one. 2. For extreme diabetes, absolutely, get a medical referral. For your day to day variety, because normal people have it, just make sure they have their equipment with them, their insulin, whatever else, maybe some glucose tablets, whatever they take to keep themselves balance. You’re not prescribing anything. You’re asking them to bring along whatever they routinely have anyways, because they get to take care of themselves. Again, it should be straightforward, right? Epilepsy. Now this is an interesting one. There is a myth in the hypnosis community that you can trigger an epileptic fit with hypnosis. It’s a myth, completely. The only way you will trigger an epileptic fit with hypnosis is if you hypnotically present to them the stimulus that would otherwise cause epilepsy. For example, if someone is triggered by lights, you know, the strobe lights, and you take them to a happy place, like a night club with strobe lights, going, “Yeah!”, the chances of accidentally triggering an epilepsy are pretty high, right? If you stay clear of the stimuli that trigger the epilepsy, the only reason for them having an epileptic fit would be as random as it would be in normal day to day life. Here’s the good news. Most epileptics know exactly what set them off because, let’s face it, experience has taught them, right? The problem is, this is not really commonly known. So, for safety’s sake, it’s still worth getting that medical referral. Does that make sense, everyone? And of course, you’re on notice to find out exactly what not to do in a session, because if you trigger them off, then you’re 100% to blame for that one. That’s totally on you. Does that make sense, everyone? An interesting aside, by the way, a lot of epileptics can be taught with hypnosis and so on, to become sensitive to the onset phenomena before an actual full fit occurs. There are some warning signs. They can be very subtle, but they can actually learn to recognize those warning signs, so they can remove themselves, either so they can be somewhere safe, or so they actually diminish the likelihood that it actually triggers to a full blown fit. That’s just an interesting aside. If you’re

431 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 interested more on that, go educate yourself. Again, like many other things, it’s a specialist topic. Okay? Pregnancy. What’s the risk with pregnancy? Complications of the pregnancy, right? Stress. Is it a good thing to stress out a pregnant mother? No, so there’s the chance they’ll be stressed out in the session because of the stuff that comes up. So exactly the same things, right? As a rule, the earlier the pregnancy, the more immune they are to these issues, but you don’t get to make that diagnosis. A doctor makes that diagnosis. Right? Asthma, what’s the risk on that one? You can trigger an asthma attack, right? Again, if it’s just a run of the mill, every day sort of asthma, make sure they bring their equipment. Inhaler, whatever else they need. You ask them if there’s anything that sets it off in particular. Here’s an example of a doctor that had a great learning moment, when he had an asthmatic come in. He brought him to this wonderful, happy place of relaxation, this beautiful green field, of course. The grass pollen set him off. The poor boy started to asphyxiate. Luckily, the doctor was smart enough to whip him up in a helicopter, take him up the clouds where the air was cleaner and purer. Logically, by the way, in reality, there’s less air up there, but the kid didn’t know that, and that saved his life, right? So, if they’re asthmatic, find out the triggers, avoid the triggers. If they’re stronger asthmatics, get a medical referral for exactly the same reason as we’ve already discussed. Do you want to stand up and we’ll get a mic to you? Q:

As a former asthmatic, I see the lesson immediately emotional, just with the idea that this could be used to help. Have you worked with it? Is there anything that you see like, do you usually need the regression part of it? Is there some typical things that happen with asthma, to help it.

Igor: Personally, I have not worked with asthma, so I can tell you what I would do. I would basically sit there and spend some time exploring. The key ideas I want to explore around it, what can the body do to prevent the attack in the first place? Especially like stress-induced and so on, you can do a lot of de-stressors so that they don’t get triggered that way. I’d do things like Non Awareness Set that probably would teach an unconscious mind to make them immune to stimulus

432 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 more, but I really can’t tell you what I’d do until I’m actually in a situation to experiment. The one thing I can tell you is I would be very cautious to be make sure there’s lots of safety in place. Not just them feeling safe, but things like the inhaler. If it’s a more serious form of asthma, I’d want a medical professional present, and they’d have to sign a consent form, realizing that this is exploratory and that they may need medical intervention afterwards. You have to think about the whole shebang. Does that make sense? Q:

Yes.

Igor: I haven’t personally worked with any asthmatics on that issue, so I can’t really tell you beyond that, I can tell you how I would explore the area and get my instincts refined, but you can bet one thing. I would be asking one question a hell of a lot. All:

What’s happening?

Igor: Exactly. That will be coming out every few seconds, just to keep track of what’s happening there. Make sense? Q:

Thank you, yes.

Igor: Then right back here again, you want to go around and pick it up again? Q:

I just have–I guess it’s a sort of related question. Would you say that some of these tools that we’re learning … I mean, in a way, I know the answer is yes, but would you be able to elaborate on potentially ways, for example, using reintegration, to find resources to clear out the … for example, with asthma. If you feel an attack coming on, and you’re in a problem area, for example, a big green field–

Igor: I see where you’re going with this. Here’s a simple answer. You do what you’ve been trained to do here. You start and you let things evolve, because there is no way you can know ahead of time what’s going to happen. You just let them evolve and if you find your H+ is strong, you will learn from each interaction. Beyond that, anything I say right now would only confuse things further, because I would interject with your own instincts and what I’m about to say may be completely wrong with that particular client in place.

433 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 You have the right instincts. Start listening to them. Just start, treat the person with respect, learn from the experience, ask, “What’s happening now?” a lot and use your common sense. There’s no magic in this. If you’re getting close to a physical reaction, which would be the asthma attack or something, then recede from it, and maybe approach from a different angle, right? Q:

I sort of meant in terms of treating the asthma itself.

Igor: Once again, I have no instinct of it, because I haven’t done it. Q:

Alright, thanks.

Igor: I would love to give you answer, it’s just without doing it, I would just be telling you pie-in-the-sky. Right? So, are we good in terms of the medical referrals? You understand it’s important in the general practice and ethical practice of hypnotherapy, yes?

Client Intake Form

Igor: The next thing I want to talk about is the intake form. Right at the end of your manual, you’ve got a whole intake form as a sample. You can use this one, or you can make your own one up. It just gives you an idea and you’re getting the kind of information we’ve talked about. Medical history is important. There’s some other things important, like their name for the recordkeeping, the date of their session, so you can again keep your records clean and know when it was happening. You want to make sure the videotape and the intake form are easily to correlate, so you can have all the information on the person available should you need it. Other things can be useful. For example, if you get the date of birth, as a nice marketing part, a tool, and just to show that you care as a human being, what if you send your clients a Happy Birthday card, right? Make sure it hasn’t got like the Hypnotherapy Wellness Center written all over it, because if their partner doesn’t know they’ve turned up, then there’s going to be questions that are unwelcome being asked, right? So just send them the letter, or

434 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 if there’s any doubt, when you finish the session, say, “Look, I like to keep in touch with my clients. Is it okay if I send you a birthday card or Christmas card from time to time? There’s no obligation, I just love to keep in touch with people, and if it’s okay with you, I just want you to know that I’m still thinking of you and even though you may have left the session, I’m really wishing well for you.” See how that works? Now, in terms of the benefit for you, other than the fact that you’re a caring person, you’re staying in their mind. So when they now come to Auntie Imelda who’s got a foot control issue, they’re going to say, “Oh, you know what? I know just the person for you. In fact, I just got a card the other day, and where’s the address? Here you go, here’s their address. Go call this person.” See how that kind of thing works? Marital status, there may be some issues around that, that may be influencing whatever work you do. I don’t feel strongly about it, but it’s a good thing to note. You always want to find out how they heard about you. If you do not have any idea where your clients are hearing about you, where they’re coming from, then you have no business, right? You have hope, and that’s it. Right? You’re gambling. As soon as you ask the question, “How did you hear about us?” you will know where to put your time, your energy, and your money, because that’s working. You could be spending $1,000 in expensive newspaper ads that bring you nothing. Whereas, the $10 ad in your local news agent or your local deli, brings you hundreds of clients, right? At that point, you better believe you’re going to spend more time in that deli, and stop wasting your time with the newspaper, right? It’s just simple things. But if you don’t have the information, you cannot possibly do anything with it. You cannot possibly have any idea of what’s working for you. Right? Referrals, if someone refers someone to you, write and thank to them. Maybe, if they refer often, send them a gift. A bottle of wine, unless they’re alcoholics, in which case, don’t. But treat the people that refer to you well because, first of all, it’s nice to be appreciated. Just a nice letter is good to receive, and if they’re doing it a lot, well, we’ll hope that they keep going anyways, right?

435 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 You can also ask for referrals. Some hypnotherapists say, “Look, if the session was worthwhile for you, and so on, if there’s anyone you think could use a session like this, if you’d like me to contact them, I’ll be happy to do that, and let them know that you had a great time,” and so on. Some people will say yes, some people say no, but you know what? If you don’t ask, you will never know, right? With medical referrals, as this lady here was just saying, make sure you write and thank the doctor for his referral. Thank him either because they referred someone to you, or when they send a letter saying it’s okay to work with this patient, thank him for taking time to respond and promise to keep the doctor updated on their client’s progress. You’re not trying to steal the client from the doctor. Doctors are running businesses too. You’re going to keep them updated on their client’s progress, so now you’ve become a solution for the doctor. You’re the person they can send people to they have no idea what to do with, but they will not be losing their business practice because you’re taking them all away from them, right? You don’t want to sit and slag off doctors the whole day. “Oh, you shouldn’t be doctors”, right? You see where I’m going with this? It’s just, again, good business practice. Building relationships. Relationships are great places to get referrals from. We’ve talked about medications and stuff like that already. Just general Do’s and Don’ts. Don’t try to diagnose things. Don’t try and tell people what’s going on. Your job is to help them resolve their problem as easy as possible. Do not promise that you will resolve the problem, because you can never promise that. You have to give that fine line between developing hope and not promising something you cannot deliver, right? Just stand up and we’ll get a mic to you. Q:

It’s actually real short. Can you just do like money-back guarantees?

Igor: Oh, question is, can you do a money-back guarantee? There is a conflicting thought in the industry on money-back guarantees. I think guarantees, as a general principal, are fantastic. The problem with a money-back guarantee is, you are rewarding someone for failing. Right? Because they’re going to get cash back, and who doesn’t like having extra cash? My personal preference is to give a–in some circumstances, like smoking–to give a free session guarantee. In other words, if, for any reason, you start smoking

436 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 again, then you’ll come back and I’ll work with you for free, right? Again, I won’t do it with all issues, because some of these, you just don’t know. It’s something you need to experiment with and decide what you’re comfortable with. Maybe a money-back guarantee works for you. I know people for whom it works great. My preference is not to, but … you know what I mean? Can we get a microphone over here? Folks, just stand up and we’ll get a mic to you. If you just stand up, they’ll come over. Q:

As far as if you get a doctor referral, how much information can you give back to them about your work with the client?

Igor: Well, it’s the doctor’s patient, if it’s got relevance to that. If there’s any doubt, what you do is you put a little section on your intake box saying that you can provide all details of the session to their medical practitioner. Problem solved. Right? That’s a simple way of doing that. Alright, so far, so good?

First Session/Phone Call

Igor: We’re going to deal with a couple of things very quickly. First of all, client comes in and you ask them, what? Client sits in their chair, what you ask? It’s your magic question, right? Gets the ball rolling, right? At that point, they say whatever they do. Where do you begin? What do you do? Right, you’ll start with your little blitz and you go into the Mind Bending Language. If some emotion comes up–you’ve got that very simple thing to go through. The only thoughts that you have is: 1. Did I set my parameters, my context up properly? Right? 2. Do I have their trust? 3. Do I have some compliance from them? 4. Do I know what the problem is?

437 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 5. Do I have a specific example of it? 6. Do I have a rough idea of what they want instead? Then, you just start talking to them. That’s it, you talk to them in a caring, heartfelt manner. You will not be able to help but let these things slip out. If you don’t follow the technique, who cares? If they get better and are thanking you at the end, who honestly cares? Right? This is a very simple progression. You only need to know how to start, and the beauty is you can start exactly the same way with everyone. Then the rest, as soon as they respond to something, which they will, the ball starts rolling. Do you see how that works? So, the two things I’m going to deal with at this point, before we kind of finish up with this whole thing is, number one, when does the session actually begin? All:

With hello.

Igor: First point of contact, and when is that most likely to be? Any ideas? All:

Phone call.

Igor: On the phone call, exactly. They’re going to call you to ask about a session. Now how you handle this phone call will determine how well you eat that week. (Laughter) It will. Here’s what, unfortunately, a lot of hypnotherapists do. I know, because I’ve called them. You call up, ring-ring, they pick it up, they go, “What?” Or they’ll go, “How can I help you?” A little bit better, instead of being a little more professional and introduce themselves, “The Wellness Center. How can I be of service?” or “How can I help you?” Right? Watch your tonality. Watch your H+. Because if you are off on the first contact and someone’s in the middle of their problem because they’re afraid to talk about it, but they want to get some help, and they get someone saying, “The Wellness Center, how can I help you?”, are they likely to open up to you? No, so, keep that in mind. Overall, it’s very tempting to have answering machines and all this sort of stuff, just realize that virtually no one leaves an answer. For every answer you have on an answering machine, there will be 10, 15, 20 clients who just hang up. So you’re losing a lot of potential clients. How do you deal with that? Well, either be on the phone all day, or if you can afford to hire someone to answer the phone, that’s fantastic. Make sure you train

438 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 them so they’re actually answering it properly. There are virtual assistants that will take phone calls for you. Again, you can train them. You can give them a little phone script and they’ll handle all the calls very professionally. They’re not too expensive. Just do an online search. Some people who are like a husband and wife team will have one person doing the work, whilst the other person is taking bookings and then they’ll switch, or they’ll keep those roles constant. If you have a family member, for example, who is like a stay at home mother, for example, they might be willing to take calls for you. You may give them something, or you just show a lot of love and appreciation. The whole point of this is to say the phone call that is not picked up by a human being is very, very rarely going to turn into a client coming to sit in your room. Does that make sense? That’s just the industry standard, just so you know. Can we have that microphone over there, please? Q:

Can you ask them if they’re under medical care or taking prescription drugs during that phone call?

Igor: Sure, you can do all that on the phone. Q:

So that you’re not making an appointment, having them come in and then going, “Oops”.

Igor: Hey, what do you think? Q:

I would think yes, but at the same time, this is also your first point of contact and it’s like, “Yeah, so are you taking antidepressants?”

Igor: It’s just a question of framing. Let’s go through the idea of how you handle the phone call first, and I’ll show you where I would put that sort of thing in. Make sense? Is that useful? There are certain things you want to talk about, and if you look at page 70, we have a little script. I’d like to talk you through the principles involved, so you understand how to handle those calls. Yes? What is your guess? What is the first thing you’re likely to hear from a client, when you say, “The Wellness Center, or the Hypnotherapy practice, how can I help you?” What do you think the first thing is you’re going to hear?

439 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 All:

How much?

Igor: First of all, “can you?” Then, “how much?” Then, “how long?” Those are the three questions. “Can you deal with X” and “how much will it cost?” Occasionally, they’ll ask, “how long does it take?” Those are the three big questions they’ll ask. And “can you deal with X” and “how much does it cost”, those are by far the most common questions. You need to handle all those questions very carefully. For example, “can you deal with X?” Yes, I can solve that easily. Cure it, no problem. Just right up, gone. Done. You’ll love it. Can you say that? No, because you have no idea. Right? There are too many variables. There’s too much uncertainty in any change work to be able to say that. So, you have to be able to present an air of confidence without promising something you can’t deliver, right? Some of the things you could say, for example, is if you have seen clients with that kind of issue before, say, “Yes, I’ve seen quite a few clients like that, and so far, we’ve had great results.” Right? So, it puts them on notice that you get great results, it’s based on experience, but you’re not promising or over-promising something. Another approach might be to say, “Oh, well, we use a specialist process that is perfect for this kind of condition”. It gives them faith, but you’re not actually saying that it will resolve it. Do you see the difference? And by the way, for most things people come in with, don’t you have a process that is perfect for that kind of condition? Because it’s perfect for almost any kind of condition. Right? Then you’re going to ask certain questions. You want to get them engaged in the process. So notice how we haven’t addressed the whole price issue. If they insist on price, if they say, “Well, how much does it cost?” the way I would handle it is somewhere along the lines of saying, “In order to answer that question, I need to know a little bit more about what’s going on. Can I ask you a few questions?” Right? It seems very reasonable, doesn’t it? So now, I can get them engaged in the conversation, and establish the value of the service I’m going to provide, right?

440 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 If someone says, “Can you cure phobia?” and I say, “Sure”. They say, “How much?” “A hundred bucks.” “Thank you very much.” Click. Not really a useful conversation, because all they’re going to do is, the next person says $75.00, they’ll go to them. It’s based on price. They have no idea what they’re getting, right? I want them to understand what they will be receiving, so they have this sense of faith in the process, shall we say. So, the first question is usually, “How did you hear about us?” Any ideas why? Marketing. You’ve got to know what’s working, right? This one’s for you. The next one is interesting. “Are you calling for yourself, or on someone else’s behalf?” Most people are calling for themselves, however, they’ll pretend it’s for someone else, right? Because it distances it. They’re afraid of a hard sale or a pitch, or anything like that. Right? So they say it’s on someone else’s behalf, you can still run through the rest of it, you just notice in the back of your mind that they’re still a bit more hesitant. Sometimes, they’ll come around at the end and admit that it was for them because they got excited about what you had to say. Sometimes not, but you can play with that a bit. If you can get them to admit that it’s for themselves, it also prevents them from coming up with excuses later on saying, “Oh no, I was just finding out for a friend.” That excuse is now gone, because they’ve already admitted up front that they’re looking for themselves. Right? The next step is to ask three to five … you know, a bunch of simple questions about their problem. Any ideas why? Any ideas? It gets them engaged. It plugs them into the problem. They start to realize how much this problem sucks. They don’t want this problem, right? If they’ve dissociated from it, they’ll go, “Oh, well, you know $100.00, it could buy an ice cream, I could solve the problem. I don’t really feel the problem. I’ll have the ice cream.” Right? On the other hand, if they’re in the problem going, “This feels real bad. You know what? Screw the ice cream, I just want to solve this.” So, ask three to five questions about that. How long, how often, how bad, symptoms, that sort of stuff. Get them plugged into it, so they realize what they have to gain, or what they stand to lose from not resolving this, right?

441 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 The next question is, again, one that is gently going to start prodding them towards action. One of the most difficult things a client will ever do is make a decision, especially to see a hypnotherapist. There’s so many hurdles. 1. Some people are just indecisive anyways. 2. If they’re in their problem, they’re un-resourceful, so finding the resource enough to actually make a clear decision or to make a good decision, well, that’s the whole point of the issue, right? 3. I’ve forgotten about and I’ll come back to it as soon as it comes back. They have difficulty making decisions, so you’re going to help them along. Is it for you, or for someone else? Great. Well, let me ask you a few questions about the problem. What’s happening here, what’s happened there, this thing or that thing. “How long have you smoked? How often? Since what age? Those sort of questions. Now, let me ask you this. When were you wanting to resolve this problem?” Well, the real answer is now. It’s just they don’t realize it. Right? If you have a problem, do you want to solve it in like a year or two’s time? Again, you’ve got to remind them why they bothered to call you. Because they’re scared. Right? Now that you’ve engaged them in the process, your next step is to give them something to be excited about, to give them hope. So you’re going to basically tell them about how your hypnosis is different to Joe Average hypnosis, right? So you want to start talking about the processes you have. “Well, here in this clinic, we have the unique Ledochowski Protocol. It’s a European method.” It adds value though, doesn’t it? Right? You can talk a little bit about those things. You’ve got some ideas in here of the kind of stuff you can talk about, but really, what you’re trying to establish is that what you’re doing is somehow quicker, better, deeper, lasts longer than what the average standard is. Would it be fair giving you experiences right now? That what you have … the tools you have right now, are overall better, deeper, faster than the average standard. I admit, there are some phenomenal hypnotists out there. Phenomenal schools. Phenomenal therapists. But when you look at the average practitioner, what you now have is above average, right? So you need to think that through carefully, so you have a way of getting people to understand that what you have is special.

442 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Because when you have a special– let’s put it this way, if you have a heart problem and you need to go to a surgeon, would you rather go to the guy, you know, he’s okay, he just passed medical school and he’s just doing his thing, or the guy who’s the number one surgeon, who’s done more operations and knows more about this than anyone. He’s written the textbook everyone else learns from. Who would you rather go to? Right. But if you’re talking to them, you have no idea who’s who, right? Unless they tell you. “Well, you should realize, I’m the guy that wrote the textbook. You’re in a safe pair of hands here.” Right? So you need to let them know what they’ll be getting. What is special about you, so that they realize that they’re in a safe pair of hands. Right? So, a little bit of Conversational Hypnosis might be useful at this stage. The next thing you have to do is establish the value of what you’re doing, right? So, typically, they want to know how many sessions. You’ll say, “Right, for the kind of thing you have, we normally deal with that in two or three sessions, as a whole package, you’ll invest this much in resolving the issue.” Right? Give them some upfront expectations. Even if you can’t, say, “Look, this is our rate in terms of the session costs $150.00, $200.00,” whatever you want to charge per session. “My expectation or my experience is that this sort of thing can be dealt with in one or two sessions. I don’t expect it to go beyond that, but I can’t make any promises because every human being is different, and I want to treat you as you need to be treated, rather than as a tick in the box,” and so on. Do you see where we’re going with this? So you’ve given them an expectation of cost so they can make the evaluation. As part of the establishing of value, uniqueness is part of it. If you’re going to throw in any bonuses–people love bonuses, right? They’re like, “Oh, extra, free. Oooh, that’s great!” They get excited by that sort of stuff. In America now, it’s happening so often, they get disappointed when it doesn’t happen, right? So, it might be worth your having some bonus you can throw in there, right? Like a free CD to reinforce things. The guarantee they can come back if they need to, but be careful about how you phrase that. Right? You want to establish that as a value proposition, so that they get, “Oh, I see. I’m going to invest X. I will get Y in return. This is a fair deal.” Right?

443 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Then the final question really is, is the soft close, which is basically, “Does this sound like the kind of thing you’re looking for?” One of two things will happen. They’ll say, “Yes”, in which case, really they’re saying, “Book me up.” So I say, “Great. Did you want to book a session now?” Right? Or, “When would you like to come in and start resolving this?” If they say no, then politely, yes, ask them, “May I ask what your reservation is?” Right? If they say, “Oh, I don’t know, the price,” and whatever, at which point, you can help them see. “I realize the price is a little expensive, but just consider this. How much money do you spend on things that you really don’t need? There’s the extra pair of shoes, or the café latte that costs you $20.00 for an extra mocha-mocha on top, right? And compare that to how you actually feel when this problem comes up. So, we’re offering a professional service here, and just like a great doctor, you’ll pay a little extra for the best. The reason the fees are this way is because you’re paying for a quick result.” Right, and you’re going to help edge them towards a decision, because once again, people can be indecisive. You’re not pushing for the decision, and say, “Absolutely, I respect your desire, whichever way you go, that’s fine by me. I just want you to realize what it is that you’re getting into.” If they say, no, you basically want to find out what is the objection? Because either your offer isn’t attractive enough or they haven’t understood something, or, you’re really not offering anything of real value, in which case, you better buck up what you’re offering. Do you see how that works? So, you get this idea of the phone script. The processes involved, yes? I’m going to encourage you guys to really go through this and get a good feel for it, so that … you might even want to call each other on the phone, and be a practice client for each other, because the worst thing you can do is, “So, how did you hear about … us?” Right? That’s not a good conversation to have. You want to be so smooth in this that it’s a natural set of questions or interaction that you have. If you’re going to train someone to answer the phone for you, you train them in the exact same process and, once again, you’re going to have to call them up to test them. Get your friends to call them up as mock clients, without them realizing, to test that they’re actually doing it, right? It’s unfortunate but it’s true,

444 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 we’ve had some receptionists who were great at the training, and then got lazy, and it wasn’t until clients get back saying, “Your receptionist is a bit strange,” that I realized that they weren’t doing what I asked them to do. So, it doesn’t happen often, but find out. Test them. Keep the engagement going, because it is your business after all, and like any business owner, you have to work on your business to maintain it. Does that make sense to everyone? So now, you have everything in this magic yellow manual, and it’s inside you. You have basically everything you need to know in order to run a practice. The only thing that I’m going to encourage you guys to do, and this is something outside the scope of this training, just because of time issues and so on, the one thing that would be of greatest service to you at this point–how many people here want to be a professional hypnotherapist? Anyone? Okay.

Special Advice

Igor: The one thing that will be tremendous benefit to you is the one thing that virtually nobody in this room will want to do, is to learn marketing. Read about it. There’s hundreds of books on how to run a successful, professional services practice. There are people out there who will teach you how to fill your hypnotherapy practice. There are online courses, offline courses. There is information out there. I warn you, much of it will be useless. You’ll have to swim through the smelly parts to get to the nice parts. Right? I’m warning you right now, it’s just the nature of the game. However, please do not let that prevent you from searching this information out. I don’t even know, I was talking about this with Joe–Joe and I were talking about this the other day, I’m not sure what the numbers is, but something like 90% of hypnotherapists cannot afford to be fulltime hypnotherapists, and you know why? Because they can’t market themselves. They’re not making enough money. Think about all that wasted potential help that can be produced, right? So guys,

445 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 really educate yourself. Learn about how to write an ad in the paper. Would you like a little bit of advice on how to know when your ad board is better than not? Check out what other hypnotherapists are putting in the ads in the papers and so on. Whatever they’re doing is probably wrong. Right? I will virtually guarantee it. Think about it. If most hypnotherapists can’t make a living, then virtually all hypnosis ads you have ever seen are useless. So, copying the ads you’ve seen will not serve you, right? And this is a huge mistake. I have made it. I have wasted a fortune on these things. As I say, it’s beyond the scope of this training to talk about that right now, but educate yourself. Can we have a microphone over here? Educate yourself, learn how to write an ad. Learn how to be a little bit persuasive in your written word. Find out places that people can hear about you, and learn from these things. You’ll invest as much time in–would it be fair to say you’ve invested time, energy, effort, and cash, in being here. Is that correct? All:

Yes.

Igor: Invest as much time, energy and effort in learning how to build your business. Right? Am I making a point that seems rather strong here? It’s because I fervently hope that all the people who just put their hands up because you want to be a hypnotherapist, that you will be successful at it. I can guarantee you, or virtually guarantee you, that unless you are willing to learn the business aspects of it, and you’re willing to wade through the smelly parts of the set up phase, that it’s not a question of you put up a sign and people come streaming in. Some of you may be lucky. Most of you will not be lucky in that way. But business is a predictable beast, if you understand marketing. If you know how to write an advert, if you know where to place those adverts, how to negotiate the rates with the newspaper and so on, it becomes predictable. You know that X amount of effort and X amount of cash in this direction will get you this many clients and it becomes a simple mechanism, or a simple machine that churns out cash. Of course, you still have to do work at that point. Does that make sense to everyone?

446 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Who here is motivated to go out and learn about business and wade through all the useless stuff to get to the really good stuff? Okay, have I said that point enough? Because I can shut up. Go ahead. Q:

Am I on? Okay. In regards to marketing, when I was going to school to become a doctor, every weekend, I sought out a practice whose doctor was having an extremely successful practice, and I contacted the doctor and ask permission to become a little fly on the wall and watch what he was doing, to educate myself as to what’s working and what’s not. I did this every weekend for years. I encouraged my fellow classmates to do this as well, but nobody took me up on it. And Igor’s right. Because of that, he’s talked about hypnosis, but 90% of my classmates were either not practicing, or could not do their own private practice, so they joined the hospital staff or something like that. When I got graduated and started my practice, I already had a one month waiting list and as time went, I’ve always had two months’ waiting list and my practice not only went from local, I practiced in the old Beverly Hills areas in California, went international. I have no idea how the word got out into international. The only thing that I could think from listening to my patients, the first thing I ask new patients, “How did you hear about me?” And they would tell, “Well, so-and-so told me,” or “So-and-so’s friends, mothers, brothers, somebody told me,” and that’s … so, I did no … virtually no advertising at all. Nothing, and I think it was because I was always going to these various doctors’ offices to find out what’s working and what’s not, and I just kind of stole all that was working good and just incorporated it into what I wanted to do for my practice. So, there’s other avenues that are just free that you can go, just by asking permission.

Igor: Right. I noticed there was a lot of effort invested in doing that, right guys? I would like to give you a little expectation. This is not necessarily because I want to make a suggestion of evil hypnosis, but this is a fact of our industry. To start your own business–how many people have ever run their own business before? Right? Oh, that’s great, actually. You guys already know where I’m going with this. To start your own business, especially when it’s the first time you’ve started a business, takes effort. A lot of effort. You’ll have heartache. You’ll have problems, right? You’ll run against the wall and you’ll want to throw the towel in at one

447 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 point or another, right? If you educate yourself about how to run a business successfully, you can resolve those problems and have a very lucrative, successful business. But it will take effort, you will wade through smelly parts, and you will learn. You’ll learn from your experience. Please don’t give up. Just realize that if something isn’t working, you may need more education, more experience, more practice. Does that help everyone here? Do you get a sense of what to do with it? Please stand up, we’ll get some mics over here. Oh, did you have … just go ahead and… Q:

I’ve been fortunate to work with a lot of professional services, a lot of professionals developing their own companies, and the best lesson I was ever given and I hope that it’s valuable to some here, was a little story. Mmm, stories. This is the story of a woman walking down the street in Paris awhile back, a long while back, and she happens to notice Pablo Picasso sitting at a café, and she runs up to him and says, “Mr. Picasso, Mr. Picasso, could you please just give me a little sketch?” So he sits down and sketches something for her, and gives her back the napkin, and she looks at him and says, “What can I give you for this?” And he looks at her sternly and says, “50,000 francs”. And she says, “But 50,000 francs? It only took you a moment.” And he looks back and he says, “No, madam, it took me a lifetime.” Professional services, we’re not selling our hour, we’re selling the accumulated knowledge and professionalism that allows us to do the work in an hour that they have not been able to do in a lifetime. So that is valuable and when I’m coaching individuals, the biggest hindrance to starting their own practice, is for them, as individuals, to realize their value. So, I hope that everyone here realizes the value they’ve achieved already, and will continue to achieve throughout their practice.

Igor: Amen to that. That is a really important point. Thank you. Q:

That was great, wasn’t it? I have a question regarding the stop-smoking, because we were all told that stop-smoking is like the best way to start and you have your Master Class.

Igor: It’s the easiest, yes.

448 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

Yes, so what do you think about self-confidence and self-esteem as another product, or is that like, you can do that for free and after that day, it was not know.

Igor: Let me put it this way to you. I will tell you the two most lucrative programs, the ones that everyone is looking for already, and knows the hypnotist will do and will spend money on, are weight loss and stop-smoking sessions. Hands down. The next upcoming one seems to be past-life regressions. A lot of people are curious. They tend to be trans-voyeurs, tourists if you like, and whatever that is. I haven’t done much with that, so it’s just not my forte. Beyond that, I have seen people who are very busy, having fantastic practices, focusing on one niche or another. I can’t tell you what the niches are, because I haven’t built my practice in those ways. So, I couldn’t tell you. I’m sure that self-esteem and stuff like that are very important. Will people respond to that? Maybe, maybe not. That comes down to your marketing, your message, how you frame it, how you find the right people for it, and so on. That’s a big question. Is the potential in there? One hundred percent. Is that the answer? That’s a bigger question than we can handle here. Q:

My question really is I’m thinking about just giving, for free, self-esteem.

Igor: Oh, great one. Q:

And so that, from there–because that’s easy to do, isn’t it?

Igor: Sure. So, once again, if you do free consultations, free simple things, you can do like little seminars like where you go spend an evening somewhere, talking about people’s lack of self-esteem and so on, and do a little induction or whatever, and it feels good. You’ll sign up a lot of people, because now they’ve had experience of it. Anytime you give someone an experience of hypnosis, their faith in you rises. Remember the Magic Moments? That’s why I had them. Remember the Street Hypnosis? I had exactly the same effect, not even doing anything therapeutic, just by sticking someone’s hand to the wall, the table, whatever. People go, “If he can do that, do you think he can help me sleep better?” Because it all starts coming together. So yes, I think it’s a great idea to do your talks, go to your Rotary Clubs, go to local care homes. Talk to people about what you do, and

449 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 demonstrate. Give them a taste of it, and have your signup sheet ready so that they can make appointments there and then. Does that help? I think it’s a great idea. Next to you, just pass it right next to you. Oh, coming back the same way. There you go, and we’ll come over to you in a sec. Q:

Excellent, so, I actually coach people who are coaches and practitioners how to build a great practice, and I want to give you a couple of things, hopefully to get you started, that are hopefully hot. One of them is that this sales conversation is probably the most important thing you’ll ever learn. I think that’s where all your skills and your leads and everything you get meet the road.

Igor: Yes. Q:

And allow you to do your work. A couple of things to highlight that are in here, but I have–I teach a whole process and I want to give you a couple of other questions that kind of elicit some things in here. When you talk about how long, how severe, when and where the problem is, ask them, “And how does this impact you, and in what areas of your life does this impact?” I was thinking about Stephanie, if I can just use you as an example of what the real impact of that phobia was, was missed vacations and time with loved ones, or the fear of every day of walking your dog. So, you actually ask them those questions to help them step into how this impacts, and it may impact way and beyond … in their relationships, their finances, their health. This can be a really big thing.

Igor: That’s a great question. Q:

The other thing is, when you get–you can ask them then, “What would it be like when you don’t have this problem? What will having that do for you? How would that impact in other areas of your life as well?” That then, leads to what this gentleman was just saying so brilliantly as well. You’ll then be able to sell something on the value and not about time and how long it takes. You’re having them into the experience of what their life would be like without it. And I sell packages for thousands and thousands of dollars. For instance, I run a six figure practice myself. So this allows you to do that in a very different way, and one other thing I’ll say, I’ve helped a client get 350 clients at once with this

450 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 idea, and you may have heard of things called, like Groupon, or Living Social. There are local ones happening probably everywhere that you live, and you can get into those, offer a discounted session, to help you start up, and then if you develop a referral system within your business, to help those clients help you find other clients, you can get a huge wave at once, give you all the practice and experience you want, and build just a referral machine for you to go on from there. Igor: Thank you very much for sharing that, I really appreciate that. Pass it back to the side. Q:

Thanks, Igor. I met a very obscenely wealthy man about two years ago.

Igor: There’s nothing obscene about wealth. Q:

No, no. He was obscenely wealthy. I sat down with him, I spoke to him for awhile, and he gave me some really profound words. He simply said, “Lou, there is absolutely no money in the product or service that you offer. None whatsoever. All of the money is in the marketing.” And when I understood that, my business just changed. It was amazing. Very profound words.

Igor: Thank you for that. Are you all beginning to appreciate or look at your idea of being a hypnotherapist slightly differently now? Similar advice was given to me when I first started getting successful, because before that, I was clueless, which is, “You want to spend as much time working on your business, as you spend working in your business.” We’re focused primarily on how to work in your business here. Please put as much time and effort into working on your business, so you have a business to work in, right? Oh, one last question and then we’ll call it quits on this one. Q:

It’s just a really simple, easy marketing concept that I used to use to kick start other types of service businesses, is you get involved in a silent auction in a community, in a school, and you offer a session as part of the silent auction, and you put the price down, you know, $200. It’s worth $200 So somebody buys it, and it ends up being a really great source of referrals down the line.

Igor: Perfect. So, you all have some ideas and food for thought to get started with, and realize we spent what? Twenty minutes, half an hour, just bringing some of these

451 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 themes to life. Educate yourself. Read books, ask people who are successful, go out there, try stuff out, and experiment, explore with it. Put your time, your investment, your efforts into it, and hopefully, you’ll all be as successful as you are great hypnotists already. Alright? Realize it is 100% possible. You just need the right kind of lessons, the right kind of learnings, and you’ll be able to apply them in the right kind of way. At that point, you’re really on Easy Street. Now, what’s going to happen now is this. In a moment, we’ll have a break for lunch for an hour and a quarter. Go relax as best you can, eat food, that sort of stuff. Then, at 1:35-ish, 1:40-ish, or a quarter to, whatever, we’ll decide a time in a minute, we’ll come back here, we’ll all collect as a group again. When we collect as a group, I’ll run you through what’s expected of you for your certification program. I’ll run that through with you right after lunch. What I’d like for you to do over lunchtime is find someone in this room that you’d like to do your certification process with. You’ll be doing at least one induction, because we need to be seeing you doing hypnosis, right. So, get together with a partner, someone that you–don’t do it right now–someone you want to be doing that certification process with and make sure that when you come back, you sit next to each other when we get back, so when I run you through your exam, the example of what you’re all about and so on, you can go straight into the whole process. I will tell you this much. The exam lasts two hours and you’re all more than capable of everything that will be asked of you. Beyond that, have a nice lunch, and be back here at 1:40.

452 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2

Certification Process

Please Note: The certification process below applies ONLY to participants of the live seminar. Anyone wishing to certify as a hypnotherapist must attend a live course and pass the requisite examination.

Igor: There’s a few empty chairs. A few people have drowned their miseries maybe, jumped off overboard. Exams, oh no! Everyone feeling their little butterflies? Yeah? Good for you. Q:

I said I wasn’t until you just suggested it.

Igor: I’m only a hypnotist. So, who had a good lunch, anyone? All:

Yeah! Woo!

Igor: Who managed to eat, anyone? Few less hands. So, what we’re going to do right now is talk a few moments about the certification process that you’re about to engage in, and then you will engage in it. So, as soon as the certification process begins, I would like for you to take your partner somewhere, anywhere in this room, so you can take all the outside edges, and sit down. We’ll be doing the work that we’re about to talk about. You will each have one hour a piece. It’s a two hour exam in total. In that one hour, I’m going to want you to do three pieces of work. The first piece of work, and these are all going to be on low level stuff. 1. The first piece of work is–you can write this down if you want, but it’s not going to be very difficult to remember–is a Hypnotic Blitz. Do you all remember this one? Just find out what the problem is, find all the other resources that are missing, and just go to town, rant away. Right? 2. The second piece of work I want you to do, is any one of the three dynamic exercises. What are those again? Exactly, DMI and you all know what I mean by these things, right? Non Awareness Set, NAS, MBL and so on, right? That’s

453 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 try that… well, actually, that’s probably a better way of putting it, isn’t it? Alright, let’s try that one more time. 3. Third process–let me emphasize this one–is a Days of Wonder regression. Do you recall that happy regression? The happy regression you did in the morning, when you came in early. Where you take them unambiguously positive emotion, make it strong, bring them back, boredom, that sort of stuff. Remember that one? Right? So, it’s a regression, but it is not a therapeutic regression. It has nothing to do with the therapeutic regression you have already learned. You will not be doing a therapeutic process for the regression. Is this, do you all know what you’re doing? You will only be doing a happy regression, with a clear, unambiguously positive emotion. Now, what if you get anything but a clear and unambiguously positive emotion? What do you do then? You give them another one. And if, for whatever reason, you cannot access one, you know what you do then? All:

Role play.

Igor: You stop and you role play it. Exactly. Right? If, for any reason, your partner starts going to even the tiniest, vagliest negative place, do you know what you do? Vagliest is a new word. I invented it. TM. It expresses a particular idea very well. You stay calm and you end the induction. You bring them out of that smoothly, with confidence and with absolute authority. You finish that process there. If you want, you can bring an assistant over, and ask if you’re okay to carry on with the role play version, or we’ll leave it there. So, either you do the role play version, you bring the assistant in, and we’ll just check out everything’s cool before you carry on. Let me be abundantly clear. If, for whatever reason, your partner goes towards something a little dark, for whatever reason, and you end the session, and you bring an assistant over, you will only be rewarded for that. Does that make sense? There will be no penalization, because you will have done the absolutely appropriate thing. Right? So, an unambiguously positive emotion, just to be abundantly clear. And if you’re not sure, do you know what you do? You ask. You

454 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 find out. “Is this a happy thing, or a bad thing? Tell me. Good, bad, what is it?” And as soon as you have any doubt, end the session. Yes? All clear? So, let’s have a look at timings. Oops, come on through, here we go. For the blitz, you have 10 minutes. That means I want to see at least six or seven minutes of solid hypnotic content. You don’t just go chatting for five minutes about the problem and so on, and then go, “Okay, you’re a wonderful person.” I’m going to expect to hear power words, trance themes, the resource themes that they’ve been asking for, all wired together in a smooth H+ sort of concept. Does that make sense? So, you have 10 minutes for that. The Dynamic Induction–whichever you do, the Dynamic Mental Imagery, or the Non Awareness Set, or Mind Bending Language, whichever you choose–or whatever combination you choose, you’ll have 20 minutes for that one. Now, on that particular one, I do not care how long you are there. So, either you take the full 20 minutes and whether or not you’ve finished, and the problem gets resolved is of no importance. It’s irrelevant, provided something’s happening, tending a new direction. Does that make sense? But if you happen to resolve whatever issue the client talks about in the first five minutes, no one’s going to come over and penalize you, say, “You’re working too quickly.” It’s not going to happen. Right? So, if you get done, you’re done, fantastic, you have extra time. So on this one here, you do whatever you need to, to get the job done and if you’re 20 minutes runs out, if you’re getting close to your 20 minutes, then you find a natural place for it to end. You then bring it to an end, eloquently saying, “Okay, our time’s coming to an end now, so allow yourself to let it settle in, integrate it into you,” and find a natural place where you can pause, so that we can switch roles, or whatever. (Phone rings) Is that for me? Are you sure? I distinctly recognize that sound as something for me. So you understand, 20 minutes? Easy. Per person. Each person gets that time. The final process, the regression, you will have 30 minutes to do that. These are minutes, not meters. You have 30 minutes to do that. Does that mean you have to use all of 30 minutes? Of course not. But 30 minutes is more than ample time. But let’s put it this way. You’ve never, up to this point, had a full 30 minutes to do

455 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 any exercise in any part of this course. You’ll be sitting there twiddling your thumbs, going like, “How long does this thing take?” You have plenty of time, and it’s a good experience to have that. Make sense? Once again, if you’re done with the Days of Wonder, you’ve looped them a few times and they’re popping with excitement, right? Don’t annoy them by calling it another 50,000 times. You’ll burn a fuse out. Bring them back, congratulate them, slap them on the back and say, “Well done.” You’re done, right? So the only one where I’m going to expect a rough adherence to the time limit is the blitz, because you can end that at any point, pretty much. Does that make sense to you guys? Now, I do not care in which order you do these. You can do one person does all three, then the other person. You could do one, they do one, you do one, they do one. You could start with the regression and work backwards. You could start with the blitz and work forward. I do not care which way you do it. But we will be coming around and we’ll be listening in, so we will be listening out for a clearly identifiable process. Does that make sense? So far, so clear? All:

Yes.

Igor: Quick question over here. Q:

Yes, just on the Days of Wonder, I’m not sure.

Igor: So the Days of Wonder is exactly what we did the other day. You regress them back, get a moment of boredom, loop through it, and once you’ve looped through it and expect it, you reintegrate and bring them back. You’ve done the full process. Now, who’s thinking a little bit like, “Oh, there’s a lot of stuff to think about here.” Anyone? Right? Here is the bit that you’ll love me for, if nothing else. Q:

We already love you.

Igor: I know you do. That’s true. In that case, go do it. I’m only kidding. It’s open book. You get to use your notes. You get to use your manuals. You get to use anything you want. If you want to get on the internet and seek help, by all means, do so. Because, let’s face it, when you’re running your own therapy practice, there is nobody going to sit there and say, “You can’t open the book. You can’t do that.”

456 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Right? So why would I do any different? So, you can use whatever notes you want, you can use your manual. Every single process is described in the manual. You can work it through step by step. The only thing you need to know is what step are you on, and when have you finished it, so you can prepare for the next step. Is that easy to do? Is that simple to do? Let’s have some microphone here guys, so get all the questions in. Oh, can we have Igor to come and say the words for us? Uh, no. So, the way it’s going to work is this. Those of you who are not doing the certification program, we’re going to set up a little program with you with assistants who will help coach you through the processes. You get extra learning. Those of you, which is most of you, doing the certification process, you may not ask anyone for help. You can find help on your own in your manuals, in your notes and so on, but you will not be able to call an assistant over. You will not be able to ask questions. You will not be able to clarify a point. Because that’s the one thing you will not be able to do once you finish it, right? The only exception to that rule is if you’re doing the regression and the person’s going somewhere negative, and you’ve finished the experience early, to keep that person safe, and if you want to have an assistant come check things out so you’re okay to continue with a role play version of it, then by all means, bring someone over to double check things out. There’s no problem whatever with double checking something out. Make sense. But if you want to have advice, if you don’t know where to go or something, well, you should have asked the question earlier. Right? So, you all understand where we’re going with this? Now, you’ve all gone through your manuals at least once, haven’t you? All:

Yes.

Igor: And it’s all made sense to you, hasn’t it? All:

Yes.

Igor: So this really should be a complete no-brainer to you at this point. There’s a question. Stand up so we can get a mic to you. Q:

If you do step second that dynamic induction, do you do it full version, or it doesn’t matter?

457 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: All of these are full versions. Q:

You said either of them.

Igor: You can do any of the three, you don’t have to do all three of them. You can do any one of them, but you want to do the full version, absolutely. Right? Now, I’m not looking for results. In other words, you don’t have to get them to a therapeutic place at the end of it. You have to be able to navigate through the processes sufficiently that we’re satisfied that if time was of no consequence, of no issue, you’ll ultimately get to that point, right? So you do not have to get to that point in the time allotted to you. That would be an unfair position to put you into, right? The fact is, all of you will, but that’s beside the point. Any questions at this point about how the exam’s going to go? No? Yes? Okay, just stand up. Q:

Then what you’re saying is, once we’ve done, let’s say in the ten minutes, we can immediately roll into the next…?

Igor: Absolutely. You will be responsible for your own time. To assist you, I will put the timer up again on the wall so you can keep an eye on it, if you haven’t got a watch. But you will be responsible for your own time. If you run over, then you are stealing time from your partner. You’re making their certification process harder, so please don’t do that. Right? At the end of the two hours, I will stop things, no matter what’s going on. They will end at that point. Right? It’s done. So you must learn to manage your time and be aware at some level of time passing, so that you can manage the time appropriately. Make sense to you guys? Please stand up, we can get a mic to you. Oh sorry, this gentleman first, then we’ll come forward after. Q:

Just a quick clarification on the Days of Wonder.

Igor: Yep. Q:

Maybe I did it wrong the first time, but I don’t recall merging a boring time with a happy time.

Igor: Well, you missed out a little step, which is fine. Q:

Okay.

458 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: Look at your notes. Which page is the Days of Wonder on again? All:

56.

Igor: Look at page 56. Run through that process. We haven’t formally started certification yet, so you have all of about 20 seconds to ask a question. Q:

I just want to make sure I understood. You wanted us to go the full 10 minutes for the blitz.

Igor: Yep. Q:

But the other ones, it’s if we…?

Igor: The other ones have no time limits, because if you finish early, the process is done, right? You can’t badger a client into … do it again, I guess if you wanted to. The hypnotic blitz, there’s no formal point at which it ends. You just want to be able to roll–I want to see you be able to roll over time. The other two, if you’re done early, you’re done early. If you’re done late, you must finish the process early enough so that you can show that if you’re running out of time, you can control that and end the process before the sessions over. Okay? Just please stand up. Q:

Question here regarding the blitz. So far, we’ve done 10 seconds, we’ve done 60 seconds, but this is 10 minutes. That means to say, maybe we’ll take 120 seconds for the procedure and then 8 minutes in the ranting.

Igor: Yep. Q:

Oooh.

Igor: Now you’re getting me. But you’re okay with this, you know why? Because none of you have actually hit the blackjack rule yet. Q:

What’s that?

Igor: None of you have actually hit 21 cycles. That takes time, my friends. It takes time and you’ll experience it. They’ll enjoy and you’ll be going, “Really? Do I keep going?” The answer is yes, you do. There was a question over here? Or is that

459 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 gone now? Okay, just stand up. Can we have a mic over here folks? Oh, you know what? Just grab this one here. Here you go. Q:

Was Days of Wonder the one you did with Jelly Bean?

Igor: Yes, that’s the one we did with Jelly Bean. You’re famous. Or at least she is. No one actually knows your real name. They just know what you used to be called. I just want you to pass it on. Just stand up so we can get a mic to you. Q:

I’m embarrassed to ask, but I realize I don’t know what to do with the nonawareness set after you get … it seems like a means to end, but I don’t know what the end is. If the conscious.

Igor: Two answers. We’ve kind of covered the second answer already and I’ll come back to it again. First answer is, if in doubt, use another process. You have three choices. Q:

Uh-huh.

Igor: Number 2, your second answer is, and we talked about this early on, all you do is you switch your implications from being, “Something’s going on here. I wonder what that is. Trance must be occurring,” to “Something is going on here. I wonder what that is. I wonder how that’s going to help you resolve problem X.” All of your pre-suppositions, all your implications, all your conclusions, no longer focus on the idea of trance, and then switch the focus to the idea of resolving the problem. If you already know the resolution it’s because they ask for it. It would be about being able to sleep longer at nights, to be more active in the day time, to be more confident around people, and, so on. Q:

Okay. Thanks.

Igor: Okay? Q:

That’s the part I was confused about. Thank you.

Igor: Next one up. Bring it over. Q:

Just real quick. I understand on two and three.

Igor: Yep.

460 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Q:

We’re supposed to be taking some kind of small issue?

Igor: Yep. Q:

Is that the same as with the dynamic blitz or is that just strictly–

Igor: Yep. Q:

It is. Okay.

Igor: How else would you know what to blitz on, right? What are you going to do with them? Unless you just want to make them a puddle of relaxation, which is fine. Right? If they want relaxation, “You are a little stressed.” Anyone here a little stressed by the idea of an exam coming? Right? Here’s what you do. When you sit down in your pairs, you say to the other hypnotist, “You go first.” “See, my problem is I feel a little bit nervous about this exam.” Right? So, the gentleman who was asking about the “Days of Wonder” earlier on, did you have a chance to look through the process? Are you clear with it now? Q:

I think so.

Igor: It’s pretty straightforward, right? It’s already straightforward. Whether or not you did exactly that way before is irrelevant–as long as you understand it now, right? Stand up. We’ll get a mic to you. Q:

In the case that my partner and I get done early, what would you like us to do?

Igor: In the case that your partner and you didn’t agree what? Q:

No. In the case that my partner and I get done early.

Igor: Oh, if you get done early. Okay. If you get done early folks, respect the fact that everyone else is still working, realize how much time is left on the clock, and feel free to have a run around the ship. But, make sure you come back before the clock runs out, because I need to pull everyone together again before we … to talk about the other stuff and so on. So, feel free to head outside. If you want to talk, please do not talk in here. The only thing to do in here during certification is ask questions about a problem or destroy minds until they are a puddle of

461 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 relaxation and comfort and resources and are happy monkeys jumping around the room. Is that fair, guys? I may remind you from time to time – and the general volume in the room gets too high, I will also remind everybody just to talk a little quieter, just out of respect for everyone else. While sounds around you can work a great deal, there’s a certain audible threshold where you cease getting the information at all. Right? Makes sense everyone? Please stand up. Go ahead. Q:

For the little problem that we are supposed to use for the 1, 2, 3, we may have difficulty in finding different problems. Can we use the same one again?

Igor: If you can’t think of a genuine problem that you want to use within this, then role play one. That’s fine. You can role play a problem. You can do whatever you want it. Q:

They’re all the same. Problem 1 through 6?

Igor: Exactly. But then, if you resolve it with 1, then you can role play it on 2. If you didn’t resolve it with 1, then you can use the same one for 2 and the same one for 3. Actually, 3, there’s no problem. You realize 3 there is no problem. So, sure. You can reuse the problem to do more with it or you can role play it. I really don’t care how you do it, provided that you get the maneuvers and the hypnotist is getting the resources and all that done. So, yes, you can do what you want with that. We’re good? Everyone clear? All:

Yes.

Igor: Okay. So, can I get rid of this so I can show you the timer? Is that okay? All:

Yes.

Igor: So, here’s the timer. Whoop … We’ll start that in a minute.

462 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2

Exam Induction

Igor: Before we start the whole process formally, I just want to remind you of one thing. And that’s the thing. You see how you are already beginning to bring yourself to another place, are you not? And whilst you were too busy to think about, “Oh, the exam!” you forgot about the one thing you can do easily. That is most important of all. When you recall how good it feels to be in H+ and how much you would like your partner to really enjoy the experience, notice how already your sense of anticipation begins to recede, because none of this is about you. You might even think it is about them. But it’s really about the other you and how the other you can communicate to the other them that things are going to be alright now. When someone has a problem, whether it’s small or large, well then, things are not alright, and they can feel that. And there is some part of every person that needs to remember that no matter what is going on, it will be alright, and, whatever is happening now is the way in which it will become alright. As you remember that, notice how comfort begins to grow. Some of you may still have some anticipation. I understand that. It’s alright, because this is how you begin to realize it will be alright. Because each one of you has an unconscious mind and you’ve relied on it for your whole life. It taught you how to speak and listen. Words have come from your mouth most of your life and you didn’t even think about them beforehand. When you are with a friend, you just know what to say because you are with a friend. When you are with a client, they need to know that they are with a friend. They will know by the way you talk to them like a friend. Really, the only thing you need to do is show up and have a genuine curiosity about that person, a real desire to help them. Allow them to discover that they already know how to resolve that problem, even if they didn’t know they knew. Isn’t that always a pleasant discovery to realize there’s more to you than you ever considered?

463 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 So, all you need to do is show up with a genuine “That’s right” and start speaking, talking, allowing words to come. At first, you may be tempted to think about those words, then, you’ll realize that you really don’t need to, and then, they will flow. They will come and they will go. There will be moments of perfect silence, so that your client can really consider everything. When it is time for you to say more, how could you not know what to say, if you simply begin to speak with that genuine desire and allow your unconscious mind to do all the rest. You’ve done it before. You’ve experienced how naturally and smoothly it leaks out of you in just the right way, just the right intensity. How could it not? Remember that. Remember that, and take these feelings you have now – these sensations, and only as slowly as you continue to deepen and intensify this state inside you, signal to your partner to follow you somewhere in this room so that you can sit down and begin, now. Those not taking certification, please meet at the back of the room at the table.

Closing Ceremony

Igor: Alright folks. Is everyone back? Put your hands up if you’re still not in the room. Now you are starting to get it. I like it. I like it. So…let me just get this right. We did a little exam, didn’t we? A little test? Who enjoyed it? Anyone? All:

Loved it. Yeah.

Igor: Who surprised themselves? Anyone? Well, I have here, after talking to all the assistants to get through about how you guys were doing and stuff, we just looked at names and stuff like that. We got the list of the results of people who passed, the people who didn’t quite make it. Would you like to have the results? All:

Yes.

Igor: You sure?

464 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 All:

Yes.

Igor: You don’t want to delay it? All:

No.

Igor: Congratulations, folks. Give yourself a round of applause. All for you guys, realize this. Okay, now settle down. So, what I want to say is, first of all, congratulations everyone. You passed. Everyone who went through the certification process, you passed. A few of you either didn’t want to go through it, or had done it before, so you get your attendance certificate as well. I think the one thing I’d like you guys just to remember as we go through the whole final stages of this is, remember how troubled you felt this morning. All:

Remember!

Igor: And how concerned you felt maybe last night, thinking about all the things you didn’t know about the exam, and how much easier did it end up being than you thought? Was it worth all that mental energy you wasted on being afraid? All:

No.

Igor: So, I’d like you just to remember that as a moment, when you start seeing your first client, because chances are, you’ll do the same thing to yourself again. And if that happens, just remember the outcome. Because all you have to do is show up. I think you know what I mean by that now, right? So, what we’re going to do now is a nice little ceremony. It’ll take awhile, so please keep your enthusiasm and energy high. We’ve got all the certificates. We’re going to invite you guys to come down three people at a time, and we’ll shake your hands and Meagan here will take a photograph of every person. We’ll put them on the website so you can just download your photographs afterwards. If you want to have your photo taken, by all means, give your camera to someone else in the crowd, however, as Meagan is being the official photographer, once the photo is done, we’ll move on, because we’ve got a lot of people to get through, and we’d like to finish before tomorrow. Is that okay with you guys?

465 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 All:

Yes.

Igor: Okay guys, so if you guys will come up and just give us a hand here. By the way, everyone may or may not recognize this handsome fellow as Cliff, the second half of Street Hypnosis. And it’s well deserved, because without his efforts, this would not exist. There’d be no training room, there’d be no one who knows we exist. We would have no seminar, and I’d be sitting my room going, “Where is everyone?” Right.

End Of Training

Igor: So, whew, was it good for you too? All:

Yes!

Igor: How are you guys feeling? All:

Great!

Igor: You deserve it folks. You deserve it. Q:

I’m in a clapping trance.

Igor: A clapping trance. So, really, the only thing left for me to do is just to remind you of all the experiences you’ve had here. You’ve had six long days. There’ve been ups, right? There’ve been downs. At some point, every one of you has probably thought to yourself, “What the heck am I doing here?” Right? And we worked you hard, didn’t we? All:

Yes.

Igor: And I made you a whole bunch of promises right at the start of the whole program, didn’t I? All:

Yes.

466 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 Igor: I told you that there would be a point in time when you’re ability to keep track of what’s going on would just disappear. You’d barely be able to hold on to your name, if that, right? Did I fulfill my promise? All:

Yes.

Igor: But, I made you another promise as well, didn’t I? That by the end of it all, not only would this all be totally clear, but it would be easy for you to do. Did I fulfill that promise as well? All:

Yes.

Igor: Why not? I’d like to leave you with one last promise. If you continue to use this H+ and develop it, and you go out there and start doing it with the people that you meet, or in a professional capacity, the clients that come to you for help, I promise that not only will you have a rewarding career, but you’ll really change someone’s life. Someone who, without you, would have a totally different track, something that–let’s put it this way, you get to be that one person they tell their grandchildren about when they grow old, without whom none of it would have happened. So, I hope you remember that, especially when you hit some highs and some lows. Because they will both come again. When you hit those lows, just take it easy. After all, it is all way too important to take seriously, isn’t it? All:

Yes.

Igor: The only thing left over for me is to honestly, genuinely, thank you all for sticking with me, because I know that hasn’t been easy throughout the whole process. So, really want to thank you for doing that. Without your willingness to take part, without your willingness to keep going, I could not possibly do any of this. So really, whatever you think this seminar has done for you, that’s really down to you guys, so I would give each other a round of applause, because without you guys this wouldn’t exist. Of course, in the back of the room, we have Meagan. We have Cliff, of course here, without whom none of this would be organized, none of it would be

467 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 settled, no one would even know it existed, so, give these guys a nice round of applause as well. We have a nice team of camera people here, without whom, all your exploits, your highs and your lows, would never have been recorded, so thank them for that. And a special thanks to all these assistants, because without their hard work, their willingness to stay long after the call of duty, to help train you, to be there by your side when you needed something extra, to guide you, to just be a friendly face in the crowd, really, there’s no way so many of you could have come so far, so easily and so smoothly. We really owe these guys a real debt of gratitude. I’ll invite you all to have a wonderful afternoon and evening. Relax, take it easy, look at these certificates, and admire them for all the effort you put into them, because these are bits of paper. They really don’t mean anything, except what you’ve put into them. Would it be fair to say you’ve earned something, when you look at that thing? All:

Yes.

Igor: So, whenever you look at it, remember what you’ve done here, folks. That’s why you have it. So, thank you once again for coming. Until tomorrow, goodnight for now.

Bonus Information

M:

Thank you. Hello, everybody. I met Igor back in January, when I did this same course, and he’s made you a few promises about what’s going to happen to you, and I just wanted to let you know that, if you do as he said, if you do the exercises, if you keep practicing, if you keep training, you’ll become one of the world’s best hypnotists really quickly. The day after I returned home from Igor’s course in Sydney, I had a conversation with my wife. She said, after we’d finished that conversation, which might not

468 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved

Conversational Hypnosis Professional Hypnotherapy 2.0 Transcript Manual – Part 2 have gone so well, but she said that was the best conversation we have ever had in the 18 years that we’ve known each other. All:

Good job.

M:

And there was no Conversational Hypnosis involved.

Igor: Of course not. M:

But be nice. The people here who have spouses with them, that’s so good. That’s so good that you could come here. But if you’re going home to somebody, and you’ve been transformed, be kind to them. They’ve not been through this, and my wife thought, “Well, is he on drugs?” She didn’t really think I was, because I’m not that sort of person, but I was behaving like I was on drugs. The highs. I was rolling around on the floor laughing at things that you should not laugh at. That is wrong to laugh at that sort of bad stuff that had happened, but your life will continue to be transformed, even if you don’t do anything. You could try and make it not happen, but you’re not going to want to do that, are you? You will get to the point where you can get any result with any technique. Then you will find that you can get any result with no technique. The four steps, the ten steps, any of that, you’ll find that you’re doing none of it, and still making amazing changes with people who aren’t even your clients. Weird stuff will happen.

Igor: That’s a promise. M:

Weird good stuff, you know. And this point where Igor was saying, “Refer out”, you know, when you don’t know what you’re doing. You’ll quickly get to the point where people will be referring to you, and it will be like, “Whoa”, and people will be saying, “You are the best hypnotist I have ever met.” So, I know everything that Igor says is true, because I have experienced all of that. Thank you again to Igor.

Igor: Thank you, I appreciate that. Give him a round of applause. (Applause) Thank you so much.

469 CHPH 2.0

©Street Hypnosis All Rights Reserved